himmelman construction - project manual · 2014-04-28 · 28 16 00 intrusion detection 1-18 28 23...

___________________________________________________________________________________

PROJECT MANUAL • • • • • • • • • •

VOLUME 2 OF 2

SCHOOL DISTRICT NO. 1 IN THE CITY AND COUNTY OF DENVER AND STATE OF COLORADO

PROJECT: Valdez Remodel LOCATION: Project #

Valdez E.S. PP2159 BID #: 14-MC-2159 DATE: April 25, 2014

Architect

Oz Architecture 3003 Larimer St.

Denver, CO 80205

Denver Public Schools Construction Services / Strategic Sourcing

1617 S. Acoma St. Denver, Colorado 80223

14-MC-2159

PROJECT DIRECTORY VALDEZ ELEMENTARY 2525 WEST 29TH AVENUE DENVER, COLORADO 80211

Denver Public Schools Department of Facilities Management Owner 1617 South Acoma Street Denver, Colorado 80223 Tel: 720.423.1928

OZ Architecture Architect 3003 Larimer Street Denver, Colorado 80205 Tel: 303.861.5704 Fax: 303.861.9230 Contacts: Kelly Yamasaki – [email protected]

JVA, Incorporated Structural Engineer 1319 Spruce Street Boulder, Colorado 80302 Tel: 303.444.1951 Fax: 303.444.1957 Contact: Brett Robinson – [email protected]

The Ballard Group, Inc. Mechanical and Plumbing Engineer 2525 South Wadsworth Boulevard, Suite 200 Lakewood, Colorado 80227 Tel: 303.988.4514 Contact: Tom Ver Straate – [email protected]

SSG MEP, Inc. Electrical Engineer 3025 South Parker Road, Suite 1100 Aurora, Colorado 80014 Tel: 303.696.2602 Fax: 303.696.0812 Contact: Sandra Scanlon – [email protected]

Collins Engineers, Inc. Civil Engineer 4875 Pearl East Circle, Suite 201 Boulder, Colorado 80301 Tel: 303.447.0090 Contact: Bryan Frantz – [email protected]

Design Concepts Landscape Architect 211 North Public Road, Suite 200 Lafayette, Colorado 80026 Tel: 303.664.5301 Contact: Bill Gotthelf – [email protected]

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary PROJECT DIRECTORY OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 00 01 08 - 1

mailto:kyamasaki@ozarch

mailto:[email protected]




3PM Design Food Service Designer 11801 East 33rd Street, Unit C Aurora, Colorado 80010 Tel: 303.840.0883 Contact: David George – [email protected]

Specifications Consultants, Inc. Specifications Consultant PO Box 3010 Colorado Springs, Colorado 80934 Tel: 719.577.9414 Fax: 719.623.0172 Contact: Paul DeArment - [email protected]

END OF PROJECT DIRECTORY

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary PROJECT DIRECTORY OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 00 01 08 - 2


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS VALDEZ ELEMENTARY

2525 WEST 29TH AVENUE DENVER, COLORADO 80211

PROJECT MANUAL

APRIL 24, 2014

TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME 2 OF 2

SPECIFICATIONS GROUP

FACILITY SERVICES SUBGROUP:

DIVISION 20 - Not Used

DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 Fire Protection 1-7

DIVISION 22 PLUMBING 22 00 00 General Plumbing Requirements 1-10 22 00 10 Plumbing Related Work 1-4 22 05 00 Pipe, Valves and Pipe Specialties 1-15 22 05 53 Plumbing Identification 1-5 22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation 1-3 22 20 00 Plumbing Systems 1-10

DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 00 00 General Mechanical Requirements 1-11 23 00 10 Mechanical Related Work 1-8 23 05 00 HVAC Pipe, Valves and Pipe Specialties 1-21 23 05 48 HVAC Vibration Control 1-2 23 05 53 Mechanical Identification 1-5 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing 1-7 23 07 00 Mechanical Insulation 1-7 23 09 23 Temperature Control Systems – DDC 1-36 23 09 30 Integrated Building Automation System (IBAS) 1-6 23 21 00 HVAC Hydronic Systems 1-12 23 30 00 Air Distribution 1-13 23 73 00 Mechanical Rooftop Units 1-5


DIVISION 25 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION - Not Used See Section 23 09 30

DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 Common Work Results For Electrical 1-9 26 05 26 Grounding And Bonding For Electrical Systems 1-3 26 05 29 Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems 1-4 26 05 33 Raceway And Boxes For Electrical Systems 1-10

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary VOLUME 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 00 01 12 - 1

CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014 26 05 44 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 1-4 26 05 53 Identification For Electrical Systems 1-9 26 24 16 Panelboards 1-8 26 24 41 Kitchen Hood Fire Control Panel 1-3 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 1-7 26 28 13 Fuses 1-3 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers 1-7 26 51 00 Interior Lighting 1-6 26 56 00 Exterior Lighting 1-14

DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 00 Common Work Results For Communications 1-5 27 05 28 Pathways for Communications Systems 1-13 27 05 36 Cable Trays for Communications Systems 1-8 27 05 44 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling 1-4 27 11 00 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 1-5 27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling 1-15 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling 1-15 27 51 23 Educational Intercommunications and Program Systems 1-7 27 53 13 Clock Systems 1-2

DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 05 00 Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security 1-40 28 05 13 Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security 1-13 28 05 28 Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security 1-13 28 05 44 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electronic Safety and Security Pathways and Cabling 1-4 28 16 00 Intrusion Detection 1-18 28 23 00 Video Surveillance 1-6 28 31 11 Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System 1-14


SITE AND INFRASTRUCTURE SUBGROUP:

DIVISIONS 30 TO 39 - Not Used


DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK 31 10 00 Site Clearing 1-5 31 20 00 Earth Moving 1-7 31 23 19 Dewatering 1-4 31 63 29 Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts 1-5 31 66 15 Helical Foundation Piles 1-5

DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 05 23 Cement and Concrete for Exterior Improvements 1-14 32 12 16 Asphalt Paving 1-9 32 13 13 Concrete Paving 1-13 32 13 73 Concrete Pavement Joint Sealers 1-6 32 15 40 Crusher Fines 1-3 32 17 23 Pavement Markings 1-3 32 31 00 Aluminum Cantilever Gate System 1-3 32 31 13 Chain Link Fences 1-5


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014 32 32 19 Unit Masonry Retaining Walls 1-2 32 84 00 Underground Sprinkler System 1-13 32 91 00 Landscape Maintenance 1-4 32 91 13 Fine Grading and Soil Preparation 1-5 32 92 23 Sodding 1-3 32 93 00 Trees, Shrubs, and Ground Covers 1-6

DIVISION 33 UTILITIES 33 41 00 Storm Utilities Drainage Piping 1-11 33 46 00 Subdrainage 1-4

DIVISION 34 TRANSPORTATION - Not Used

DIVISION 35 WATERWAY AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION - Not Used


PROCESS EQUIPMENT SUBGROUP:


APENDIX Geotechnical Engineering Study

END OF VOLUME 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS


100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTSApril 24, 2014

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLSValdez Elementary FIRE PROTECTIONOZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 21 00 00 - 1

SECTION 21 00 00

FIRE PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Refer to Division 22, Section 22 05 00: Pipes, Valves and Piping Specialties.

C. This is a general requirement specification. Refer to DPS Standards Section 15300 for additional requirements.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Furnish and install a complete automatic fire sprinkler system for the entire building. The work shall include but not be limited to the following items:1. System Design Requirements.2. Sprinkler System.

B. Related work specified elsewhere:1. Finish painting, including pipe stenciling.2. Electrical wiring, except as noted.3. Excavation and backfilling.4. Concrete and reinforcing for foundations.5. Fire extinguishers.6. Freezing protection heating cable.7. Access ladders to control valves.8. Access doors.9. Bonding Requirements. Refer to Division 01.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Contractor's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the design and installation of fire protection systems, of types, materials, and sizes required, which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.1. The design of the fire protection systems including hydraulic calculations shall be stamped

and signed by a registered P.E. or a NICET level IV or higher. Said professionals shall be experienced in fire protection, thoroughly familiar with and experienced in this type of installation.

2. The owner’s representative, Engineer, and AHJ reserve the right to request proof of qualifications.

3. No design related work shall be subcontracted or performed by persons other than bona fide employees working solely for the contractor. Any exception shall be pre-approved by the owner, in writing.

4. The entire fire protection system project including design, calculation, installation and testing, excluding prefabrication, shall be bid by a single firm which has the capabilities to perform all of the work required under this standard. No installation work shall be subcontracted without prior permission in writing from the Owner/Architect/Engineer.



5. Shall have an emergency service capability for response to emergency conditions.6. Shall have an established office within one hundred (100) miles of the project which

maintains a full complement of spare parts, tools and equipment for the specific project and type of system.

7. Welders shall comply with the requirements of AWS D10.9, “Specifications of Qualifications of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing, Level AR-3.”

8. Job foremen shall be trained for the installation and operation of each type of system and possess documentation of qualifications and training. Foremen shall have a minimum of three (3) years of successful installation experience on projects with fire protection systems similar in scope and nature to that required for the project.

B. Codes and Standards:1. NFPA Compliance: Install fire protection systems in accordance with NFPA as applicable.2. UL Compliance: Provide fire protection products in accordance with UL standards; provide

UL label on each product.3. Fire Department/Marshal Compliance: Install fire protection systems in accordance with local

regulations of fire department or fire marshal.4. Screw Thread Connections: Comply with local Fire Department/Marshal regulations for

sizes, threading and arrangement of connections for fire department equipment to standpipe system.

1.04 SYSTEM DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Verify requirements with Jurisdictional authorities, i.e.: Insurance Co. or Underwriter, Fire Department or Marshal, or Building Departments. Provide system complete, functional and acceptable to Jurisdictions without penalty of any type to the insurance premium rate.

B. System shall be installed hydraulically calculated per NFPA #13.

C. System shall be designed to provide sprinkler heads at ¼ points in 2'x4' lay-in ceiling tiles in a uniform pattern, centered in 2' direction, ¼ points in 4' direction. All heads shall be centered in 2'x2' lay in ceiling tiles.

D. All calculations shall include flow test results. Flow tests shall be performed by this Contractor and verified by the Fire Department, Architect, and Engineer. Prior flow tests on file with jurisdictional agencies may be used in lieu of new flow tests only when previous test has been made within 3 months of project start date.

E. Contractor shall use 85% of flow test pressure data as the base in performance of the Project Calculations.

F. Six Copies of Hydraulic Calculations and Drawings shall be submitted for review. Drawings shall show hydraulic reference points, hydraulically most remote areas clearly shown, and proof by example that area shown is in fact the hydraulically most remote.

G. Area and densities shall conform to NFPA #13 or jurisdictional authorities requirements.

H. Include all lines as center to center of fittings, not cut lengths, include all fittings.

I. Sprinkler system shall be calculated from the flow test elevation to the highest sprinkler head.

J. Provide all trim and accessories, inlets, alarms, switches, and valves required.



K. Provide bracing, restraining, thrust blocks, rods, anchors, cathodic protection, and plastic pipe wrap as required.

L. Water supply flow test(s) shall be conducted in strict accordance with NFPA #13 and NFPA #291.

M. Hydraulic calculation submittals shall clearly define and annotate all devices which will cause friction loss with equivalent lengths of pipe. This includes vane type electric water flow switches (assume 10 feet of equivalent length of pipe).

N. The Fire Contractor shall coordinate that all piping and fire sprinkler heads are located within a heated space with the HVAC Contractor and HVAC Drawings. Provide necessary dry type systems and heads or glycol in all non-heated spaces.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit product data for the following items:1. Pipe, fittings, hangers, attachments devices, and valves.2. Sprinkler heads and escutcheons.3. Specialty valves and devices.4. Fire Flow Test Results.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for the following items:1. Engineered fabrication drawings showing main and line elevations, sizes, and routing.2. Drawings showing lights, registers, grilles, diffusers, heat detection devices, ceiling grids,

beams, joists, trusses and other items of possible interference with proper function or routing of the system and component devices such as access panels, clerestories, display structures, skylights, atriums, etc.

3. Hydronic calculations prepared in a form with appropriate information as required and acceptable to all reviewing and jurisdictional agencies. Include certified flow test data with calculations.

4. All drawings and calculations shall be reviewed and accepted by the jurisdictional fire department, building department, fire marshal, and the insurance carrier or insurance reviewing authority prior to submitting to the Architect. Indication of review and acceptance by all agencies, as appropriate, shall be certified by name of reviewer, agency, and date affixed to the plans or reproducibles submitted to the Architect.

5. Alarms, devices, monitors and all electrical wiring diagrams6. Partial submittals shall not be acceptable.7. Equipment submittals shall contain annotated descriptive data to show the specific model,

type and size of each item the Contractor proposes to furnish. Catalog cut sheets shall be submitted in a suitable folder or binder and indexed referencing the applicable specification sections. Unclear or partial reproductions of manufacturer’s original catalog cuts or descriptive data shall not be accepted. Each item supplied shall be clearly identified on each sheet. Where the submittal material describes items, in addition to the items being submitted, the additional items shall be crossed out and the submittal item shall be identified. Submit proof of compatibility for equipment components required to be approved as a system.

8. Review by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from full compliance with requirements of the contract documents, codes, and standards.

9. Submit detailed shop drawings including a riser diagram, stamped and signed hydraulic calculations, equipment data sheet submittals and employee certification in accordance with NFPA #13.

10. Submit anchoring details and calculations.



C. Certificate of Installation: Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work which indicates that work has been tested in accordance with NFPA 13 and that system is operational, complete, and has no defects.

D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed fire protection piping and products in accordance with requirements of Division 01.

E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for fire protection materials and products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, approval drawings, approval calculations, certificate of installation, and record drawings in maintenance manual in accordance with requirements of Division 01.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Contractor shall not fabricate or install any piping until they have assured themselves that the piping can be run as contemplated in cooperation with Contractors of other Divisions of the Work and the physical constraints of the Structural and Architectural Work.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide original copies of all warranties and extended warranties for specific equipment where specified and in accordance with Section 23 00 00.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS

A. General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in fire protection systems. Where more than one type of materials or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option.

2.02 BASIC IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Provide identification complying with Division-22, Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Mechanical Identification" in accordance with the following listing:1. Fire Protection Piping: Pipe markers.2. Fire Protection Valves: Valve tags.3. Fire Protection Signs: Provide the following signs:

a. At each sprinkler valve, sign indicating what portion of system valve controls.b. At each outside alarm device, sign indicating what authority to call if device is activated.

2.03 BASIC PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS

A. General: Provide pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with the following:

B. Interior Piping:1. Interior and Exterior Above-ground Piping:

a. Pipe and Joints:1) Black steel threaded, welded or roll grooved schedule 40 conforming to ASTM A-

53. Provide galvanized steel piping and fittings on all dry pipe sytems. Light wall



conforming to ASTM A-795 equal to Dyna Thread, or replacement Schedule 10 equal to American Tube Dyna-Flow ASTM-795. All threaded piping shall meet a threaded CRR equal to 1.00 or better, 300 psi max. system pressures. All pipe shall conform to NFPA #13, Chapter 3 and shall be UL/FM approved.

b. Fittings:1) Threaded cast iron 175 psi minimum and in accordance with developed system

pressures, conforming to ANSI B16.4. Threaded malleable iron 175 psi minimum and in accordance with developed system pressures, conforming to ANSI B16.3.

2) Weld type fittings (schedule 40 pipe only): Buttweld conforming to ANSI B16.9. Flanges conforming to ANSI B16.25. Socket weld conforming to ANSI B16.11. All welds by certified welder in accordance with Section 22 05 00.

3) Grooved fittings shall conform to ASTM-A47 (malleable), ASTM 536 (ductile), or ASTM-106 GRB (forged steel), ASTM A-53 type E, F, or S GRB (nipples), ANSI B-16.5 or B16.1 cast iron and carbon steel flanges.

C. Valves:1. All valves are to be indicating type.2. All valves U.L. listed, F.M. approved.3. Refer to Section 22 05 00 for valve specifications.

D. Hangers:1. All hangers, attachments and components U.L. listed, F.M. approved.2. Refer to Section 22 05 00 for specifications and restrictions for hanger systems. Where

specification is more stringent, these requirements will apply.3. Permission to use anchoring system utilizing powder driven studs must be obtained from the

Structural Engineer prior to submitting pricing or bids.

2.04 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

A. General: Provide fire protection specialties, UL-listed, in accordance with the following listing. Provide sizes and types which mate and match piping and equipment connections.

2.05 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS

A. General: Provide automatic sprinklers in accordance with the following listing.1. Match existing fire protection heads in all areas where system is modified.2. Provide off-white finished plate for concealed heads in all finished ceilings.3. Provide brass or white upright/pendant and sidewall heads in all exposed ceiling areas and

unfinished areas as indicated on plans.4. Provide fire sprinkler protection cages in all gymnasium areas.

B. Sprinkler Heads: Provide quick response type throughout project. A contractor option will be to provide either standard or extended coverage heads.

C. Sprinkler Head Cabinets:1. Provide cabinet complete with appropriate heads, wrench and mounting per NFPA.

D. Acceptable Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide automatic sprinklers of one of the following:1. Globe Inc.2. Grinnell Fire Protection Systems Co. Inc.3. Central Sprinkler Crop.4. Viking Inc.



5. Tyco.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION AND INSPECTION

A. Field Measurements: Verify all dimensions before proceeding with the work. Obtain field measurements for work required to be accurately fitted to other construction. Be responsible for the accuracy of such measurements and precise fitting and assembly of finished work. Prefabrication of systems is done at this Contractor's own risk.

B. Coordination: Coordinate all work and placement of components with other trades, be responsible for complete coordination of design and field installation, (remedial field work will be required to eliminate conflicts) and provide an acceptable finished product. Removal of piping and heads will be required at contractor’s expense if field coordination does not take place.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Provide a complete operable system designed and installed in accordance with applicable local, state, federal and jurisdictional codes, enforcement agencies and insurance rating or underwriting agencies.

B. All systems shall be drainable with proper drainage devices, and drain terminations either to exterior of building or to properly sized receptacles within building. The fire protection contractor shall route drainage per NFPA.

C. All systems shall be supported and braced for conformance to proper and applicable standards.

D. Care shall be taken with chrome plated or other polished finish components so that marring does not occur to the finish, and installation provides for a uniform pattern and true installation.

E. Install Sprinkler heads on a true axis line in both directions a maximum deviation of 1/2 inch plus or minus. Any heads exceeding the maximum tolerance are to be removed and re-installed by the contractor at no additional cost.

F. Where piping passes thru masonry units or concrete walls or floors or other building construction, sleeves must be used. Where exposed piping passes thru finished work, chrome, plated or other finish acceptable to architect, split wall plates or escutcheons shall be installed to fit snugly around piping. Where rated walls are penetrated, approved safing shall be provided at each hole to assure effectiveness of construction as a fire stop.

G. All openings for piping should be anticipated and coordinated with General Contractor. Indicate such openings on the shop drawings. Any additional cutting of openings must have the written approval of the Architect.

H. Contractor shall complete the automatic fire sprinkler ready for operation, in all respects, as soon as possible. When system is complete and ready for continuous operation, activate the system for its intended use. After system has been activated for continuous use, water charges, if any will be paid for by the Owner.

I. Provide identification sign of the standard design adopted by the Automatic Sprinkler Industry, attaching same to all valves, drains, test connections, etc., with chain around body of valve in such a way that the sign cannot be removed without opening link.



J. Provide hydraulic placard indicating the location of calculated system, the discharge density over designed area of discharge, including gallons per minute and residual pressure demand at the base of riser. Place this sign at the system control valve.

K. Use no face bushings.

L. Furnish wiring requirements to Division 26 Contractor for interior alarm items furnished in this Section.

M. Contractor shall coordinate piping elevation with other trades prior to installation. All other trades shall have right-of-way over fire protection piping if not coordinated.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Sprinkler Piping Flushing: Prior to connecting sprinkler risers , flush water feed mains, lead-in connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire sprinkler piping installation has been completed and before piping is placed in service, flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove foreign substances, under pressure as specified in NFPA 13. Continue flushing until water is clear.

B. Hydrostatic Testing: After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for period of 2 hours, at not less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum static pressure is in excess of 150 psi. check system for leakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system or zone being tested.

C. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with NFPA standards for "little or no leakage" and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance.

3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Cleaning and Inspecting: Clean and inspect fire protection systems in accordance with requirements of Division 22, Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods, Section 22 05 00 "Pipes and Pipe Fittings".

3.05 EXTRA STOCK

A. Heads: For each style and temperature range required, furnish additional sprinkler heads, amounting to one unit for every 100 installed units, but not less than 5 units of each.

B. Wrenches: Furnish 2 spanner wrenches for each type and size of valve connection and fire hose coupling.1. Obtain receipt from Owner that extra stock has been received.

3.06 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION

A. Obtain certificate of compliance and completion for jurisdictional agencies, as applicable and present to Owner.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLSValdez Elementary GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTSOZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 22 00 00 - 1

SECTION 22 00 00

GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements, and applicable provisions elsewhere in the Contract Documents apply to work of Division 22.

B. In case of disagreement between Drawings and Specifications, or within either document itself, obtain written clarification from the Mechanical Engineer through the Architect. Failure to obtain clarification prior to bid will result in the better quality and greater quantity being required during the construction phase without additional reimbursement.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS

A. The related work of Division 22 includes but is not limited to:1. Section 22 00 00 – General Plumbing Requirements.2. Section 22 00 10 – Plumbing Related Work.3. Section 22 05 00 – Pipe, Valves and Pipe Specialties.4. Section 22 05 53 – Plumbing Identification.5. Section 22 07 00 – Plumbing Insulation.6. Section 22 20 00 – Plumbing Systems.


A. Work Included: Unless specified otherwise, provide all supervision, labor, materials, transportation, equipment, hauling, and services necessary for a complete and operational mechanical system. Provide all incidental items such as offsets, fittings, etc. required as part of the work even though not specifically shown on Contract Drawings or Specifications.

B. Inspection: Inspect work proceeding or interfacing with work of Division 22 sections prior to submitting bid and report any known or observed defects that affect the Mechanical Design to the General Contractor. Do not proceed with the construction work until defects are corrected.

1.04 UTILITIES, EXTENTIONS, CONNECTIONS AND FEES FOR WATER AND SEWER

A. Provide all building services and connections to site utilities, as indicated on Drawings.

B. Connection charges, membership fees, system development charges and the like, that in principle allow the right to obtain the services from the utility, will be arranged and paid for by the property owner.

C. Tap fees are the charges for actual materials and labor for tapping, inspection and recording of the tap shall be arranged and paid for by the Division 22 Contractor.

D. In the event that the serving utility company installs their own taps, service, meters, etc., all costs imposed by this action shall be paid for by the Owner. Extensions from termination points to connection with building services and systems will be the responsibility of the Division 22 Contractor.



E. Contractor shall be responsible for all pads, vaults, manholes, manhole covers, meter enclosures, valves, service boxes, and appurtenances, all in conformance with requirements of the serving utility company.

1.05 REFERENCES

A. General:1. For products or workmanship specified by Association, Trade or Federal Standards, comply

with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

2. The date of the standard is that which is in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, except when a specific date is specified.

1.06 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Materials and apparatus required for the work shall be new and of first-class quality; to be furnished, delivered, erected, connected and finished in every detail; and to be so selected and arranged so as to fit properly into the building spaces.

B. Unless otherwise specifically indicated, equipment and materials shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. This includes the performance of tests as recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Ratio of at least (1) licensed (journeyman) to 2 unlicensed (apprentice) at all times.

1.07 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. The Mechanical Drawings show the general arrangement of piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, and appurtenances, and shall be followed as closely as actual building construction and the work of other trades will permit.

B. The Architectural and Structural Drawings shall be considered part of the mechanical work insofar as these Drawings furnish this Division with information relating to design and construction of the building.

C. Field verify building dimensions governing mechanical work. Do not scale the Mechanical Drawings for dimensions. If field dimensions are not available take dimensions, measurements, locations, levels, etc. from the Architectural Drawings and the approved Shop Drawings submitted on the actual equipment to be furnished.

D. The Mechanical Contractor shall request of the Test and Balance (TAB) Contractor an early review of the Contract Documents for the purpose of identifying where proper balancing cannot be achieved. The report requirements are referred to in Division 23, Temperature Controls section, “Submittals.” Forward a copy of the report to the mechanical engineer for review. The Mechanical Contractor shall modify the system as recommended by the TAB Contractor or refer unresolved issues to the Mechanical Engineer for resolution prior to ordering of ductwork and equipment. Unresolved balancing issues from untimely or incomplete application of these requirements will be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor to correct.

E. No extra compensation shall be claimed or allowed due to differences between the actual dimensions and those indicated on the Drawings.

F. Discrepancies: Examine Drawings and Specifications for other parts of the work, and if any discrepancies occur between the plans for the work of this Division and the plans for the work of others, report such discrepancies to the General Contractor and obtain written instructions for any



changes necessary. Report any inconsistencies between the drawings and specifications and the installation requirements of equipment manufacturers.

G. Order of Precedence: The precedence of Mechanical Construction Documents is as follows:1. Addenda and modifications to the Drawings and Specifications take precedence over the

original Drawings and Specifications.2. Should there be a conflict within the Specifications or within Drawings of the same scale, the

more stringent or higher quality requirements shall apply.3. In the Drawings, the precedence shall be figured dimensions over scaled dimensions and

noted materials over graphic indications.4. Should a conflict arise between the Drawings and the Specifications the most stringent shall

have precedence.5. Should there be a conflict in dimensions or locations between Mechanical Drawings and/or

Architectural/Structural Drawings, the Architectural/Structural Drawings shall have precedence.

1.08 EXAMINATION OF PROJECT SITE

A. Examine site carefully to determine conditions to be encountered, work to be performed, equipment, materials to be transported, stored, furnished, and other features applicable to completion of the work.

B. Study Drawings and Specifications, report inconsistencies, errors, omissions or conflicts with codes and ordinances.

C. Submittal of bid will indicate satisfactory examination of the Documents have been made, and applicable allowances included in the bid.

1.09 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to Architectural Drawings and Division 01 specifications for a list of applicable codes.

B. Execute work per Underwriters, Public Utility, Local and State Codes, Ordinances and applicable regulations. Obtain and pay for required permits, inspections, and certificates. Notify Architect of items not meeting said requirements.

C. Comply with latest editions of all applicable codes, standards, ordinances and regulations in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents.

D. If discrepancies occur between the Contract Documents and any applicable codes, ordinances, acts, or standards, the most stringent requirements shall apply.

E. Where hourly fire and smoke ratings are indicated or required, whether or not shown, provide components and assemblies meeting requirements of the American Insurance Association, Factory Mutual Insurance Association and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. The Contractor shall plan all of his work in advance, and shall inform the General Contractor of the proposed construction schedule and anticipated completion date upon request. Contractor shall complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the remaining building construction will permit.

B. Before purchase, fabrication, or installation of items, determine if the installation will properly fit and can be installed as contemplated without interference with structural elements or the work of other trades.



C. Locations of pipes, ducts, switches, panels, equipment, and fixtures, shall be adjusted to accommodate the work or interferences anticipated and encountered. Determine the exact route and location of each pipe and duct prior to fabrication.

D. Right of Way: Lines which pitch shall have the right-of-way over those which do not pitch. Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have right-of-way over lines whose elevations can be changed.

E. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction of pipes and ducts shall be made as required to maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the Drawings.

F. Where major conflicts occur, contractor shall rely upon the Architect/Engineer to make final decision regarding priority of right-of-way. Contractor shall request written clarification from the Architect/Engineer prior to conflict reaching critical stage requiring removal of previously installed equipment or system components either by himself or by other trades involved.

G. When directed by the Architect/Engineer, submit Shop Drawings showing interrelationship of various portions of work and work of other trades. Failure to properly coordinate may result in removal and relocation at expense to the Contractor.

H. Coordination Drawings for Acoustical and Drywall Ceilings, Plumbing, Fire Protection, HVAC and Electrical:1. Coordination Drawings are required for the trades noted above. The HVAC contractor shall

prepare reproducible Coordination Layout and Installation Drawings (at least ¼” scale or as approved by the Architect) for resolution of interferences and conflicts with other trades.

2. The Plumbing, Fire Protection and Electrical Contractors, as well as acoustical and drywall ceiling contractors, are required to superimpose their Shop Drawings on the HVAC Drawings and verify layout and elevations to eliminate conflicts. Any conflicts shall be highlighted and these Drawings shall be forwarded to the Architect for resolution. Priority shall be given to “gravity” systems above the ceiling. Each trade shall initial acknowledgement that the proceeding has been completed. No fabrication of ductwork, fire protection, or other prefabricated systems shall begin until these Coordination Drawings have been completed and reviewed by the General Contractor and Architect/Engineers. Any Subcontractor that fabricates and installs items above the ceiling before the Coordinated Drawings are reviewed and conflicts resolved shall do so at their own risk, and be responsible to relocate said equipment in the event conflicts arise, at no cost to the Owner.

3. Additionally, all trades shall show the proposed location of access panels (for maintenance) in “hard” ceilings for access to HVAC boxes, control valves, fire damper motors, plumbing valves, fire protection drains, valves, light fixture remote ballasts, ceiling hung equipment, etc., for coordination with the reflected ceiling plans. Indicate on same Drawings the location of access panels in walls as well as location of plumbing cleanouts.

4. Upon Architect/Engineer completion of the review of the Coordination Drawings, the Design Team, General Contractor and Subcontractors shall conduct a pre-installation coordination meeting for all “fit-up” above ceilings. No ceiling shall be lowered without the expressed approval of the Owner and the Architect.

I. Coordinate all electrical work with Electrical Contractor. Read the Electrical Specification and report any inconsistencies. See “Electrical Wiring and Safety Device Work and Material Responsibilities” in this section.

J. Coordinate all cutting & patching with General Contractor.


A. Accessibility:



1. Contractor shall be responsible for the sufficiency of the size of shafts and chases and the adequate clearance in double partitions and hung ceilings for proper installation of work. Coordinate these requirements with the General Contractor. Such spaces and clearances shall be kept to the minimum size required.

2. Locate all equipment which must be serviced, operated, or maintained in fully accessible positions. Furnish access doors for this purpose. Minor deviations from Drawings may be allowed to provide for better accessibility. Any changes shall be approved by the Architect prior to making the change.

3. Provide the General Contractor with the exact locations of access doors. Locations of these doors shall be submitted in sufficient time to be installed in the normal course of work.

4. Demonstration of access will be required prior to project completion. The contractor is responsible for providing reasonable and safe access for all system components. Contractor to arrange with an Owner’s Representative a time for the demonstration prior to the final punchlist.

B. Fabrication: Before installing and/or fabricating any lines of piping or ductwork the Contractor shall assure himself that they can be run as contemplated in cooperation with Contractors of other Divisions of the Work and the physical constraints of the Structural and Architectural Work.

C. Freeze Protection: Do not run pipes in outside walls, or locations where freezing may occur. Piping next to outside walls shall be in furred spaces with insulation between the piping and the outside wall. Insulation of piping shall not be considered freeze protection.

D. Scaffolding, Rigging and Hoisting: Provide scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection and delivery into the premises of any equipment and apparatus furnished. Remove same from premises when no longer required.

1.12 SUBMITTALS:

A. Within thirty days after award of the Contract, submit to Architect complete catalog data and/or Shop Drawings for each item of material and for every manufactured item of equipment to be used in the work. Such data shall include specific performance data, material description, rating, capacity, dimensions, and type for each item of material, each manufactured item, and all component parts utilized in final operating mechanical system. Applicable data shall be underlined and each applicable item identified in each catalog by the same identification acronyms used on the Drawings.

B. This Contractor shall submit to the Architect the number of copies required by the General and Special Conditions of Division 01, but in no case less than four (4) copies.

C. Each item submitted shall bear the Contractor's stamp, be dated and signed certifying that he has reviewed and approved the Submittal.

D. For each item scheduled on the Drawings, submit a replication of that schedule indicating actual data of the submitted equipment in the schedule.

E. The review comments of the Architect and/or Engineer do not in any case supersede the Drawings and Specifications, and shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the Drawings or Specifications unless the Contractor has called to the attention of the Architect and/or Engineer, in writing, such deviations at the time of submission, nor shall it relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors of any sort in the items submitted.

F. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports as required by various Sections of Division 22 showing compliance in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract.



G. Deviations: It is the contractors responsibility to indicate deviations from the Plans And Specifications. Approval shall not be considered acceptance of the deviation unless it has been explicitly indicated.

1.13 SITE OBSERVATION REPORTS

A. During the construction period the Engineer may issue periodic site observation reports. The contractor shall immediately address the issues and provide a written response identifying the “Responsible Contractor,” “Date,” “Corrective Action Taken,” and “Recommendations.”

B. The written response must be returned to the Architect no later than (5) working days after receipt of the site observation report.

1.14 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions: Comply with Division 01 & Instructions to Bidders.

B. Contractors desiring to use alternate equipment or materials and manufacturers or suppliers desiring to furnish alternate materials or equipment in lieu of those specified, shall submit requests for approval to the Engineer not less than seven (7) calendar days prior to scheduled closing date for receipt of proposals.

C. Materials and equipment are specified by manufacturer and catalog numbers. The manufacturers and catalog numbers are used to establish a degree of quality and style for such equipment and material.

D. When alternate or substitute materials and equipment are used, Contractor will be responsible for space requirement, configurations, performance, changes in bases, supports, structural members and openings in structure, electrical changes and other apparatus and trades that may be affected by their use. Contractor shall provide drawings for alternate/substitute equipment in detail equal to the construction documents.

1.15 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. General: Comply with Division 01.

B. Job Site Documents: Maintain at the job site, one record copy of the following:1. Drawings2. Specifications3. Addenda4. Reviewed Shop Drawings5. Field Test Records

C. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Maintain documents in clean, dry legible condition, apart from documents used for construction.

D. Record Information: Label each document "Record Document." Mark information with contrasting color using ink. Keep each record current. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information is recorded. Record the following information on drawings:1. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities.2. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction.3. Field changes of dimension and detail.4. Changes by change order or field order.5. Details not on original Contract Drawings.



E. Contractor shall transfer all as-built information on to CAD files. Electronic copy will be provided upon request.

F. Record the following information on Specifications:1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product and item of

equipment actually installed.2. Changes by change order or field order.3. Other matters not originally specified.

G. Shop Drawings: Maintain Shop Drawings as record documents recording changes made after review as specified for drawings above.

1.16 ELECTRIC WIRING AND SAFETY DEVICE WORK AND MATERIAL RESPONIBILITIES

A. Unless otherwise indicated, all mechanical equipment motors and controls shall be furnished, set in place, and wired in accordance with the following schedule: MD = Mechanical Division, ED = Electrical Division, TD = Temperature Control Division, I = Installer of equipment requiring electrical service.

B. Note: If Temperature Control Division is a subcontract to the Mechanical Contractor, both MD and TD shall fall under the responsibility of MD. If no Temperature Control Contractor is under contract, Mechanical Division shall assume all Temperature Control responsibilities.

Furnished Under

Set In Place or Mounted Under

Power Wired & Connected Under

Control Wired & Connected Under

1. Control Wiring Regardless of Voltage

TD TD TDSee footnote 1

TD

2. Control Valves, Solenoid Valves, Plumbing Fixtures

TD MD -- TD

3. Thermowells in Piping TD MD -- --

1. Footnote 1: It is the intention of this specification for all conduit and wiring which connects to control equipment or provides controls to mechanical equipment to be provided by the Temperature Control Contractor. Other portions of the specification which may be in conflict with this concept shall be brought to the attention of the engineer for clarification prior to bidding the project. The ED shall provide line voltage wiring conduit and junction boxes for the express purpose of temperature controls. It shall be the responsibility of the Temperature Control Contractor to coordinate the location of the junction boxes (if not otherwise shown on the Electrical Drawings) and to utilize these junction boxes for temperature control wiring. The Temperature Control Contractor shall extend line and/or low voltage wiring from junction boxes to all mechanical and control components which require control wiring.

C. All temperature control conduit and wiring will be furnished and installed under temperature control subcontract. In the event that temperature control is not under separate contract, Mechanical Contractor shall assume all temperature control subcontract responsibilities.

D. Division 26 shall furnish and install all conduit and wiring required for power wiring carrying equipment full load amperage to all mechanical equipment unless shown otherwise.

E. Provide Division 26 with a complete summary list of all mechanical equipment and line voltage control requiring electric power within 30 days after award of contract. This list shall summarize equipment power loads, line voltage control requirements, quantities, and locations of equipment and connection points. If any mechanical equipment is required to run on emergency power, the



list shall note that requirement along with the requirement for the building temperature controls systems to also be under emergency power.

F. All starters shall be furnished under Division 22.

1.17 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store materials and equipment in manufacturer's unopened containers fully identified with manufacturer's name, trade name, type, class, grade, size and color.

B. Protection: Make provisions for coordination with Owner and other Contractors for safe storage of materials and equipment. Store materials and equipment off the ground and under cover, protected from damage.

C. All items subject to moisture damage, such as controls, shall be stored in a dry, heated space.

D. Large Items: Make arrangements with other Contractors on the job for introduction into the building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings. Schedule delivery of large equipment requiring special openings as required for installation without delaying the work of other project trades.

E. Acceptance: Check and sign for materials to be furnished by Division 22 and other trades for installation under Division 22 upon delivery. Assume responsibility for the storage and safekeeping of such materials from time of delivery until final acceptance.

F. Inspection: Stored material shall be readily accessible for inspection by the Architect until installed.

1.18 WARRANTIES

A. Warranty: In accordance with Division 01, provide a written warranty to the Owner covering the entire mechanical work to be free from defective materials, equipment and workmanship. If the warranty period is not defined in Division 01, the minimum warranty period will be for a period of two years after Date of Acceptance. Purchase of manufacturer’s extended warranty may be required to comply with the warranty period requirement. During this period provide labor and materials as required to repair or replace defects at no additional cost to the Owner. Provide certificates for such items of equipment which have warranties in excess of two years. Submit to the General Contractor.

B. This warranty will be in addition to the terms of any specific equipment warranties or warranty modifications resulting from use of equipment for temporary heat or ventilation.

1.19 SCHEDULE OF TESTING

A. Provide testing in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract. Make all specified tests on piping, ductwork and related systems as necessary. Demonstrate the proper operation of equipment installed under this project.

B. Equipment shall not be tested, or operated for any purpose until fully lubricated in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and until connections to fully operative systems have been accomplished.

C. A schedule of testing shall be drawn up by the Division 22 Contractor in such a manner that it will show areas tested, test pressure, length of test, date, time and signature of testing personnel. All testing must be performed in the presence of the General Contractor's representative; his



signature for verification of the test must appear on the schedule. At completion of testing, the schedule shall then be submitted in triplicate to the Architect.

D. Make sure operational and performance tests are made on seasonal equipment.

E. Complete all tests required by Code Authorities, such as smoke detection, life safety, fire protection and health codes.

1.20 DEMONSTRATION OF ACCESS

A. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner’s designated representative the access to all switches, valves, actuators, dampers, motors, lubrication lines, sensors and panels. Contractor shall correct deficiencies noted by the Owner. Refer outstanding issues to the Architect/Engineer for resolution. Contractor to be responsible for arranging the demonstration prior to final inspection.

1.21 CERTIFICATES AND KEYS

A. Certificates: Upon completion of the work, deliver to the General Contractor one copy of Certificate of Final Inspection.

B. Keys: Upon completion of work, submit keys for mechanical equipment, panels, etc. to the General Contractor.

1.22 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit three (3) typed and bound copies of the maintenance manual, 8-1/2" x 11" in size, to the Architect, for review and approval. These approved copies shall then be transmitted to the Owner.

B. The manual shall be enclosed in a stiff-back, three-ring binder and shall have:1. Table of Contents, Equipment List with identification used in contract documents.2. Alphabetical list of all system components including the name, address, and 24-hour phone

number of the company responsible for servicing each item during the first year of operation.3. Operating instructions for complete system, including procedures for fire or failure of major

equipment and procedures for normal starting/operating/shutdown and long-term shutdown.4. Maintenance instructions, including valves, valve tag and other identified equipment lists,

proper lubricants and lubricating instructions for each piece of equipment and necessary cleaning/replacing/adjusting schedules.

5. Manufacturer's data on each piece of equipment, including:a. Installation instructions.b. Drawings and Specifications (approved Shop Drawings).c. Parts lists.d. Complete wiring and temperature control diagrams. (Approved Shop Drawings).e. Completed and approved TAB report.

1.23 INSTRUCTIONAL SESSIONS

A. Be responsible for scheduling instructional meetings for maintenance personnel on the proper operation and maintenance of all mechanical systems, using the maintenance manual as a guide. These meetings must be scheduled through the Architect or General Contractor and with enough advanced notice that all personnel can be notified. Provide instructional sessions as required.



PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLSValdez Elementary PLUMBING RELATED WORKOZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 22 00 10 - 1

SECTION 22 00 10

PLUMBING RELATED WORK

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.


A. Types of mechanical related work specified in this section include the following:1. Access Doors.2. Excavation.3. Cutting and Patching.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCESS DOORS

A. Furnish access doors where shown on Drawings and at all locations where required for access to concealed valves, shock absorbers, dampers, cleanouts, control devices, coils, and equipment servicing. Access doors shall be 24” x 24”.

B. Standard Doors:1. Frames: 16 ga. steel.2. Panels: 14 ga. steel.3. Finish: Chemically bonded prime coat of baked enamel.4. Hinge: Concealed spring hinges openable to 175°; removable pins. Provide number of

hinges as recommended by manufacturer for size of door.5. Locking Devices: Flush steel, screw driver operated, cam type locks. All access doors below

8'-0" in public areas shall be key-operated cylinder lock with two keys.6. Style of doors shall be appropriate for architectural finish at door location. Furnish masonry

anchors where required.

C. Fire Rated Doors:1. Frames: 16 gauge steel.2. Panels: Sandwich type, 20 gauge steel sheets, manufacturer's standard insulated core.3. Finish: Chemically bonded prime coat of baked enamel.4. Hinge: Continuous type, steel with stainless steel pin.5. Closer: Automatic closing mechanism.6. Locking Devices: Self latching, key-operated cylinder lock with two keys; interior, latch

release mechanism.7. Style of doors shall be appropriate for architectural finish at door location.8. Fire rated doors shall have components and assemblies meeting requirements of the

American Insurance Association, Factory Mutual Insurance Association and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Cesco.



2. Karp Associates, Inc.3. Meadowcraft, Inc.4. Milcor Div; Inryco Inc.5. Nystrom, Inc.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ACCESS TO MECHANICAL WORK

A. Installation:1. Deliver access doors to General Contractor for installation and provide instructions for their

location. Exact location of access doors to be as directed by Mechanical Contractor and Architect/Engineer.

2. Furnish all access doors whether shown or not.3. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of access doors.4. Coordinate installation with work of other trades.5. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face panels plumb or

level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces.6. Access door location shall be coordinated with Architect/Engineer prior to installation. All

access panels not coordinated will run the risk of removal and relocation at the expense of the contractor.

7. Install access doors for the following concealed equipment:a. Shock absorbers.b. Valves.c. Control devices.d. Trap primers.e. Other plumbing equipment requiring service.

B. Adjust and Clean:1. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.2. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.

3.02 EXCAVATING FOR MECHANICAL WORK

A. General: Do not excavate for mechanical work until work is ready to proceed without delay, so that total time lapse from excavation to completion of backfilling will be minimum.

B. Existing Utilities: Locate and protect existing utilities and other underground work in manner which will ensure that no damage or service interruption will result from excavating and backfilling.

C. All trenches deeper than the footing of any building or structure and paralleling the same shall be at least forty-five (45) degrees therefrom, unless permission is otherwise granted by the Administrative Authority and Structural Engineer.

D. Excavation for Trenches: Dig trenches to uniform width required for particular item to be installed, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room. Provide 6" to 9" clearance on both sides of piping:1. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Carry depth of trenches for piping to

establish indicated flow lines and invert elevations. Beyond building perimeter, keep bottoms of trenches sufficiently below finish grade to avoid freeze-ups.

2. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6" below required elevation and backfill with 6" layer of 3/4" gravel prior to installation of pipe.

3. Where bedding is required, backfill with sand 6" below and 6" above pipe.



4. For piping 5" or less in nominal size, do not excavate beyond indicated depths. Hand excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations and support piping on undisturbed soil.

5. For piping 6" and larger in nominal size, tanks, and other mechanical work indicated to receive sub-base, excavate to sub-base depth indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, to 6" below bottom of work to be supported.

6. Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under piping couplings to provide solid bearing for entire body of piping.

E. Shape sub-bases and bottoms of excavations with recesses to receive pipe bells, flanged connections, valves and similar enlargements in piping systems.

3.03 BACKFILLING

A. Do not backfill until installed mechanical work has been tested and accepted, wherever testing is indicated.

B. All excavations shall be completely backfilled as soon after inspection as practical. Adequate precaution shall be taken to insure proper compactness (95% density) of backfill around piping without damage to such piping. Trenches shall be backfilled in thin layers to twelve (12) inches (0.3m) above the top of the piping with clean earth which shall not contain stones, boulders, cinderfill, or other materials which would damage or break the piping or cause corrosive action. Mechanical devices such as bulldozers, graders, etc., may then be used to complete backfill to grade. Fill shall be properly compacted (95% density). Suitable precautions shall be taken to insure permanent stability for pipe laid in filled or made ground. For testing and backfill material see Division 02 - Site Work.

C. Underground plumbing shall be surrounded by a minimum of 6” of squeegee.

3.04 EXISTING PIPES AND PLUMBING EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED

A. Where existing plumbing equipment, fixtures and/or piping is to be removed and/or relocated, all piping shall be disconnected and capped. All existing piping and hangers not to remain in use shall be removed completely to an existing main that is to remain in use, and capped at the main. All existing equipment not to remain in use shall be removed completely. General Contractor shall do all cutting, patching, and restoring that may be required for the removal of this piping and equipment. Where it is not possible to remove branch piping not remaining in use due to its being concealed in the structure, the Division 22 Contractor shall cap the concealed piping at both ends in these areas as approved by the Architect.

B. All mechanical equipment, fixtures, and piping to be removed and not re-used shall remain the property of the Division 22 Contractor and used as credit to the contract price except as noted otherwise.

3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Openings in New Construction – Provisions for New Openings: Verify all openings required in the new construction in connection with the work under Division 22 with the Architectural and Structural Drawings. Meet with and verify same with the General Contractor who will assign the work to the appropriate contractor to provide all openings in the new construction of the correct size and location in walls, floors or through roofs required for the installation of the mechanical work.

B. Cutting in New Construction: Failure on the part of the Division 22 Contractor to make the above arrangements for required openings shall cause the cost of cutting and patching for the necessary openings or the installation of his work to be borne by him, either by having the cutting done by the appropriate contractor as assigned by the General Contractor or in the form of



performing the required cutting himself. In either case, all patching shall be done by the appropriate finishing contractor as determined by the General Contractor. No cutting or drilling of holes shall be done without approval of the Architect/Engineer.

C. Patching in New Construction:1. The appropriate finishing contractor as determined by the General Contractor shall patch all

openings in the new structure. All openings made in fire-rated walls, floors, or ceilings, shall be patched and made tight to conform to the fire rating for the enclosure. All materials used in patching shall match the materials specified in the Architectural Specifications and all patched areas shall be restored to the specified finish surface to the satisfaction of the Architect.

2. The Division 22 Contractor shall pay the appropriate Finishing Contractor as determined by the General Contractor for all patching resulting from cutting to accommodate mechanical work.

D. Cutting in Existing Building: The General Contractor shall make arrangements for required openings in the existing building to facilitate the passage of ductwork, piping, etc. through existing floors, walls, and beams. Division 22 Contractor to coordinate all requirements.

E. Patching in Existing Building: The General Contractor shall patch all existing walls and floors to match existing.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLSValdez Elementary PIPE, VALVES & PIPE SPECIALTIESOZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 22 05 00 - 1

SECTION 22 05 00

PIPE, VALVES & PIPE SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL




A. Types of equipment specified in this section include the following:1. Pipes and Pipe Fittings.2. Valves.3. Pipes Specialties.4. Expansion Devices.5. Supports and Anchors.6. Gages.


A. Codes and Standards:1. Welding: Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME

B31.1, or ASME B31.9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping work.2. Brazing: Certify brazing procedures, brazers, and operators in accordance with ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, for shop and job-site brazing of piping work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Shall be of material, weight, ASTM and ANSI Designation, and pressure ratings as follows unless specifically excepted otherwise.

B. Above Ground Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping:1. Pipe Size 10" and Smaller: Hubless cast-iron soil pipe; Service weight; Hubless cast-iron

soil pipe fittings conforming to ASTME A888 or ASTM A-74. Acceptable manufacturers: AB&I, Charlotte Pipe, Tyler Pipe.a. Hubless Joints:

1) Standard couplings equal to CISPI 310 on all piping unless otherwise noted.2) Heavy duty couplings with 304 stainless steel band, bolts, etc. equal to Husky

HD2000 on the following piping:a) Roof drain, overflow drain and storm drain piping.

2. Pipe size 1 1/2" and Smaller: Type “L” copper with DWV pattern solder joints.

C. Underground Building Drain Piping to 5 Feet Beyond Building Line:1. Pipe size 8" and smaller: Schedule 40 PVC solid core (only), PVC-DWV pipe with DWV

drainage fitting and solvent welded joints. ASTM D-2665.



D. Domestic Cold Water, Hot Water, Hot Water Recirculation, Compressed Air and Condensate Piping Above Ground Inside Building:1. 4” and Under:

a. Pipe: Type L, hard drawn, seamless copper tubing ASTM B 88-70.b. Fittings: Wrought copper or bronze solder joint pressure type fittings per ANSI B16.22.c. Joints: All-State “Aquasafe” solder. Antimony is not allowed in solder. Shear strength

greater than 10,000 psi.

E. Natural Gas and Natural Gas Relief Vent Piping, Above Ground Inside Building and Above Ground Exterior:1. Pipe: Schedule 80 for pipe sizes 1/2" and under; Schedule 40 for pipe sizes over 1/2", black

steel (ERW) pipe per ASTM A53.2. Fittings:

a. ½” and Under: 300 pound malleable iron flat banded pattern screwed fittings per ANSI B16.3.

b. Over ½” thru 2": Same as above except 150 pound class, screwed or welding fittings per joints below. Welded and/or sleeved only in return air plenum.

c. Over 2": Schedule 40, seamless carbon steel welding fittings, long radius, 150 pound class, dimensions per ANSI B16.9-1971; ASTM A 234-73, Grade WPB.

3. Joints:a. 1-1/2” and Under: Threaded using joint compound resistant to gas-air mixture.b. 2" and Above: Butt-welded.

2.02 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS/PRODUCTS

A. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.1. Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding

materials.

B. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldering materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.1. All-State “Aquasafe”. "No Antimony."2. Shear strength greater than 10,000 psi.

C. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.1. Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler

metal materials.

D. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full-faced for cast- iron flanges; raised-face for steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated. Provide flange connection to valve and equipment for PRV stations at each end of the legs, to allow for component replacement.

E. Piping Connectors for Dissimilar Non-Pressure Pipe: Elastomeric annular ring insert, or elastomeric flexible coupling secured at each end with stainless steel clamps, sized for exact fit to pipe ends and subject to approval by plumbing code.1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Fernco, Inc.b. Indiana Seal

2.03 VALVES

A. General: Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide end connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is



indicated, selection is Installer's option. Valves shall be manufactured in accordance with all applicable M.S.S. Standards. All ball and globe valves intended to supply drinking water shall meet NFS-61 (180° F C. Hot).

B. Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size.

C. Operators: Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter-turn. Provide lever handle for quarter-turn valves, 6" and smaller, other than plug valves. Provide one wrench for every 10 plug valves. Provide gear operators for quarter-turn valves 8" and larger.

D. Acceptable Manufacturer’s1. Swing Check Valves:

a. Crane/Stockham.b. Hammond/Milwaukee Valve Corp.c. Nibco, Inc.

2. Drain Valves:a. Hammond/Milwaukee Valve Corp.b. Nibco, Inc.

3. Gas Plug Valves:a. Walworth Co.

4. Gas Cocks:a. Hammond.b. Crane.

5. Ball Valves:a. Apollo.b. Hammond/Milwaukee Valve Corp.c. Nibco, Inc.d. Watts Co.

6. Balance Valve (2" and smaller variable CV orifice type):a. Armstrong.b. Bell & Gossett.c. Tour – Anderson.

E. Valve Features:1. General: Provide valves with features indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide

proper valve features as determined by Installer for installation requirements. Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping, and ASME B31.1 for power piping.

2. Flanged: Valve flanges complying with ANSI B16.1 (cast iron), ANSI B16.5, (steel), or ANSI B16.24 (bronze).

3. Threaded: Valve ends complying with ANSI B2.1.4. Butt-Welding: Valve ends complying with ANSI B16.25.

F. Valve Schedule:1. General: Provide the following valves for various valve types referenced in Division 22

sections.2. Ball Valves:

a. 2” and Smaller: 600 WOG/150 SWP, bronze body, full port, bronze trim, 1-piece construction, TFE seats and seals (NSF 61 - 180° F C. Hot), 400 PSIG CWP rating.1) Apollo – Threaded Ends.

b. 2-1/2” thru 4": 400 WOG/150 SWP, bronze body, full port, 2- or 3-piece body, PTFE seats with bronze trim (NSF 61 - 180° F C. Hot).1) Apollo – Threaded Ends.

3. Swing Check Valves:a. 3” and Smaller: 125 lb. SWP, bronze body, horizontal swing, straight pattern flow

renewable disc. Conform to MSS SP-80. Type 4.1) Nibco – Threaded Ends: T-433.



4. Gas Plug Valve:a. 2-1/2”and Larger: 175 psi, lubricated or permanently lubricated plug type, semi-steel

body, single gland, wrench operated, flanged ends.1) DeZurik: 118.

5. Gas Cocks:a. Gas Cocks 3" and Smaller: 250 psi non-shock WOG, bronze ball valve with chrome

plated ball, threaded ends, UL listed.1) Nibco: T-580-70-UL-842.2) Apollo: 80-100

b. Gas Cocks 4" and Larger: 175 psi non-shock WOG, iron body nickel plated, corrosion resistant plug, flanged ends, lever handle.1) Dezurik: 425

6. Balance Valves:a. 2” Size and Smaller: Provide balance valves equipped with readout valves to facilitate

connecting of differential pressure meter to balance valves. Equip each readout valve with integral EPT check valve designed to minimize system fluid loss during monitoring process. Provide calibrated nameplate to indicated degree of closure of precision machined orifice. Construct balancing valve with internal EPT o-ring seals to prevent leakage around rotating element. Provide balance valves with preformed polyurethane insulation suitable for use on heating and cooling systems, and to protect balance valves during shipment.1) Acceptable Manufacturers:

a) Armstrong.b) Bell & Gossett, ITT; Fluid Handling Div.c) Tour-Anderson.

2.04 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated piping specialties recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide piping specialties of types and pressure ratings indicated for each service, or if not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes as indicated, and connections, which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option.

B. Pipe Escutcheons:1. General: Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting

pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe penetration hole in floors, walls, or ceilings; and pipe sleeve extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with chrome finish for occupied areas.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers:a. Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co.b. Producers Specialty & Mfg. Corp.c. Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co.

C. Strainers:1. General: Provide strainers full line size of connecting piping, with ends matching piping

system materials. Select strainers for 125 psi working pressure, with Type 304 stainless steel screens, with 3/64" perforations @ 233 per sq. in. as a minimum.a. Threaded, 4" and Smaller in Copper Piping Systems: Cast bronze body, screwed

screen retainer with centered blowdown fitted and blowdown piped to nearest drain with valve.

b. Acceptable Manufacturers:1) Apollo.2) Mueller Co.



3) Watts Regulator Co.

D. Dielectric Fittings:1. General: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use in service

indicated, which effectively isolate ferrous from non-ferrous piping (electrical conductance), prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion.a. Clearflow dielectric waterway nipple, steel nipple with inert thermoplastic liner. Shall

meet ASTM F-492-77.1) Acceptable Manufacturers:

a) Perfection Corporation – Victaulic.

E. Fire Barrier Penetration Seals:1. Provide seals for any opening through fire-rated walls, floors, or ceilings used as passage for

mechanical components such as piping or ductwork.a. Cracks, Voids, or Holes Up to 4" Diameter: Use putty or caulking, one-piece

intumescent elastomer, non-corrosive to metal, compatible with synthetic cable jackets, and capable of expanding 10 times when exposed to flame or heat, UL-listed.

b. Openings 4" or Greater: Use sealing system capable of passing 3-hour fire test in accordance with ASTM E-814, consisting of wall wrap or liner, partitions, and end caps capable of expanding when exposed to temperatures of 250 to 350°F (121 to 177°C), UL-listed.

c. Acceptable Manufacturers:1) Electro Products Div./3M. (Fire Barrier Systems)2) Manville Products Corp.3) Nelson; Unit of General Signal. (Flameseal)4) Pipe Shield Incorporated.5) STI.6) Hilti – FS/One.

F. Water Hammer Arresters:1. General: Provide bellows or piston type water hammer arresters, pressure rated for 250 psi,

tested and certified in accordance with ASSE #1010. Provide access panel for servicing. Provide full size ball valve and union from pipe to shock arrester.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers:a. PPP, Inc.

2.05 FABRICATED PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:1. Sheet-Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint,

welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate from the following gages: 3" and smaller, 20 gage; 4" to 6" 16 gage; over 6", 14 gage.

2. Steel-Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs.3. Iron-Pipe: Fabricate from cast-iron or ductile-iron pipe; remove burrs.4. Plastic-Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe; remove burrs.

B. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals in sleeve as follows:1. Below grade in foundation wall or exterior walls above grade.

a. Link seal.b. Innerlynx

2. Penetration below grade thru floor.a. Provide elastomeric joint sealant to maintain watertight and airtight continuous seal.

3. Penetrations thru walls, floors, or ceilings above grade.a. Intumescent fire stop.



2.06 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. References:1. ASTM B633 – Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.2. ASTM A123 – Specification for Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from

Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip.3. ASTM A653 G90 – Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.4. MSS SP58 – Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and Supports –

Materials, Design and Manufacture.5. MSS SP69 – Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and Supports –

Selection and Application.6. NFPA 13 – Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.

B. Quality Assurance:1. Hangers and supports used in fire protection piping systems shall be listed and labeled by

Underwriters Laboratories.2. Steel pipe hangers and supports shall have the manufacturer’s name, part number, and

applicable size stamped in the part itself for identification.3. Hangers and supports shall be designed and manufactured in conformance with MSS SP58.4. Supports for sprinkler piping shall be in conformance with NFPA 13.

C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports:1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated horizontal-piping

hangers and supports selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping systems. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide baked on epoxy paint hangers and supports for copper piping systems.

D. Vertical-Piping Clamps:1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated vertical-piping clamps

complying with MSS SP-58 selected by Installer to suit vertical piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of vertical piping clamps to exactly fit pipe size of bare pipe. Provide baked on epoxy paint clamps for copper-piping systems.

E. Hanger-Rod Attachments:1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated hanger-rod attachments

complying with MSS SP-58 selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper-plated hanger-rod attachments for copper-piping systems.

F. Building Attachments:1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated building attachments

complying with MSS SP-58 selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods.

G. Finishes:1. Indoor Finishes:

a. Hangers and clamps for support of bare copper piping shall be coated with copper colored epoxy paint. Additional PVC coating of the epoxy painted hanger shall be used where necessary.



b. Hangers for other than bare copper pipe shall be zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633 or shall have an electrodeposited epoxy finish.

c. Strut channels shall be pre-galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653 G90 or have an electrodeposited epoxy finish.

2. Outdoor Finishes:a. Hangers and strut located outdoors shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication in

accordance with ASTM A123. All hanger hardware shall be stainless steel. Zinc plated hardware is not acceptable for outdoor use.

H. Manufacturers of Hangers and Supports (Acceptable Manufacturers):1. B-Line Systems Inc.2. Grinnel Corp.

I. Pipe Positioning Systems:1. Description: IAPMO PS42, system of metal brackets, clips and straps for positioning piping

in pipe spaces for plumbing fixtures.2. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Holdrite Corp.; Hubbard Enterprises.

J. Saddles and Shields:1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields under piping hangers

and supports, factory-fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation.

2. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length per schedule below to prevent crushing of insulation. Provide coated projection shields on cold/ chilled water piping.a. Schedule:

Nominal Pipe or Tubing Size Shield Length

Shield Gauge Thickness Material

½” thru 3” 12” 18 Galvanized4” 12” 16 Galvanized

3. Thermal Hanger Shields: MSS Type 40 Constructed of an insert of high density, 100 psi, water-proofed calcium silicate, encased in a sheet metal shield. Provide assembly of same thickness as adjoining insulation. The style of thermal hanger shield assembly shall be determined by shield manufacturer based on hanger type.

4. Acceptable Manufacturers:a. Pipe Shields, Inc.b. Value Engineering Products, Inc.

2.07 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Metal Framing:1. Supplementary Structural Supports: Design and fabricate supports using structural quality

steel bolted framing materials as manufactured by B-Line Systems. Channels shall be roll formed, 12 gauge ASTM A570 Grade 33 steel, 1 5/8” x 1 5/8” or greater as required by loading conditions. Submit designs for pipe tunnels, pipe galleries, etc., to Engineer for approval. Use clamps and fittings designed for use with the strut system.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Provide products complying with ASTM A 36.

C. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration.

D. Trapeze Hangers:



1. Trapeze hangers shall be constructed from 12 gauge roll formed ASTM A570 Gr. 33 structural steel channel, 1 5/8” x 1 5/8” minimum. B-Line B22 strut or stronger as required.

2. Mount pipes to trapeze with 2 piece pipe straps sized for outside diameter of pipe, B-Line B2000 Series.

3. For pipes subjected to axial movement:a. Strut mounted roller support, B-Line B3126. Use pipe protection shield or saddles on

insulated lines.b. Strut mounted pipe guide, B-Line B2417.

E. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS standards.

F. Pipe Guides: Provide factory-fabricated guides, of cast semi- steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted two- section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider bolted tight to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if any), and cylinder. Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel.

2.08 GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. General: Provide glass thermometers of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated. Gauges with dual units (U.S. English and S.I.) are required.

B. Case: Die cast aluminum finished in baked epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured, 9" long.

C. Adjustable Joint: Die cast aluminum, finished to match case, 180°F adjustment in vertical plane, 360 degrees adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.

D. Tube and Capillary: Organic filled "red" color, magnifying lens, 1% scale range accuracy, shock mounted.

E. Scale: Satin faced, non-reflective aluminum, permanently etched markings.

F. Stem: Copper-plated steel, or brass, for separable socket, length to suit installation.

G. Range: Conform to the following:1. Hot Water: 30° - 240°F with 2°F scale divisions.

H. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Trerice (H.O.) Co.2. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

2.09 THERMOMETER WELLS

A. General: Provide thermometer wells constructed of brass or stainless steel, pressure rated to match piping system design pressure. Provide 2" extension for insulated piping. Provide cap nut with chain fastened permanently to thermometer well.

B. Manufacturer: Same as thermometers.

2.10 PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE GAGE CONNECTOR PLUGS

A. General: Provide temperature and pressure gage connector plugs pressure rated for 600 psi and 275°F. Construct of brass and finish in nickel-plate, equip with 1/2" NPT fitting, with self-sealing valve core type neoprene gasketed orifice suitable for inserting 1/8" O.D. probe assembly from



dial type insertion thermometer or pressure gauge. Equip orifice with gasketed screw cap and retaining strap. Provide extension, length equal to insulation thickness, for insulated piping.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Peterson Equipment Co.

2.11 PRESSURE GAGES

A. General: Provide pressure gages of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated. Gauges with dual units (U.S. English and S.I.) are required.

B. Type: General use, 1% accuracy, ANSI B40.1 grade A, phosphor bronze bourdon type, bottom connection, with stainless steel seat ring and individual shock-proof cases.

C. Case: Bonze body with cast aluminum case, glass lens, 4 1/2" diameter.

D. Connector: Brass with 1/4" male NPT with ball valve.

E. Scale: White coated aluminum, with black permanently etched markings.

F. Range: Conform to the following:1. Water: 0 – 200 psi.

G. Accuracy: 1% full scale, ASME B40.100 Grade 1A.

H. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Ametek/U.S. Gauge.2. Trerice (H.O.) Co.

2.12 PRESSURE GAGE COCKS

A. General: Provide pressure gage cocks between pressure gages and gage tees on piping systems. Construct gage cock of brass with 1/4" female NPT on each end, and "T" handle brass plug.

B. Snubber: 1/4" brass bushing with corrosion resistant porous metal disc, through which pressure fluid is filtered. Select disc material for fluid served and pressure rating.

C. Manufacturer: Same as for pressure gages.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PIPE AND PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve permanently leakproof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16" misalignment tolerance.

B. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column



lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of building; limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of piping, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated piping for 1" clearance outside insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as indicated.

C. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures unless unavoidable. Install drip pan under piping that must be run through electrical spaces.

D. Painting of Pipe: Paint all exterior steel piping (gas, etc.) with a rust inhibitor paint. Coordinate color with architect prior to painting.

3.02 PIPING SYSTEM JOINTS

A. General: Provide joints of type indicated in each piping system.

B. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.

C. Braze copper tube-and-fitting joints where indicated, in accordance with ASME B31.

D. Solder copper tube-and-fitting joints where indicated, in accordance with recognized industry practice. Cut tube ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and clean outside of tube ends and inside of fittings. Apply solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. Use only flux with no lead content. Insert tube full depth into fitting, and solder in manner which will draw solder full depth and circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens.

E. Weld pipe joints in accordance with recognized industry practice and as follows:1. Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above 0°F (-18°C) where possible.2. Bevel pipe ends at a 37.5 degree angle where possible, smooth rough cuts, and clean to

remove slag, metal particles and dirt.3. Use pipe clamps or tack-weld joints with 1" long welds; 4 welds for pipe sizes to 10", 8 welds

for pipe sizes 12" to 20".4. Build up welds with stringer-bead pass, followed by hot pass, followed by cover or filler pass.

Eliminate valleys at center and edges of each weld. Weld by procedures which will ensure elimination of unsound or unfused metal, cracks, oxidation, blow-holes and non-metallic inclusions.

5. Do not weld-out piping system imperfections by tack-welding procedures; re-fabricate to comply with requirements.

6. At Installer's option, install forged branch-connection fittings wherever branch pipe is indicated; or install regular "T" fitting.

7. Clean all welded joints and apply prime coat rust inhibitor.

F. Weld pipe joints of steel water pipe in accordance with AWWA C206.

G. Hubless Hub & Spigot, Cast-Iron Joints: Comply with coupling manufacturer's installation instructions.



3.03 INSTALLATION OF VALVES

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following requirements:1. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves

in all branch lines to isolate sections of piping whether shown or not. Branch lines will be considered any line connecting to the main piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary.

2. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable. Install valve drains with hose-end adapter for each valve that must be installed with stem below horizontal plane.

B. Shutoff Valves: Install on inlet and outlet of each mechanical equipment item, and elsewhere as indicated.

C. Drain Valves: Install on each mechanical equipment item located to completely drain equipment for service or repair. Install at base of each riser, at base of each rise or drop in piping system, and elsewhere where indicated or required to completely drain hydronic piping system.

D. Insulation: Where insulation is indicated, install extended-stem valves, arranged in proper manner to receive insulation.

E. Valve System: Select and install valves with outside screw and yoke stems, except provide inside screw non-rising stem valves where headroom prevents full opening of OS&Y valves.

F. Non-Metallic Disc: Limit selection and installation of valves with non-metallic discs to locations indicated and where foreign material in piping system can be expected to prevent tight shutoff of metal seated valves.

G. Renewable Seats: Select and install valves with renewable seats, except where otherwise indicated.

H. Fluid Control: Except as otherwise indicated, install ball valves to comply with ANSI B31.9.

I. Installation of Check Valves:1. Swing Check Valves: Install in horizontal position with hinge pin horizontally perpendicular to

center line of pipe. Install for proper direction of flow.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Pipe Escutcheons: Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration thru floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure escutcheon to pipe or insulation so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush with adjoining surface.

B. Y-Type Strainers: Install Y-type strainers full size of pipeline, in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install pipe nipple and shutoff valve in strainer blow down connection, full size of connection, except for strainers 2" and smaller installed ahead of control valves feeding individual terminals. Where indicated, provide drain line from shutoff valve to plumbing drain, full size of blow down connection.1. Locate Y-type strainers in supply line ahead of the following equipment, and elsewhere as

indicated, if integral strainer is not included in equipment:a. Pumps.b. Temperature control valves larger than 2".c. Pressure reducing valves.d. Temperature or pressure regulating valves.e. Prior to backflow preventers.



C. Dielectric Fittings:1. Provide dielectric pipe fittings and isolators at all connections between dissimilar metals in

the domestic water and fire protection systems to control corrosion potential caused by galvanic or electrolytic action.

2. Typical locations for dielectric isolation are: water heaters, storage and pressure tanks, pumps, changes in service piping materials, make-up connections to boilers and chilled water systems, valves, deaerators, flexible connectors and the like where materials of different electrode potential are joined.

3. Storage tanks shall be isolated from piping and tank stands by use of anti-electrolytic and galvanic isolators.

D. Fire Barrier Penetration Seals: Fill entire opening with sealing compound. Adhere to manufacturer's installation instructions.

E. Water Hammer Arresters: Install in upright position, in locations and of sizes in accordance with ASSE #1010, and elsewhere as indicated.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Pipe Sleeves: Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except as detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect/Engineer. Install sleeves accurately centered on pipe runs. Size sleeves so that piping and insulation (if any) will have free movement in sleeve,including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping run. Where insulation includes vapor-barrier jacket, provide sleeve with sufficient clearance for installation. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction penetrated, and finish flush to surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves 1/4" above level floor finish, and 3/4" above floor finish sloped to drain. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves.1. Install sheet-metal sleeves at interior partitions and ceilings other than suspended ceilings.2. Install iron-pipe sleeves at exterior penetrations; both above and below grade.3. Install steel-pipe sleeves except as otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings per local code. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support pipingfrom other piping.

B. Installation of Building Attachments:1. Install building attachments at required locations within concrete or on structural steel for

proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69 Table 3 or local code, whichever is more stringent. Install additional hangers at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert securely to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.



C. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping.

D. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are copper plated, or by other recognized industry methods, or by plastic coated hangers.

E. Provisions for Movement:1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit

freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units.

2. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

3. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not exceeded.

F. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements.1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through

insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31.2. Saddles and Shield Installation:

a. 3” and smaller piping: Contractor option; protection shields or thermal hanger shields. Provide on cold/chilled water a vapor barrier.

b. 4” and Larger: Contractors option; thermal hanger shields. Provide on cold/chilled water piping a vapor barrier.

G. Support of pipe and equipment shall be accomplished by means of engineered products, specific to each application. Makeshift, field devised methods shall not be allowed.

3.07 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS

A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ANSI B31, and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

B. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to structure. Comply with ANSI B31 and with AWS standards.

C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions, to limit movement of piping and forces to maximums recommended by manufacturer for each unit.

D. Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe-runs, at intermediate points in pipe- runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping.

3.08 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Provide structural steel stands to support equipment not floor mounted or hung from structure. Construct of structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings. Provide factory-fabricated tank saddles for tanks mounted on steel stands.

3.09 INSTALLATION OF TEMPERATURE GAGES

A. General: Install temperature gages in vertical upright position, and tilted so as to be easily read by observer standing on floor.

B. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated:



1. At outlet of each domestic hot water storage tank and temperature mixing valve.2. Downstream of hot water recirculation pump.

C. Thermometer Wells: Install in piping tee where indicated, in vertical upright position. Fill well with oil or graphite, secure cap.

D. Temperature Gage Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipe at most readable position. Secure cap.

3.10 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS

A. General: Install in piping where indicated, located on pipe at the most readable position. Secure cap.

B. For horizontal pipe, install in top half of pipe line.

3.11 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAGES

A. General: Install pressure gages in piping tee with pressure gage cock, located on pipe at most readable position.

B. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated:1. At suction and discharge of each pump.2. At discharge of each pressure reducing valve.3. At water service and fire service entry. Prior to backflow preventer.

C. Pressure Gage Cocks: Install in piping tee with snubber. Install syphon for steam pressure gages.

D. Pressure Gage Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipe at most readable position. Secure cap.

3.12 CLEANING, FLUSHING, INSPECTING

A. General: Clean exterior surfaces of superfluous materials, and prepare for application of specified coatings (if any). Flush out systems with clean water before proceeding with required tests. Inspect each run of each system for completion of joints, supports and accessory items.1. Inspect pressure piping in accordance with procedures of ASME B31.

B. Disinfection of Domestic Water Piping System1. Disinfect water mains and water service including all new and existing inside building

domestic HW, CW and HWC piping. 2. Disinfection of piping and testing shall be completed a minimum of one week prior to

occupancy.3. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.4. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or

soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric).5. Inject disinfectant free chloride in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to

obtain 50 to 80 mg/K residual.6. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at a minimum

15 percent of outlets.7. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.8. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.9. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.10. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 5 percent of outlets and from

water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.



C. Disinfect water mains and water service including all new and existing inside building domestic HW, CW and HWC piping in accordance with the authority having jurisdiction or, if methods are not prescribed, in accordance with AWWA C651. Disinfection of piping and testing shall be completed a minimum of one week prior to occupancy.

3.13 PIPING TESTS

A. Test pressure piping in accordance with ASME B31.

B. General: Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test piping system before insulation is installed wherever feasible, and remove control devices before testing. Test each natural section of each piping system independently but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time.1. Required test period is 2 hours.2. Test long runs of Schedule 40 pipe at 150 psi, except where fittings are lower Class or

pressure rating.3. Test each piping system at 150% of operating pressure indicated, but not less than 25 psi

test pressure.4. Test drainage piping systems at a nominal pressure of 10 ft. hydrostatic head.5. Test force drainage (pumped) piping at 50 psi.6. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed

or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure.

C. Repair piping systems sections which fail required piping test, by disassembly and re-installation, using new materials to extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods.

D. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLSValdez Elementary PLUMBING IDENTIFICATIONOZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 22 05 53 - 1

SECTION 22 05 53

PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Types of identification devices specified in this section include the following:1. Plastic Pipe Markers.2. Plastic Tape.3. Valve Tags.4. Valve Schedule Frames.5. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs.6. Plastic Tags.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)1. ANSI A13.1 “Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems”.2. ANSI Z53.1 “Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards”.

B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. General: Where more than single type is specified for application, selection is Installer’s option, but provide single selection for each product category.

2.02 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS

A. Pressure-Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1.

B. Insulation: Furnish 1" thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipe marker to be installed on uninsulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatures of 125°F (52°C) or greater. Cut length to extend 2" beyond each end of plastic pipe marker.

C. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6" (including insulation if any), provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods:1. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap.2. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation).3. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4" wide;

full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2".



D. Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6" and larger (including insulation if any), provide either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3 times letter height (and of required length), fastened by one of the following methods:1. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation).2. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 1-1/2"

wide, full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3".3. Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type, with manufacturer's standard

stainless steel bands.

E. Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled or shown, and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length.1. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with

piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit of plastic.

2.03 PLASTIC TAPE

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard color-coded pressure- sensitive (self-adhesive) vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick.

B. Width: Provide 1-1/2" wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including insulation, if any) of less than 6". Provide 2 1/2" wide tape for larger pipes.

C. Color: Classification Color of

Field District Letters

Legend

Flammable or Explosive:

Natural Gas Yellow Black NG

Acid Waste Yellow Black AW

Extreme Temperatures or Pressures:

Domestic Hot Water Yellow Black HW

Domestic Hot Water Circulating Yellow Black HWC

180°F Domestic Hot Water Yellow Black 180°F HW

180°F Domestic Hot Water Circulating Yellow Black 180°F HWC

Boiler Feed Water Yellow Black BFW

High-Pressure Compressed Air (over 90 psig)

Yellow Black CA

Liquid or Liquid Admixture:

Domestic Cold Water Green White W

Sanitary Sewer Green White SAN

Waste Vent Green White V

Storm Sewer Green White SS

Gas or Gaseous Admixture:

Medium-Pressure Compressed Air (30 to 90 psig)

Blue White CA XXPSI

Low-Pressure Compressed Air (less than 30 psig)

Blue White CA XXPSI

Fire-Quenching Materials:

Water, Foam, CO2, Clean Agent Red White FL

Fire Lines Red White FL



2.04 VALVE TAGS

A. Brass Valve Tags: Provide 19-gage polished brass valve tags with stamp-engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve number 1/2" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener.1. Provide 1-1/2" diameter tags.

B. Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide manufacturer’s standard solid brass chain beaded type.

2.05 VALVE SCHEDULE FRAMES

A. General: For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum, with SSB-grade sheet glass.

2.06 ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE SIGNS

A. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387, in the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and wording indicated, black with white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate.

B. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact- type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.

2.07 PLASTIC TAGS

A. General: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing, approximately 3-1/4" x 5-5/8", with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed wording including large-size primary wording (as examples; DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.

3.02 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system indicated to receive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow.1. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" in this section.

Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot non-insulated pipes.

B. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations.1. Near each valve and control device.2. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each pipe at

branch, where there could be question of flow pattern.



3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non-accessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping.5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.6. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce

spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment.7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced markers.

3.03 VALVE IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system; exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose bibs, and shut-off valves at plumbing fixtures and similar rough-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system.

B. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in boiler rooms where indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, where directed by Architect/Engineer.

3.04 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Install engraved plastic laminate sign on or near each major item of mechanical equipment and each operational device, as specified herein if not otherwise specified for each item or device. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment and operational devices:1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas

outlets.2. Gages, thermometers and similar units.3. Fuel-burning units including water heater.4. Pumps and similar motor-driven units.5. Tanks and pressure vessels.6. Strainers, filters, and similar equipment.

B. Optional Sign Types: Where lettering larger than 1" height is needed for proper identification, because of distance from normal location of required identification, stenciled signs may be provided in lieu of engraved plastic, at Installer's option.

C. Lettering Size: Minimum 1" high lettering for name of unit.

D. Text of Signs: In addition to name of identified unit, provide lettering to distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions and warn of hazards and improper operations.

E. Access doors:1. Provide engraved nameplates to identify concealed valves, controls, dampers or other

similar concealed mechanical equipment. Use the following colors for specified nameplates or labels.a. Red for fire-protection devices, including dampers.b. Blue for air-handling devices.c. Green for plumbing devices and piping.

F. Lift-out Ceilings:1. Provide adhesive labels on ceiling grid to identify concealed valves, filters, fire/smoke

dampers or similar concealed mechanical equipment that is directly above nameplate in the ceiling space. Use the following colors for specified labels.a. Red for fire-protection devices, including dampers.



b. Blue for air-handling devices.c. Green for plumbing devices and piping.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLSValdez Elementary PLUMBING INSULATIONOZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 22 07 00 - 1

SECTION 22 07 00

PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL




A. Types of mechanical insulation specified in this section include the following:1. Piping System Insulation:

a. Fiberglass.


A. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Fiberglass Piping Insulation: ASTM C 547, Type I unless otherwise indicated.

B. Jackets for Piping Insulation:1. Factory applied jackets shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C 1136.2. Field applied jackets shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C 921, Type 1 unless

otherwise specified.

C. Encase pipe fittings insulation with flame and smoke rated one-piece premolded PVC fitting covers, fastened as per manufacturer's recommendations.

D. Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Knauf Fiber Glass.2. Johns Manville Corporation.3. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.02 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION

A. Cold Piping systems:1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following plumbing piping systems:

a. Cold water piping.b. Air conditioner condensate drain piping.

2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation:a. Fiberglass: 1" thick for all pipe sizes. 2” for roof drains.

3. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on chrome-plated exposed piping (except for ADAfixtures), air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, balance cocks, flow regulators, drain lines from water coolers, drainage piping located in crawl spaces or tunnels, buried piping, fire protection piping, and pre-insulated equipment.

B. Hot Piping Systems (from 140°F up to 180°F):1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following plumbing piping systems:

a. Hot water piping.b. Hot water recirculation piping.

2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation:a. Fiberglass: 1" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1 1/4", 1-1/2" thick for pipe sizes

1-1/2" through and including 2", 2 1/2" thick for pipe sizes over 2".3. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on chrome-plated exposed piping (except for ADA

fixtures), air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, balance cocks, flow regulators, drain lines from water coolers, drainage piping located in crawl spaces or tunnels, buried piping, fire protection piping, and pre-insulated equipment.

C. Hot Piping Systems (up to 140°F):1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following plumbing piping systems:

a. Hot water piping.b. Hot water recirculation piping.

2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation:a. Fiberglass: 1" thick for pipe sizes through and including 2", 1-1/2" thick for pipe sizes

over 2".3. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on chrome-plated exposed piping (except for ADA

fixtures), air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, balance cocks, flow regulators, drain lines from water coolers, drainage piping located in crawl spaces or tunnels, buried piping, fire protection piping, and pre-insulated equipment.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION

A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose.

B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, painting, testing, and acceptance of tests.



C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other.

D. Clean and dry surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.

E. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage.

F. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated.

G. Extend insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.

H. Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. For hot pipes, apply 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band over the butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band.

I. Install insulation and vapor barrier jackets continuous over piping at trapeze hangers.

J. Piping Exposed to Outdoor/Ambient Conditions: Increase specified insulation thickness by 1” minimum. Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installing outdoor protective jacketing as recommended by manufacturer.

3.04 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT

A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units.

B. Replace and repair insulation disturbed by testing and balancing procedures required under Section 23 21 00.

C. Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLSValdez Elementary PLUMBING SYSTEMSOZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 22 20 00 - 1

SECTION 22 20 00

PLUMBING SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL



B. Refer to Section 22 05 00: Pipes, Valves and Piping Specialties.


A. Systems and equipment specified in this section include the following:1. Potable Water System.2. Storm Water, Waste and Vent System.3. Natural Gas System.4. Plumbing Fixtures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS

A. General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products, and specified equipment of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections and provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials. Where more than one type of materials or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option.

2.02 PIPES, PIPE FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide pipes and pipe fittings complying with Division 22, Section 22 05 00.1. Basic Valves: Refer to Section 22 05 00 for valve and manufacturer specification.

a. Sectional and Shutoff Valves:1) All Sizes: Ball valves.

b. Drain Valves:1) All Sizes: Ball valves.

c. Check Valves:1) All Sizes: Swing check valves.

d. Balancing Valves:1) All sizes: Calibrated type only; positive shut-off.

2. Potable Water Specialties:a. Hose Bibbs:

1) HB-1: Chicago Faucet Co. No. 952; Threaded end, chrome plated, bronze body, renewable composition disc, tee handle, 3/4" NPT inlet, 3/4" hose outlet, integral vacuum breaker.

2) Acceptable Manufacturers:a) Chicago Faucet Co.: finished roomsb) Woodford: unfinished and equipment rooms

b. Connection Outlet:



1) Ice Maker Box (IMB-1): Sioux Chief #696-101, white ABS, Type L copper, “AA” water hammer arrestor (Refer to Section 22 05 00 for specification), face plate.

c. Wall Hydrants:1) WH-1: Woodford Model B67; non-freeze cast-bronze box hydrant, chrome plated

face, tee handle key, bronze casing, length to suit wall thickness, integral vacuum breaker, self-draining, hinged locking cover, 3/4" inlet, hose outlet.

2) Acceptable Manufacturers:a) Josam Mfg. Co.b) Mifab, Inc.c) Smith, (Jay R.) Mfg. Co.d) Woodford Mfg. Co.e) Watts Co.f) Zurn Industries Inc., Hydromechanics Div.

d. Backflow Preventers: Per Section 22 05 00.e. Relief Valves: Provide relief valves as indicated, of size and capacity as selected by

Installer for proper relieving capacity, in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.1) Acceptable Manufacturers:

a) Cash (A. W.) Valve Mfg. Corp.b) Conbraco Industries, Inc.c) Proset Systems.d) Watts Regulator Co.e) Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins-Regulator Div.

f. Water Hammer Arresters:1) Refer to Section 22 05 00 for specification.

g. Trap Guard: 1) Provide trap guard to floor drain with specified trap guard combination that meets

specified floor drain. See drawings for locations. 2) Acceptable Manufacturers:

a) Proset.b) Sure Seal.

h. P-Trap & Supply Insulation Kits1) Approved Manufacturers:

a) Truebro.b) McQuire Manufacturing.c) PlumberEx.

i. Pressure Regulating Valves: Provide pressure regulating valves, single seated, direct operated type, bronze body, integral strainer, complying with requirements of ASSE Standard 1003. Size for maximum flow rate and inlet and outlet pressures indicated on drawings.1) Acceptable Manufacturers:

a) Mueller Mfg. Co.b) Watts Regulator Co.

j. Water Heater Mixing Valve:1) General: Provide thermostatic mixing valve assembly to include thermostatic

three way mixing valve(s), if required, pressure reducing valve, pressure gauges, union inlet strainer checkstops, dial thermometer, shut-off ball valves and all interconnecting piping. Valve(s) shall provide protection against hot or cold supply line failure and thermostatic failure. Valve(s) shall meet drawing scheduled requirements.

2) Acceptable Manufacturers:a) Bradley (Preferred)b) MCC Powers Process Controls.c) Symmons.

k. Diaphragm-Type Expansion Tanks:



1) General: Provide diaphragm expansion tanks of size and number as indicated. Construct tank of welded steel, constructed, tested, and stamped in accordance with Section VIII of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for working pressure of 125 psi. Furnish National Board Form U-1 denoting compliance. Provide specially compounded heavyduty butyl flexible diaphragm securely sealed into tank to permanently separate air charge from system water, and to maintain design expansion capacity. Provide pressure gauge and air-charging fitting, and drain fitting.

2) Acceptable Manufacturers:a) Amtrol, Inc.b) Armstrong Pumps, Inc.c) Bell & Gossett ITT.

l. Gas Pressure Regulators:1) Line Pressure Regulators (Equipment): “Natural Gas” Comply with ANSI Z21.80.

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide as indicated on the Drawings.a) End connections: Threaded for regulators 2” and smaller; flanged for

regulators 2-1/2” and larger.b) Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.c) Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.d) Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.e) Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and

deformation at the valve port.f) Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.g) Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.h) Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at

maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator.

i) Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.

j) Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator.k) Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless steel screen in

opening if not connected to vent piping. Regulator may include vent limiting device instead of vent connection if approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

l) Maximum Inlet Pressure: See Drawings. m) Outlet Pressure: See Drawings and Equipment Schedules.

2) Approved Manufacturers:a) American Meter Company.b) Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process

Management.c) Maxitrol Company.d) Schlumberger.

B. Storm Drain, Waste and Vent System:1. General: Provide pipes and pipe fittings complying with Division 22, Section 22 05 00.2. Floor Drain, Roof Drain and Vent Flashing: Flashing (safe pan) shall consist of one of the

following:a. 4 lb./ft2 sheet lead with appropriate under support.b. No. 24 B & S gauge (.02) sheet copper with 15 lb. asphalt felt sub pans (silver soldered

seams only). c. .04 thickness non plasticized chlorinated polyethylene and asphalted saturated felt

flashing as approved and acceptable with jurisdictional code.3. Vandal-Proof Vent Caps: Provide vandal-proof vent caps, coated cast iron, counterflashing

collar, recessed securing screws with frost proof opening.a. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) Josam Mfg. Co.



2) Smith, (Jay R.) Mfg. Co.3) Tyler-Wade.4) Zurn Industries Inc., Hydromechanics Div.

4. Drainage Piping Products: Provide factory-fabricated drainage piping products of size and type indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements and governing regulations.a. Cleanout Plugs: Cast-bronze or brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1, countersunk

head.b. Floor Cleanouts: Cast-iron body and frame; cleanout plug; adjustable round top as

follows:1) Nickel-Bronze Top: Manufacturers standard cast unit of the pattern indicated:

a) Pattern: Exposed rim type, with recess to receive 1/8" thick resilient floor finish.

b) Pattern: Exposed rim type, with recess to receive 1" thick terrazzo floor finish.c) Pattern: Exposed finish type, standard mill finish.d) Pattern: Exposed flush type, standard non-slip scored or abrasive finish.

c. Wall cleanouts: Cast-iron body adaptable to pipe with cast-bronze or brass cleanout plug; stainless steel cover including screws.

d. Acceptable Manufacturers:1) Josam Mfg. Co.2) Smith (Jay R.) Co.3) Tyler-Wade.4) Zurn Industries Inc.

5. Drains:a. General: Provide factory-fabricated drains of size and type indicated. Where not

indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Architect/Engineer to comply with installation requirements and governing regulations.

b. Floor Drains and Floor Sinks:1) Floor Drain (FD-1): Josam No. 30000-A, cast-iron body, flashing collar, weepholes,

satin Nikaloy strainer.6. Roof Drains, Area Drains & Downspout Nozzles:

1) Roof Drain (RD-1): Josam No. 21500-AE-3-22-VP, cast iron body, Leveleze type roof drain, clamp ring w/gravel stop, bottom outlet, deck clamp, sump receiver, cast iron locking dome.

2) Overflow Roof Drain (OD-1): Josam No. 21500-AE-3-16-22-VP, cast iron drain body, Leveleze type overflow roof drain, clamp ring w/gravel stop, bottom outlet, deck clamp, sump receiver, cast iron locking dome, 2" water collar.

3) Downspout Nozzle (DSN-1): Josam #25020 Series, cast bronze downspout nozzle, loose wall flange and inlet threaded connection.

4) Acceptable Manufacturers:a) Josam Mfg. Co.b) Mifab, Inc.c) Sioux Chief.d) Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co.e) Tyler Pipe; Subs. of Tyler Corp.f) Watts Co.g) Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.

C. Natural Gas System:1. General: Provide pipes and pipe fittings complying with Division 22, Section 22 05 00.

2.03 PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated fixtures of type, style and material indicated. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option; but, all fixtures of same type must be furnished by single manufacturer.



B. Materials:1. General: Unless otherwise specified, comply with applicable Federal Specification WW-P-

541/-Series sections pertaining to plumbing fixtures, fittings, trim, metals and finishes. Comply with requirements of WW-P-541/-specification relative to quality of ware, glazing, enamel, composition and finish of metals, air gaps, and vacuum breakers, even though some plumbing fixtures specified in this section are not described in WW-P-541.

2. Provide materials which have been selected for their surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed surfaces which exhibit pitting seam marks, roller marks, foundry sand holes, stains, discoloration, or other surface imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.

3. Where fittings, trim and accessories are exposed or semi-exposed provide bright chrome-plated or polished stainless steel units. Provide copper or brass where not exposed.

4. Stainless Steel Sheets: ASTM A 167, Type 302/304, hardest workable temper.a. Finish: No. 4, bright, directional polish on exposed surfaces.

5. Vitreous China: High quality, free from fire cracks, spots, blisters, pinholes and specks; glaze exposed surfaces, and test for crazing resistance in accordance with ASTM C 554.

6. Fiberglass: ANSI Z124, smooth surfaced, with color selected by Architect/Engineer.

2.04 PLUMBING FITTINGS, TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Water Outlets: At locations where water is supplied by manual, automatic or remote control, provide commercial quality faucets, valves, or dispensing devices, of type and size indicated, and as required to operate as indicated. Include manual shutoff valves and connecting stem pipes to permit outlet servicing without shut-down of water supply piping systems.1. Vacuum Breakers: Provide with flush valves where required by governing regulations,

including locations where water outlets are equipped for hose attachment.

B. P-Traps: Include removable, 17 gauge cast brass with chrome plated P-traps with brass nuts and cleanout, where drains are indicated for direct connection to drainage system.

C. Carriers: Provide cast-iron supports for fixtures of either graphitic gray iron, ductile iron, or malleable iron.

D. Fixture Bolt Caps: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fixture bolt caps finished to match fixture finish.

E. Escutcheons: Where fixture supplies and drains penetrate walls in exposed locations, provide chrome-plated cast-brass escutcheons with set screw.

F. Aerators: Provide aerators of types approved by Health Departments having jurisdiction.

G. Comply with additional fixture requirements contained in fixture schedule.

H. Faucet/trim shall meet ANSI 117.1 Section 4.20.4.

I. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Plumbing Fixtures (Vitreous China):

a. American Standard; U.S. Plumbing Products.b. Totoc. Kohler Co.

2. Lavatory Trim:a. Symmons.

3. Sink Trim:a. Chicago.b. Kohler.

4. Flush Valves:a. Sloan Valve Co.



5. Fixture Seats:a. Bemis Mfg. Co.b. Beneke Corp.c. Church Products.d. Olsonite Corp.; Olsonite Seats.

6. Electric Water Coolers:a. Halsey Taylor Div.b. Haws Drinking Faucet Co.

7. Mop Basin (Molded Stone):a. Fiat Co.b. Florestone.

8. Stainless Steel Sinks:a. Elkay Mfg. Co.b. Just Mfg. Co.

9. Fixture Carriers:a. Josam Mfg. Co.b. Smith Co.c. Tyler-Wade.d. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which piping systems are to be installed. Verify actual locations of equipment, fixtures and/or piping connections prior to installation. Also examine floors and substrates, and conditions under which work is to be accomplished. Correct any incorrect locations of piping, and other unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR WATER PIPING

A. Install piping level with no pitch.

B. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and servicing of valves.

C. Refer to Section 22 05 00 for hanger and support requirements.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDENSATE PIPING

A. Route piping to closest open waste receptacle (i.e. floor drain, floor sink, mop service basin) or to roof drain or on to roof or grade per Local Code. If on to grade, do not discharge over walkway.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Install backflow preventers where indicated, and where required by governing authority having jurisdiction. Locate in same room as equipment being protected. Pipe relief outlet to nearest floor drain.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND SANITARY DRAIN PIPING WITHIN BUILDING

A. General: Install underground building drains as indicated and in accordance with Local and International Plumbing Code. Lay underground building drains beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of



piping facing upstream. Install required gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements. Clean interior of piping of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops.

B. All soil and waste piping: Shall be run at a slope of not less 1/4" per foot (2.08%) for piping up to 4" in size. All piping 4" and over shall be run at a slope of not less than 1/8" (1.04%) per footunless noted otherwise on Drawings.

C. Cast-iron Pipe: Install in accordance with applicable provisions of CISPI "Cast Iron Soil Pipe & Fittings Handbook".

3.06 INSTALLATION OF ABOVE GROUND STORM AND SANITARY DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT PIPING WITHIN BUILDING

A. General: Install all piping, as indicated and in accordance with the International Plumbing Code.

B. Provide restraints and hangers as appropriate and in accordance with manufacturers recommendations based upon type of pipe, fittings, joints. Refer to Section 22 05 00.

C. Piping shall be run true, plumb, and straight, with all restraints and hangers adjusted to carry their proportional load and locked to prevent pipe "wag", misalignment, movement or shear.

D. Provide anchors for piping risers on every floor using riser clamps, wall brackets, knee brackets, and foot blocks for all vertical piping over 20 feet straight height.

E. All soil and waste piping shall be run at a slope of not less than 1/4" per foot (2.08%) for piping up to 4" in size. All piping 4" and over shall be run at a slope of not less than 1/8" (1.04%) per foot unless noted otherwise on Drawings. All storm drain piping shall be run at slopes indicated on the drawings.

F. Bushings in soil waste or vent piping shall be prohibited. Tapped spigots or tees shall be used when changing from cast iron pipe to DWV waste or vent piping, and for appropriate cleanout plugs.

G. All horizontal storm soil, waste and vent piping shall be supported from the building structure at not more than five (5) foot intervals. Cast iron no-hub pipe and fittings shall be supported within one foot of each side of couplings. All vertical storm soil and vent stacks shall be supported with riser clamps at each floor slab.

H. The waste connections between fixtures and their respective collection and venting systems shall consist of DWV nipples and drainage fittings.

I. All interior waste and vent piping up to 1 1/2" shall consist of DWV copper with drainage fittings. All piping 2" and over shall consist of service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings.

J. All cast iron pipe and fittings shall have affixed thereon the CISPI grade mark of identification.

K. All vents protruding through the roof shall be not less than 3" size and extended to not less than 12" above the finished roof, and flashed with 24" x 24" x 4 lb. sheet lead. The flashing shall extend not less than 6" above the roof and the edges turned down into a hub type cast iron vent pipe, caulked in place and finished with hot poured lead or per roof membrane manufacturer’s requirements.



L. All vents shall be located in accordance with jurisdictional code and in no case less than two (2) feet from roof edge or parapet, or wall line of an "on the roof structure".

M. Provide all expansion joints, braces, earthquake restraints as required by the contract documents and jurisdictional authority.

N. Provide heavy duty couplings on cast-iron no-hub drainage piping above[ nursery,][ computer rooms][ and base of waste stack more than five (5) stories in height].

3.07 INSTALLATION OF DRAINAGE PIPING PRODUCTS

A. Cleanouts: Install in above ground piping and building drain piping as indicated, as required by Local and International Plumbing Code; and at each change in direction of piping greater that 45 degrees; at minimum intervals of 50'; and at base of each vertical soil or waste stack. Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping. Wall cleanouts shall be installed at a maximum height of 1'-6" above finished floor unless otherwise indicated or directed on the plans. Do not locate at edges of tile fields.

3.08 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DRAINS

A. General: Install floor drains in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in locations indicated.

B. Coordinate flashing work with work of waterproofing and adjoining substrate work.

C. Cover all drain strainers during building construction with heavyduty tape similar to duct tape.

D. Install drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set tops of drains flush with finished floor.

E. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.

F. Provide flashing (safepan) for each floor drain above grade, 24"x24" in size.

3.09 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide soil and waste piping runouts to plumbing fixtures and drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated; but in no case smaller than required by Local and International Plumbing Code.

B. Locate piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains.

C. Upon completion of installations, flush all traps and fill with water.

3.10 INSTALLATION OF ROOF DRAINS

A. General: Install roof drains in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in locations indicated.

B. Coordinate flashing work with work of roofing, water-proofing and adjoining substrate work.

C. Provide flashing (safe pan) for each roof drain, 36" x 36" in size.

D. Coordinate with roofing as necessary to interface roof drains with roofing work.



E. Install roof drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated.

F. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between roof drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.

G. Position roof drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain.

H. During application of roofing, plug all roof drains with test plugs, remove plugs after roofing has cured.

I. Securely lock roof drain domes in place upon completion of construction.

3.11 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. General: Install plumbing fixtures of types indicated where shown and at indicated heights; in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, roughing-in drawings, and with recognized industry practices. Ensure that plumbing fixtures comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. Comply with applicable requirements of governing authority having jurisdiction pertaining to installation of plumbing fixtures.

B. Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to indicated supports or building structure; and ensure that fixtures are level and plumb. Secure plumbing supplies behind or within wall construction so as to be rigid, and not subject to pull or push movement.

C. Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period.

3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR FIXTURES

A. Upon completion of installation of plumbing fixtures and after units are water pressurized, test fixtures to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. When possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and proceed with retesting.

B. Inspect each installed unit for damage to finish. If feasible, restore and match finish to original at site; otherwise, remove fixture and replace with new unit. Feasibility and match to be judged by Architect/Engineer. Remove cracked or dented units and replace with new units.

3.13 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING OF FIXTURES

A. Clean plumbing fixtures, trim, and strainers of dirt and debris upon completion of installation.

B. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, faucets, shower valves, and flush valves to provide proper flow stream and specified gpm.

C. Adjust or replace washers to prevent leaks at faucets and stops.

D. Transport, coordinate, and obtain as required per notes on Drawings.

3.14 INSTALLATION OF NATURAL GAS PIPING

A. Use sealants on metal gas piping threads which are chemically resistant to natural gas. Use sealants sparingly, and apply to only male threads of metal joints.

B. Remove cutting and threading burrs before assembling piping.



C. Do not install defective piping or fittings. Do not use pipe with threads which are chipped, stripped or damaged.

D. Plug each gas outlet, including valves, with threaded plug or cap immediately after installation and retain until continuing piping, or equipment connections are completed.

E. Ground gas piping electrically and continuously within project, and bond tightly to grounding connection.

F. Install drip-legs in gas piping where indicated, and where required by code or regulation.

G. Install "Tee" fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped, at bottom of pipe risers.

H. Use dielectric unions where dissimilar metals are joined together.

I. Install piping with 1/64" per foot (1/8%) downward slope in direction of flow.

J. Install piping parallel to other piping, but maintain minimum of 12" clearance between gas piping and steam or hydronic piping above 200°F (93°C).

K. Refer to Section 22 05 00 for hanger and support requirements.

3.15 GAS SERVICE

A. General: Arrange with Utility Company to provide gas service to building including gas meter, regulator, service shut-off valve, and gas load within 30 days after award of contract. Consult with Utility as to extent of its work, costs, fees and permits involved. Pay such costs and fees; obtain permits. Costs for actual installation of service and setting of meter by the utility company shall be paid by the owner. Coordinate size of concrete pad or wall brackets for utility company to set meter.


A. Gas Cocks: Provide at connection to gas train for each gas-fired equipment item; and on risers and branches where indicated.

B. Locate gas cocks where easily accessible, and where they will be protected from possible injury.

C. Pressure Regulating Valves: Install as indicated; comply with Utility requirements. Pipe atmospheric vent to outdoors, full size of outlet. Install gas shutoff valve upstream of each pressure regulating valve.

D. Verify venting requirements for pressure regulating valves in factory installed or factory supplied valve trains. Extend atmospheric vent to outdoors, full size of vent outlet when equipment is controlled by spark ignition. When equipment has standing pilot, pipe regulator vent(s) to combustion chamber. Verify regulator venting requirements with local authority prior to installation.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLSValdez Elementary GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTSOZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 23 00 00 - 1

SECTION 23 00 00

GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements, and applicable provisions elsewhere in the Contract Documents apply to work ofDivision 23.

B. In case of disagreement between Drawings and Specifications, or within either document itself, obtain written clarification from the Mechanical Engineer through the Architect. Failure to obtain clarification prior to bid will result in the better quality and greater quantity being required during the construction phase without additional reimbursement.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS

A. The related work of Division 23 includes but is not limited to:1. Section 23 00 00 – General Mechanical Requirements.2. Section 23 00 10 – Mechanical Related Work.3. Section 23 05 00 – HVAC Pipe, Valves and Pipe Specialties.4. Section 23 05 48 – HVAC Vibration Control.5. Section 23 05 53 – Mechanical Identification.6. Section 23 05 93 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.7. Section 23 07 00 – Mechanical Insulation.8. Section 23 09 23 – Temperature Control Systems – DDC.9. Section 23 09 30 – IBAS10. Section 23 21 00 – HVAC Hydronic Systems.11. Section 23 30 00 – Air Distribution.12. Section 23 73 00 – Mechanical Rooftop Units


A. Work Included: Unless specified otherwise, provide all supervision, labor, materials, transportation, equipment, hauling, and services necessary for a complete and operational mechanical system. Provide all incidental items such as offsets, fittings, etc. required as part of the work even though not specifically shown on Contract Drawings or Specifications.

B. Inspection: Inspect work proceeding or interfacing with work of Division 23 sections prior to submitting bid and report any known or observed defects that affect the Mechanical Design to the General Contractor. Do not proceed with the construction work until defects are corrected.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. General:1. For products or workmanship specified by Association, Trade or Federal Standards, comply

with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

2. The date of the standard is that which is in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, except when a specific date is specified.



1.05 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Materials and apparatus required for the work shall be new and of first-class quality; to be furnished, delivered, erected, connected and finished in every detail; and to be so selected and arranged so as to fit properly into the building spaces.

B. Unless otherwise specifically indicated, equipment and materials shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. This includes the performance of tests as recommended by the manufacturer.

1.06 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. The Mechanical Drawings show the general arrangement of piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, and appurtenances, and shall be followed as closely as actual building construction and the work of other trades will permit.

B. The Architectural and Structural Drawings shall be considered part of the mechanical work insofar as these Drawings furnish this Division with information relating to design and construction of the building.

C. Field verify building dimensions governing mechanical work. Do not scale the Mechanical Drawings for dimensions. If field dimensions are not available take dimensions, measurements, locations, levels, etc. from the Architectural Drawings and the approved Shop Drawings submitted on the actual equipment to be furnished.

D. The Mechanical Contractor shall request of the Test and Balance (TAB) Contractor an early review of the Contract Documents for the purpose of identifying where proper balancing cannot be achieved. The report requirements are referred to in Division 23, 23 05 93, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing, “Submittals.” Forward a copy of the report to the mechanical engineer for review. The Mechanical Contractor shall modify the system as recommended by the TAB Contractor or refer unresolved issues to the Mechanical Engineer for resolution prior to ordering of ductwork and equipment. Unresolved balancing issues from untimely or incomplete application of these requirements will be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor to correct.

E. No extra compensation shall be claimed or allowed due to differences between the actual dimensions and those indicated on the Drawings.

F. Discrepancies: Examine Drawings and Specifications for other parts of the work, and if any discrepancies occur between the plans for the work of this Division and the plans for the work of others, report such discrepancies to the General Contractor and obtain written instructions for any changes necessary. Report any inconsistencies between the drawings and specifications and the installation requirements of equipment manufacturers.

G. Order of Precedence: The precedence of Mechanical Construction Documents is as follows:1. Addenda and modifications to the Drawings and Specifications take precedence over the

original Drawings and Specifications.2. Should there be a conflict within the Specifications or within Drawings of the same scale, the

more stringent or higher quality requirements shall apply.3. In the Drawings, the precedence shall be figured dimensions over scaled dimensions and

noted materials over graphic indications.4. Should a conflict arise between the Drawings and the Specifications the most stringent shall

have precedence.5. Should there be a conflict in dimensions or locations between Mechanical Drawings and/or

Architectural/Structural Drawings, the Architectural/Structural Drawings shall have precedence.



1.07 EXAMINATION OF PROJECT SITE

A. Examine site carefully to determine conditions to be encountered, work to be performed, equipment, materials to be transported, stored, furnished, and other features applicable tocompletion of the work.

B. Study Drawings and Specifications, report inconsistencies, errors, omissions or conflicts with codes and ordinances.

C. Submittal of bid will indicate satisfactory examination of the Documents have been made, and applicable allowances included in the bid.

1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to Architectural Drawings and Division 01 specifications for a list of applicable codes.

B. Execute work per Underwriters, Public Utility, Local and State Codes, Ordinances and applicable regulations. Obtain and pay for required permits, inspections, and certificates. Notify Architect of items not meeting said requirements.

C. Comply with latest editions of all applicable codes, standards, ordinances and regulations in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents.

D. If discrepancies occur between the Contract Documents and any applicable codes, ordinances, acts, or standards, the most stringent requirements shall apply.

E. Where hourly fire and smoke ratings are indicated or required, whether or not shown, provide components and assemblies meeting requirements of the American Insurance Association, Factory Mutual Insurance Association and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

1.09 COORDINATION

A. The Contractor shall plan all of his work in advance, and shall inform the General Contractor of the proposed construction schedule and anticipated completion date upon request. Contractor shall complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the remaining building construction will permit.

B. Before purchase, fabrication, or installation of items, determine if the installation will properly fit and can be installed as contemplated without interference with structural elements or the work of other trades.

C. Locations of pipes, ducts, switches, panels, equipment, and fixtures, shall be adjusted to accommodate the work or interferences anticipated and encountered. Determine the exact route and location of each pipe and duct prior to fabrication.

D. Right of Way: Lines which pitch shall have the right-of-way over those which do not pitch. Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have right-of-way over lines whose elevations can be changed.

E. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction of pipes and ducts shall be made as required to maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the Drawings.

F. Where major conflicts occur, contractor shall rely upon the Architect/Engineer to make final decision regarding priority of right-of-way. Contractor shall request written clarification from the



Architect/Engineer prior to conflict reaching critical stage requiring removal of previously installed equipment or system components either by himself or by other trades involved.

G. When directed by the Architect/Engineer, submit Shop Drawings showing interrelationship of various portions of work and work of other trades. Failure to properly coordinate may result in removal and relocation at expense to the Contractor.

H. Coordination Drawings for Acoustical and Drywall Ceilings, Plumbing, Fire Protection, HVAC and Electrical:1. Coordination Drawings are required for the trades noted above. The HVAC contractor shall

prepare reproducible Coordination Layout and Installation Drawings (at least ¼” scale or as approved by the Architect) for resolution of interferences and conflicts with other trades.

2. The Plumbing, Fire Protection and Electrical Contractors, as well as acoustical and drywall ceiling contractors, are required to superimpose their Shop Drawings on the HVAC Drawings and verify layout and elevations to eliminate conflicts. Any conflicts shall be highlighted and these Drawings shall be forwarded to the Architect for resolution. Priority shall be given to “gravity” systems above the ceiling. Each trade shall initial acknowledgement that the proceeding has been completed. No fabrication of ductwork, fire protection, or other prefabricated systems shall begin until these Coordination Drawings have been completed and reviewed by the General Contractor and Architect/Engineers. Any Subcontractor that fabricates and installs items above the ceiling before the Coordinated Drawings are reviewed and conflicts resolved shall do so at their own risk, and be responsible to relocate said equipment in the event conflicts arise, at no cost to the Owner.

3. Duct layout on coordination drawings shall include duct size, length, fittings, and pressure class for each duct.

4. Additionally, all trades shall show the proposed location of access panels (for maintenance) in “hard” ceilings for access to HVAC boxes, control valves, fire damper motors, plumbing valves, fire protection drains, valves, light fixture remote ballasts, ceiling hung equipment, etc., for coordination with the reflected ceiling plans. Indicate on same Drawings the location of access panels in walls as well as location of plumbing cleanouts.

5. Upon Architect/Engineer completion of the review of the Coordination Drawings, the Design Team, General Contractor and Subcontractors shall conduct a pre-installation coordination meeting for all “fit-up” above ceilings. No ceiling shall be lowered without the expressed approval of the Owner and the Architect.

I. Coordinate all electrical work with Electrical Contractor. Read the Electrical Specification and report any inconsistencies. See “Electrical Wiring and Safety Device Work and Material Responsibilities” in this section.

J. Coordinate all cutting & patching with General Contractor.

K. Utility Interruptions: Coordinate mechanical utility interruptions with the Owner and the Utility Company. Plan work so that duration of the interruption is kept to a minimum.


A. Accessibility:1. Contractor shall be responsible for the sufficiency of the size of shafts and chases and the

adequate clearance in double partitions and hung ceilings for proper installation of work. Coordinate these requirements with the General Contractor. Such spaces and clearances shall be kept to the minimum size required.

2. Locate all equipment which must be serviced, operated, or maintained in fully accessible positions. Furnish access doors for this purpose. Minor deviations from Drawings may be allowed to provide for better accessibility. Any changes shall be approved by the Architect prior to making the change.



3. Provide the General Contractor with the exact locations of access doors. Locations of these doors shall be submitted in sufficient time to be installed in the normal course of work.

4. Demonstration of access will be required prior to project completion. The contractor is responsible for providing reasonable and safe access for all system components. Contractor to arrange with an Owner’s Representative a time for the demonstration prior to final punchlist.

B. Fabrication: Before any ductwork is fabricated and before installing and/or fabricating any lines of piping or ductwork the Contractor shall assure himself that they can be run as contemplated in cooperation with Contractors of other Divisions of the Work and the physical constraints of the Structural and Architectural Work.

C. Freeze Protection: Do not run pipes in outside walls, or locations where freezing may occur. Piping next to outside walls shall be in furred spaces with insulation between the piping and the outside wall. Insulation of piping shall not be considered freeze protection.

D. Scaffolding, Rigging and Hoisting: Provide scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection and delivery into the premises of any equipment and apparatus furnished. Remove same from premises when no longer required.

1.11 SUBMITTALS:

A. Within thirty days after award of the Contract, submit to Architect complete catalog data and/or Shop Drawings for each item of material and for every manufactured item of equipment to be used in the work. Such data shall include specific performance data, material description, rating, capacity, dimensions, and type for each item of material, each manufactured item, and all component parts utilized in final operating mechanical system. Applicable data shall be underlined and each applicable item identified in each catalog by the same identification acronyms used on the Drawings.

B. Seismic Restraint Plan1. The contractor shall provide a vibration and seismic restraint plan for projects designated a

Seismic Design Category C (with a seismic importance factor greater than 1.0), D, E, or F as found on the structural drawings. The plan shall include stamped and signed drawings for the state in which the project is located, details, equipment cutsheets, and analysis from one of the acceptable equipment manufacturers listed below for the entire project scope. The contractor will provide the selected equipment manufacturer with a copy of the drawings, specifications, soils reports and any other pertinent information necessary to perform the vibration and seismic restraint analysis per pertinent codes.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers:a. Mason Industries, Inc.b. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.c. M. W. Sausse & Co., Inc.d. Amber/ Booth, a VMC Company

C. This Contractor shall submit to the Architect the number of copies required by the General and Special Conditions of Division 01, but in no case less than four (4) copies.

D. Each item submitted shall bear the Contractor's stamp, be dated and signed certifying that he has reviewed and approved the Submittal.

E. For each item scheduled on the Drawings, submit a replication of that schedule indicating actual data of the submitted equipment in the schedule.

F. The review comments of the Architect and/or Engineer do not in any case supersede the Drawings and Specifications, and shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations



from the Drawings or Specifications unless the Contractor has called to the attention of the Architect and/or Engineer, in writing, such deviations at the time of submission, nor shall it relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors of any sort in the items submitted.

G. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports as required by various Sections of Division 23 showing compliance in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract.

H. Deviations: It is the contractor’s responsibility to indicate deviations from the Plans and Specifications. Approval shall not be considered acceptance of the deviation unless it has been explicitly indicated.

1.12 SITE OBSERVATION REPORTS

A. During the construction period the Engineer may issue periodic site observation reports. The contractor shall immediately address the issues and provide a written response identifying the “Responsible Contractor,” “Date,” “Corrective Action Taken,” and “Recommendations.”

B. The written response must be returned to the Architect no later than (5) working days after receipt of the site observation report.


A. Substitutions: Comply with Division 01 & Instructions to Bidders.

B. Contractors desiring to use alternate equipment or materials and manufacturers or suppliers desiring to furnish alternate materials or equipment in lieu of those specified, shall submit requests for approval to the Engineer not less than seven (7) calendar days prior to scheduled closing date for receipt of proposals.

C. Materials and equipment are specified by manufacturer and catalog numbers. The manufacturers and catalog numbers are used to establish a degree of quality and style for such equipment and material.

D. When alternate or substitute materials and equipment are used, Contractor will be responsible for space requirement, configurations, performance, changes in bases, supports, structural members and openings in structure, electrical changes and other apparatus and trades that may be affected by their use. Contractor shall provide drawings for alternate/substitute equipment in detail equal to the construction documents.

1.14 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. General: Comply with Division 01.

B. Job Site Documents: Maintain at the job site, one record copy of the following:1. Drawings2. Specifications3. Addenda4. Reviewed Shop Drawings5. Field Test Records

C. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Maintain documents in clean, dry legible condition, apart from documents used for construction.

D. Record Information: Label each document "Record Document." Mark information with contrasting color using ink. Keep each record current. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information is recorded. Record the following information on drawings:



1. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities.2. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction.3. Field changes of dimension and detail.4. Changes by change order or field order.5. Details not on original Contract Drawings.

E. Contractor shall transfer all information on to CAD files. Provide electronic copy upon request.

F. Record the following information on Specifications:1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product and item of

equipment actually installed.2. Changes by change order or field order.3. Other matters not originally specified.

G. Shop Drawings: Maintain Shop Drawings as record documents recording changes made after review as specified for drawings above.

1.15 ELECTRIC WIRING AND SAFETY DEVICE WORK AND MATERIAL RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Unless otherwise indicated, all mechanical equipment motors and controls shall be furnished, set in place, and wired in accordance with the following schedule: MD = Mechanical Division, ED = Electrical Division, TD = Temperature Control Division, I = Installer of equipment requiring electrical service.

B. Note: If Temperature Control Division is a subcontract to the Mechanical Contractor, both MD and TD shall fall under the responsibility of MD. If no Temperature Control Contractor is under contract, Mechanical Division shall assume all Temperature Control responsibilities.

Furnished Under




1. Other Equipment Motors/Starters I I ED I2. Mechanical Equipment Motors MD MD ED TD3. Mechanical Magnetic Motor

Starters, VFD’sMD MD ED TD

4. Control Wiring Regardless of Voltage


TD

5. Control Components: Control Relays, Thermostats, Control Transformers, EP, PE Switches


TD

6. Temperature Control Panels, Time Clocks, Controllers


TD

7. Valve and Damper Motors and Actuators


TD

8. Control Valves, Solenoid Valves TD MD -- TD9. Control Dampers Integral with a Fan

UnitMD MD -- --

10. Control Dampers (duct mounted) TD MD -- TD11. Thermowells in Piping TD MD -- --12. Smoke Duct Detectors (including

relays)ED See footnote 3

MD See footnote 3

ED See footnote 4

EDSee footnote 3

13. Fire and Smoke Dampers MD MD ED EDSee footnote 2

14. Pushbutton Stations and Pilot Lights MD MD ED TDSee footnote 4

15. Manual Operating Switches MD MD ED --See footnote 5

16. Multi-speed Switches (not integral with Equipment served)

MD MD ED --See footnote 5



Furnished Under




17. Fused and Unfused Disconnect Switches & Thermal Overload Switches

EDSee footnote 6

EDSee footnote 6

ED --

18. Contactors ED ED ED ED19. Temporary Heating Connection MD MD ED TD20. Boiler Controls, Boiler Burner

Control Panels Internally WiredMD MD TD

See footnote 1TD

21. Remote Disconnect Switches for Boiler (Heating & Domestic HW)Controls per ASME-CSD-1.

TD TDSee footnote 7

EDSee footnote 8

TD

1. Footnote 1: It is the intention of this specification for all conduit and wiring which connects to control equipment or provides controls to mechanical equipment to be provided by the Temperature Control Contractor. Other portions of the specification which may be in conflict with this concept shall be brought to the attention of the engineer for clarification prior to bidding the project. The ED shall provide line voltage wiring conduit and junction boxes for the express purpose of temperature controls. It shall be the responsibility of the Temperature Control Contractor to coordinate the location of the junction boxes (if not otherwise shown on the Electrical Drawings) and to utilize these junction boxes for temperature control wiring. The Temperature Control Contractor shall extend line and/or low voltage wiring from junction boxes to all mechanical and control components which require control wiring.

2. Footnote 2: Wiring from the fire alarm electrical contacts to fire alarm system control panel by ED; all mechanical equipment control function wiring by TD. ED to coordinate locations of electrical contact with MD. MD to coordinate locations of duct smoke detectors with ED.

3. Footnote 3: MD shall assist in locating the detectors, but ED shall verify that the installation meets the manufacturer’s installation guidelines, and is responsible for correctly ordering the smoke detectors. MD shall mount the detectors in a manner directed by ED according to manufacturer’s recommendation. If the detector is used for operation of a smoke/fire damper, the control wiring will be by ED. If the unit is used for fan shutdown, the fire alarm functions will be by ED and the wiring to the starter for a direct shutdown will be by MD, typically by the TD. Any signal required for the sequence of operation shall be coordinated between MD and ED, with ED providing a point of connection and MD responsible for the rest of the installation.

4. Footnote 4: For connection to auxiliary contacts if required.5. Footnote 5: Device is used in the power wiring circuit to the equipment. Control functions do

not exist.6. Footnote 6: Unless furnished with equipment.7. Footnote 7: A manually operated remote shutdown switch(es) shall be located just outside

the boiler room door(s) and marked for easy identification. Consideration should be given to the type and location of the switch to safeguard against tampering. If the boiler room door is on the building exterior, the switch should be located just inside the door. If there is more than one door to the boiler room, there should be a switch located at each door. The emergency shutdown switch shall be wired to the boiler safety circuit relay and shall disconnect all power to the boiler safety circuit. Use explosion proof switches at indoor switch locations.

8. Footnote 8: ED shall provide a separate 120 volt branch circuit and a junction box at each boiler room door. Junction box location shall be as indicated on Mechanical Drawings and shall be coordinated with TD prior to installation.

C. All temperature control conduit and wiring will be furnished and installed under temperature control subcontract. In the event that temperature control is not under separate contract, Mechanical Contractor shall assume all temperature control subcontract responsibilities.



D. Division 26 shall furnish and install all conduit and wiring required for power wiring carrying equipment full load amperage to all mechanical equipment unless shown otherwise.

E. Provide Division 26 with a complete summary list of all mechanical equipment and line voltage control requiring electric power within 30 days after award of contract. This list shall summarize equipment power loads, line voltage control requirements, quantities, and locations of equipment and connection points. If any HVAC equipment is required to run on emergency power, the list shall note that requirement along with the requirement for the building temperature controls systems to also be under emergency power.

F. All starters shall be furnished under Division 23.


A. Deliver and store materials and equipment in manufacturer's unopened containers fully identified with manufacturer's name, trade name, type, class, grade, size and color.

B. Protection: Make provisions for coordination with Owner and other Contractors for safe storage of materials and equipment. Store materials and equipment off the ground and under cover, protected from damage.

C. All items subject to moisture damage, such as controls, shall be stored in a dry, heated space.

D. Large Items: Make arrangements with other Contractors on the job for introduction into the building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings. Schedule delivery of large equipment requiring special openings as required for installation without delaying the work of other project trades.

E. Acceptance: Check and sign for materials to be furnished by Division 23 and other trades for installation under Division 23 upon delivery. Assume responsibility for the storage and safekeeping of such materials from time of delivery until final acceptance.

F. Inspection: Stored material shall be readily accessible for inspection by the Architect until installed.

1.17 WARRANTIES

A. Warranty: In accordance with Division 01, provide a written warranty to the Owner covering the entire mechanical work to be free from defective materials, equipment and workmanship. If the warranty period is not defined in Division 01, the minimum warranty period will be for a period of two years after Date of Acceptance. Purchase of manufacturer’s extended warranty may be required to comply with the warranty period requirement. During this period provide labor and materials as required to repair or replace defects at no additional cost to the Owner. Provide certificates for such items of equipment which have warranties in excess of two years. Submit to the General Contractor.

B. This warranty will be in addition to the terms of any specific equipment warranties or warranty modifications resulting from use of equipment for temporary heat or ventilation.

1.18 SCHEDULE OF TESTING

A. Provide testing in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract. Make all specified tests on piping, ductwork and related systems as necessary. Demonstrate the proper operation of equipment installed under this project.



B. Equipment shall not be tested, or operated for any purpose until fully lubricated in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and until connections to fully operative systems have been accomplished.

C. A schedule of testing shall be drawn up by the Division 23 Contractor in such a manner that it will show areas tested, test pressure, length of test, date, time and signature of testing personnel. All testing must be performed in the presence of the General Contractor's representative; his signature for verification of the test must appear on the schedule. At completion of testing, the schedule shall then be submitted in triplicate to the Architect.

D. Make sure operational and performance tests are made on seasonal equipment.

E. Complete all tests required by Code Authorities, such as smoke detection, life safety, fire protection and health codes.

1.19 DEMONSTRATION OF ACCESS

A. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner’s designated representative the access to all switches, valves, actuators, dampers, motors, lubrication lines, sensors and panels. Contractor shall correct deficiencies noted by the Owner. Refer outstanding issues to the Architect/Engineer for resolution. Contractor to be responsible for arranging the demonstration prior to final inspection.

1.20 CERTIFICATES AND KEYS

A. Certificates: Upon completion of the work, deliver to the General Contractor one copy of Certificate of Final Inspection.

B. Keys: Upon completion of work, submit keys for mechanical equipment, panels, etc. to the General Contractor.

1.21 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Include the following information in addition to operation and maintenance information required by Division 1 standards and other Division 23 standards.

B. Submit three (3) typed and bound copies of the maintenance manual, 8-1/2" x 11" in size, to the Architect, for review and approval. These approved copies shall then be transmitted to the Owner. Verify quantity requirement with Div. 1 standards.

C. The manual shall be enclosed in a stiff-back, three-ring binder and shall have:1. Table of Contents, Equipment List with identification used in contract documents.2. Alphabetical list of all system components including the name, address, and 24-hour phone

number of the company responsible for servicing each item during the first year of operation.3. Operating instructions for complete system, including procedures for fire or failure of major

equipment and procedures for normal starting/operating/shutdown and long-term shutdown.4. Maintenance instructions, including valves, valve tag and other identified equipment lists,

proper lubricants and lubricating instructions for each piece of equipment and necessary cleaning/replacing/adjusting schedules.

5. Manufacturer's data on each piece of equipment, including:a. Installation instructions.b. Drawings and Specifications (approved Shop Drawings).c. Parts lists.d. Complete wiring and temperature control diagrams. (Approved Shop Drawings).e. Completed and approved TAB report.



6. In addition to the "Operation and Maintenance Manual", and keyed to it, equipment shall be identified and tagged as specified in Section 23 05 53 - Mechanical Identification including the following: a. Identify starters, disconnect switches, and manually operated controls, except integral

equipment switches with permanently applied, legible markers corresponding to operating instructions in the "Operation and Maintenance Manual".

b. Tag manual operating valves with 1-1/2" diameter brass tags attached with chains. Tags shall be sequence numbered with legible metal stamps.

c. Provide a typed tag list or schedule mounted under glass in the Equipment Room stating number, location, and function of each tagged item. Insert a copy of tag list in each "Operation and Maintenance Manual."

1.22 INSTRUCTIONAL SESSIONS

A. Be responsible for scheduling instructional meetings for maintenance personnel on the proper operation and maintenance of all mechanical systems, using the maintenance manual as a guide. These meetings must be scheduled through the Architect or General Contractor and with enough advanced notice that all personnel can be notified. Provide (2) 8 hour sessions.

B. Video tape instructional sessions for the Owner’s future use.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLSValdez Elementary MECHANICAL RELATED WORKOZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 23 00 10 - 1

SECTION 23 00 10

MECHANICAL RELATED WORK

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.


A. Types of mechanical related work specified in this section include the following:1. Motors.2. Starters.3. Access Doors.4. Variable Frequency Drives.5. Temporary Heat.6. Cutting and Patching.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MOTORS

A. Motor Characteristics: Except where more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with the following requirements for motors of mechanical work:1. Temperature Rating: Rated for 104°F (40°C) environment with maximum 122°F (50°C)

temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class A Insulation).2. Altitude Deration: Motors to be furnished to maintain specified rated service factor at altitude

of project.3. Starting Capability: Provide each motor capable of making starts as frequently as indicated

by automatic control system, and not less than 5 starts per hour for manually controlled motors.

4. Phases and Current Characteristics: Provide squirrel-cage induction polyphase motors for 3/4 hp and larger. Provide capacitor-start single-phase motors for 1/2 hp and smaller; except 1/6 hp and smaller may, at equipment manufacturer's option, be split-phase type. Coordinate current characteristics with power specified in Division 26 sections and with individual equipment requirements specified in other Division 23 requirements. For 2-speed motors provide 2 separate windings on polyphase motors. Do not purchase motors until power characteristics available at locations of motors have been confirmed, and until rotation directions have been confirmed.

5. Power Factor: All motors rated greater than 5 hp shall have a Power Factor of not less than 95% under rated load conditions. The 95% PF may be obtained by design of the motor or by providing a capacitor. Capacitors, if provided to obtain the 95% PF, must be switched with the motor.

6. Efficiency: 1-1/2 HP and larger: shall meet the efficiency ratings of the latest NEMA Premium efficiency rating per IEEE Test Procedure 112A, Method B.

7. Service Factor: 1.15 for three-phase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.8. RPM: Motors shall be a maximum of 1750 RPM unless special application as indicated on

drawings.



B. Motor Construction: Provide general purpose, continuous duty motors, NEMA Design "B" or "C" where required for high starting torque. Provide inverter duty motors, for all variable speed motor applications and on all motors 7.5 hp and larger:1. Frames: NEMA No. 56.2. Bearings: Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals, regreasable except

permanently sealed where motor is normally inaccessible for regular maintenance. Provide double shielded ball bearings in accordance with ANSI-B 3.16-1972. Bearings shall be rated for an L-10 life of 20,000 hours.

3. Where belt drives and other drives produce lateral or axial thrust in motor, provide bearings designed to resist thrust loading. Refer to individual sections of Division 23 for fractional-hp light-duty motors where sleeve-type bearings are permitted.

4. Enclosure Type: Except as otherwise indicated, provide open drip-proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation, and provide guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants. Provide weather-protected Type I for outdoor use, Type II where not housed. Refer to individual sections of Division 23 for other enclosure requirements.

5. Overload Protection: Provide built-in thermal overload protection and, where indicated, provide internal sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping motor at starter.

6. Noise Rating: Provide "Quiet" rating on motors. Motors shall not exceed 80 DB at full speed and power.

7. Insulation: NEMA Class F.8. Altitude: Derate motors for an elevation of 5400 feet not utilizing service factor.9. Belt Drive Motors: 5 hp and larger provide dual push-pull adjustments screws for motor

mounts.

C. Name Plate: Provide metal nameplate on each motor, indicating full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, construction, special features and similar information.

D. Manufacturer: Except where item of mechanical equipment (which otherwise complies with requirements) must be integrally equipped with motor produced by another manufacturer, provide motors for mechanical equipment manufactured by one of the following:1. ABB2. Baldor Electric Co.3. General Electric Co.4. Louis Allis Div.; Litton Industrial Products, Inc.5. Reliance Electric Co.6. Gould7. Lincoln8. Toshiba9. TECO-Westinghouse

2.02 STARTERS

A. Motor Starter Characteristics: Comply with NEMA standards and NEC. Provide enclosures NEMA Type as required with padlock ears, and with frames and supports for mounting on wall, floor or panel as indicated. Where starter location is not within sight of motor, provide fused disconnect switch within sight of motor. Provide type and size of starter recommended by motor manufacturer and equipment manufacturer for applicable protection and start-up condition; refer to individual equipment sections for basic load requirements.1. Manual Switches: Provide manual switch and pilot light for motors 1/2 hp and smaller,

except where interlock or automatic operation is indicated. Provide extra switch positions and pilot lights for multi-speed motors.a. Overload Protection: Provide melting alloy type thermal overload relays.

2. Magnetic Starters: Provide magnetic starters for motors 3/4 hp and larger, and for smaller motors where interlock or automatic operation is indicated. Include the following:



a. Heavyduty oiltight type hand-off-auto switch and pilot lights, properly arranged for single-speed operation as indicated.

b. Trip-free thermal overload relays, each phase.c. Built-in 120-volt control circuit transformer, fused from line side and on secondary side.d. Control circuit conductors to be protected in accordance with Article 250-5, Exception 5,

of the National Electric Code.e. Externally operated manual reset.f. Undervoltage release or protection.g. Hand-off-auto switch.h. Single Phasing Protection: All starters shall include a phase protection relay mounted

and wired in the starter enclosure, equal to time-mark 257 series or motor saver model 201. Starters for motors 5 hp and less may meet this requirement either by supplying the phase protection relay as above, or by providing a current differential trip mechanism in the overload relay which advances the trip setting 25% or more under single phase conditions. Submittals must include documentation of the type of single phasing protection is used.

i. Provide spare normally open and normally closed contacts.j. With two speed starters, include an adjustable time delay device within starter

enclosure to allow the motor to come to a complete stop when switching from high to low speed. Two speed starters shall have heavyduty 4 position rotary switch, "auto-off-low-high".

B. Weather Protection: Provide weather-proof mounting of magnetic starters for equipment outside of the building.

C. Unless furnished otherwise, provide over current protection for each motor. Coordinate with Division 26.

D. Motor Starter Manufacturer: Provide motor starters for mechanical equipment manufactured by one of the following:1. ABB.2. Allen-Bradley Co.3. General Electric Co.4. Square D Co.5. Siemens6. Baldor

2.03 ACCESS DOORS

A. Furnish access doors where shown on Drawings and at all locations where required for access to concealed valves, shock absorbers, dampers, cleanouts, control devices, coils, and equipment servicing. Access doors shall be a minimum of 20” x 20” for hand access and 24” x 24” for head and shoulder access, or as indicated.

B. Standard Doors:1. Frames: 16 ga. steel.2. Panels: 14 ga. steel.3. Finish: Chemically bonded prime coat of baked enamel.4. Hinge: Concealed spring hinges openable to 175°; removable pins. Provide number of

hinges as recommended by manufacturer for size of door.5. Locking Devices: Flush steel, screw driver operated, cam type locks. All access doors below

8'-0" in public areas shall be key-operated cylinder lock with two keys.6. Style of doors shall be appropriate for architectural finish at door location. Furnish masonry

anchors where required.

C. Fire Rated Doors:



1. Frames: 16 gauge steel.2. Panels: Sandwich type, 20 gauge steel sheets, manufacturer's standard insulated core.3. Finish: Chemically bonded prime coat of baked enamel.4. Hinge: Continuous type, steel with stainless steel pin.5. Closer: Automatic closing mechanism.6. Locking Devices: Self latching, key-operated cylinder lock with two keys; interior, latch

release mechanism.7. Style of doors shall be appropriate for architectural finish at door location.8. Fire rated doors shall have components and assemblies meeting requirements of the

American Insurance Association, Factory Mutual Insurance Association and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Cesco.2. Karp Associates, Inc.3. Meadowcraft, Inc.4. Milcor Div; Inryco Inc.5. Nystrom, Inc.

2.04 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

A. Provide a variable-speed adjustable-frequency drive system, fully tested by the manufacturer before shipment. Start-up services shall be provided by the manufacturer at the installation site for inspection and adjustment. Submit a complete wiring diagram for approval by the Engineer.

B. Warranty: The drive system shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of 36 months from date of shipment.

C. Provide a NEMA 1, Adjustable Frequency Controller (AFC) as noted on the plans:1. The adjustable frequency controller shall be solid state type and performance matched to the

energy efficient motor.2. The adjustable frequency controller shall convert 480 or 208 volt, +10 to -5%, three phase,

A-C power for stepless motor control from 10% to 110% of base speed. All components shall mount within the adjustable frequency controller enclosure unless otherwise specified.

3. The AFC and components shall be UL listed. The AFC shall comply with the applicable requirements of the latest standards of ANSI, IEEE and the National Electric Code.

4. The AFC shall be designed and constructed to operate within the following service conditions:a. Elevation: to 5,300 Ft. without derating.b. Ambient Temperature Range: 32°F - 104°F (0° - 40° C).c. Atmosphere: non-condensing relative humidity to 95%.d. A-C Line Voltage Variation: 5% to 10%.e. A-C Line Frequency Variation: +2 Hz.f. Minimum efficiency of 97% at 100% speed and 100% torque.g. Displacement power factor: Minimum 98% over entire speed range.h. Power unit rating basis: 100% current continuous.i. Capacity overload 110% for one minute at 40 degrees C.

5. The AFC individual enclosures shall be NEMA 1 – Indoor Non-Hazardous or NEMA 3R –Outdoor Non-Hazardous, with hinged front door and line circuit breaker with double lugs and side openings for Cross Bus Cables. Cabinets shall be factory prewired and assembled.

6. Each AFC shall have the following basic features:a. On/Off switch.b. Auto/Manual switch.c. Speed selection.d. Hz controlled speed range.e. Auxiliary contacts for remote indication of AFC fault condition and on-off status.



f. Start-stop and speed selection with coast-to-rest standard or ramp-to-rest by jumper selection on "stop".

g. Input fuses or breakers.h. Insensitive to incoming power phase sequence.i. Acceleration/Deceleration control adjustable over range of 2 to 180 seconds by

separate ramps.j. Adjustable volts/hertz and adjustable voltage boost.k. Output frequency stabilized to +0.25% of set speed for +10% to -5% change in line

voltage or 59°F (15°C) change in ambient temperature.l. Three-phase output voltage regulated at +1% of rated voltage with +10% to -5%

variations in plant power.m. Automatic shutoff under output short circuit conditions or when load current can

damage the drive.n. Line transient protection prevents power line transients from harming the controller.o. Provisions for remote start-stop, and speed control.p. Monitor lamps for each power stage provide immediate indication of drive functioning.q. A circuit breaker providing a positive disconnect on all 3 phases of the incoming A-C

line. The circuit breaker shall be mounted inside the controller enclosure and include a mounting bracket and through-the-door interlocking handle with provisions for padlocking:1) Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic molded case current limiting type.

r. Thermal overload relay designed to protect one A-C motor, operated on AFC output from extended overload operation.

s. Shall enable the AFC to follow a 0-5, 1-5, 4-20, 10-50, ma; 0-4, 0-8, 0-10, VC-C grounded or ungrounded signal from a process controller and shall permit operation of the controller over and 11:1 speed range.

t. Shall provide a positive disconnect or contactor between the output terminals of the AFC controller and the motor being controlled. When an AFC stop command is initiated, the contactor shall immediately open if coast-to-rest operation is selected. If ramp-to-rest operation is selected, the AFC, upon stop command, shall first bring the motor to a controlled stop after which the contactor drops out. In either mode of operation, when start command is initiated, the contactor shall first close before the AFC converter or invertor sections begin operation.

D. Arrange VFD to provide automatic restart after trip condition from over current, overvoltage, under voltage, over temperature, Drive shall shut down and require manual reset and restart if automatic reset/restart function is not successful after five attempts.

E. VFD shall incorporate energy saver circuit which shall improve motor efficiency at reduced speeds.

F. Mount input line reactor within VFD enclosure to limit total harmonic distortion (THD) on input lines to 3% per IEEE-519.

G. Include critical speed avoidance circuit for selection of critical speed with rejection band centered on that speed. Drive shall ignore any speed signals requiring driver operation within rejection band.

H. Manual Bypass (Air handling units with VAV terminal units shall not require manual bypass):1. Manual bypass shall provide all the circuitry necessary to transfer the motor from the AFC to

the power line, or from the line to the controller while the motor is at zero speed. 2. Two motor contactors, electrically interlocked, shall be utilized. One contactor is to be

between the controller and the motor. The other contactor is to be between the bypass power line and the motor providing across-the-line starting. Motor overload protection is to be provided in both the controller mode and the bypass mode.



3. The bypass section door shall include a switch to transfer motor operation from drive to line or line to drive, and a pilot light to indicate whether motor is operating in drive or line mode.

4. The bypass circuitry shall include a fused disconnect switch or circuit breaker to provide a means of disconnecting all power to both the bypass circuitry and the controller. The disconnected switch or circuit breaker shall be door interlocked and padlockable. The fuses or circuit breaker shall be sized to provide short circuit protection for the motor when in the bypass mode per the NEC.

I. Accessories: Where the building walls are not suitable for mounting the AFC, a floor stand kit shall be provided.

J. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. ABB.2. Reliance Electric.3. Robicon.4. Siemens5. Mitsubishi

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF MOTORS AND STARTERS

A. Install motors on motor mounting systems in accordance with motor manufacturer's instructions, securely anchored to resist torque, drive thrusts, and other external forces inherent in mechanical work. Secure sheaves and other drive units to motor shafts with keys and Allen set screws, except motors of 1/3 hp and less may be secured with Allen set screws on flat surface of shaft. Unless otherwise indicated, set motor shafts parallel with machine shafts.

B. Install starters and wiring devices securely supported and anchored, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Locate for proper operational access, including visibility, and for safety.

C. Install control connections for motors to comply with NEC and applicable provisions of Division 26 sections.

3.02 ACCESS TO MECHANICAL WORK

A. Installation:1. Deliver access doors to General Contractor for installation and provide instructions for their

location. Exact location of access doors to be as directed by Mechanical Contractor and Architect/Engineer.

2. Furnish all access doors whether shown or not.3. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of access doors.4. Coordinate installation with work of other trades.5. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face panels plumb or

level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces.6. Access door location shall be coordinated with Architect/Engineer prior to installation. All

access panels not coordinate will run the risk of removal and relocation at the epense of the contractor.

7. Install access doors for the following concealed equipment:a. Manual volume dampers.b. Valves.c. Control devices.d. Fire dampers and fire/smoke dampers.e. Coils.



f. Other mechanical equipment requiring service.

B. Adjust and Clean:1. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.2. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

A. General: Install variable frequency drive systems in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction.

B. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer’s wiring diagram submittal to Electrical installer.1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer’s submittal and

installation requirements of Division-26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer.

2. Examination:a. Contractor to verify that job site conditions for installation meet factory recommended

and code-required conditions for VFD installation prior to start-up, including clearance spacing, installation of the motor wiring, and installation per the manufacturer’s recommendations shall be verified.

b. The VFD is to be covered and protected from installation dust and contamination until the environment is cleaned and ready for operation. The VFD shall not be operated while the unit is covered.

3. Start-up Service:a. The manufacturer shall provide start-up commissioning of the VFD and its optional

circuits by a factory certified service technician who is experienced in start-up and repair services. Sales personnel and other agents who are not factory certified shall not be acceptable as commissioning agents. Start-up services shall include checking for verification of proper operation and installation for the VFD, its options and its interface wiring to the building automation system.

3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Openings in New Construction – Provisions for New Openings: Verify all openings required in the new construction in connection with the work under Division 23 with the Architectural and Structural Drawings. Meet with and verify same with the General Contractor who will assign the work to the appropriate contractor to provide all openings in the new construction of the correct size and location in walls, floors or through roofs required for the installation of the mechanical work.

B. Cutting in New Construction: Failure on the part of the Division 23 Contractor to make the above arrangements for required openings shall cause the cost of cutting and patching for the necessary openings or the installation of his work to be borne by him, either by having the cutting done by the appropriate contractor as assigned by the General Contractor or in the form of performing the required cutting himself. In either case, all patching shall be done by the appropriate finishing contractor as determined by the General Contractor. No cutting or drilling of holes shall be done without approval of the Architect/Engineer.

C. Patching in New Construction:1. The appropriate finishing contractor as determined by the General Contractor shall patch all

openings in the new structure. All openings made in fire-rated walls, floors, or ceilings, shall be patched and made tight to conform to the fire rating for the enclosure. All materials used in patching shall match the materials specified in the Architectural Specifications and all patched areas shall be restored to the specified finish surface to the satisfaction of theArchitect.



2. The Division 23 Contractor shall pay the appropriate Finishing Contractor as determined by the General Contractor for all patching resulting from cutting to accommodate mechanical work.

3.05 HEATING SYSTEM USED FOR TEMPORARY HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Permanent heating system shall not be used unless approved in writing.

B. If for any reason the heating system has been placed into operation, it shall not be shut down except for moderate weather, and all heated areas shall be maintained at a minimum temperature of 50°F, 24 hours a day. Building must be totally enclosed; no temporary barriers.

C. When any air-handling equipment is used for temporary heat, the filters shall be installed and maintained. Before building acceptance by Owner, these units shall be thoroughly cleaned and new filters shall be installed. This is over and above the set of filters to be provided the Owner as called for in the specifications. Coils shall be cleaned if necessary, as determined by the Architect or Engineer:1. Any and all systems being used for temporary heat shall become the contractor's

responsibility to maintain, and be put into first class working order before acceptance by the Owner.

2. Any guarantees that start with the use of equipment for temporary heat shall be personally extended by the contracting firm holding the prime contract for construction, so that the Owner will have his one-year guarantee from date of acceptance.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLSValdez Elementary HVAC PIPE, VALVES & PIPE SPECIALTIESOZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 23 05 00 - 1

SECTION 23 05 00

HVAC PIPE, VALVES & PIPE SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL




A. Types of equipment specified in this section include the following:1. Pipes and Pipe Fittings.2. Valves.3. Pipes Specialties.4. Expansion Devices.5. Supports and Anchors.6. Meters and Gages.


A. Codes and Standards:1. Welding: Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME

B31.1, or ASME B31.9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Shall be of material, weight, ASTM and ANSI Designation, and pressure ratings as follows unless specifically excepted otherwise.

B. Hydronic Piping (Heating Water, Chilled Water, & Dual Temperature Water):1. Pipe Size 2" and Smaller: Black steel pipe; ASTM A-53, Type S (seamless) or Type F

(furnace-butt welded); Schedule 40; Class 125 cast-iron fittings with threaded joints.2. Pipe Size 2" and Smaller: Copper pipe; Type L ASTM B88, hard-drawn temper; wrought-

copper fittings with soldered joints (95-5 tin antimony solder).3. Pipe Size 2 1/2" through 12": Black steel pipe; ASTM A-53, Type E (electric resistance

welded)or Type S (seamless); Schedule 40; 150 wrought-steel with welded and flanged joints.

4. Pipe Run Within Concrete Construction: Copper tube; Type K, soft annealed temper; no joints or fittings allowed. Sleeve tube with continuous length of 3/8" minimum thickness of flexible unicellular insulation.

C. Refrigeration Piping:1. Pipe Size 3" and Smaller: Copper pipe; Type L, hard-drawn temper; wrought-copper,

solder-joint fittings; soldered joints.2. Tube Size 4-1/8" and Smaller: Copper tube; Type ACR, hard-drawn temper; wrought-

copper, solder-joint fittings; soldered joints.3. Soldered Joints: Solder joints using silver-copper zinc solder, ASTM B 260-62T, BAG-2.



2.02 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS/PRODUCTS

A. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.1. Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding

materials.

B. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldering materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.1. Tin-Antimony Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade 95TA.2. Silver-Copper-Zinc Solder: ASTM B260-62T, Bag-2. (refrigeration piping only)

C. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full-faced for cast- iron flanges; raised-face for steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated.

2.03 VALVES

A. General: Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide end connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option. Valves shall be manufactured in accordance with all applicable M.S.S. Standards.

B. Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size.

C. Operators: Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter-turn. Provide lever handle for quarter-turn valves, 6" and smaller, other than plug valves. Provide one wrench for every 10 plug valves. Provide gear operators for quarter-turn valves 8" and larger. Provide chain-operated sheaves and chains for overhead valves as indicated.

D. Acceptable Manufacturer’s1. Swing Check Valves:

a. Hammond/Milwaukee Valve Corp.b. Nibco, Inc.c. Watts.

2. Drain Valves:a. Hammond/Milwaukee Valve Corp.b. Nibco, Inc.c. Prierd. United Bras

3. Ball Valves:a. Apollo.b. Hammond/Milwaukee Valve Corp.c. Nibco, Inc.d. Watts Co.

4. Butterfly Valves:a. Grinnelb. Hammond/Milwaukee Valve Corp.c. Keystone.d. Nibco, Inc.

5. Wafer Check Valves:a. Stockham/Crane.b. Hammond/Milwaukee Co.

6. Lift Check Valves:a. Hammond/Milwaukee Co.b. Nibco.



c. Stockham/Crane.7. Balance Valve (2" and smaller Venturi Type):

a. Flowset-Flow Design Inc.b. Gerand.

8. Balance Valve (2" and smaller variable CV orifice type):a. Armstrong.b. Bell & Gossett.

9. Balance Valve (2 1/2" and larger eccentric ball design):a. Armstrongb. Barcoc. B&Gd. Flow Designe. Gerandf. Keystone

10. Balance Valve (2 1/2" and larger plug valve type):a. Armstrongb. Barcoc. B&Gd. Flow Designe. Gerandf. Keystone

11. Balance Valve (2 1/2" and larger butterfly valve type):a. Armstrongb. Barcoc. B&Gd. Flow Designe. Gerandf. Keystone

E. Valve Features:1. General: Provide valves with features indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide

proper valve features as determined by Installer for installation requirements. Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping, and ASME B31.1 for power piping.

2. Flanged: Valve flanges complying with ANSI B16.1 (cast iron), ANSI B16.5, (steel), or ANSI B16.24 (bronze).

3. Threaded: Valve ends complying with ANSI B2.1.

F. Valve Schedule:1. General: Provide the following valves for various valve types referenced in Division 23

sections.2. Drain Valves:

a. 125 lb. SWP: Bronze body, screw-in bonnet, rising stem, composition disc, 3/4" hose outlet, provide cap and chain. Conform to ASSE 1005.1) Nibco – Threaded End.

3. Ball Valves:a. 2” and Smaller: 600 WOG/250 SWP, bronze body, full port, stainless trim, 2-piece

construction, TFE seat and seals.1) Apollo – Threaded Ends.

4. Butterfly Valves:a. 6” and Smaller: 200 psi, cast iron or ductile iron body, lug type, extended neck,

aluminum bronze disc, bearings, reinforced resilient EDPM seat, manual lever and lock. Conform to MSS SP-67. Butterfly valves shall be capable of bubbletight shut-off at full rated pressure in either direction without the need for full blind flanges.1) Nibco

b. 8” and Larger: 200 psi, cast iron or ductile iron body, extended neck, aluminum bronze disc, bearings, reinforced resilient EDPM seat, gear operator. Conform to MSS SP-67.



Butterfly valves shall be capable of bubbletight shut-off at full rated pressure in either direction without the need for full blind flanges.1) Nibco

5. Swing Check Valves:a. 2” and Smaller: Type 4, 125 lb. SWP, bronze body, horizontal swing, straight pattern

flow renewable disc. Conform to MSS SP-80.1) Hammond/Milwaukee – Threaded Ends.

b. 2-1/2” and Larger: Type II, 125 lb. SWP, gray iron body, bolted bonnet, horizontal swing, renewable seat and disc, flanged ends. Conform to MSS SP-71.1) Hammond/Milwaukee.

6. Wafer Check Valves:a. All Sizes: 125 psi, cast-iron body, aluminum bronze or plated iron plates, stainless steel

stem, Buna-N seat, stainless steel springs. 2" and smaller must be type IV. 2-1/2" and larger must be type I or II.1) Stockham/Crane.

7. Lift Check Valves:a. 2” and Smaller: Type 2, 125 psi, bronze body, lift type, spring loaded, renewable disc,

threaded ends. Conform to FCI74-1 for design, rating and testing.1) Stockham/Crane – Horizontal.2) Stockham/Crane – Angle.

8. Balance Valves:a. 2” Size and Smaller: Provide balance valves equipped with readout valves to facilitate

connecting of differential pressure meter to balance valves. Equip each readout valve with integral EPT check valve designed to minimize system fluid loss during monitoring process. Provide calibrated nameplate to indicated degree of closure of precision machined orifice. Construct balancing valve with internal EPT o-ring seals to prevent leakage around rotating element. Provide balance valves with preformed polyurethane insulation suitable for use on heating and cooling systems, and to protect balance valves during shipment.1) Acceptable Manufacturers:

a) Armstrong.b) Bell & Gossett, ITT; Fluid Handling Div.

b. 2” and Smaller: One piece, non-ferrous, bronze/brass flow measuring and balancing/shut-off valve combination. The flow element shall be a low loss/high signal Venturi type (± 2% accuracy) of one to ten rangeability, equipped with dual Schrader Type pressure test posts and caps. Balancing/shutoff valves shall be Ball type with large diameter plated ball, teflon seats, blow out proof stem with teflon packing and packing nut. Full size handle, grip and memory stop. Entire assembly rated to 400 WOG and tested to 100% after assembly.1) Provide one gauge kit consisting of Bellows Type meter capable of reading flow

directly in GPM using magnetically attached transparent faces. Meter equipped with 6 ft. hoses, Schrader Type end connectors, bleed and equalizing manifold and rugged plastic case with instructions.

2) Acceptable Manufacturers:a) Gerand Co.b) Flow Design-Flowset.

c. 2 1/2" and Larger: Provide cast-iron body with ball centric, plug, or butterfly valve design. Locate downstream of all flow measuring stations or as recommended by manufacturer.1) Acceptable Manufacturers:

a) Armstrongb) Barcoc) B&Gd) Flow Designe) Gerandf) Keystone



2.04 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated piping specialties recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide piping specialties of types and pressure ratings indicated for each service, or if not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes as indicated, and connections, which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option.

B. Pipe Escutcheons:1. General: Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting

pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe penetration hole in floors, walls, or ceilings; and pipe sleeve extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas, prime paint finish for unoccupied areas.

2. Pipe Escutcheons for Moist Areas: For waterproof floors, and areas where water and condensation can be expected to accumulate, provide cast brass or sheet brass escutcheons, solid or split hinged.

3. Pipe Escutcheons for Dry Areas: Provide sheet steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged.4. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co.b. Producers Specialty & Mfg. Corp.c. Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co.

C. Strainers:1. General: Provide strainers full line size of connecting piping, with ends matching piping

system materials. Select strainers for 125 psi working pressure, with Type 304 stainless steel screens, with 3/64" perforations @ 233 per sq. in. as a minimum.

2. Basket Strainers: duplex, quick-opening covers, stainless steel baskets, single-handle or hand-wheel operation of valve. 125-psig working pressure; high-tensile cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged-end connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection with blowdown piped to nearest drain with valve

3. Y-Pattern Strainers: 125-psig working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger, threaded connections for NPS 2 and smaller, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection with blowdown piped to nearest drain with valvea. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) Armstrong.2) Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div.3) Mueller Co.4) ITT

D. Dielectric Fittings:1. Clearflow dielectric waterway nipple, steel nipple with inert thermoplastic liner. Shall meet

ASTM F-492-77.a. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) Perfection Corporation: Dielectric Waterway.2) Victaulic.3) Precision Plumbing Products: Clear flow dielectric waterway.

E. Fire Barrier Penetration Seals:1. Provide seals for any opening through fire-rated walls, floors, or ceilings used as passage for

mechanical components such as piping or ductwork.a. Cracks, Voids, or Holes Up to 4" Diameter: Use putty or caulking, one-piece

intumescent elastomer, non-corrosive to metal, compatible with synthetic cable jackets, and capable of expanding 10 times when exposed to flame or heat, UL-listed.



b. Openings 4" or Greater: Use sealing system capable of passing 3-hour fire test inaccordance with ASTM E-814, consisting of wall wrap or liner, partitions, and end caps capable of expanding when exposed to temperatures of 250 to 350°F (121 to 177°C), UL-listed.

c. Acceptable Manufacturers:1) Electro Products Div./3M. (Fire Barrier Systems)2) Manville Products Corp.3) Nelson; Unit of General Signal. (Flameseal)4) Pipe Shield Incorporated.5) STI.6) Hilti – FS/One.

2. Fire Penetration Sleeves:a. Provide ProSet Systems fire rated sleeve/coupling Penetrator for each pipe penetration

or plumbing fixture opening passing through floors, walls, partitions or floor ceiling assemblies. All penetrators passing through fire rated construction must comply with ASTM E-814, U.L. 1479 or CSA/ULC CAN S-115 fire test standards, and in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

b. Sleeve penetrators shall have built-in anchor ring for waterproofing and anchoring into concrete pours. For cored holes use the special tight fitted ProSet Cored Hole Penetrator for cored holes.

c. Chilled water piping shall have ProSeal Plugs on both sides and Firefill insulation material packed into the void between the pipe and sleeve to prevent condensation problems.

d. All other piping shall have one ProSeal Plug or a Riser Clamp on the top side of the Penetrator or alternate types of ProSet Penetrators for various piping materials that comply with ASTM E-814 fire testing as shown below:1) Insulated or uninsulated pipe – Use System “A”2) Cast Iron Pipe – Use System “B”3) ABS or PVC waste & vent piping – Use System “C”4) Polypropylene acid waste piping – Use System “C”5) Glass acid waste piping – Use System “A”6) EMT or Electrical Conduit – Use System “A”

e. All above systems are to be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

f. Alternate firestopping systems are acceptable if approved with Engineer and local code official.

g. Acceptable Manufacturers:1) ProSet Systems.

2.05 FABRICATED PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Drip Pans: Provide drip pans fabricated from corrosion-resistant sheet metal with watertight joints, and with edges turned up 2-1/2". Reinforce top, either by structural angles or by rolling top over 1/4" steel rod. Provide hole, gasket, and flange at low point for watertight joint and 1" drain line connection.

B. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:1. Sheet-Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint,

welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate from the following gages: 3" and smaller, 20 gage; 4" to 6" 16 gage; over 6", 14 gage.

2. Steel-Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs.3. Iron-Pipe: Fabricate from cast-iron or ductile-iron pipe; remove burrs.4. Plastic-Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe; remove burrs.

C. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals in sleeve as follows:1. Below grade in foundation wall or exterior walls above grade.



a. Link seal.b. Innerlynx

2. Penetration below grade thru floor.a. Provide elastomeric joint sealant to maintain watertight and airtight continuous seal.

3. Penetrations thru walls, floors, or ceilings above grade.a. Intumescent fire stop.

2.06 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Provide packless expansion joints where indicated for piping systems, with materials and pressure/temperature ratings selected by Installer to suit intended service. Select packless expansion joints to provide 200% absorption capacity of piping expansion between anchors.

B. Expansion Compensators: Pressure rated for 60 psi for low pressure systems, 175 psi for high pressure systems; 2-ply phosphor bronze bellows, brass shrouds and end fittings for copper piping systems, or 2-ply stainless steel bellows, carbon steel shrouds and end fittings for steel piping systems. Provide internal guides and anti-torque device, and removable end clip for proper positioning.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Flexonics Div.; UOP, Inc.2. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.3. Keflex, Inc.4. Metraflex Co.

2.07 RUBBER EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Construct of duct and butyl rubber with full-faced integral flanges, internally reinforced with steel retaining rings. Provide steel retaining rings over entire surface of flanges, drilled to match flange bolt holes, and provide external control rods.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Keflex, Inc.2. Metraflex Co.

2.08 SLIP JOINTS

A. General: Provide slip joints where indicated for piping systems, with materials and pressure/temperature ratings selected by Installer to suit intended service. Select slip joints to provide 200% absorption capacity of piping expansion between anchors.

B. Slip Joints: Slip type designed for repacking under pressure, with ends to mate with piping system.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Adsco Manufacturing Corp.2. Flexonics Div; UOP, Inc.

2.09 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES

A. General: Provide pipe alignment guides on both sides of expansion joints, and elsewhere as indicated. Construct with 4- finger spider traveling inside guiding sleeve, with provision for anchoring to building substrate.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Anvil.



2. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.3. Metraflex Co.

2.10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. References:1. ASTM B633 – Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.2. ASTM A123 – Specification for Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from

Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip.3. ASTM A653 G90 – Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.4. MSS SP58 – Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and Supports –

Materials, Design and Manufacture.5. MSS SP69 – Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and Supports –

Selection and Application.

B. Quality Assurance:1. Steel pipe hangers and supports shall have the manufacturer’s name, part number, and

applicable size stamped in the part itself for identification.2. Hangers and supports shall be designed and manufactured in conformance with MSS SP58.

C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports:1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated horizontal-piping

hangers and supports selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping systems. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide baked on epoxy paint hangers and supports for copper piping systems.

D. Vertical-Piping Clamps:1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated vertical-piping clamps

complying with MSS SP-58 selected by Installer to suit vertical piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of vertical piping clamps to exactly fit pipe size of bare pipe. Provide baked on epoxy paint clamps for copper-piping systems.

E. Hanger-Rod Attachments:1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated hanger-rod attachments

complying with MSS SP-58 selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper-plated hanger-rod attachments for copper-piping systems.

F. Building Attachments:1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated building attachments

complying with MSS SP-58 selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods.

G. Finishes:1. Indoor Finishes:

a. Hangers and clamps for support of bare copper piping shall be coated with copper colored epoxy paint. Additional PVC coating of the epoxy painted hanger shall be used where necessary.

b. Hangers for other than bare copper pipe shall be zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633 or shall have an electrodeposited epoxy finish.



c. Strut channels shall be pre-galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653 G90 or have an electrodeposited epoxy finish.

2. Outdoor Finishes:a. Hangers and strut located outdoors shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication in

accordance with ASTM A123. All hanger hardware shall be stainless steel. Zinc plated hardware is not acceptable for outdoor or corrosive use.

b. Hangers and strut located in corrosive areas shall be electrodeposit epoxy finish with stainless steel hardware.

H. Manufacturers of Hangers and Supports (Acceptable Manufacturers):1. B-Line Systems Inc.2. Grinnel Corp.3. Michigan4. P.H.D.5. Tolco

I. Saddles and Shields:1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields under piping hangers

and supports, factory-fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation.

2. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching adjoining insulation or manufacturers pre-insulated type.

3. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length per schedule below to prevent crushing of insulation. Provide coated projection shields on cold/ chilled water piping.a. Schedule:

Nominal Pipe or Tubing Size Shield Length

Shield Gauge Thickness Material

½” thru 3” 12” 18 Galvanized4” 12” 16 Galvanized

4. Thermal Hanger Shields (Required for Chilled Water Piping): MSS Type 40 Constructed of an insert of high density, 100 psi, water-proofed calcium silicate, encased in a sheet metal shield. Provide assembly of same thickness as adjoining insulation. The style of thermal hanger shield assembly shall be determined by shield manufacturer based on hanger type.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers:a. Pipe Shields, Inc.b. Value Engineering Products, Inc.

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Metal Framing:1. Supplementary Structural Supports: Design and fabricate supports using structural quality

steel bolted framing materials as manufactured by B-Line Systems. Channels shall be roll formed, 12 gauge ASTM A570 Grade 33 steel, 1 5/8” x 1 5/8” or greater as required by loading conditions. Submit designs for pipe tunnels, pipe galleries, etc., to Engineer for approval. Use clamps and fittings designed for use with the strut system.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Provide products complying with ASTM A 36.

C. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration.

D. Trapeze Hangers:1. Trapeze hangers shall be constructed from 12 gauge roll formed ASTM A570 Gr. 33

structural steel channel, 1 5/8” x 1 5/8” minimum. B-Line B22 strut or stronger as required.



2. Mount pipes to trapeze with 2 piece pipe straps sized for outside diameter of pipe, B-Line B2000 Series.

3. For pipes subjected to axial movement:a. Strut mounted roller support, B-Line B3126. Use pipe protection shield or saddles on

insulated lines.b. Strut mounted pipe guide, B-Line B2417.

E. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS standards.

F. Pipe Guides: Provide factory-fabricated guides, of cast semi- steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted two- section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider bolted tight to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if any), and cylinder. Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel.

2.12 GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. General: Provide glass thermometers of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated.

B. Case: Die cast aluminum finished in baked epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured, 9" long, individual shock proof.

C. Adjustable Joint: Die cast aluminum, finished to match case, 180°F adjustment in vertical plane, 360 degrees adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.

D. Tube and Capillary: Organic filled "red" color, magnifying lens, 1% scale range accuracy, shock mounted.

E. Scale: Satin faced, non-reflective aluminum, permanently etched markings.

F. Stem: Copper-plated steel, or brass, for separable socket, length to suit installation, insertable stem with adjustable hinge and bulb well.

G. Units: Provide dual units, U.S. English and S.I.

H. Range: Conform to the following:1. Hot Water: 30° - 240°F with 2°F scale divisions.2. Chilled Water: 30° - 180°F with 2°F scale divisions (0° - 100°C with 1°C scale divisions).

I. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Trerice (H.O.) Co.2. U.S. Gauge3. Weksler4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

2.13 DIRECT MOUNT DIAL THERMOMETERS

A. General: Provide direct mount dial thermometers of materials, capacities, and range indicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated. Provide thermometer that may be calibrated.

B. Type: Vapor tension, universal angle.

C. Case: Drawn steel or brass, glass lens, 4-1/2" diameter.



D. Adjustable Joint: Die cast aluminum, 180 degrees adjustment in vertical plane, 360 degrees adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.

E. Thermal Bulb: Copper with phosphor bronze bourdon pressure tube, one scale division accuracy.

F. Movement: Brass precision geared.

G. Scale: Progressive, satin faced, non-reflective aluminum, permanently etched markings.

H. Stem: Copper plated steel, or brass, for separable socket, length to suit installation.

I. Units: Provide dual units, U.S. English and S.I.

J. Range: Conform to the following:1. Hot Water: 40° - 240°F (10° - 115°C).2. Chilled Water: 30° - 100°F (0° - 40°C).

K. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Trerice (H.O.) Co.2. U.S. Gauge3. Weksler4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

2.14 THERMOMETER WELLS

A. General: Provide thermometer wells constructed of brass or stainless steel, pressure rated to match piping system design pressure. Provide 2" extension for insulated piping. Provide cap nut with chain fastened permanently to thermometer well.

B. Manufacturer: Same as thermometers.

2.15 PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE GAGE CONNECTOR PLUGS

A. General: Provide temperature and pressure gage connector plugs pressure rated for 600 psi and 275°F. Construct of brass and finish in nickel-plate, equip with 1/2" NPT fitting, with self-sealing valve core type neoprene gasketed orifice suitable for inserting 1/8" O.D. probe assembly from dial type insertion thermometer or pressure gauge. Equip orifice with gasketed screw cap and retaining strap. Provide extension, length equal to insulation thickness, for insulated piping.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Peterson Equipment Co.2. Trerice

2.16 PRESSURE GAGES

A. General: Provide pressure gages of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated.

B. Type: General use, 1% accuracy, ANSI B40.1 grade A, phosphor bronze bourdon type, bottom connection.

C. Case: Cast aluminum, individual shock proof case with glass lens, 4 1/2" diameter.

D. Dial Face: Aluminum with white background with black graduations and markings.



E. Connector: Brass with 1/4" male NPT.

F. Scale: White coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings.

G. Units: Provide dual units, U.S. English and S.I.

H. Range: Conform to the following:1. Vacuum: 30" Hg - 15 psi.2. Water: 0 - 100 psi.

I. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Trerice (H.O.) Co. (600CB basis of design)2. Crosby3. Dwyer4. U.S. Gauge5. Weksler

2.17 PRESSURE GAGE COCKS

A. General: Provide pressure gage cocks between pressure gages and gage tees on piping systems. Construct gage cock of brass with 1/4" female NPT on each end, and "T" handle brass plug.

B. Syphon: 1/4" straight coil constructed of brass tubing with 1/4" male NPT on each end.

C. Snubber: 1/4" brass bushing with corrosion resistant porous metal disc, through which pressure fluid is filtered. Select disc material for fluid served and pressure rating.

D. Manufacturer: Same as for pressure gages.

2.18 FLOW MEASURING STATIONS (VENTURI)

A. Furnish and install where shown on drawings or indicated elsewhere, complete Venturi Flow Measuring System. This shall be a coordinated system, including individual Venturi Flow Stations and Portable Master Meter, supplied by one manufacturer.

B. Each primary flow element shall be a Venturi selected from a manufacturer's engineering data to permit prescribed flow at a minimum of head loss. For maximum accuracy and minimal turbulence in recovery area and thus, low pressure loss, Venturis shall have minimum length of 1.6 x pipe diameter. The beta ratio shall be selected to allow for a differential pressure compatible with the meter as specified herein and insure a properly calibrated system accuracy within 1% throughout the entire range. This accuracy must be obtained with as little as five (5) pipe diameters of straight pipe upstream and two (2) diameters downstream from the Venturi. Each Venturi shall be furnished with two (2) accurately located built-in sensing taps, nipples, shut-off valves, and quick connect couplings. Venturis shall be complete with identification tag on chain, giving pipe size, Venturi series, station identification and meter reading at specified flow rate, flow vs. differential curves and installation instructions.

C. Sizes 2-1/2" through 8" shall consist of one-piece cadmium-plated cast steel Venturi with weld neck or flanged ends with balance valve downstream per this specification.

D. Venturi sizes and beta ratios shall be selected so that design flow rates shall read between 20% and 80% of the full scale range on a linear meter with permanent pressure loss of not more than 25% of indicated flow rate differential pressure.



E. The indicating meter shall be portable type with 6" round dial, 270° indication. It shall be the dual rupture-proof liquid-filled bellows type with integral temperature compensation. The meter shall have over-range protection in either direction equal to the working pressure equivalent of the instrument housing (250 psig at 250°F). The accuracy of the meter shall be no less than 0.5% full scale. The meters case shall be waterproof and coated with appropriate paint. It shall have external zero and range-adjusting screws and life-long lubrication. Scale shall be calibrated uniformly either in differential pressure, percent of flow, or directly in gpm.1. Portable Master Meters shall be mounted in a durable metal reinforced plastic carrying case

with the following accessories:a. Two 10" lengths of connecting hose, each with color coded quick connect couplings

compatible with the Venturi couplings.b. Two brass blow-down valves with Buna-N seals.c. Blow-down hoses.d. Instruction book with flow vs. differential curves.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Barco.2. Flow Design3. Gerand.4. Bell and Gossett5. Armstrong

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PIPE AND PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve permanently leakproof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of eccentric reducing fittings with level side up. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16" misalignment tolerance.

B. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space, limit expansion, or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of building; limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of piping, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated piping for 1" clearance outside insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as indicated.

C. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures unless unavoidable. Install drip pan under piping that must be run through electrical spaces.

D. Painting of Pipe: Paint all exterior steel piping (condenser, chilled water, etc.) with a rust inhibitor paint. Coordinate color with architect prior to painting.

3.02 PIPING SYSTEM JOINTS

A. General: Provide joints of type indicated in each piping system.



B. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.

C. Solder copper tube-and-fitting joints where indicated, in accordance with recognized industry practice. Cut tube ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and clean outside of tube ends and inside of fittings. Apply solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. Use only flux with no lead content. Insert tube full depth into fitting, and solder in manner which will draw solder full depth and circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens.

D. Weld pipe joints in accordance with recognized industry practice and as follows:1. Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above 0°F (-18°C) where possible.2. Bevel pipe ends at a 37.5 degree angle where possible, smooth rough cuts, and clean to

remove slag, metal particles and dirt.3. Use pipe clamps or tack-weld joints with 1" long welds; 4 welds for pipe sizes to 10", 8 welds

for pipe sizes 12" to 20".4. Build up welds with stringer-bead pass, followed by hot pass, followed by cover or filler pass.

Eliminate valleys at center and edges of each weld. Weld by procedures which will ensure elimination of unsound or unfused metal, cracks, oxidation, blow-holes and non-metallic inclusions.

5. Do not weld-out piping system imperfections by tack-welding procedures; re-fabricate to comply with requirements.

6. At Installer's option, install forged branch-connection fittings wherever branch pipe is indicated; or install regular "T" fitting.

7. Clean all welded joints and apply prime coat rust inhibitor.

E. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gaskets.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF FLOW MEASURING STATIONS

A. Install at the following locations:1. Upstream of all balancing valves 2½" and larger (except in balancing valve(s) located in the

bypass line of a 3-way control valve).2. Discharge of each pump prior to discharge balancing valve.3. Discharge of each chiller (one on evaporator side and one on condenser side.)

B. Provide at least 5 pipe diameters upstream of flow measuring station and at least 3 pipe diameter downstream of flow measuring station.


A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following requirements:1. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves

in all branch lines to isolate sections of piping whether shown or not. Branch lines will be considered any line connecting to the main piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary.

2. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable. Install valve drains with hose-end adapter for each valve that must be installed with stem below horizontal plane.

B. Shutoff Valves: Install on inlet and outlet of each mechanical equipment item, and elsewhere as indicated.



C. Drain Valves: Install on each mechanical equipment item located to completely drain equipment for service or repair. Install at base of each riser, at base of each rise or drop in piping system, and elsewhere where indicated or required to completely drain hydronic piping system.

D. Insulation: Where insulation is indicated, install extended-stem valves, arranged in proper manner to receive insulation.

E. Mechanical Actuators: Install mechanical actuators with chain operators where indicated. Extend chains to about 5' above floor and hook to clips to clear aisle passage.

F. Valve System: Select and install valves with outside screw and yoke stems, except provide inside screw non-rising stem valves where headroom prevents full opening of OS&Y valves.

G. Non-Metallic Disc: Limit selection and installation of valves with non-metallic discs to locations indicated and where foreign material in piping system can be expected to prevent tight shutoff of metal seated valves.

H. Renewable Seats: Select and install valves with renewable seats, except where otherwise indicated.

I. Fluid Control: Except as otherwise indicated, install gate, ball, globe, and butterfly valves to comply with ANSI B31.9. Where throttling is indicated or recognized as principal reason for valve, install globe or butterfly valves.

J. Installation of Check Valves:1. Swing Check Valves: Install in horizontal position with hinge pin horizontally perpendicular to

center line of pipe. Install for proper direction of flow.2. Wafer Check Valves: Install between 2 flanges in horizontal or vertical position, position for

proper direction of flow.3. Lift Check Valve: Install in piping line with stem vertically upward, position for proper

direction of flow.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Pipe Escutcheons: Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration thru floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure escutcheon to pipe or insulation so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush with adjoining surface.

B. Y-Type Strainers: Install Y-type strainers full size of pipeline, in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install pipe nipple and shutoff valve in strainer blow down connection, full size of connection, except for strainers 2" and smaller installed ahead of control valves feeding individual terminals. Where indicated, provide drain line from shutoff valve to plumbing drain, full size of blow down connection.1. Locate Y-type strainers in supply line ahead of the following equipment, and elsewhere as

indicated, if integral strainer is not included in equipment:a. Pumps.b. Temperature control valves larger than 2".c. Temperature or pressure regulating valves.

C. Dielectric Fittings:1. Provide dielectric pipe fittings and isolators at all connections between dissimilar metals in

the heating water and chilled water systems to control corrosion potential caused by galvanic or electrolytic action.

2. Typical locations for dielectric isolation are: storage and pressure tanks, water conditioning equipment, pumps, changes in service piping materials, make-up connections to boilers and



chilled water systems, valves, deaerators, flexible connectors and the like where materials of different electrode potential are joined.

D. Fire Barrier Penetration Seals: Fill entire opening with sealing compound. Adhere to manufacturer's installation instructions.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Drip Pans: Locate drip pans under piping passing over or within 3' horizontally of electrical equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Hang from structure with rods and building attachments, weld rods to sides of drip pan. Brace to prevent sagging or swaying. Connect 1" drain line to drain connection, and run to nearest plumbing drain or elsewhere as indicated.

B. Pipe Sleeves: Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except as detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect/Engineer. Install sleeves accurately centered on pipe runs. Size sleeves so that piping and insulation (if any) will have free movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping run. Where insulation includes vapor-barrier jacket, provide sleeve with sufficient clearance for installation. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction penetrated, and finish flush to surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves 2" above floor for most areas increase to 4" above floor in mechanical rooms or kitchens and extend 1/4" above the finished floor in other exposed areas. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves.1. Install sheet-metal sleeves at interior partitions and ceilings other than suspended ceilings.2. Install iron-pipe sleeves at exterior penetrations; both above and below grade.3. Install steel-pipe sleeves except as otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements or as required to meet fire ratings. Where fire rated separations are penetrated by pipes the annular space around the pipe shall be caulked with appropriate fire rated material.

D. Space between the pipe sleeve and the sheet metal shall be insulated.

3.07 EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION

A. General: Install expansion joints where indicated, and elsewhere as determined by Installer for adequate expansion of installed piping system. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide pipe anchors and pipe alignment guides as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations Align units properly to avoid end loading and torsional stress.

3.08 EXPANSION LOOP INSTALLATION

A. General: Fabricate expansion loops as indicated, in locations indicated, and elsewhere as determined by Installer for adequate expansion of installed piping system. Subject loop to cold spring which will absorb 50% of total expansion between hot and cold conditions. Provide pipe anchors and pipe alignment guides as indicated, and elsewhere as determined by Installer to properly anchor piping in relationship to expansion loops.


A. General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with



maximum spacings per local code. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe.

B. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. Use of powder actuated fastener and toggle bolts is prohibited. Steel roof and floor decking, suspended ceilings, and hollow assemblies shall not be used for attachment of anchorages or supports for suspended piping or any other mechanical components.

C. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. NPS 3 and larger: Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal

piping 20 feet or longer. 3. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 4. Verify actual supported loads for hanger sizes and spacing. Consult structural engineer if

required to support piping. Spacing and sizes below are from the 2012 ASHRAE HANDBOOK--"HVAC Systems and Equipment."

D. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1 : Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 8. NPS 6: Maximum span, 17 feet minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 9. NPS 8: Maximum span, 19 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch. 10. NPS 10: Maximum span, 20 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch. 11. NPS 12: Maximum span, 23 feet; minimum rod size, 7/8 inch.

E. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

F. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.

G. Installation of Building Attachments:1. Install building attachments at required locations within concrete or on structural steel for

proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69 Table 3 or local code, whichever is more stringent. Install additional hangers at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert securely to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

H. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping.



I. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are copper plated, or by other recognized industry methods, or by plastic coated hangers.

J. Hangers in contact with steel, iron or cast or ductile iron shall be plated.

K. Provisions for Movement:1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit

freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units.

2. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

3. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not exceeded.

L. Insulated Hot/Heating Water: Comply with the following installation requirements.1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through

insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31.2. Saddles and Shield Installation:

a. 3” and smaller piping: Contractor option; protection shields or thermal hanger shields. Provide on cold/chilled water a vapor barrier.

b. 4” and Larger: Contractors option; thermal hanger shields or protection saddles. Provide on cold/chilled water piping a vapor barrier.

M. Support of pipe tubing and equipment shall be accomplished by means of engineered products. Makeshift, field devised methods shall not be allowed.

N. Insulated Cold/Chilled Water Piping: Provide the following installation requirements.1. Saddles and Shield Installation: Provide thermal hanger shields with a vapor barrier.

O. Support of pipe tubing and equipment shall be accomplished by means of engineered products. Makeshift, field devised methods shall not be allowed.

P. If any hangers are found to be out of plumb or not adjusted properly, the contractor shall be responsible for the cost of removal and reinstallation of the ceiling in order to inspect and correct the hanger installation.

3.10 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS

A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ANSI B31, and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

B. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to structure. Comply with ANSI B31 and with AWS standards.

C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions, to limit movement of piping and forces to maximums recommended by manufacturer for each unit.

D. Anchor Spacing: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe-runs, at intermediate points in pipe- runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping.



3.11 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Provide structural steel stands to support equipment not floor mounted or hung from structure. Construct of structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings. Provide factory-fabricated tank saddles for tanks mounted on steel stands.

3.12 INSTALLATION OF TEMPERATURE GAGES

A. General: Install temperature gages in vertical upright position, and tilted so as to be easily read by observer standing on floor.

B. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated:1. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone.2. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler and chiller.3. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air handling units, and make up air units.4. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger.

C. Thermometer Wells: Install in piping tee where indicated, in vertical upright position. Fill well with oil or graphite, secure cap.

D. Temperature Gage Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipe at most readable position. Secure cap.

3.13 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS

A. General: Install in piping where indicated, located on pipe at the most readable position. Secure cap.

B. At a minimum include the following; water coils, zone loops and booster pumps.

C. For horizontal pipe, install in top half of pipe line.

D. Determine and provide the minimum number of portable thermometers and gauges that will be required for text plugs to monitor any one set of conditions.

3.14 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAGES

A. General: Install pressure gages in piping tee with pressure gage cock, located on pipe at most readable position.

B. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated:1. At suction and discharge of each pump.2. At inlet and outlet of water cooled condensers and refrigerant cooled chillers.

C. Pressure Gage Cocks: Install in piping tee with snubber.

D. Pressure Gage Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipe at most readable position. Secure cap.

3.15 CLEANING, FLUSHING, INSPECTING

A. General: Clean exterior surfaces of superfluous materials, and prepare for application of specified coatings (if any). Flush out systems with clean water before proceeding with required tests. Inspect each run of each system for completion of joints, supports and accessory items. Contractor shall install a temporary bypass pipe to achieve full circulation through the newly



installed piping without disturbing the existing system(s). If all piping will be drained and the entire system cleaned, the bypass will not be required.1. Inspect pressure piping in accordance with procedures of ASME B31.

B. Notify the DPS HVAC Shop in writing at least 72 hours in advance of start of work so they may be prepared to observe the cleaning procedure. “Certification of Work Certificate” shall be signed by the observer.

C. Alkaline Solution: May be supplied from a water treatment firm that has been submitted for approval or the following solution can be provided by the Contractor.

D. Chemical of system volume Ounces per 100 gallons1. Trisodium Phosphate – 16 2. Sodium Hydroxide – 1 3. Dawn dishwashing soap, liquid surfactant – 1 4. Sodium Sulfite, oxygen scavenger – 1

E. DPS requires a pH of 10.5 minimum solution.

F. Procedure:1. Open isolation valves. Open control valves to flow through coils and circulation pumps.2. Clean treated water shall be installed immediately after the system has been cleaned and

rinsed.3. Coordinate with the installed pump manufacturer precautions to be taken with their pumps

and seals. Coordinated with boiler manufacturer precautions to be taken.4. Flush system to remove large particulate matter before cleaning. Fill, circulate and flush the

system with clean water. Drain the system; especially at boiler drains, air purger and pump strainers.

5. Isolate expansion tank at the connection to the main.6. Fill the system with clean water and circulate. Following the boiler manufacturer’s

recommended procedure, heat the boilers to temperature. Monitor pressure since the expansion tanks are isolated.

7. Circulate the system for a minimum of 48 hours. Before beginning timing, again vent the system. Capture vented solution. Do not bleed on to surfaces that may be damaged.

8. Drain and properly dispose of the flushing solution. Add water if necessary to aid in draining. Drain low points of boilers, pumps, filter feeder, air purger, etc.

9. Fill system with fresh water and circulate through system. Vent air from the system and establish full flow through the system.

10. Drain low points of the system to remove solids. Remove and clean strainers.11. Drain and refill the system as indicated above at 24 hour intervals as necessary to reach a

pH no higher than 1.0 point higher than the local water pH. Final rinse fluid should be clear in color with no visible particles. Test pH with litmus paper in presence of DPS Shops.

12. Immediately install clean treated water for the heating and chilled water systems. Contractor shall verify the concentration percentages with the existing systems and the District Project Manager.

13. Vent the system.14. At any time Contractor is called back to the Project to fix piping leaks while under warranty,

the pH of the system will be documented prior to work and the Contractor shall shall return the system back to proper levels above after warranty work is complete.

3.16 PIPING TESTS

A. Test pressure piping in accordance with ASME B31.

B. General: Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test piping system before insulation is installed wherever feasible, and remove control devices before



testing. Test each natural section of each piping system independently but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time.1. Required test period is 2 hours.2. Test long runs of Schedule 40 pipe at 150 psi, except where fittings are lower Class or

pressure rating.3. Test each piping system at 150% of operating pressure indicated, but not less than 100 psi

test pressure.4. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed

or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure.

C. Repair piping systems sections which fail required piping test, by disassembly and re-installation, using new materials to extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods.

D. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLSValdez Elementary HVAC VIBRATION CONTROLOZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 23 05 48 - 1

SECTION 23 05 48

HVAC VIBRATION CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 VIBRATION CONTROL MATERIALS AND SUPPORT UNITS

A. Neoprene Pads: Oil-resistant standard neoprene material, of manufacturer's standard hardness and waffle pattern.

B. Vibration Isolation Springs: Wound-steel compression springs, of high-strength spring alloy steel; with spring diameter not less than 0.8 of compressed height of spring at rated loads. Provide minimum additional travel to solid, equal to 50% of rated deflection. Provide spring wire with elastic limit stress exceeding stress at solid deflection.

C. Isolation Hangers: Hanger units formed with brackets and including manufacturer's standard compression isolators of type indicated. Design brackets for 3 times the rated loading of units. Fabricate units to accept misalignment of 15 degrees off center in any direction before contacting hanger box, and for use with either rod or strap type members, and including acoustical washers to prevent metal-to-metal contacts.1. Provide vibration isolation spring with cap in lower part of hanger and rubber hanger element

in top, securely retained in unit.

D. Flexible Pipe Connectors:1. For non-ferrous piping, provide bronze hose covered with bronze wire braid with copper tube

ends or bronze flanged ends, braze- welded to hose.2. For ferrous piping, provide stainless steel hose covered with stainless steel wire braid with

NPT steel nipples or 150 psi ANSI flanges, welded to hose.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Metraflex2. Mason Industries, Inc.3. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which vibration control units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLSValdez Elementary HVAC VIBRATION CONTROLOZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 23 05 48 - 2

B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's recommendations for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units.

3.02 APPLICATIONS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated select vibration control products in accordance with the latest edition of the ASHRAE Handbook, "Sound and Vibration Control". Where more than one type of product is offered, selection is Installer's option.

B. Piping: For piping connected to equipment mounted on vibration control products, install isolation hangers for first 3 points of support for pipe sizes 4" and less, for first 4 points of support for pipe sizes 5" through 8", and for first 6 points of support for pipe sizes 10" and over.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and load application to vibration control materials and units. Adjust to ensure that units have equal deflection, do not bottom out under loading, and are not short-circuited by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices intended for temporary support duringinstallation.

B. Install units between substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent displacement by normal forces, and as indicated.

C. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units asrequired where substrate is not level.

D. Locate isolation hangers as near overhead support structure as possible.

E. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Install on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to equipment shafts and as indicated on the drawings.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLSValdez Elementary MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATIONOZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 23 05 53 - 1

SECTION 23 05 53

MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Types of identification devices specified in this section include the following:1. Plastic Pipe Markers.2. Plastic Tape.3. Valve Tags.4. Valve Schedule Frames.5. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs.6. Plastic Tags.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)1. ANSI A13.1 “Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems”.2. ANSI Z53.1 “Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards”.

B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. General: Where more than single type is specified for application, selections is Installer’s option, but provide single selection for each product category.

2.02 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS

A. Pressure-Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1.

B. Insulation: Furnish 1" thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipe marker to be installed on un-insulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatures of 125°F (52°C) or greater. Cut length to extend 2" beyond each end of plastic pipe marker.

C. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6" (including insulation if any), provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods:1. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.2. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap.3. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation).



4. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4" wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2".

D. Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6" and larger (including insulation if any), provide either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3 times letter height (and of required length), fastened by one of the following methods:1. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation).2. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 1-1/2"

wide, full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3".3. Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type, with manufacturer's standard

stainless steel bands.

E. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature which best describes piping system in each instance, as selected by Architect/Engineer in cases of variance with name as shown or specified.

F. Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled or shown, and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length.1. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with

piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit of plastic.

2.03 PLASTIC TAPE

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard color-coded pressure- sensitive (self-adhesive) vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick.

B. Width: Provide 1-1/2" wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including insulation, if any) of less than 6". Provide 2 1/2" wide tape for larger pipes.

C. Color: Classification Color of

Field District Letters

Legend

Extreme Temperatures or Pressures:

Heating Water Supply Yellow Black HWS

Heating Water Return Yellow Black HWR

Glycol Heating Water Supply Yellow Black HWS/G

Glycol Heating Water Return Yellow Black HWR /G

Refrigerant Yellow Black REF

Liquid or Liquid Admixture:

Chilled Water Supply Green White CWS

Chilled Water Return Green White CWR

Tower (Condenser) Water Supply Green White TWS

Tower (Condenser) Water Return Green White TWR

2.04 VALVE TAGS

A. Brass Valve Tags: Provide 19-gage polished brass valve tags with stamp-engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve number 1/2" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener.1. Provide 1-1/2" diameter tags.

B. Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide manufacturer’s standard solid brass chain, beaded type.



2.05 VALVE SCHEDULE FRAMES

A. General: For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum, with SSB-grade sheet glass.

2.06 ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE SIGNS

A. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387, in the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and wording indicated, black with white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate.

B. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact- type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.

2.07 PLASTIC TAGS

A. General: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing, approximately 3-1/4" x 5-5/8", with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed wording including large-size primary wording (as examples; DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.

3.02 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system indicated to receive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow.1. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" in this section.

Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot non-insulated pipes.

B. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations.1. Near each valve and control device.2. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for terminal units; mark each pipe at branch,

where there could be question of flow pattern.3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non-accessible

enclosures.4. At access doors and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping.5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.6. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce

spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment.7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced markers.



3.03 VALVE IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system; exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, HVAC terminal devices and similar rough-in connections of end-use units. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system.

B. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in boiler rooms where indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, where directed by Architect/Engineer.1. Where more than one major machine room is shown for project, install mounted valved

schedule in each major machine room, and repeat only main valves which are to be operated in conjunction with operations of more than single machine room.

3.04 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Install engraved plastic laminate sign on or near each major item of mechanical equipment and each operational device, as specified herein if not otherwise specified for each item or device. When more than one HVAC unit is present, it shall be permanently identified as to the area or space served by the equipment. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment and operational devices:1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas

outlets.2. Meters, gages, thermometers and similar units.3. Fuel-burning units including boilers, heaters and absorption units.4. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers and similar motor-driven units.5. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units and similar

equipment.6. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers and mixing boxes.7. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.8. Tanks and pressure vessels.9. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water treatment systems and similar equipment.

B. Optional Sign Types: Where lettering larger than 1" height is needed for proper identification, because of distance from normal location of required identification, stenciled signs may be provided in lieu of engraved plastic, at Installer's option.

C. Lettering Size: Minimum 1" high lettering for name of unit.

D. Text of Signs: In addition to name of identified unit, provide lettering to distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions and warn of hazards and improper operations.

E. Fire and Smoke Damper Identification: Access points, i.e. access doors, access panels, lay-in ceiling tile, etc., shall be permanently identified on the exterior of the access point by a label having letters not less than 0.5” in height reading: “SMOKE DAMPER” or “FIRE DAMPER” or “FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER”.

F. The location of fire dampers above accessible ceilings shall be identified by a red circular dot at least ¾” in diameter or embossed tape adhered to the nearest ceiling grid member.

G. Locations of the air handling devices which have filters and are accessible ceilings shall be identified by a blue circular dot at least ¾” in diameter or embossed tape adhered to the nearest ceiling grid member.

H. Access doors:



1. Provide engraved nameplates to identify concealed valves, controls, dampers or other similar concealed mechanical equipment. Use the following colors for specified nameplates or labels.a. Red for fire-protection devices, including dampers.b. Blue for air-handling devices.c. Green for plumbing devices and piping.

I. Lift-out Ceilings:1. Provide adhesive labels on ceiling grid to identify concealed valves, filters, fire/smoke

dampers or similar concealed mechanical equipment that is directly above nameplate in the ceiling space. Use the following colors for specified labels.a. Red for fire-protection devices, including dampers.b. Blue for air-handling devices.c. Green for plumbing devices and piping.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLSValdez Elementary TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCINGOZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 23 05 93 - 1

SECTION 23 05 93

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

PART 1 GENERAL



1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Extent of testing, adjusting, and balancing work required by this section is indicated by requirements of this section; and is defined to include, but is not necessarily limited to, air distribution systems, hydronic distribution systems and associated equipment, and apparatus of mechanical work. The work consists of setting speed and volume (flow) adjusting facilities provided for systems, recording data, conducting tests, preparing and submitting reports, and recommending modifications to the work as required by the contract documents.

B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing specified in this section include, but are not limited to, the following mechanical equipment:1. Fans.2. Air-handling units.3. Ductwork systems, including terminal units.4. Pumps.5. Coils.6. Piping systems.7. Cabinet heaters.8. Unit heaters.9. Domestic hot water recirculating pumps & system balancing valves shown on plumbing

plans.


A. Contractor's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5-years of successful testing, adjusting, and balancing experience on projects with testing and balancing requirements similar to those required for this project.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTOR

A. The Mechanical Contractor shall procure the services of an independent testing and balancing agency specializing in the testing, adjusting and balancing of environmental systems to perform the above mentioned work. Testing and balancing report shall be certified by a Registered Professional Engineer, or a NEBB or TABB Certified Balancing Supervisor who is registered and/or certified in the jurisdiction where the testing is being conducted. The Engineer, NEBB, or TABB Supervisor shall represent the balancing firm in progress meetings as required, and shall be available for interpreting all material found in the balance report. Any individual involved in actual testing and balancing shall be under the direct supervision of the Registered Professional Engineer or the NEBB or TABB certified supervisor.

B. Codes and Standards:



1. NEBB Compliance: Comply with NEBB's latest edition of "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" as applicable to mechanical air and hydronic distribution systems, and associated equipment and apparatus.

2. TABB Compliance: Comply with TABB’s “Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Bureau Standards, Procedure and Specifications” as applicable to mechanical air and hydronic distribution systems, and associated equipment and apparatus.

3. AABC Compliance: Comply with the latest edition of AABC's Manual MN-1 "AABC National Standards", as applicable to mechanical air and hydronic distribution systems, and associated equipment and apparatus.

1.05 APPROVAL OF CONTRACTOR

A. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) firms acceptable to do the work are:1. Air-Right, Inc.2. Double T Balancing Company.3. Griffith Engineering Service Co.4. Jedi Balancing, Inc.5. JPG Engineering.6. TAB Services.

B. Any Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) firm other than those listed above desiring to offer their services for this work shall submit their qualifications to the Engineer, not less than seven (7) calendar days before the bid date. Their submittals shall include the name and Professional Engineer stamp of the engineer who will be supervising the testing and balancing. Copies of each Supervisor’s certificate shall be included in the submittals. This submittal of qualifications will be reviewed by the Engineer. The Engineer will then approve or disapprove this TAB firm based on these qualifications.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit certified test reports, signed by Test and Balance Supervisor who performed TAB work. In addition, have the report certified by the Professional Engineer who is familiar with the TAB work on this project.

B. Submit biographical data on Engineer who is to directly supervise testing, adjusting, and balancing work.

1.07 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Do not proceed with testing, adjusting, and balancing work until work has been completed and is operable. Ensure that there is no latent residual work still to be completed.

B. Do not proceed until work scheduled for testing, adjusting, and balancing is clean and free from debris, dirt, and discarded building materials.

C. Put all heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems and equipment into full operation and continue operation of same during each working day of testing and balancing. Preliminary TAB requirements shall be ascertained prior to the commencement of work through a review of available plans and specifications for the project. In addition, visual observations at the site during construction shall be made to determine the location of required balancing devices and that they are being installed properly for the need.

D. Before any air balance work is done, the following will be completed on each system:1. Check for duct leakage.2. Assure filters are installed.3. See that filters are changed if they are dirty.



4. Check for correct fan rotation.5. Check equipment vibration. 6. Check automatic dampers for proper operation. 7. Place all volume control dampers and outlets wide open at this time.

E. Before any hydronic balancing work is done, the system shall be checked for plugged strainers, correct pump rotation, correct control valve installation and operation, air locks, check system static pressure to assure system operation is below the limits of the system relief valves, proper flow meter and check valve installation. All throttling devices and control valves shall be open at this time.

1.08 INSPECTION OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Test and Balance contractor shall request from the Division 23 contractor a set of documents so that he can review his ability to balance the mechanical system. If any portion of the system cannot be balanced due to its configuration, a report shall be issued to the Division 23 contractor pointing out those areas where proper balancing will be impossible to achieve. This report shallbe issued in time to make corrective actions prior to the purchase of materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS

A. Except as otherwise indicated, use the same products as used by the original Installer for patching holes in insulation, ductwork and housings, which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, including access for test instruments, attaching jigs, and similar purposes.1. At Tester's option, plastic plugs with retainers may be used to patch drilled holes in ductwork

and housings.

2.02 TEST INSTRUMENTS

A. Utilize test instruments and equipment for TAB work required, of type, precision, calibration and capacity as recommended in the following TAB standards:1. NEBB's Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental

Systems.2. TABB’s Standards, Procedures and Specifications.3. AABC's Manual MN-1 "AABC National Standards".

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Examine installed work and conditions under which testing is to be done to ensure that work has been completed, cleaned, and is operable. Do not proceed with TAB work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Tester.

B. Test, adjust and balance environmental systems and components, as indicated, in accordance with procedures outlined in applicable standards.

C. Test, adjust and balance system during summer season for air conditioning systems and during winter season for heating systems, including at least period of operation at outside conditions within 5°F wet bulb temperature of maximum summer design condition, and within 10°F dry bulb temperature of minimum winter design condition. When seasonal operation does not permit



measuring final temperatures, then take final temperature readings when seasonal operation does permit.

D. Balance all flows to terminals within +10% to -5% of design flow quantities. Measure and record the following data.

E. Systems may be tested in increments when approved by the Engineer.

F. When testing and balancing involve the building temperature control systems, coordinate with the temperature control subcontractor to achieve the desired results. All setpoints shall be documented and included with test report.

G. When deemed necessary by the mechanical consulting Engineer, the Test & Balance firm shall run temperature and/or humidity recordings and shall read any of the air or water report quantities in the presence of the engineer for verification purposes.

H. Permanently mark the settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time.

I. The contractor shall report observations made on the job such as noisy systems and unusual equipment vibration.

3.02 AIR BALANCE

A. Air supply, return and exhaust systems with air quantities for each air device; air handling units including supply, return, mixed, and outside temperatures and fan data including CFM, static pressure, fan RPM, motor running and full load amperage before and after final balance. Air diffusion patterns shall be set to minimize objectional drafts and noise.

B. The supply, return and exhaust fan static pressure shall be set by the balancing firm and the control contractor if the systems have fan volume control dampers. The duct static shall be confirmed both through the instrumentation installed on the job and by the balancing contractor. Fan air flows shall be confirmed by duct pitot traverse. The system shall be tested in all operation modes (full return air, full outside air, modulated damper position, full cooling). Amperages shall be checked in all modes. The fan speed resulting in satisfactory system performance shall be determined at full design delivery. Inlet or outlet fan volume control dampers shall be in the wide open position and one path presenting the greatest resistance to flow shall be fully open and unobstructed.

C. Verify operation of each room thermostat/sensor serving VAV terminal units over full range of heating and cooling to ensure proper sequence of control of the VAV operator and reheat coil valve. Field verify minimum and maximum air quantities of all variable volume terminal units andrecord final settings.

D. Final adjustments shall include, but are not limited to, the following:1. All Fans: Belt Drive

a. RPM. Include sheave and belt exchange to deliver air flow within limits of installed motor horsepower and mechanical stress limits of the fan. Determine the limiting fan tip speed before increasing RPM. Final fan speed setting shall allow for predicted filterloading and shall establish proper duct pressures for operation of zone CFM regulators.

2. All Fans: Direct Drivea. RPM with speed taps. Set fan speed on tap which most closely approaches design

CFM. Report tap setting on equipment data sheet as high, medium or low.b. RPM with speed control rheostat. Set output of fan at design CFM by adjusting the

SCR or potentiometer. After adjustment, check fans ability to restart after powering



down. Increase setting if required for proper starting. Mark setting on the adjustment device.

3. Motor Startera. Mechanical Contractor Furnished

4. Thermal Heatersa. Magnetic and Manual Starters. Furnish and exchange thermals as required for proper

motor protection.

E. All major equipment performance tests shall be verified after system has been balanced and proper airflow rates established.

F. Patch holes in insulation, ductwork, and housings, which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, in manner recommended by original Installer. Report all damage requiring repair to the Division 23 contractor.

3.03 HYDRONIC BALANCE

A. Start hydronic balance after piping system has been cleaned, including strainers, and controls are functioning as required under other sections of Division 23.

B. Where liquid flow balancing cannot be accomplished due to system deficiencies such as excessive or lack of pumping head, inadequately sized motors, pressure drops not determinable or similar problems, prepare a list of such deficiencies and the suggested system modifications and furnish to the Engineer in writing and prior to submission of test report for necessary action.

C. Hydronic Balance shall include, but not be limited to the following:1. Inlet and outlet water temperatures of all air handling unit coils, unit heaters, fan coil units,

cabinet unit heaters, and other heat release equipment, as well as the corresponding media flows.

2. Boiler inlet and leaving water temperatures, reset supply temperature (if applicable), gas flow rate and flue gas analysis.

3. Balancing valves on the inlet side of the boilers shall be adjusted for equal flow across all boilers.

4. Water chiller chilled water supply and return temperatures, condenser water supply and return temperatures, and compressor amperage at 100% load.

5. Cooling tower inlet and outlet temperatures, outside air wet bulb temperature, fan RPM and motor amperage.

6. All circulating pump flow rates, pressures, running amperage, and full load amperage at design flow and shut-off conditions.

7. The hydronic system shall be proportionally balanced being certain that the path to one terminal is fully open. Total system flow shall be adjusted at the pump by restricting the discharge balancing valve. If the pump must be severely restricted the impeller may have to be trimmed. This decision will be the responsibility of the contractor, supplier, and the mechanical engineer.

8. Check expansion tanks for water level and tank pressure. Record pressure.9. Check all air vents for operation. Completely eliminate air from water systems.10. Set and adjust water flow in all piping branches and risers, and record flow.

D. All water flow rates shall be balanced according to the actual flow rates indicated on the submittals. Do not balance directly off the HVAC schedules. Refer to the submittals for flow rates.

3.04 MINIMUM OSA QUANTITY OF VAV AIR HANDLING UNITS

A. The Test And Balance Contractor shall be required to assist the Temperature Controls Contractor in establishing a minimum outdoor air quantity under all supply flow conditions.



B. Test And Balance Procedure:1. The Temperature Controls Contractor shall drive the VAV boxes to the minimum position.

After the fan operation has stabilized the supply fan flow shall be provided by the Temperature Controls Contractor and noted for the test and balance report. The outdoor damper shall be set to provide the proper airflow and that setting shall be noted in the test and balance report. The Temperature Controls Contractor shall drive the VAV boxes to the maximum position. After the fan operation has stabilized the supply fan flow shall be provided by the Temperature Controls Contractor and noted for the test and balance report. The outdoor damper shall be set to provide the proper airflow and that setting shall be noted in the test and balance report. All four of these readings shall be provided to the Temperature Controls Contractor.

Description Type Device CommentsMaximum Airflow Setpoint Measurement From Test and BalanceMinimum Airflow Setpoint Measurement From Test and BalanceDamper Position at Maximum Setpoint Measurement From Test and BalanceDamper Position at Minimum Setpoint Measurement From Test and BalanceEconomizer Minimum Setpoint Calculation

3.05 DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRCULATION

A. Balance hot water recirculation pumps and all system balancing valves shown on plumbing drawings.

3.06 REPORT OF WORK

A. Submit six (6) bound copies (or as required in Division 01) of the final testing and balancing report at least 15 days prior to the Mechanical Contractor's request for final inspection. All data shall be recorded on applicable reporting forms. The report shall include all operating data as listed in sections above, a list of all equipment used in the testing and balancing work, and shall be signed by the supervising engineer and affixed with his certification seal. Final acceptance of this project will not take place until a satisfactory report is received.

B. The pitot tube traverse method for determining CFM shall be used and recorded wherever possible.

C. Hydronic systems with meters: The system shall be balanced proportionally using the flow meters. On completion of the balance, the following information shall be recorded in the report: flow meter size and brand, required flow rate and pressure drop, valve settings on meters with a readable scale, flow rate in both full coil flow and full bypass modes.

D. Hydronic systems without meters (thermal or terminal rated pressure drop balance): the system shall be balanced proportionally to the terminal ratings. On completion of the balance the following information shall be recorded in the report: design entering and leaving water temperature/pressure drop, final balance entering and leaving water temperature/pressure drop.

E. When all hydronic balancing is done, all valves shall be marked or the locking rings set. Control valve bypass loops shall be set with the balancing valve to provide equal flow in either mode. Confirm in writing.

F. After all balancing is complete and all coordination with the contractor and the engineer is complete, furnish a bound report which shall contain the following information:1. RPM, drive sheave information (as installed and as changed), fan nameplate information,

motor nameplate information, and amperage and voltage to all motors (in all operating modes).



2. Static pressure across all components of the system.3. Original design and final balanced CFM at each system terminal. Include the terminal size,

reading orifice size, and velocities read to attain the CFM.4. Pump and motor nameplate information, amperage and voltage to all motors, pressure drop

across all system terminals, pressure rise across the pump in PSI and feet of head.5. Thermal protection for all motors shall be recorded. Starter brand, model, enclosure type,

installed thermal heaters and the rating of the heaters, required thermal heaters and the rating of the heaters if different than installed shall be recorded. If the starters were furnished by the mechanical contractor, the heaters shall be changed to the correct size and so noted in the report. If the starters were furnished by the electrical contractor, the correct heater sizes shall be noted in the report and the electrical contractor shall be advised.

6. The report shall include a sheet which shall report the method of balance, project altitude, and any correction factors used in the calculations.

7. A reduced set of contract drawings shall be included in the report with all terminals (VAV boxes, outlets, inlets, coils, unit heaters, fintube loops, radiant panel loops, etc.) clearly marked and all equipment designated. Indicate all duct pitot traverse locations by a number which shall match identification numbers utilized in balance report.

3.07 GUARANTEE OF WORK

A. Guarantee the tests and balance for a period of 90 days from date of final acceptance of the test and balance report. During this period, the TAB Contractor shall make personnel available at no cost to the Owner to correct deficiencies in the balance or to help troubleshoot problem areas.

3.08 ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings at completion of TAB work. Provide markings with paint or other suitable permanent identification materials.

B. Prepare report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical performances when system cannot be successfully balanced; including, where necessary, modifications which exceed requirements of contract documents for mechanical work.

C. Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications, and resubmit test results.

3.09 RETAINAGE

A. Contract payment retainage will be withheld against the Mechanical Contractor until the final completion of this section of work has been demonstrated by the submission of the TAB report and an evaluation of its contents has been made by the Engineer.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLSValdez Elementary MECHANICAL INSULATIONOZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 23 07 00 - 1

SECTION 23 07 00

MECHANICAL INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL



B. Refer to Section 23 30 00: Air Distribution for lined ductwork requirements.


A. Types of mechanical insulation specified in this section include the following:1. Piping System Insulation:

a. Fiberglass.b. Calcium Silicate.c. Flexible Elastomeric.

2. Ductwork System Insulation:a. Fiberglass.

3. Equipment Insulation:a. Fiberglass.b. Flexible Elastomeric.


A. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Fiberglass Piping Insulation: ASTM C 547, Type I unless otherwise indicated.1. Density: 3 lb/cu ft2. Conductivity: not more than 0.24 Btu-in/hr-sq-°F at 75 °F.3. Temperature Rating: -20 to 850 °F

B. Elastomeric thermal insulation1. ASTM C534, Type 1 for piping materials; Type II for sheet materials 2. Temperature rating: -40 to 220º. 3. Density: 5.5 lb/cu ft 4. Conductivity: Not more than 0.27 Btu-in/hr-sq ft-ºF at 75°F 5. Permeance: 0.19 perms per inch

C. Jackets for Piping Insulation:1. Refer to jacket schedule below.



D. Encase pipe fittings insulation with flame and smoke rated one-piece premolded PVC fitting covers, fastened as per manufacturer's recommendations.

E. Encase exterior piping and pipe insulation in tunnels with aluminum jacket with weather-proof construction.

F. Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: 1. Insulating Cement: Dry density 34 lb/cu ft, thermal conductivity 0.91 Btu-in/hr-sq-°F at 400

°F.a. Approved manufacturers

1) PK "Super Stick"2) Ryder "GP"

2. Filling and Finishing Cement: Dry density 40 lb/cu ft, thermal conductivity 0.89 Btu-in/hr-sq-°F at 400 °F.a. Approved manufacturers

1) PK "Quick Cote"2) Ryder "MW"

G. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. (Basis of design fiberglass = Fiberglas 25) (Basis of

design calcium silicate = Kaylo 10)2. Armstrong (Basis of design elastomeric = Armaflex II)3. Knauf Fiber Glass.4. Johns Manville Corporation.5. Certain-Teed

2.02 DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Flexible Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 553, Type I.1. Density: 3/4 lb/cu ft2. Conductivity: not more than 0.31 Btu-in/hr-sq-°F at 75 °F.3. Vapor transmission rating shall not exceed 0.02 perms.

B. Jackets for Ductwork Insulation: Refer to jacket schedule below.

C. Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner angles and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

D. Ductwork Insulation Compounds: Provide cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers, protective finishes and similar compounds as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

E. Encase exterior ductwork and ductwork insulation with aluminum jacket with weather proof construction

F. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. (Basis of design = Type 75P "Ductwrap")2. Knauf Fiber Glass.3. Johns Manville Corporation.

2.03 EQUIPMENT INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 553, Type I1. Density: 3/4 lb/cu ft2. Conductivity: not more than 0.45 Btu-in/hr-sq-°F at 75 °F.3. Vapor transmission rating shall not exceed 0.02 perms.



B. Elastomeric thermal insulation1. ASTM C534, Type 1 for piping materials; Type II for sheet materials 2. Temperature rating: -40 to 220º. 3. Density: 5.5 lb/cu ft 4. Conductivity: Not more than 0.27 Btu-in/hr-sq ft-ºF at 75°F 5. Permeance: 0.19 perms per inch

C. Equipment Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, cements, sealers, mastics and protective finishes as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

D. Equipment Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wire, wire netting, tape, corner angles, anchors and stud pins as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp (Basis of design fiberglass = High Temperature Flexible

Batt Insulation)2. Armstrong (Basis of design elastomeric = Armaflex II)3. Knauf Fiber Glass.4. Johns Manville Corporation.

2.04 JACKETS

A. Puncture resistance rating based on ASTM D781 test method

B. Permeance ratings based on ASTM E96, Procedure A

C. Type AA-1 jacket 1. Material: T3003, H14 to H19 aluminum alloy 2. Thickness: 0.016” (0.4mm), minimum 3. Factory applied to insulation with 1 mil thick polyethylene moisture barrier continuously

laminated across full width of jacketing 4. Seal: Integral longitudinal Pittsburgh seam with butt joint strips and weatherproof mastic 5. Approved manufacturer: Insul-Coustic “Alcorjac” or equivalent

D. Type GFR-1 jacket 1. Material: Heavy-duty, fire-retardant, glass fiber reinforced material with self-sealing lap 2. Factory applied to insulation 3. Finish: White vinyl or white kraft suitable for painting 4. Bench puncture resistance: 50 units minimum 5. Permeance: 0.02 perms, maximum 6. Vapor barrier: 0.001" aluminum foil adhered to inner surface of jacket 7. Approved manufacturer: Owens Corning Type ASJ or equivalent

E. Type GFR-2 jacket 1. Material: Heavy-duty, fire-retardant, glass fiber reinforced material 2. Factory applied to insulation3. Finish: White vinyl or white kraft suitable for painting 4. Bench puncture resistance: 25 units minimum 5. Permeance: 0.02 perms, maximum 6. Vapor barrier: 0.001" aluminum foil adhered to inner surface of jacket 7. Approved manufacturer: Owens Corning type ASJ or equivalent

F. Type GFR-3 jacket 1. Material: Glass fiber reinforced 2. Factory applied to insulation 3. Finish: White kraft



4. Bench puncture resistance: 15 units, minimum 5. Permeance: 0.01 perms, maximum 6. Vapor barrier: Aluminum laminated to inner surface of jacket 7. Approved manufacturer: Owens Corning type FRK or equivalent

G. Type GF-1 jacket 1. Material: 20 x 20 mesh glass fabric 2. Embed in coat of lagging adhesive; finish with second coat of lagging adhesive. 3. Approved manufacturers: Manville “Duramesh” Type 205 or equivalent

H. Banding 1. Over aluminum jacketing with insulation less than 13" diameter: Stainless steel, 1/2" x 0.020,

Approved manufacturer: AJ Gerrard & Co., No. 305-SS with No. 202-SS seals 2. Maximum spacing 12" on center

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.02 HVAC PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION

A. Cold Piping (35°F to ambient):1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold HVAC piping systems:

a. HVAC chilled water supply and return piping. b. HVAC make-up water piping.c. Air conditioner condensate drain piping (first 10').d. Refrigerant suction lines between evaporators and compressors.

2. Insulate each piping system specified above with the following type and thicknesses of insulation:a. Fiberglass: 1-1/2" thick. GFR-1 Jacketb. Elastomeric: 1" thick (for refrigerant piping only)

3. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on cold piping within unit cabinets provided piping is located over drain pan.

B. Hot Low Pressure Piping (to 200°F):1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot low pressure HVAC piping systems

(water piping up to 250°F):a. HVAC hot water supply and return piping.b. HVAC dual temperature supply and return piping.c. Hot gas refrigerant piping.

2. Insulate each piping system specified above with the following type and thicknesses of insulation:a. Fiberglass: 1-1/2" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1-1/2", 2" thick for pipe over

1-1/2". GFR-1 Jacket except for condenser water which should have a AA-1 Jacket.3. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on hot piping within unit cabinets; on cold piping within

unit cabinets provided piping is located over drain pan; on heating piping between control valve and heating coil where length is less than 4’ up to and including 1” size.

C. Refer to INSTALLATION OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK INSULATION for additional requirements.



3.03 DUCTWORK SYSTEM INSULATION

A. Insulation Omitted: Do not insulate fibrous glass ductwork, or lined ductwork. Refer to Section 23 30 00 for Lined Ductwork requirements (applies ONLY to transfer air duct as lined supply and return air ductwork is not allowed).

B. Cold Ductwork (Below Ambient Temperature):1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold ductwork:

a. Outdoor air intake ductwork between air entrance and termination of outdoor air ductwork.

2. Insulate each ductwork system specified above with one of the following types and thickness of insulation:a. Rigid Fiberglass: 1-1/2" thick. (GFR-2)

C. Dual Temperature Ductwork:1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following dual temperature ductwork:

a. Hot/cold supply and return ductwork between fan discharge or HVAC unit discharge and room terminal outlets.

2. Insulate each ductwork system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation:a. Flexible Fiberglass: 1-1/2" thick, application limited to concealed locations.

1) Exposed ducts/plenums in equipment rooms (GFR-2)2) Concealed ducts (GFR-3)

D. Refer to INSTALLATION OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK INSULATION for additional requirements.

3.04 EQUIPMENT / PIPING SPECIALTIES INSULATION

A. Cold Equipment / Piping Specialties (Below Ambient Temperature):1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold equipment:

a. Refrigerant equipment, including chiller, tanks and pumps.b. Drip pans under chilled equipment.c. Chilled water pumps.d. Chilled water expansion tanks and air separators.e. Fittings.f. Valves.g. Chiller water boxes.

2. Insulate each item of equipment specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation:a. Fiberglass: 2" thick for surfaces above 35°F and 3" thick for surfaces 35°F and lower.

GF-1 Jacket. Unless indicated otherwise below.1) Air Separators: Fiberglass 2-1/2" thick minimum GF-1 Jacket.2) Chiller Evaporator Shell: Elastomeric 1-1/2" thick.

3. Insulation on valves, unions, pumps and other devices requiring service shall be removable.

B. Hot Equipment / Piping Specialties (Above Ambient Temperature):1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot equipment:

a. Boilers (not pre-insulated at factory).b. Water heaters (not pre-insulated at factory).c. Heat exchangers.d. Hot water expansion tanks.e. Air Separators.f. Flash tanks.g. Fittings.h. Valves



2. Insulate each item of equipment specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation:a. Fiberglass: 2" thick. GF-1 Jacket, unless indicated otherwise below.

1) Air Separators: Fiberglass 2-1/2" thick minimum GF-1 Jacket.2) Heat Exchangers: Fiberglass 2-1/2" thick minimum GF-1 Jacket.

3. Insulation on valves, unions and other devices requiring service shall be removable.

C. Refer to INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT INSULATION for additional requirements.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK INSULATION

A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose.

B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, painting, testing, and acceptance of tests.

C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other.

D. Clean and dry surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.

E. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage.

F. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, or job fabricated units that are removable except where specific form or type is indicated.

G. Extend insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.

H. Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. For hot pipes, apply 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band over the butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band.

I. Install insulation and vapor barrier jackets continuous over piping at trapeze hangers.

J. Piping and Ductwork Exposed to Outdoor/Ambient Conditions: Increase specified insulation thickness by 1” minimum. Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installing outdoor protective jacketing as recommended by manufacturer.

K. Do not insulate cleanouts, access openings or identification plates.

L. Flexible Elastomeric insulation shall be used on refrigerant piping only. All seams, fittings and joints shall be sealed with an approved flexible elastomeric adhesive. Piping system shall be insulated with absolutely no holes, gaps, tears or exposed joints.



3.06 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT INSULATION

A. General: Install equipment thermal insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves intended purpose.

B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces and on clean and dry surfaces. Redo poorly fitted joints. Do not use mastic or joint sealer as filler for gaping joints and excessive voids resulting from poor workmanship.

C. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on equipment insulation and protect it to prevent puncture and other damage.

D. Do not apply insulation to equipment, breechings, or stacks while hot.

E. Apply insulation using staggered joint method for both single and double layer construction, where feasible. Apply each layer of insulation separately.

F. Coat insulated surfaces with layer of insulating cement, troweled in workmanlike manner, leaving smooth continuous surface. Fill in scored block, seams, chipped edges and depressions, and cover over wire netting and joints with cement of sufficient thickness to remove surface irregularities.

G. Cover insulated surfaces with all-service jacketing neatly fitted and firmly secured. Lap seams at least 2". Apply over vapor barrier where applicable.

H. Do not insulate boiler manholes, handholes, cleanouts, ASME stamp, and manufacturer's nameplate. Provide neatly beveled edge at interruptions of insulation.

I. Provide removable insulation sections to cover parts of equipment which must be opened periodically for maintenance; include metal vessel covers, fasteners, flanges, frames and accessories.

J. Equipment Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installation of weather-barrier mastic protective jacketing, as recommended by manufacturer.

3.07 INSULATION REPAIR

A. Repair damaged sections of existing mechanical insulation damaged during this construction period. Use insulation of same thickness as damaged insulation, install new jacket lapping and sealed over existing.

3.08 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT

A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units.

B. Replace and repair insulation disturbed by testing and balancing procedures required under Section 23 05 93.

C. Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLSValdez Elementary TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS - DDCOZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 23 09 23 - 1

SECTION 23 09 23

TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS - DDC

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: This section contains general requirements for all work to be provided by the Temperature Controls Contractor. All requirements of Division 01 apply to all work of this section.

B. Refer to Section 23 00 00, Electric Wiring And Safety Device Work And Material Responsibilitiesfor electrical, mechanical and temperature control contractor coordination of responsibilities.

C. The temperature controls contractor shall be responsible for providing and verifying all control sequences described in this section or in the Sequence of Operations regardless of whether the sequence uses the building automation system, unitary controls or third party control systems, or any combination of systems. Any deviation from the sequence of operations, including limitations caused by the lack of ability of the building automation system to interact with unitary or third party controls shall be clearly and prominently described as a deviation in the temperature controls submittal. The temperature controls contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and assuring the sequence of operations will be compatible with all equipment, including equipment purchased by other contractors. The temperature controls contractor will be responsible for correcting any interface problems that prevent the system from operating according to the sequence of operations.

D. Work Included: It is the intent of this specification for the building automation system to be fullynetworked and installed as a complete package by the Temperature Controls Contractor. The system shall include all computer software and hardware, controllers, sensors, transmission equipment, system workstations, local panels, installation, engineering, supervision, acceptance test, training, warranty service and, at the owner's option, extended warranty service.

E. All controller hardware and software provided under this section shall be BACnet or LONMARK compliant to provide the owner with an open, interoperable direct digital control system that will allow microprocessor control hardware and software from different control, fire alarm or card access system manufacturers to be integrated to this control system.

F. The system shall be capable of supporting an unlimited number of clients using a standard Web Browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and supplementary conditions and Division 01 specifications sections, apply to work of this section.1. Products furnished but not installed under this section:

a. Valves, flow switches, flow sensors, thermowells and pressure taps to be installed under Sections 23 05 00 and 23 21 00.

b. Automatic dampers to be installed under Section 23 30 00.2. Products connected but not furnished or installed under this section:

a. Duct smoke detectors provided under Division 26 (fire alarm system) and installed under Section 23 30 00.

3. Coordination with electrical:



a. Installation of all line voltage power wiring by Division 26.b. Each motor starter provided under Division 23, shall be furnished with individual control

power transformer to supply 120 volt control power and auxiliary contacts (one N.O. and one N.C.) for use by this section.

c. Controls contractor to coordinate the control panel locations requiring 120V power with the electrical contractor.

4. DPS Department of Technology Services will make any and all connections to the DPS intranet. DPS Department of Technology Services will assign an IP address to each IP-communicating controls device.

1.03 QUALIFICATIONS

A. The control system shall be furnished, engineered, and installed by a manufacturer's local authorized office. The control contractor shall have factory trained technicians to provide instruction, routine maintenance, and emergency service within 48 hours upon receipt of request.

B. Control system components shall be new and in conformance with the following applicable standards for products specified:1. American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM.2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, IEEE.3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association, NEMA.4. Underwriters Laboratory, UL (UL 916).5. FCC Regulation, Part 15, Section 156.6. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA.7. Local Building Codes.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: All submittal requirements specified shall be provided as a single complete package, bound in a 3 ring binder. Provide six (6) submittal copies or the amount specified in Division 01, whichever is greater. Incomplete submittal packages will be returned un-reviewed. A partial submittal consisting of a damper and valve schedule will be accepted for projects with short construction schedules, provided a written request is submitted to the engineer. Submittal requirements are intended to eliminate or minimize engineering of either control hardware or software in the field, and shall be adhered to.

B. Sequences of Operation Submittals: The Controls Contractor’s submittals of control drawings shall include complete detailed sequences of operation for each piece of equipment, regardless of the completeness and clarity of the sequences in the specifications. They shall include:1. An overview narrative of the system generally describing its purpose, components and

function.2. All interactions and interlocks with other systems.3. Detailed delineation of control between any packaged controls and the building automation

system, listing what points the BAS monitors only and what BAS points are control points and are adjustable.

4. Written sequences of control for packaged controlled equipment.5. Sequences of control for the following modes of operation: Start-up, Warm-up, Cool-down,

Normal Occupied, Unoccupied, and Shutdown.6. Capacity control sequences and equipment staging.7. Temperature and pressure control: setbacks, setups, resets, etc.8. Detailed sequences for all control strategies, e.g., economizer control, optimum start/stop,

staging, optimization, demand limiting, etc.9. Effects of power or equipment failure with all standby component functions.10. Sequences for all alarms and emergency shut downs.



11. Seasonal operational differences and recommendations.

C. Drawings: The controls contractor shall submit AutoCAD (Compliant with Version 2009) generated schematic drawings in hard copy and electronic media for the entire control system, for review and approval before work shall begin. Visio drawings are not acceptable. The hard copy drawings shall be submitted on 11" x 17" sheets with drawing information sized such that all drawing information is legible. The valve schedule, damper schedule and equipment specification data sheets for all controls equipment shall be issued within 30 days for the notice to proceed. Provide software programs and sequences written in the programming language and in English (algorithm form), 14 days prior to system demonstration and acceptance testing. All other submittals required by this specification shall be issued within 60 days of the notice to proceed. The submittal drawings shall include the following:1. A title sheet indicating the project title, index of all control drawings, and a one page network

diagram. The diagram shall depict the system architecture complete with a communications riser and all peripheral devices (DDC control panels). The diagram shall depict the actual connection arrangement including, distance between devices, type of wire used and serial number of controller. Items shall be arranged in the order they will be installed in the field. The following items shall also be listed for each DDC control panel on the diagram.a. Location (room number)b. Power source (breaker panel I.D. and breaker number).c. Panel software name and serial number.d. Type of controller.

2. Typical installation details, valve schedule, and damper schedule shall immediately follow the title sheet.

3. Floor plan layouts including locations with room numbers of controlled equipment, communication bus and network wiring layout, controller power source, temperature sensors, duct and space static pressure sensors, piping differential pressure sensors and terminal unit controllers with communication address identifiers.

4. Mechanical room layouts including locations of controlled equipment, communication and network wiring layout, and panel locations with unit communication address identifiers.

5. Point-to-point wiring diagrams for each HVAC system accurately depicting:a. All temperature controls located on a schematic diagram of the controlled HVAC

system.b. Start-stop arrangement for each piece of equipment.c. Equipment interlocks.d. Wiring terminal numbers.e. Special connection information required for properly controlling the mechanical

equipment.f. Control enclosure interior and exterior (face) layouts.g. Electrical power source for each DDC panel by room number. Include electrical panel

designation and breaker number on control drawing and at the DDC panel itself.6. A bill of material reference list with drawing tag identifiers, application description,

manufacturer, model number, and quantity.7. Sequences of operation which shall identify each major component (hardware and software)

involved in the control scheme by its tag identifier. Sequence shall be on the same drawing as the as the corresponding system schematic.

8. Software flow diagrams for each sequence of operation. Provide detail of all parameters; of inputs, outputs, PID loops, and auxiliary control functions. This requirement applies to both text editing and function block programming types. DDC systems that utilize block programming shall submit the flow diagrams utilizing the actual object oriented blocks, with a key of block types and block descriptions.

9. Detailed title block on each sheet indicating project title, date and contractor contact information.



10. Provide software programs and sequences written in the programming language and in English (algorithm form)

D. Technical Data: The submittal shall also include manufacturers catalog data describing each item of control equipment or component provided and installed for the project. Include and identify all data needed to show adherence to the corresponding specification section. Provide compressor sizing calculations if pneumatic devices are utilized.

E. Damper Schedule: Provide a damper schedule with tag identifiers, application descriptions, damper sizes, damper arrangements, damper type / name / model number, actuator type / name / model number, actuator quantity for each damper, spring range, actual pressure drop (in H20) , and air flow rate (CFM). Include damper/actuator product cut sheets and identify all technical data needed to show adherence to the corresponding specification section.

F. Valve Schedule: Provide a valve schedule which describes valve tag identifiers, application descriptions, specified GPM's, close-off rating, valve Cv ratings, pressure drop at rated Cv, port arrangement, spring range, valve size, part number, manufacturer and actuator type for each valve. Include valve/actuator product cut sheets and identify all technical data needed to show adherence to the corresponding specification section.

G. Test and Balance Plan: Provide test plan coordinated with the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Contractor per 23 05 93. The test plan shall delineate the methods of testing and recording the results of the point-by-point verification and calibration of the hardware and the testing and tuning of the software. The test plan shall include a listing of all hardware points with columns for calibration, test and certification. There shall be a similar record for software.

H. Specification Compliance: Irrespective of any prior approval to bid, the submittals shall include a specification compliance analysis for review and approval before work shall begin. The compliance document shall address each paragraph of Part 1, Part 2, Part 3, and Part 4 of the specification by indicating COMPLY, or EXCEPTION. Do not indicate COMPLY unless the proposed system exactly meets the paragraph requirement. If EXCEPTION is indicated, then provide a clear and concise explanation of the variance from the specifications and the effect this has on the specified system performance. A schematic diagram showing the proposed system architecture and describing the expendability and capacity of the proposed system shall be included. The schematic shall have all non-applicable items clearly deleted and shall indicate the quantity of each component to be utilized to meet the requirements of this specification. The Engineer shall retain the right to accept or reject any listed exceptions to the specification.

1.05 RECORD DRAWINGS:

A. An updated as-built version of the control drawings and sequences of operation shall be included in the final controls O&M manual submittal. As-built drawings shall comply with all of the submittal requirements listed above. In addition to the control drawings the record drawings shall include the following instructions where applicable.1. Emergency procedures for fire or failure of major equipment.2. Normal starting, operating and shutdown procedures.3. Summer or winter shutdown procedures.

B. Temperature control drawings shall be wall-mounted in an aluminum frame with plastic laminate glass in a location approved by the DPS Controls Application Engineer. Preferably in the main mechanical room.

C. A reduced copy of the controller drawing, listing all input and output points with functional descriptions, shall be placed inside the door to each controller enclosure in a plastic pocket attached to the door. The sheet shall be laminated. One sheet is required for each controller



housed in the enclosure. Control System Programmer’s Manual with complete description of the custom control language and associated editor, including sample-written programs. Provide complete sets of all Programmer’s Manuals. All software and firmware algorithms shall be completely described and documented.

D. Provide maintenance, installation, and engineering manual(s) that clearly explain how to debug hardware problems; how to repair or replace hardware; preventive maintenance guidelines and schedules; calibration procedures; and how to engineer and install new points, panels, and operator interfaces.

E. All CAD drawings and controller dumps, generated for operation of the system, shall be included as part of the system documentation. This information shall be submitted in a machine-readable format (i.e., compact disk).

F. Input/output schedules, data sheets, and all other items required. Describe all regular maintenance that will need to be performed on the DDC hardware. Provide list of recommended spare parts. List all replacement parts with part numbers.

G. Complete original-issue documentation, installation, operation manuals, and supporting software for all third-party hardware and software furnished and installed as part of the system or required for the operation of the system, including remote terminals, user's computer work station, monitors, graphics and memory boards, network servers, printers, and modems.

H. A diagram of the wiring layout for the communication network showing the room number of the location of all junction boxes shall be shown on the diagram. Distances between termination points shall be indicated with a description of routing.

1.06 ACCEPTANCE PLAN: 1. Submit a detailed description of acceptance testing procedures that will be utilized to confirm

proper operation of all sequences of operation and points, along with acceptance testing checkoff sheets.

1.07 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING:

A. Submit a detailed description of the training to be provided to Owner's personnel for the Engineer's approval. Plan shall include comprehensive details on: course outline, schedule, synopsis, training materials required/supplied and shall include the identity and credentials of the course instructor(s). Plan shall include the following.1. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of 16 hours of training in 4-hour blocks one day per

week on system operations and provide control demonstration time at the job site for the Owner's personnel.

2. This Contractor shall provide at least 4 hours in one session of classroom training at times and location as directed by the Owner. The training shall focus on design, operation, and maintenance procedures of the products installed and shall cover: a. Hardware configuration, including PC boards, switches, communication and point

wiring, and location of all sensors and control devices.b. Hardware maintenance, calibration, troubleshooting, diagnostics, and repair

instructions.c. Operation of central work station, including logging on and off, interrogating the system,

producing reports, acknowledging alarms, overriding computer control, changing firmware and software parameters, and generating and linking graphic screens.

d. The operational sequence of each system, including normal and abnormal operating modes, operating control strategies, and operator actions required to reset or monitor the system.



e. Programming using the editor, program design, syntax, and loading of custom control software.

f. Recovery procedures from power failures.g. Alarm formats.h. Maintaining software and programming backups.

3. The instructor(s) for the above sessions shall be employee(s) of the Control Contractor whose primary function is customer training and applications support.

4. A minimum of two copies of the most current control drawings shall be provided to the DPS HVAC Shop before the training begins. These shall be in addition to the drawings to be pro-vided under Part 1 Shop Drawing requirements, if the O&M Manuals have not been turned in to the Architect before the time of the training.

5. The training may be phased. The Owner may elect to conduct training and demonstration in two- to four-hour sessions over the life of the warranty period. All instructional material shall be available to each employee at each training session up to a maximum of ten (10) individuals.

6. All demonstration and training sessions shall be coordinated with the DPS ControlsApplication Engineer.

1.08 TWO-YEAR WARRANTY SUPPORT PLAN:

A. Submit a detailed description of the plan to support the owner during the two-year warranty period. Provide comprehensive details for: standard workday emergency problem response methods, planned preventative maintenance schedules, training and other plan information for the Engineer's approval. Plan shall include the following.1. The warranty period shall begin as authorized by the DPS Controls Application Engineer in

writing. Authorization will not be given before the following conditions are met. Under no conditions will the Controls Warranty begin before the starting date of the General Warranty for the overall project.a. Completion of the tests and demonstration required in Part 3 and correction of all

problems discovered during the testing process.b. Completion of all punch list items that are the direct responsibility of the Controls

Contractor.c. Conduction of a preliminary training session for personnel of the HVAC Shop of the

District. The training shall consist of an orientation session at the job site to familiarize personnel with the location and type of controlled equipment and controls on the project, a discussion of the control sequences, and a review of the control drawings. A copy of the most current control drawings shall be provided to the DPS HVAC Shop at this time as well. Other, more detailed, training sessions (such as for review of the control programs) may be held at a later date during the warranty period

d. Completion and distribution of the as-built control drawings, including correction of all items noted by the Owner and Engineer after review of the documents.

2. The control system shall be guaranteed to be free from original defects in material and workmanship and in software design and operation for a period of 24 months after com-pletion of the contract. The Contractor shall provide the necessary skills, labor, and parts to assure that all system and component failures are promptly repaired.

3. The Contractor shall receive calls during the warranty period for all problems or questions experienced in the operation of the installed equipment and shall take steps to correct any deficiencies that may exist. The response time to critical problems (critical problems are those that may shut down or disrupt the operation of the school or create potential damage to the building or equipment) shall be four (4) hours maximum.

4. During the warranty period, the Contractor shall maintain a backup of all software installed in the system. The backup shall be updated monthly or whenever the Contractor makes a change to the software. A reload of backup software into the system shall be performed by the Contractor immediately upon notification by the Owner. The reload shall be free of charge unless it is due to a power failure of a duration longer than the battery backup.



5. The Contractor shall optimize all control software to assure acceptable operating and space conditions and peak energy efficiency. This shall include changes needed to optimize operation of the systems even if not explicitly described in Control Strategies.

6. The Contractor shall include the extended warranty for upgrades of controllers installed in the building for the warranty period.

7. At the end of the warranty period, the Contractor shall supply updated copies of the latest versions of all project record documentation as described in the Part 1 Project Record Documents requirements. This includes final updated drawings, software documentation, and magnetic media backups that include all changes that have been made to the system during the warranty period.

8. Coordinate with DPS Controls Application Engineer in advance before connecting new DDC system to District network.

9. Once the building DDC system is connected to the network, the Contractor shall notify the DPS Controls Application Engineer before and after performing any work on the DDC components, and report any changes made.

10. During the warranty period, District personnel shall make a reasonable effort to determine if a problem is due to the control system or some other source not the responsibility of the Controls Contractor, before requesting warranty service. However, if the Controls Contractor is called out and determines that the problem is not due to the controls system or other building components, the Contractor shall not charge the District for a service call if it is determined that the source of the problem is not his responsibility.

B. OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL: All project developed hardware and software shall become the property of the Owner. These include but are not limited to:1. Project graphic images.2. Record drawings.3. Project database.4. Job-specific application programming code.5. All other documentation.

1.09 PROTECTION OF SOFTWARE RIGHTS

A. Prior to delivery of software the Owner and the party providing the software will enter into a software license agreement with provisions for the following:1. Limiting use of software to equipment provided under these specifications.2. Limiting copying.3. Preserving confidentiality.4. Prohibiting transfer to a third party.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable manufacturers shall be as follows:1. Johnson Controls as installed by the Denver (JCI) branch.2. Schneider Electric controls installed by Long and Associates.

2.02 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. The complete electronic DDC temperature control system shall be comprised of five levels of control. Provisions for expansion of all levels of the DDC system shall be provided with this project such that a need for future "gateway" or "repeater" expansion hardware and software is not required:



1. The First Level is comprised of electronic sensors, valves, dampers, actuators, switches, relays, and transducers, etc.

2. The Second Level includes dedicated zone controllers for VAV box, and FTU units.3. The Third Level is comprised of local controllers for control of large primary mechanical

systems such as air handling systems or heating/chilled water systems.4. The Fourth Level consists of the system controller(s) which are used for high level global

programming functions and system networking.5. The Fifth Level is the System Workstation which includes the hardware and software

necessary for an operator/engineer to interface with the control system.

2.03 SENSOR/TRANSMITTERS

A. Transmitters shall have direct-acting, linear 0-10vdc or 4-20madc output signal compatible with controller, with full-scale accuracy of ±1 percent or better. Zero and span shall be field-adjustable.

B. Temperature Sensors: Temperature sensors shall be linear precision, thermistor or platinum RTD type elements with ranges appropriate for applications, accurate within 1°F over the entire span:1. Space (room) sensors shall be available with set point adjustment. Space sensors used for

terminal unit applications shall have a communications jack for connection to a laptop computer. The user shall be able to read actual cfm and set minimum maximum cfm setpoints plus other air balance criteria such as cfm calibration, fan start point, open-close damper, open-close valve and reheat flow setpoint through the space temperature sensor communication jack. a. Provide occupant temperature set point adjustment allowing a +/- 3°F deviation from

the stored set point.b. Place temperature sensors, thermostats or other control sensors inside locking covers

that discourage tampering and vandalism in gyms, corridors, art rooms, unsupervised areas, athletic areas or where shown on the drawings. Metal covers and key locks are not required in administration areas or seated classrooms.

2. Duct mounted averaging sensors shall utilize a sensing element incorporated in a copper capillary with a minimum length of 20 feet. The sensor shall be installed according to manufacturer’s recommendation and looped and fastened at a minimum of every 36 inches.

3. Sunshields shall be provided for outside air sensors.4. Thermowells for all immersion sensors shall be stainless steel or brass as required for

application.5. The following are typical sensor application ranges:

a. Space: 20°F - 100°Fb. Chilled Water: 20°F - 100°Fc. Condenser Water: 30°F - 130°Fd. Heating Water: 50°F - 250°Fe. Outside Air: -40°F - 140°Ff. Mixed Air: 20°F - 100°F

C. Pressure Sensors:1. Air Differential Pressure Sensor: Differential pressure sensor shall be temperature

compensated and shall vary the output voltage with a change in differential pressure. Sensing range shall be suitable for the application with accuracy of +/- 2% of range and repeatability of +/- 0.5% of range. Sensor shall be capable of withstanding up to 10" W.C. or eight times the rated pressure without damage, whichever is greater. Provide each sensors with a panel-mounted differential pressure gauge. Provide tees with removable lines on the high and low pressure lines.

2. Water Differential Pressure Sensor: Differential pressure sensor shall be temperature compensated and shall vary the output voltage with a change in differential pressure. The



sensor accuracy shall be +-0.25 percent of calibrated span. Sensor shall be capable of withstanding up to three times the rated pressure for water applications without damage.Provide each sensor with differential pressure gauges mounted at the point of application. Provide tees with 1/2" size, quick-connect fittings on the high and low pressure lines. Provide McDonnell and Miller, Mueller or Barksdale DP switches.

3. Critical Differential Air Pressure Sensor: Provide Air-Monitor, Veltron II Model or Ashcroft differential air pressure sensors on critical applications where the pressure can drop below 0.2" W.C. such as outside air flow rate monitoring.

4. Provide wind dampening, weatherhead for each atmospheric pressure sensing point (DWYER A-306)

5. Transmitter span selection shall be by the contractor.a. The selection of the appropriate transmitter span is a crucial step in the design of a

functional control system. In general, the span of the transmitter should match the normal ranges of the variable to be controlled. For example, the measurement of system pressure where the normal operating pressure is 20 psi and the peak system pressure is 35 psi, the correct span selection would be 0 to 50 psi. A 0 to 100 psi span, while workable, would be operating in the lower third of the span under normal conditions. This decreases the controller’s ability to detect small changes in pressure. Ideally, the control setpoint should be at approximately 75 percent of the transmitter’s span. However, expected maximum and minimum values encountered during normal operation of the system must be accounted for.

b. Transmitter span selection must be very precise with airflow monitoring stations. The recommendations of the airflow-monitoring station supplier must be followed and shall include an altitude correction factor.

c. Transmitters found operating in the lower 33 percent or upper 20 percent of their span, during normal conditions of system operation, shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense with units having an acceptable span.

D. Water Flow Rate Sensors: Provide in-line, insertion turbines, vortex or magmeter type water flow rate sensors.

E. Air Velocity Sensors: Sensor shall use thermal anemometry to determine air flow rate. Repeatability shall be ± 25 FPM; accuracy ± 5% of range. The anemometer shall use constant temperature differential technology and operate from 30°F to 120°F.

F. Carbon Dioxide Sensor: Duct Mounted type; provide Viasala GDM20) or approved equal. Wall mounted type; provide Viasala GMW20, or approved equal. Sensor shall be designed to monitor CO2 levels, in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62-2001, have a 4-20 mA output, have an accuracy at 20°C <(20ppm +1.5% of reading), and a range of 0-2000 PPM, adjustable to 20,000 PPM.

G. Status: Fan and pump status shall utilize a current switch.

2.04 AUXILIARY ELECTRIC CONTROL DEVICES

A. Control Relays: Shall be UL listed plug-in type with dust cover, LED "energized" indicator and integral H-O-A switch. Contract rating, configuration and coil voltage shall be suitable for the application.

B. Manual Control Switches: Shall be UL listed for use in NEMA 1 enclosures with contact arrangement and rating suitable for the application. Bat handle or knob actuator with nameplate clearly identifying function of each switch position.

C. Line Voltage Thermostats: Line Voltage Thermostats shall be U.L. listed with, digital display and temperature adjustment and switching at an adjustable setpoint with a range of 55° to 85°F.



Provide lockable metal guards for all thermostats located in areas where mechanical damage or tampering may occur. (Honeywell LineVoltPRO or equal)

D. Low Voltage Thermostats: Low voltage thermostats shall be single stage with digital display, and temperature adjustment and switching at an adjustable setpoint with a range of 55° to 85°F. Provide lockable metal guards for all thermostats located in areas where mechanical damage or tampering may occur. (Honeywell FocusPro 5000 or equal)

E. Differential Pressure Switches: Pressure differential switches (air or water service) shall be UL listed, DPDT snap-acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum), NEMA 1 enclosure, with scale range and differential suitable for intended application or as specified. Switches shall be capable of withstanding up to 150% of rated pressure for air applications and up to 300% of rated pressure for water applications. Duct high pressure switches shall be provided with contacts that require manual resetting.

F. Current Sensing Relays: Current Sensing Relays shall be U.L. listed and of the proper range. The switch output contact shall be rated for 30VDC, Threshold setting shall be fully adjustable within the selected range. Response time shall be 0.25 seconds or less. Provide current sensing relays on all fans and pumps for status sensing unless otherwise noted.

G. Low Temperature Thermostats: Low Temperature Thermostats shall be U.L. listed, DPDT snap-acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA, minimum), NEMA 1 enclosure with manually adjustable set point and differential suitable for the application or as specified. Switches shall be actuated by the coldest 1' of a 20' capillary and shall be provided with contacts that require manual resetting. The element shall be properly supported to cover the entire downstream side of the heating coil with a minimum of three loops. Separate thermostats shall be provided for each coil section. The setpoint shall be 25°F unless otherwise specified on the plans or sequence of operation. Wire to protect unit in both hand and automatic operation. Wire one set of contacts directly to the fan starter circuit and the other to an alarm input. The device shall be manually reset unless indicated otherwise.

H. Flow Switches: Flow Switches shall be U.L. listed and shall be of the paddle type equipped with DPDT contacts to establish proof of flow. Flow switches shall be of the vapor-proof type.

I. Control Transformers: Shall be UL listed Class 2 current-limiting type, or shall be furnished with over-current protection in both primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service.

J. Damper End Switches: Shall be UL listed line voltage SPDT snap-acting pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum) NEMA 1 enclosure, with roller type actuating arm suitable for damper positionapplication and shall be integral to the actuator.

K. Breakglass Chiller Room Emergency Stop Switch: Shall be UL listed for line voltage with SPDT snap-acting pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum). Provide weather tight enclosure for exterior mounted applications.

L. Smoke Detectors: Shall be as specified in the schedule of responsibilities:1. Smoke detectors located in air handling units or ducts shall be complete with duct-mounting

accessories as recommended by manufacturer. Provide multiple units for larger duct areas consistent with manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Provide all control interlock wiring from fire/smoke alarm system relay contacts to HVAC controls unless this wiring is noted in the Division 26 plans or specifications

3. Wire smoke detectors to shut down in both hand and automatic mode.

M. Time-delay relays shall be adjustable plus or minus 200 percent (minimum) from the required set point.



N. Multi-Level Control Panel for Liquids: the controls shall be conductance-actuated, utilizing electrodes and the conductivity of the liquid itself to sense level. The sensor shall have four (4) level-sensing electrodes and one (1) ground electrode, in lengths suitable for the application. Unit must function on a fiberglass tank.

2.05 CONTROL VALVES

A. General:1. All valves to heating coils which are part of an air handling system which takes in outside air

shall open for full supply water flow whenever a loss of power or air supply to the valves occurs. Chilled water valves shall fail closed.

2. Valve actuator and trim shall be furnished to provide the following minimum close-off pressure ratings:a. Water Valves:

1) Two-way - 150% of total system (pump) head.2) Three-way - 300% of pressure differential between ports A and B at design flow or

100% of total system (pump) head.3. The temperature control contractor shall size control valves for proper control characteristics

for each application. 4. All modulating valves shall have equal flow characteristics, i.e., for equal increments of valve

stem stroke the change if flow rate with respect to valve stroke will be expressed as a constant percent of the flow rate at the time of the change.a. Two-way modulating valves shall be sized at wide open position, with full flow across

the valve. The pressure drop at these conditions shall be equal to 50 percent of the available pressure differential between the mains with a minimum of 4 psi.

b. Three-way modulating valves shall be sized at wide open position, with full flow across the valve. The pressure drop at these conditions shall be equal to twice the pressure drop through the device serviced with a minimum of 3 psi.

5. All control valves over 3/4 inch shall have a minimum rangeability (the ratio of the maximum controllable flow to the minimum controllable flow) of 50 to 1.

6. All two position isolation valves shall be line size. Butterfly valves may be used for any isolation valve application.

B. Water Valve Characteristics:1. Valves - 1/2" to 2": Valves shall be bronze body or cast brass ANSI Class 250, spring

loaded, Teflon or ring packing and stainless steel stems. Two-way valves to have replaceable composition disc. Johnson VG-700, Siemens 599 or Belimo globe valves. The body rating shall be a minimum of 250 psig.

2. Valves - 2½" and above: Valves shall be constructed with a cast iron body ANSI Class 125 with guided plug, stainless steel stems, Teflon ring packing and flanged connections. The body rating shall be a minimum of 125 psig.

3. Water Valves with caged trim are not allowed.4. Butterfly valves: modulating, three-way valves or two-position valves 4" and larger may be

tight-closing butterfly valves. Full-lug type, 250 psi WOG, extended neck, cast iron body, alu-minum/bronze disk, stainless steel shaft, field replaceable cartridge design, EPDM seat and seal with integral actuator. The modulating, three-way valve substitute shall consist of linked butterfly valves with a factory-installed linkage. Modulating valves shall be sized for three (3) psi pressure drop. Johnson Controls VF, Siemens or Belimo

5. Air handling unit coils, Variable air volume terminal coils, heat exchangers and Baseboard heating: modulating (not two-position) valves

6. For systems with glycol solutions, provide documentation that the valve components in contact with the fluid are compatible with glycol.

C. Valve Actuators:



1. Valve actuators shall have a cast aluminum or cast iron housing.2. Actuators shall have sufficient power to operate the valve and provide for tight shut-off at the

differential pressures encountered.3. Provide spring return actuators for all applications unless noted otherwise.4. Where required by the sequence of operation, valves shall be capable of being sequenced

with other valves or other actuated devices. Where such sequencing is required, the actual spring range, when adjusted for spring shift, shall be such that no overlapping occurs. In the event that spring shift causes an overlap, a pilot positioner shall be furnished.

5. Electric actuators shall be oil-immersed gear train, rotary, hydraulic or magnetic type except as noted otherwise.

6. Electric actuators for VAV and reheat terminal unit applications may be three point floating type for valves that are 3/4 inch or less. These actuators are not required to be spring-return.

7. Actuators providing control by temperature change media within the actuator are not acceptable.

8. All actuators shall provide a means of manually positioning the output coupling in the absence of power.

9. Dual independently adjustable auxiliary switches must be integral to the actuator. The addition of this feature as an accessory kit is not acceptable.

10. All actuators shall provide an easily readable high contrast yellow on black position indicator.

2.06 CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Motorized dampers, unless otherwise specified elsewhere, shall meet the following and shall be provided by the temperature controls contractor:1. Frame of 13 gauge galvanized steel roll formed into channels and welded for maximum

strength and shall have flanges for duct mounting where applicable.2. Blades of 16 gauge galvanized steel, roll-formed airfoil-type design with extruded vinyl blade

edge seals mechanically locked into the blade edge.3. Stainless steel (28 gauge minimum) jamb seals of flexible, compression type.4. Control shaft shall be 1/2" dia. removable shaft. Linkage shall be located outside of

airstream.5. Leakage shall be a maximum of 4.5 cfm/ft based on a pressure differential of 1.0" w.g.6. Airfoil type dampers shall be used for any applications where the air velocities are greater

than 1500 FPM.7. Provide a minimum of one damper actuator per damper section.8. Bearings shall be oil impregnated to provide constant lubrication.9. Blade edge seals shall be easily replaceable if they are damaged.10. An internal stop shall be provided on all dampers to prevent over-rotation in the closed

position.11. Provide Ruskin CD-50 or approved equal.

B. Unless otherwise scheduled, the control dampers for outdoor/return air mixing box dampers shall be parallel blade, arranged to direct airstreams towards each other. Dampers used for air volume or pressure control modulating applications shall be opposed blade type. All other dampers may be parallel or opposed blade type.

C. Damper Actuators:1. Electric actuators shall be direct coupled typed. 2. Unless otherwise noted, all actuators must be spring return type. Under no circumstances

shall capacitors or batteries be used in lieu of spring return.3. Actuators for VAV terminal control may be non-spring return.4. All actuators shall provide a means of manually positioning the output coupling in the

absence of power.



5. Dual independently adjustable auxiliary switches must be integral to the actuator. The addition of this feature as an accessory kit is not acceptable.

6. All actuators shall provide an easily readable high contrast yellow on black position indicator.

2.07 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS

A. All DDC control panels, relays, switches, transducers, transformers, power supplies, communications interfaces and other field interface devices, shall be panel mounted. Each local controls panel shall have door mounted devices as shown on the drawings. Provide a convenience 120 VAC receptacle in each panel. All electrical devices, within the panels shall be wired to a numbered terminal strip. All wiring within the panel shall be run in wiring tray in accordance with NEMA and UL standards, and shall meet all local codes. Panels shall be NEMS-1 locking type suitable for applications as required. Provide a final as-built control drawing, reduced, laminated, and mounted inside of the panel door. Provide panel with 20% spare mounting capacity.

B. Devices shall be flush-mounted on panel face.

C. Manual timer overrides are not permitted. Manual overrides will be handled through a software function. If any manual override exist, they shall be removed as part of this project.

D. Internal components shall be securely mounted on removable sub-panels. Each component shall be individually labeled with function and device identification, as shown on control/interlock shop drawings. Label all components in accordance with Electrical Identification Specification Section.

E. Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices pre-wired with color-coded stranded conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or tie-wrapped. Terminals for field connections shall be UL-listed for 600-volt service, individually identified per control/interlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control terminations for field connection shall be individually identified per control drawings.

F. Provide on/off power switch with over-current protection to each local panel. Provide a 120-volt duplex outlet inside each control panel that houses a DDC controller (except VAV controllers) if there is not an outlet within 5’ of the enclosure.

G. All control panel locks shall be the same. Contractor shall give the keys to the DPS Controls Application Engineer at completion of training.

H. All field devices shall be mounted in panels. Exceptions include devices with enclosed electrical terminations, and designed to be installed on the controlled/monitored equipment and (e.g., pipe/duct temperature/pressure sensors) or those for space mounting (e.g., space temperature sensors).

2.08 MISCELLANEOUS

A. The Controls Contractor shall furnish all electric relays and coordinate with the supplier of magnetic starters for the auxiliary contact requirements. All electric control devices shall be of a type to meet current, voltage, and switching equipment of their particular application. Relays shall be provided with 24 VAC coils and contacts shall be rated at 10 amps minimum.

2.09 ZONE CONTROLLER HARDWARE

A. General: Each HVAC Zone Controller shall be a stand-alone DDC controller. The controller shall include all hardware and software required for communications with the system controller. An



individual zone controller shall be dedicated for each zone terminal device. Individual zone controllers are not required for constant volume duct reheat coil applications, but may be provided at Temperature Control Contractor's option.

B. Programs: The control program shall reside in the zone controller. The application program shall be maintained in ROM. The default database, ie. setpoints and configuration information, shall be stored in EEPROM. Controllers requiring local setting of potentiometer or dip switches for control strategies are not acceptable. No batteries can be used for memory protection.

C. Stand-Alone: Controllers requiring the application or database to be downloaded from a host or share processing with a "master controller" shall not be acceptable. After a power failure the zone controller must run the control application using the current setpoints and configuration.

D. Communications: Communication to the system controller shall be 9600-baud asynchronous.

E. Input-/Output: Each zone controller shall have the necessary quantities of inputs and outputs for the selected duty. Inputs shall be individually electrically isolated from other inputs, outputs, communications, and power. All inputs shall feature an auto-calibrate function to eliminate sensing errors.

F. Connections: All electrical connections shall be made to the combination terminal strip and base assembly. To insure long term reliability, all electrical terminations shall be screw type.

G. The logic card, containing all active electrical components, shall be easily installable and removable from the wiring base, without the use of tools or the removal of any electrical wiring. Products that require disconnection of wiring from logic card before removal will be required to supply and install a quick disconnect type inter-connection.

H. All controllers shall be interoperable controllers bearing the applicable BACnet or LONMARK logo on each controller that is provided.

2.10 ZONE CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

A. The zone controller software shall be provided with the capabilities required by the specific application.

B. Each input, output or calculation result shall be capable of being assigned to the network controller for system networking.

2.11 LOCAL CONTROLLER HARDWARE

A. General: The Local Controllers shall be a local control loop microprocessor-based controller installed at each mechanical system; i.e., air handling unit, heating boiler, chiller. Provide only one controller for each system indicated above. The controller shall execute local control sequences, independent of a workstation. All control loops and setpoints shall be stored in EEPROM or other non-volatile field reprogrammable memory. Each controller shall be addressable by a workstation or a portable laptop computer. Where local controllers are used for constant volume duct reheat coil applications, group reheat zones to a local controller by floor, air handling unit, service, etc.

B. Scan: Controller shall continuously scan and maintain the most recent data in EEPROM for retrieval by a remote workstation and by the local controller software programs.



C. Isolation: Control, communication, and power circuits for each controller shall be individually electrically isolated to protect against transients, spikes, and power surges. All inputs and outputs shall be individually optically isolated from other inputs and outputs, power, communication, and field wiring. Optical isolation shall be provided either as an integral component of the controller or provided as a separate interface device between the controller and field wiring.

D. Servicing: For ease of servicing, each Controller shall consist of a removable plug-in circuit board. Products which require disconnection of wiring from the local controller logic card before removal shall supply and install a quick disconnect type interconnection.

E. All controllers shall be interoperable controllers bearing the applicable BACnet or LONMARK logo on each controller that is provided.

F. Provide interfaces to subsystems that do not communicate via BACnet/IP

G. Database: All field control database shall be entered, changed or downloaded to the local controllers via a portable service tool or system workstation.

H. Auto-Calibration: All inputs shall feature an auto-calibrate function to eliminate sensing errors.

I. Input/Output Modules: Provide the following input/output capabilities:

J. Universal inputs which can accept industry standard analog signals (4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, etc.) and binary contact closures:1. Digital outputs may be latched or momentary contact type.2. Analog outputs shall have a 1% resolution over total output span of 100%.

2.12 LOCAL CONTROL SOFTWARE

A. General: Provide complete controller software to execute all mechanical system local loop controls functions.

B. Control Parameters: The software blocks in the local controller shall produce all of the necessary reverse acting and/or direct acting PI2 signals as required by the control sequence. The proportional and integral values which make up the PI2 output value shall be readable and modifiable, at the system workstation or the portable service tool to facilitate tuning of control loops.

C. Networking: Each input, output, or calculation result shall be capable of being assigned to the system controller for system networking.

D. Programming Functions: Provide the following standard temperature control loop programming functions:1. Control Block Programming.2. PI2 or PID Control.3. Serial Load Staging.4. Binary Load Staging.5. Analog Load Staging.6. Master-Submaster Routines.7. Anti-Windup for Integrated Loops.8. Weekly/Daily/Holiday Scheduling.9. Optimum Start/Stop Programming.10. Automatic Trending with Adjustable Sample Rates.



2.13 CUSTOM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS

A. Summary 1. The following sections outline the requirements for custom application controllers. The

controllers referred to herein shall be fully programmable and capable of operating in a standalone mode.

B. Scope Of Work1. The controllers described herein shall be provided in their entirety by the BAS/ATC

contractor. High voltage power shall be provided by the Division 16 Electrical Contractor. The BAS/ATC contractor shall provide all low voltage (24 volts or less) wiring, terminations, and system programming.

C. System Description 1. Custom application controllers shall be microprocessor based, consisting of analog and

binary input and output points, and programmable logic, designed for monitoring and control applications. The controllers shall be capable of operating as completely independent units and/or as part of a facility-wide building control system.

D. Quality Assurance1. Controllers shall be certified by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to company with

the requirements of the UL-916 Energy Management Equipment standard. Controllers shall meet all requirements of FCC regulations, Part 15, Class A, for radio frequency emissions. Controller shall be in compliance with European Directive CE for electrical immunity (directive 89/336/EEC EN) and CE for electrical emissions, and include the CE Mark.

E. Custom Application Controllers1. Custom application controllers shall be mounted in enclosures appropriate to the project

environmental conditions.a. Controllers used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in NEMA type-1 enclosures,

and shall be rated for operation at 0 C to 50 C (32 F to 120 F).b. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within NEMA type-4

waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40 C to 70 C (- 40 F to 158 F).

2. Enclosures shall include a line voltage to 24 VAC transformer. Transformer shall be fused or circuit-breaker protected within the enclosure.

3. Enclosures shall have multiple access locations for wire and conduit to enter the cabinet, and an isolated high voltage section. All control wiring shall be electrically terminated inside the cabinet. The controller in enclosure shall be UL-listed.

4. The controllers shall be software configurable for the types of input/output points required per the points list, and for future expansion.

5. The controllers shall receive signals from industry standard sensors and input devices and directly control analog and binary control devices. The controllers shall have the capability to monitor and control the following types of inputs and outputs:a. Analog Inputs

1) Current: 0 to 20 mA2) Voltage: 0 to 10 Vdc3) Thermistor4) Linear resistance5) Resistance temperature detectors (RTD)

b. Binary Inputs1) Isolated dry contact closure2) Pulse inputs for metering

c. Analog Outputs



1) Current: 0 to 20 mA2) Voltage: 0 to 10 Vdc

d. Binary Outputs1) 24 VAC, relay controlled. Each output shall include an indicator light providing

on/off status of the associated binary output.6. Each controller enclosure shall include a 18-24 Vdc power supply capable of supplying

sufficient dc power for all transmitting (e.g. 4-20 mA) sensors connected as specified, and for all unused analog inputs.

7. All binary and analog output points shall be provided with a manual override, with local feedback indication that an output is presently overridden.

8. Each controller shall have a real-time clock which shall remain active during power failure for up to seven (7) days under normal operating conditions. When the controller is used with a higher level system, the time clock shall be automatically synchronized with the system controller.

9. Custom application controllers shall communicate using BACnet. Controllers shall use FTT-10 transceivers. All communications shall be with the use of LonMark-approved standard network variable types (SNVT).

10. The custom application controller shall include an operator display allowing the user to perform basic daily operations tasks. At a minimum this operator display shall:a. Be installed on the custom application controller and require no additional power

source.b. Consist of a one-quarter VGA touch screen with 320 x 240-pixel resolution. The touch

screen shall be backlit. The brightness and contrast shall be adjustable to allow for easy reading of information on the screen.

c. Provide on-screen graphical icons to identify common user functions including viewingpoint data, alarms, scheduling, output overrides, and controller setup.

d. Be capable of having unique user identification and passwords that can be programmed to limit access to the system and operator functions.

e. Display the current state of all input/output points connected to the controller.f. Allow for up to 24 individual custom display screens that allow 24-character English

descriptions of controller data.g. Give the operator the ability to override the current state of all binary and analog output

points connected to the controller. The controller shall have this capability prior to any on-site programming.

h. Include a time clock which shall maintain correct time for at least 7 days during a power loss to the controller.

i. Allow the operator to modify the start and stop times of the time-of-day schedule within the controller. Scheduling function shall provide for 7-day control, with 2 start and stop events per day.

j. Provide a unique visual alarm indicator such as a flashing LED, separate from the display screen.

k. Automatically update displayed system information every 10 seconds.11. The controller operating system and programming shall be stored in non-volatile memory.12. Each controller shall monitor all analog inputs and control analog outputs, utilizing 12-bit

analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion.13. Each controller shall be capable of executing proportional, integral, and derivative (PID)

control loops and custom logic control routines.14. PID loops shall be programmable to operate at user-defined intervals, as frequently as one

second.15. The custom application controllers shall include a communications data port for connection

to a personal computer for upload, download, and editing of data and programs.16. The controller shall provide the following diagnostic information via light or LED:

a. Status (power) indicationb. BACnet communications status



c. Indication of the loss of controller function, or network problems17. The service tool using the edit software, and connected to one local controller shall have full

access to all local controllers on the same communications link.

2.14 SYSTEM CONTROLLER HARDWARE

A. General: The system controller shall be a microprocessor based, multi-tasking real time system controller that provides advanced system programming, uplink and downlink communication, polling and other supervisory functions for zone and local controllers. Provide the system controller with an Ethernet connection for remote network access and remote alarm reporting.

B. Operating Environment: The control shall be capable of operating in an environment of 32° to 122°F and 10 to 90% relative humidity non-condensing.

C. Power Loss/Restart: The controller shall be tolerant of power failures. Memory shall be non-volatile or unit shall hold memory of to 30 days minimum on back-up batteries. When a power failure has occurred and power (normal or emergency) is restored, automatically and without operator intervention, the controller shall execute the following restart procedures:1. Come on line.2. Update all monitored functions.3. Implement special building start-up strategies as required.4. Resume operation based on current time and status.

D. Stand-Alone: The controller shall be a true no-host system that does not require a PC or "Host" computer to perform any control functions or communications.

E. Isolation: Field communication ports shall be individually electrically isolated to protect against transients, spikes, and power surges. The ports shall be optically isolated from each other, the controller circuit board and from power wiring. Optical isolation shall be provided either as an integral component to the controller or provide as a separate interface device between the controller and field wiring.

F. Self Diagnostics: The controller shall contain in this program, a self-test procedure for checking communications and verify the functionality of the CPU memory and database.

G. The system controller shall be the integration point for ASHRAE Standard 135-1995 BACnet or LONMARK technology communication protocols. The system controller shall also provide all tools for Java enabled Web browser access via the local area networks (Intranet) and wide area networks (Internet).

H. Graphical User Interface (GUI): 1. The GUI shall be completely icon driven, multi-tasking and employing a graphical operating

environment. The GUI shall not only be for real-time access to any system(s) on the LAN but shall also allow the operator an easy method of information management. Information management shall mean the massaging and manipulation of any system real time or historical data into integrated applications such as report generators, spreadsheets, X/Y charts, database managers, etc. Complete file management and data transfer, such as copying, moving files, automatic and manual means of "cutting and pasting" of data items from one application to another shall be provided as an integral part of this GUI. This GUI shall be completely Windows "compliant":a. Menu and System Access:

1) This GUI shall provide an easy and absolute method of menu and system access. The menu system shall provide the entry point into the entire GUI array of



applications and programs. All the GUI programs and Windows programs shall be accessible through this menu system.

2) This menu system shall be able to call any operator specific menu or menus allowing complete versatility in how the menu structure is designed and used.

3) System Database Save and Restore: Automatic (when changes occur) or manual backup of the system databases (e.g., a DDC Panel point database and/or control program). The operator shall also be able to manually initiate a download of a specified database to any DDC Device in the BAS.

4) System Configuration: Provide an application for DDC System configuration (DDC Device communications addressing, point definition, etc.).

5) Help: Provide a context sensitive, help system to assist the operator in operation of the DDC System.

b. System Security:1) System security shall be on an application by application basis. During the setup

or editing of a particular user the owner shall be able to enable or disable the use of any application or function within an application for each user of the system. Each user security access record shall list each of the applications to which the user has access and the functions that are permitted from within each of theseapplications. The users shall be assigned discrete passwords in order to have access to any particular application or function within the system.

2) As well as application protection each user shall be assigned to a personalized menu (see Menu and System Access). This shall allow for each user to have their own discrete menu system for access into the various applications and dynamic graphic screens.

c. Dynamic Graphics:1) The dynamic graphic portion of this GUI shall allow the operator to access any

system information via a system penetration method. System penetration shall allow the operator to begin at an entire site plan and then zoom in to a particular area for closer inspection and then further zoom in on this area and so on until the detailed color graphic display of a desired portion of the facility is represented.

2) As a minimum a graphic screen shall be designed showing the building, each floor, each major piece of mechanical equipment within each building that is being monitored/controlled, all of which will display the data for each area dynamically.

3) Dynamic point display shall be user selectable from at least the following options: standard text readout, font, style, size, foreground and background colors, border style, plus discrete movement animation allowing animation displays for items such as dampers, gauges, fans, switches, lights, alarm activity, etc.

4) Each mechanical and electrical system that is monitored/controlled by the system shall have a unique dynamic color graphic. The display will be provided by the control contractor and approved by the engineer.

5) The graphical user interface shall allow the user to easily create new displays. A library of standard HVAC equipment, control devices, mechanical systems, tables, lines, circles, rectangles, squares, arrows, etc. shall be provided to allow easy implementation of the changes/additions to the system.

6) The program shall allow JPG, GIF or AutoCad file to be displayed with dynamic data overlaid on to the display.

d. Centralized Scheduling and Modification:1) Calendars shall be provided for displaying and modification of any of the

controller’s time clock functions. Holidays and special functions shall be clearly marked on the calendar. Changes shall be permanent or, for one time or multiple occurrences. Global changes shall be allowed for similar schedules.

e. Alarm Annunciation:1) Upon the incidence of an alarm an alarm window shall be displayed showing the

point in alarm, the time and date of the alarm and a user -selected predefined alarm message (and optionally printed to a user defined printer, printers and/or



dumb terminal devices). Alarms shall be displayed regardless of the application in use including any Windows applications. The program shall display the unacknowledged alarms. The user shall be able to selectively enable or disable the alarm reminder in the event there are unacknowledged alarms.

2) Acknowledgment of alarms shall be from an alarm "pop-up" display and/or from a separate alarm summary. Acknowledgment shall be by a specific event, date range, class, or specific alarm definition and condition. Upon acknowledging the alarm, the name of the operator acknowledging the alarm and the time and date will be associated with the acknowledgment. This data will be stored to the alarm history file and printed to the chosen printers or terminal devices.

3) Automatic or manual display of associated dynamic graphic screens shall be provided for each alarm upon the alarm occurrence.

4) The user shall be automatically placed back to the application or graphic in use at the time of alarm occurrence upon exiting the alarm handling mode.

5) A current alarm summary shall be provided which will dynamically display only alarms that are currently in alarm. As alarms are returned from their respective alarm states the current alarm summary shall be dynamically updated to reflect the change.

f. Trend Management:1) The GUI shall automatically perform time based periodic collection of real time

point data and subsequently store it to the systems hard disk. 2) Storage and manipulation of sampled points shall only be limited by disk space.

Sampling rates shall be user selectable from instantaneous (once a second) to longer periods of time such as one week. Collection of data shall be user selectable to start and stop on specific times and dates.

3) Charting of the trend data shall be an integral part of the trend management program. Third party graphing packages such as Excel or Lotus 123 shall not be required to implement this program. Multiple points shall be capable of displaying on the same chart. Multiple X/Y charts may be run simultaneously displaying either real time data (instantaneous) or historical. X/Y scaling shall be either automatic or user selectable for any chart displayed, each chart may have different scaling. X scales shall be user selectable allowing for display of data over a wide range of times and dates. Display of multiple years of data shall be allowed. The chart display shall be capable of displaying a window of time for multiple years.

g. Multi-tasking:1) The GUI shall be capable of true multi-tasking capabilities. The user shall be able

to use other non-related programs while still running all GUI applications with no interruptions. This shall include the use of real time data in other applications.

h. The user interface shall employ Web browser-like functionality for ease of navigation. This interface shall include, but not be limited to, forward/backwards buttons, home button and a context sensitive locator line (similar to a URL line).

i. Graphic screens on the Web Browser client shall support hypertext links to other Web pages on other Internet or Intranet sites.

j. User log-on identification and passwords shall use Java authentication techniques to prevent unauthorized access.

2.15 SYSTEM CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

A. General: The network controller software shall be multi-tasking, menu-driven, in English language. The software shall operate on a database comprised of control blocks which resemble control hardware devices (receiver controllers, gradual relays, higher or lower of two pressure relays, time delay relays, etc.). The Controls Contractor shall configure these control blocks to attain the proper sequence of control. The user shall be able to add, delete, or modify all control blocks on-line as required.



B. Passwords: Provide a minimum of multiple levels of user definable passwords.

C. Help Menu: On-line location sensitive help shall be provided for each menu item, describing the consequences of making the highlighted menu selection.

D. Login: A login message shall be displayed every time the workstation is connected to a network controller.

E. Backup and Restore: The database in each network controller shall be uploaded to the System Workstation, for archival purposes, and shall be re-downloaded to each network controller at any time. Operating system changes, parameter changes, upgrades and enhancement for network controllers shall be downline loadable from the System Workstation, or via dial-in from a remote location.

F. Programming Functions: The software blocks shall provide all the necessary mathematics, logic, utility, and control functions necessary for proper sequence of control. These functions shall be contained in the network controller operating system to be available in any combination for field programming the unit through RAM memory. As a minimum, these routines shall include, but not be limited to, energy management strategies such as:1. Time or Event Based Scheduling.2. Adaptive Optimum Start/Stop.3. Demand Limiting/Load Shedding.4. Enthalpy Control.5. Hot Water/Outdoor Air Reset.6. Run Time Totalization.7. Alarm Detection and Dial Out.8. Night Setback.9. Historical Trending.

G. Alarms: The network controller shall be capable of comparing analog and digital readings to predetermined high and low limits and annunciate each time a value enters or returns from an alarm condition. Unique high and low limits shall be supplied for each analog point in the system. The system shall be capable of suppressing selected alarm reporting when the primary equipment from which the alarm point is based is in the inactive state. The alarm features of the network controller software shall, as a minimum, provide the following:1. Digital, Analog, and Hi/Lo settings and deadband.2. Sliding Alarm Limits.3. Conditional Alarming.4. Alarm inhibiting through feedback loop.5. Fluttering Alarm Suppression.6. Separate Tailored Alarm Messages for each alarm.7. Auto dial of any alarm condition to a minimum of 10 phone numbers.

H. Communication Diagnostics: The network controller software shall be programmed for self-diagnosing of failure, automatically without query by the operator. In the event of communications failure or limited power failure, the system shall be capable of both notifying a local operator of the specific occurrence, as well as auto dialing the condition to a remote site. Auto-dial out shall be configurable to repeat the alarm while the situation remains unattended and unacknowledged. In addition to automatic self-diagnostics, communications statistics on zone and general application controller communications shall be maintained. These statistics shall tabulate total communications attempted versus successful and unsuccessful communications by unit number. The option to reset communications statistics to zero (0) at any time shall be provided.



I. Interfaces to Other Manufacturer's Equipment: Where specified, each Network Controller shall be equipped with standard software blocks with which to interface to other manufacturer's equipment. The software blocks shall be defined by the Controls Contractor to read/write analog values and digital status to/from other manufacturer's equipment for alarm, trend, operator advisory, graphic display and other system uses. Communications between the Network Controller and other manufacturer's equipment shall occur in the same manner and with the same software as that used for communications with Dedicated and General Application Controllers.

J. The software shall employ object-oriented technology for representation of all data and control devices within the system. In addition, adherence to industry standards for ASHRAE BACnet and LONMARK is required to assure interoperability between control system manufacturers. The control contractor must provide a PICS document showing the installed system’s BACnet compliance level of 3.

K. The software must incorporate the ability to access all data using Java enabled browsers without requiring proprietary operator interface and configuration programs.

L. The software shall allow alarms to be routed to E-mail messages and paging services.

M. Access to the system controller shall be via the Internet from a remote location and from a local computer operator’s station (when specified) by direct connection to an Ethernet LAN. The control contractor shall provide a connection to the Internet to enable this access via high-speed modem or via the Intranet to a corporate server providing access to an Internet Service Provider. The owner shall pay monthly access charges for the connection and service provider.

2.16 OPERATOR INTERFACE STATION

A. Provide an operator workstation and locate as directed by the owner. The workstation shall include the following:1. Dedicated IBM PC or 100% compatible computer.2. Intel Core 2 Duo @ 2.5 GHZ or faster 512 KB cache.3. Intel 440 BX chipset or later, 160 GB Ultra ATA Hard Drive.4. 48X or faster Read/Write CD-Rom, 4 GB RAM.5. Standard Video Graphics, 512 MB on board RAM memory.6. One printer port and page printer (Ink Jet or Laser) for report printing.7. Serial/Parallel communication ports, Ethernet Controller, (4) minimum USB 2.0 ports.8. Microsoft Compatible Mouse.9. CD-RW with DVD for backup.10. Surge Protector.11. 19” LCD Flat Screen display monitor.12. PS/2 standard keyboard, and a two button optical mouse.13. Windows XP Professional with SP2 and MS Internet Explorer 7.

2.17 WIRING AND CONDUIT

A. All wire will be copper and meet the minimum wire size and insulation class listed below:

Wire Class Wire Size Isolation ClassPower 12 Gauge 600 VoltClass One 14 Gauge Std. 600 VoltClass Two 18 Gauge Std. 300 VoltClass Three 18 Gauge Std. 300 Volt



Wire Class Wire Size Isolation ClassCommunications Per Mfr. Per Mfr.

B. Power and Class One wiring may be run in the same conduit. Class Two and Three wiring and communications wiring may be run in the same conduit.

C. Where different wiring classes terminate within the same enclosure, maintain clearances and install barriers per the National Electric Code.

D. Where wiring is required to be installed in conduit, EMT shall be used. Conduit shall be minimum 1/2 inch galvanized EMT. Compression fittings shall be used for interior locations and watertight compression fittings for exterior locations. Provide conduit seal off fitting where exterior conduits enter the building or between areas of high temperature/moisture differential.

E. Flexible metallic conduit (max. 3 feet) shall be used for connections to motors, actuators, controllers, and sensors mounted on vibration producing equipment. Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be use in exterior locations and interior locations subject to moisture.

F. Junction boxes shall be provided at all cable splices, equipment terminations, and transitions from EMT to flexible conduit. Interior dry location J-boxes shall be galvanized pressed steel, nominal four-inch square with blank cover. Exterior and damp location J-boxes shall be cast alloy FS boxes with threaded hubs and gasketed covers.

G. Where the space above the ceiling is a supply or return air plenum, the wiring shall be plenum rated. Teflon wiring can be run without conduit above suspended ceilings. EXCEPTION: Any wire run in suspended ceilings that is used to control outside air dampers or to connect the system to the fire management system shall be in conduit.

2.18 COAXIAL CABLE

A. Coaxial cable shall conform to RG62 or RG59 rating.

B. Provide plenum rated coaxial cable when running in return air plenums.

2.19 FIBER OPTIC CABLE

A. Acceptable fiber optic cable shall include the following sizes; 50/125, 62.5/125 or 100/140. Only glass fiber is acceptable, no plastic.

B. Fiber optic cable shall only be installed and terminated by an experienced contractor. The BAS contractor shall submit to the Engineer the name of the intended contractor of the fiber optic cable with his submittal documents.

2.20 ENCLOSURES

A. All controllers and field interface panels shall be mounted in new enclosures unless otherwise stated in this specification.

B. All outside mounted enclosures shall meet the NEMA-4 rating.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

A. Provide a project manager who shall, as a part of his duties, be responsible for the following activities:1. Coordination between the Contractor and all other trades, Owner, local authorities, and the

design team.2. Scheduling of manpower, material delivery, equipment installation and checkout.3. Maintenance of construction records such as project scheduling and manpower planning

and AutoCad for project co-ordination and project record drawings.

3.02 SYSTEM SETUP AND INSTALLATION

A. System setup and installation shall include but is not limited to the following:1. Database entry and database setup of all input and output points, including alarm printouts

with individual alarm messages, as described on the input/output point list.2. Programming and full setup of all sequences described in the sequence of operation section

of the specification as shown in Part 4 - Sequence of Operation & Points List.3. Complete checkout and testing of all functions, operations and features of the building

automation system as described in this specification including, but not limited to, all features and functions utilized in the system setup as well as features and capabilities of the software and hardware described as provided and installed but not implemented or used at this time.

3.03 WIRING INSTALLATION METHODS

A. Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, rough-in drawings and equipment details. Install electrical components and use electrical products complying with requirements of applicable Division 26 sections of these specifications.

B. The term "control wiring" is defined to include the providing of wire, conduit, and miscellaneous materials as required for mounting and connecting electric or electronic control devices as follows:1. Consist of wiring in pilot circuits of contractors, starters, relays, etc., and wiring for valve and

damper operators.2. For single phase devices where power current passes through controller, wiring between

controller and device shall be considered control wiring; wiring to device from electric panel shall be considered power wiring.

C. Install control wiring system in conduit for electric/electronic control systems. Conceal wiring/conduit, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. UL plenum rated cable shall be allowable in air plenums as approved by local codes. All control wiring shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner parallel to building lines with adequate support. Provide shielded cabling where required to prevent noise from being superimposed on control system wiring. Both conduit and plenum wiring shall be supported from or anchored to structural members. Conduit or plenum wiring supported from or anchored to piping, duct supports, the ceiling suspension system, or the electrical conduits is not acceptable. Wiring buried in slab on grade concrete or explosion proof areas shall be in rigid metal conduit. Provide adequate strain relief for all field terminations.

D. Number-code or color-code conductors, excluding those used for individual zone controls, appropriately for future identification and servicing of control system.



E. All line voltage power wiring required because of substitution of equipment specified in this section, shall be provided by this section.

3.04 CONTROL DEVICE LOCATIONS

A. Adjustable sensors and thermostats shall be mounted according to the construction drawings. The contractor shall submit coordination documents to the architect indicating intended sensor/thermostat locations including intended mounting heights for architect review and approval. Upon completion of the architect’s comments, the documents shall be submitted to the mechanical engineer for final review.

B. Remote control devices not in local panels shall be accessible for adjustment and service – below 7' above finished floor whenever possible.

C. Locate all temperature control devices wired under Division 26.

D. Local control enclosures shall be mounted at eye level for accessibility and service, and located within 50 feet of the system served, unless otherwise shown on the plans.

3.05 IDENTIFICATION

A. All control equipment shall be clearly identified by control shop drawing designation as follows:1. Control valves and damper actuators - brass tags or engraved bakelite tags2. Other remote control devices - metal tags or laser printed, adhesive backed, metalized

polyester film labels.3. Control Enclosures - engraved nameplate with panel number and system served.4. Control Conduit Junction Boxes - Painted medium blue.

3.06 MOUNTING AND INSTALLATION PRACTICES FOR DEVICES

A. Well-mounted sensors will include thermal conducting compound within the well to insure good heat transfer to the sensor.

B. Actuators will be firmly mounted to give positive movement and linkage will be adjusted to give smooth continuous movement throughout 100 percent of the stroke.

C. Relay outputs will include transient suppression across all coils. Suppression devices shall limit transients to 150% of the rated coil voltage.

D. Water line mounted sensors shall be removable without shutting down the system in which they are installed.

E. Outdoor air sensor shall be placed in a location approved by the engineer.

F. All control valves, wells for immersion sensors and taps for flow and pressure instruments shall be provided by the controls contractor and installed by the mechanical contractor under the controls contractor supervision.

G. All control dampers, and air flow stations shall be provided by the controls contractor and installed by the mechanical contractor under the controls contractor supervision, unless they are components of packaged equipment.

H. The controls contractor shall provide assistance to the balancing contractor with control adjustments. as required to obtain design flows.



3.07 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS

A. All relays, switches, transducers and other field interface devices, for equipment located within the mechanical equipment rooms, shall be panel mounted. Panels shall be NEMA type suitable for applications as required with hinged door and key-lock latch. Size for 20% spare mounting capacity.

B. Manual switches and indicating devices shall be flush-mounted on the panel face. Provide engraved bakelite or lithographed metal nameplates for all items on the panel face with white 1/2 inch high letters on a black background. Paper or embossed labels are not acceptable.

C. Mount internal components securely on steel removable sub-panels. Each component shall be individually labeled with function and device identification, as shown on the control shop drawings. Label information shall be printed with a laser printer on adhesive backed metalized polyester film. Paper or embossed labels are not acceptable.

D. Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices pre-piped and wired with color-coded tubing/conductors shall be neatly installed in plastic tray and/or tie-wrapped. All wiring within the panel shall be run in wiring tray in accordance with NEMA and UL standards, and shall meet all local codes. Terminals for field connections shall be UL listed for 600V service, individually identified per control shop drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control air terminations for field connection shall be individually identified control shop drawings.

E. Provide a convenience 120 VAC receptacle in each panel and a fused on/off power switch for control power sources to each local panel. Provide a final as-built control drawing, reduced, laminated, and mounted inside of the panel door.

3.08 MOUNTING AND INSTALLATION PRACTICES FOR ZONE AND LOCAL CONTROLLERS

A. Controllers are to be mounted vertically.

B. The 120 VAC power wiring to the network of Controllers shall be a dedicated run, with a separate breaker. Each run will include a separate hot, neutral, and ground wire. The ground wire will terminate at the breaker panel ground. This circuit will not feed any other circuit or device.

C. Utilize a true earth ground. Do not use a corroded or galvanized pipe, or structural steel.

D. Controllers will be clearly labeled with the model number of the controller. In addition, all status lights will be identified with labels to indicate their function.

3.09 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

A. The Contractor shall provide all labor necessary to install, initialize, start-up, and debug all system software as described in this section. This includes any operating system software or other third party software necessary for successful operation of the system.

3.10 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE

A. General: The system installation shall be complete and tested for proper operation prior to acceptance testing for the Owner's authorized representative. A letter shall be submitted to the Engineer requesting system acceptance. This letter shall certify all controls are installed and the software programs have been completely exercised for proper equipment operation. Acceptance testing shall commence at a mutually agreeable time within ten (10) calendar days of request.



When the test procedures have been demonstrated to the Owner's representative and pass, the system will be accepted. The One-Year Warranty Support Plan shall begin at this time.

B. Acceptance Test Procedures: DDC control panels shall be demonstrated via a functional end-to-end test. Prior to an acceptance test review by the Engineer, the contractor shall submit a point by point checklist to the Engineer with descriptions of how the following tests were performed. Such that:1. All output channels shall be commanded (on/off, stop/start, adjust, etc.) and their portion

verified.2. All analog input channels shall be verified for proper operation.3. All digital input channels shall be verified by changing the state of the filed device and

observing the appropriate change of displayed value.4. Automatic control operation of PID control loops shall be verified by introducing an error or

change into the system and observing the proper corrective system response.5. Automatic control operation of sequences of operation shall be verified by introducing an

error or change into the system and observing the proper corrective system response.6. Selected time and setpoint schedules shall be verified by changing the schedule and

observing the correct response on the controlled outputs.7. Communication with each DDC control panel shall be demonstrated.8. All available and specified system reports and logs shall be demonstrated at the system

workstation.9. Correct system start-up and shutdown procedures shall be demonstrated.10. All controllers shall be demonstrated to operate in a standalone mode.11. Workstation Operator commands will be explained and demonstrated.12. If any point or sequence should fail testing, perform necessary repair action and retest failed

point and all interlocked points.

C. Project Record Documentation: After a successful acceptance demonstration, submit project record drawings of the completed project for final approval. After receiving final approval, supply three (or as specified in Division 01) complete project record drawing sets (maximum ANSI "D" size), together with AutoCad diskettes to the owner. The original master site software license and disposition of any required software keys shall be included.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit six (6) copies (or as specified in Division 01) of operation and maintenance manuals. Include the following:1. Update all drawings and data required in the control submittal to a finalized form and add the

following information:a. An operator's manual which will include detailed instructions for all operations of the

system.b. A programmer's manual which will include all information necessary to perform

programming functions.c. A language manual which will include a detailed description of the language used and

all routines used by the system.d. An operator's reference table listing the addresses of all connected input points and

output points. Settings shall be shown where applicable.e. Complete program listing file and parameter listing file for all programs.f. A copy of the warranty.g. Operating and maintenance cautions and instructions.h. Recommended spare parts list.

3.11 TRAINING

A. Contractor shall provide to the engineer a training class outline prior to any scheduled training.



B. Training sessions shall be provided for the Owner's personnel by factory trained control engineers and technicians.

C. The control contractor shall conduct four - four (4) hour on-site training sessions as a course for designated owner's personnel in the maintenance and operation of the control system. One course shall be given prior to system acceptance and one additional course shall be provided during the Warranty Support Plan period.

D. The course shall include instruction on specific systems and instructions for operating the installed system on include as a minimum:1. HVAC system overview2. Operation of Control System3. Function of each Component4. System Operating Procedures5. Programming Procedures6. Maintenance Procedures

3.12 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: The control system shall be warranted to be free from defects in both material and workmanship for a period of two (2) years of normal use and service. This warranty shall become effective the date the owner accepts the system. The warranty shall include standard workday emergency problem response and all Warranty Support Plan preventative maintenance items (i.e. sensor calibration, linkage adjustment, etc.). An emergency service number shall be provided to the owner. Response shall be within four (4) hours to the phone call. Provide information and costs to the owner for an Extended Support Agreement prior to Warranty Support Plan period expiration.

B. Upgrades: Include all controller firmware and software updates for the installed system version at no additional cost to the system owner during the warranty period.

3.13 SPARES

A. Provide one each of the following spare parts:1. Room Sensor2. Zone Controller Board (one of each type)3. Local Controller Board (one of each type)

3.14 EXPANSION

A. System Controller Hardware and Software must be provided with expansion capabilities for the addition of control, points, etc. for future remodel of remainder of building.

PART 4 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS AND POINTS LISTS

4.01 CHANGE OVER DIVERTING VALVE CONTROL

A. Design intent:1. The change over system serves air handling units in the mechanical penthouse.2. The diverting valves shall change the mode of operation based on the mixed air

temperatures of the air handling units.



B. The DDC shall provide heating and cooling for the mechanical penthouse dual temperature zone based on the following:1. The heating mode shall be enabled whenever the mixed air temperature at (E)AHU-4 or

(E)AHU-7 under Alternate E falls below 55°F (adj.).2. The cooling mode shall be enabled whenever (E)AHU-4, (E)AHU-5, (E)AHU-6, or (E)AHU-7

have a call for cooling.3. The heating mode, based on the mixed air temperature for (E)AHU-4 or (E)AHU-7 under

Alternate E, shall take precedence over a call for cooling from (E)AHU-5, (E)AHU-6, or (E)AHU-7.

C. The 2 position diverting valves shall open to the heating or chilled water system during the associated temperature mode of operation.

D. Pump P-1 Control:1. Whenever the dual temperature system is calling for heating and the diverting valves have

opened to the heating water system, pump P-1 shall energize.2. When the dual temperature system changes to cooling mode, the pump P-1 shall de-

energize, and after a delay of (2) minutes (adj.), the diverting valves shall open to the chilled water system.

E. Safeties:1. Upon sensing the failure of the pump P-1 through its status “off” for five (5) continuous

seconds, the failed pump shall be disabled and alarmed at the BAS workstation.

4.02 VARIABLE VOLUME AIR HANDLING CONTROL – (E)AHU-4

A. Design intent:1. This is a variable air volume air handling unit utilizing variable air volume terminal units

(VAV’s) serving the renovated areas of the school.2. This variable air volume air-handling unit is primarily designed for cooling. The existing

cooling coil shall utilize dual temperature piping to provide preheating. Temperature control is provided by a cooling coil and an airside economizer. The outside air damper shall delivery a constant set amount of outside air. The supply fan shall be controlled by itsassociated variable frequency drives.

B. General:1. The scheduled operation time is by the DDC system. The system shall operate continuously

during building occupied hours.2. When the supply and return fan are off, the outside air damper shall be closed, and the

return air damper shall be open. When a start is commanded, the supply fan shall energize and after 30 seconds, the outside air damper shall open to its minimum position.

C. Supply static pressure control:1. The supply fan variable frequency drive shall modulate the fan speed to maintain a minimum

of 1.5” w.g. positive supply duct pressure at all duct static pressure transmitters (adjustable at front end workstation). The duct sensing references shall be located downstream from the fan approximately 2/3’s the distance of the duct run. Refer to HVAC plans for sensor locations.

2. The transmitter shall be located in straight runs of duct to prevent false signals from being transmitted to the BAS.

D. Supply static pressure setpoint reset control:1. The Duct static pressure setpoint shall be reset using trim & respond logic within the range

0.8“ W.C. to 1.5“ W.C. When fan is initially started, setpoint shall be 1.0“ W.C. Operate the



fan at this setpoint for 20 minutes (Adj.). Thereafter the following reset shall be activated. Every 2 minutes (Adj.), trim (reduce) the setpoint by 0.05“ W.C. (Adj.) if there are 0, 1 or 2 (Adj.) pressure requests. If there are more than 2 pressure requests, increase the setpoint by 0.05“ W.C. (Adj.) times the number of pressure requests minus 2 but no more than 0.15“ W.C. every 2 minutes.

2. One pressure request is generated for each zone with a VAV damper >80% open, two requests shall be generated for each zone with a damper >90% open.

3. Each zone shall have a “Zone Importance Multiplier” that allows rogue zones to be ignored from the sequence (multiplier of zero), and critical zones to exceed the ignore value (multiplier of 2 or greater). This value shall be adjustable from the operator workstation.

4. Each zone shall have a request-hours clock that tracks the number of hours each zone has posted a pressure request. This allows quick diagnosis of “rogue” zones.

E. Return fan speed and building pressure control:1. The return fan variable frequency drive shall modulate the fan speed to maintain a

differential pressure of 0.10” W.C. across the return fan plenum and outdoors as sensed by a differential pressure transmitter.

2. The exhaust air damper shall modulate to maintain the building pressurization of 0.03” W.G. (adjustable at front end workstation) with respect to the outdoors as sensed by the building static pressure sensor. The BAS shall monitor the building static pressure and generate an alarm if the building static pressure drops below 0.03” W.C. with respect to ambient outdoor static pressure.

F. Discharge air temperature control:1. The changeover water valve shall modulate to maintain the discharge air set point

temperature of 55°F (adjustable at front end workstation).2. During occupied mode, the setpoint is reset from 55°F (Adj.) when the outdoor air

temperature is 75°F (Adj.) and above, proportionally up to T-Max when the outdoor air temperature is 60°F (Adj.) and below. T-Max shall be reset using trim & respond logic within the range 55°F to 65°F. When fan is initially started, setpoint shall be 60°F. Operate the fan at this setpoint for 20 minutes (Adj.). Thereafter the following reset shall be activated. Every 2 minutes (Adj.), increase the setpoint by 0.25°F (Adj.) if there are 0, 1 or 2 reset requests. If there are more than 2 reset requests, trim (reduce) the setpoint by 0.5°F times the number of reset requests minus 2 but no more than 1.0°F every 2 minutes.

3. A reset request is generated for each VAV zone where the cooling loop output is 90% until it falls below 80%.

G. Mixed air damper control:1. The mixed air controller shall modulate the OA and return dampers to maintain a mixed air

set point 3oF below the discharge air setpoint. The unit shall be capable of 100% OA when outdoor conditions allow.

2. The minimum outside air damper shall modulate with changing supply fan speeds to deliver a constant minimum amount of outside air as indicated on the schedule or as determined by the indoor air quality control sequence. Whenever the outside air temperature and return air temperature reach 2°F of each other, the DDC system shall lock the outside air damper in its current position until the temperature difference between return and outside air becomes greater than 2°F or the unit goes into economizer mode.

H. Indoor air quality control:1. Provide a single OSA CO2 sensor in the outside air stream of a representative air handling

unit.2. Locate a RA CO2 sensor in the return duct. The minimum OSA damper position will be reset

to maintain a differential of 400 ppm between the OSA CO2 sensor and the RA CO2 sensor.



3. Because the unit is not capable of 100% OSA at extreme conditions, the mixed air temperature set point shall take precedence over the air quality control whenever the CO2

sensor set point is not satisfied.

I. Morning warm up:1. The DDC system shall poll the zone sensors and determine the coldest zone temperature.

This space temperature shall be used to determine the amount of time to preheat the space to the occupied setpoint by the normal occupied time. It will vary from 0 minutes when the space temperature is equal or greater than 71°F to 120 minutes when the temperature is equal or less than 58°F. The supply fan shall run with the outside air damper fan closed and the return air damper open. The unit is indexed to occupied control at the scheduled start time.

J. Unoccupied/Night Setback Mode:1. The outside air damper shall close, and the return air damper shall open. The fan shall cycle

to maintain a night setback temperature setpoint when any sensor has a call for heating. All parameters shall be independently adjustable.

2. All associated air handling unit VAV terminals shall close shut. During a call for night time heat, all zones calling for heat shall open to their heating CFM. Other zones shall also open so there is a minimum total of 15,000 CFM of VAV terminal minimums open prior to the unit starting. Once all zones are satisfied, all terminal units shall close.

K. Safeties:1. Emergency fan shutdown shall be accomplished via an interconnect to the total coverage

smoke detection system complying with UFC Standard 10-2. Coordinate the ZAM location with the Fire Alarm Contractor/Installer.

2. The supply fan shall de-energize if the smoke detector, freeze protection thermostat or high discharge pressure safeties are energized. These safeties shall all be hardwired and shall all generate an alarm at the BAS.

3. The freeze protection thermostat shall be located across downstream face of the hot water coil one per every 20 S.F. of coil area. The set point shall be set to 37°F (adjustable at the device mounted on the unit). This safety shall be hardwired and shall generate an alarm at the BAS.

4. The changeover coil pump shall energize and run continuously whenever the outside air temperature drops below 40° F, or whenever the changeover coil control valve is energized to open. Upon sensing the failure of the coil circulating pump through its status “off” for five (5) continuous seconds, the failed pump shall be disabled and alarmed at the BAS workstation.

L. Points List:1. Refer to Drawings for points list and control diagram.

4.03 CONSTANT VOLUME AIR HANDLING CONTROL – (E)AHU-7-ALTERNATE E

A. Design intent:1. This is a constant volume air handling unit serving the Alternate E Cafetorium renovation.2. The existing cooling coil shall utilize dual temperature piping to provide full heating and

cooling. The outside air damper shall delivery a constant set amount of outside air. The supply fan shall run constant during occupied hours.

B. General:1. The scheduled operation time is by the DDC system. The system shall operate continuously

during building occupied hours.



2. When the supply is off, the outside air damper shall be closed. When a start is commanded, the supply fan shall energize and after 30 seconds, the outside air damper shall open to it minimum position.

C. Discharge air temperature control:1. The changeover water valve shall modulate to maintain the discharge air set point

temperature of 55°F at a call for cooling and 95°F at a call for cooling from the new space temperature sensor (adjustable at front end workstation).

D. Mixed air damper control:1. The mixed air controller shall modulate the OA and return dampers to maintain a mixed air

set point 3oF below the discharge air setpoint. The unit shall be capable of 100% OA when outdoor conditions allow.

2. The minimum outside air damper shall modulate as determined by the indoor air quality control sequence. Whenever the outside air temperature and return air temperature reach 2°F of each other, the DDC system shall lock the outside air damper in its current position until the temperature difference between return and outside air becomes greater than 2°F or the unit goes into economizer mode.

E. Indoor air quality control:1. Provide a single OSA CO2 sensor in the outside air stream of a representative air handling

unit.2. Locate a RA CO2 sensor in the return duct. The minimum OSA damper position will be reset

to maintain a differential of 400 ppm between the OSA CO2 sensor and the RA CO2 sensor.3. Because the unit is not capable of 100% OSA at extreme conditions, the mixed air

temperature set point shall take precedence over the air quality control whenever the CO2

sensor set point is not satisfied.

F. Morning warm up:1. The DDC system shall use the space temperature to determine the amount of time to

preheat the space to the occupied setpoint by the normal occupied time. It will vary from 0 minutes when the space temperature is equal or greater than 71°F to 120 minutes when the temperature is equal or less than 58°F. The supply fan shall run with the outside air damper fan closed and the return air damper open. The unit is indexed to occupied control at the scheduled start time.

G. Unoccupied/Night Setback Mode:1. The outside air damper shall close, and the return air damper shall open. The fan shall cycle

to maintain a night setback temperature setpoint when the temperature sensor has a call for heating. A call for cooling shall be locked out during unoccupied mode. All parameters shall be independently adjustable.

H. Safeties:1. Emergency fan shutdown shall be accomplished via an interconnect to the total coverage

smoke detection system complying with UFC Standard 10-2. Coordinate the ZAM location with the Fire Alarm Contractor/Installer.

2. The supply fan shall de-energize if the smoke detector, freeze protection thermostat or high discharge pressure safeties are energized. These safeties shall all be hardwired and shall all generate an alarm at the BAS.

3. The freeze protection thermostat shall be located across downstream face of the hot water coil one per every 20 S.F. of coil area. The set point shall be set to 37°F (adjustable at the device mounted on the unit). This safety shall be hardwired and shall generate an alarm at the BAS.



4. The changeover coil pump shall energize and run continuously whenever the outside air temperature drops below 40° F, or whenever the changeover coil control valve is energized to open. Upon sensing the failure of the coil circulating pump through its status “off” for five (5) continuous seconds, the failed pump shall be disabled and alarmed at the BAS workstation.

I. Points List:1. Refer to Drawings for points list and control diagram.

4.04 EXISTING AIR HANDLING UNITS (E)AHU-4,5,6,7,8,9

A. Design intent:1. These are air handling units serving various spaces within the building.2. Existing controls sequences and points are to remain.

B. Safeties:1. Provide a differential pressure sensor across the replaced filter sections. Provide a dirty filter

safety to de-energize the supply fan and generate an alarm to the BAS for pressure drops across the filter section of greater than 1.0” W.C.

C. Points List:1. Refer to Drawings for points list and control diagram

4.05 VARIABLE VOLUME SINGLE ZONE ROOFTOP UNIT CONTROL (RTU-1) -ALTERNATE E

A. Design Intent:1. The rooftop units shall have factory provided variable volume single zone controller with a

DDC interface card. The DDC shall monitor and control the commercial rooftop unit in a stand-alone mode or as directed by the building automation system. Automation system to send control setpoints, control damper positions and etc. to the factory controller via the interface card as required to meet the below sequence of operations.

B. Rooftop Unit Control: The factory controller and building automation system (BAS) shall perform the following rooftop control strategies, provide the points listed on the point list and provide the specified monitoring and diagnostics.1. AHU Occupied Sequence of Operation

a. General:1) The occupied / unoccupied scheduled operation time is by the DDC system. 2) When the supply and return fans are off, the outside air dampers shall be closed,

the return air damper shall be open, the DX compressors shall be off and the gas heat shall be off.

3) When a start is commanded, the supply and return fans shall energize and after 30 seconds and the outside air damper shall open to the occupied ventilation position.

b. Return fan speed and building pressure control:1) The return fan variable frequency drive shall modulate the fan speed to maintain

the building pressurization of 0.05” W.G. (adjustable at front end workstation) with respect to the outdoors as sensed by the building static pressure sensor. Refer to control drawings for sensor location.

c. Space temperature control:1) When the space temperature is below the heating setpoint modulate the gas heat

to maintain the heating space temperature setpoint. The supply fan shall operate at 75% airflow. The maximum unit discharge air temperature shall be limited to 100°F and the minimum DAT shall be 50°F. If the discharge air temperature is at



the maximum setpoint and the space temperature is below setpoint for 5 minutes, the VFD shall increase the airflow to maintain the setpoint .

2) When the space temperature is above the cooling setpoint modulate the economizer dampers and stage the DX compressors in sequence to maintain the discharge air temperature at 55F. The supply fan shall operate at 50% airflow.a) If the space temperature drops below setpoint, raise the discharge air

temperature as necessary to maintain the space temperature.b) If the space temperature rises above the setpoint, the VFD will modulate the

airflow to maintain the setpoint.3) Economizer control:

a) The unit shall utilize dry bulb economizer controls.b) When the outside air temperature is below the return air temperature the

mixed air controller shall modulate the OA and return dampers to maintain a mixed air set point 3oF below the discharge air setpoint. The unit shall be capable of 100% OA economizer when outdoor conditions allow.

c) The economizer shall be automatically locked out at an outside air dry bulb temperature of 65°F and above.

d. Indoor air quality control:1) A CO2 sensor shall be provided for air quality control. Locate a CO2 sensor in the

return air duct. Minimum OA damper position will be reset up or down from a CO2signal to maintain the return air setpoint below 900 ppm (adj.) of CO2.

2) Because the unit is not capable of 100% outside air at extreme outdoor conditions, the mixed air temperature setpoint shall take precedence over the air quality control whenever the CO2 setpoint is not satisfied.

3) To maintain adequate building pressurization during occupied mode the outside air damper position shall have a minimum position of 10% open.

2. Safeties:a. The supply fan and return fan shall de-energize if the smoke detector safety is

energized. The safety shall all be hardwired and shall all generate an alarm at the BAS.b. Generate an alarm at the BAS upon fan, gas heat or DX cooling failure.c. The unit discharge air temperature sensor shall serve as the unit low limit temperature

alarm. Stop the supply fan and generate an alarm at the BAS upon sensing a discharge air temperature below 35°F.

3. Unoccupied Mode:a. The supply fan and return fan shall cycle at full airflow and the furnace section shall

stage to full heat to maintain the unoccupied mode heating setpoint.4. Morning Warm-up:

a. Morning warm-up shall be indexed to start at a scheduled start time.b. The outside air damper and relief air damper shall be closed and the return air damper

shall be open. Modulate the gas heat and cycle the supply and return fans at full airflow to maintain the occupied space temperature setpoint.

c. Once the occupied time schedule starts, the unit shall go into the occupied mode.

C. Unit Status Report1. For each rooftop unit, the BAS shall provide an operating status summary of the following

information to provide the operator with critical rooftop operating data. a. Unit type and sizeb. Operating modec. Active rooftop diagnosticsd. Active cooling/heating modee. Active cooling space setpointf. Active heating space setpointg. Supply air temperatureh. Zone temperature



i. Supply fan statusj. Return fan statusk. Active space pressurel. Compressor on/off statusm. Condenser on/off statusn. Economizer statuso. Economizer position – percent

D. Diagnostics1. The BAS system shall be able to alarm from all sensed points from the rooftop units and

diagnostic alarms sensed by the unit controller. Alarm limits shall be designated for all sensed points.

2. Individual rooftop diagnostic and alarm statuses shall include the following latching items for each rooftop unit:a. Emergency stopb. Supply fan failurec. Return fan failured. Compressor trip (each circuit)e. Compressor contactor fail (each circuit)

3. Individual rooftop diagnostic and alarm statuses shall include the following non-latching items (items not sent through the BAS) for each rooftop unit:a. Supply air temperature sensor failureb. Auxiliary temperature sensor failurec. Occupied zone cool/heat setpoint failured. Evaporator temperature sensor failure (each circuit)e. Condenser Temperature sensor failure (each circuit)f. Heat failureg. Unoccupied zone cool/heat setpoint failure h. Space static pressure setpoint failurei. Building pressure sensor failurej. Return air temperature sensor failurek. Unit communications lossl. Heat communications failurem. Supply air temperature cool/heat setpoint fail

E. Points list:1. Refer to Drawings for points list & control diagram. Points list on plans indicates points

provided by and/or installed by the TCC. Coordinate final extent of field installed/provided controls with the RTU factory controller. All points indicated on the control diagram shall either be factory provided and available to the BAS though the interface card or field provided by the TCC.

4.06 VAV TERMINAL UNIT AND MISCELLANEOUS EXHAUST FAN CONTROL

A. System Control:1. The VAV controller modulates the primary air damper between its minimum & maximum

settings to control the space temperature. When heat is required, the VAV controller modulates the primary air damper between its minimum and maximum heating settings and opens the reheat valve open as necessary to control the space temperature. When the space temperature is between the heating and cooling temperature set points, the VAV controller shall modulate the primary air damper to its minimum position.

2. The heating mode sequence shall be disabled if the heating water system is disabled.3. In the unoccupied mode, the minimum air valve position shall be 0%.



4. Occupied/Un-occupied Exhaust Fans EF-1,2,3,5,6,8: The DDC controller shall start/stop miscellaneous exhaust fans and monitor their status.

5. Temperature Controlled Exhaust Fans EF-4,7,9 & TF-1:a. The DDC controller shall start/stop miscellaneous exhaust fans and monitor their status.b. The fan shall stage in response to the associated DDC space temperature sensor.

Upon a rise in space temperature above the space set point the fan shall energize.

4.07 MISCELLANEOUS DDC CONTROL

A. MDF Room Fan Coil Unit: Unit shall be controlled by a programmable thermostat system provided by the unit manufacturer. Provide an alarm point to the DDC system if the temperature, as sensed by the space temperature sensor, rises above 80°F (adj.).

4.08 MISCELLANEOUS NON-DDC CONTROL

A. Hydronic Cabinet Unit Heater Control:1. Provide single room temperature thermostat to cycle fan motor and open control valve to

maintain constant space temperature.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLSValdez Elementary INTEGRATED BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (IBAS)OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 23 09 30 - 1

SECTION 23 09 30

INTEGRATED BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (IBAS)

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 23 09 23 – Temperature Control Systems – DDC

B. Other Division 23 and/or 26 sections that specify the Subsystems to be integrated to the IBAS.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. This section along with those for the integrated Subsystems are responsible for joint efforts in integrating the Subsystems to the IBAS.

B. The Controls Contractor and Contractor for other integration division 15/16/17 Subsystems shall set up the Subsystems to communicate the specified data with the IBAS. Subsystems that are BTL-listed shall be set up to use BACnet Alarm and Event services for alarm reporting and BACnet Schedule/Calendar objects for scheduling.

C. Communications address and device/object instance numbering are the responsibility of each Subsystem’s Contractor.

D. All modifications to the IBAS for representing/controlling data from the Subsystems (e.g., graphics, alarm reporting, trend data presentation, schedule viewing/changes, etc.) are the responsibility of this section’s Contractor.

E. This sections’ Contractor shall review the sections for all integrated Subsystems to determine the scope of the communicated data and operator interface functions for the IBAS.

F. See Part 3 of this section for more information.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Prior to commencement of the work submit:

1.04 GRAPHIC SCREENS AND REPORTS

A. Meet with the DPS Controls Application Engineer and the Subsystem contractors prior to developing the following submittals to determine the graphic screen design, any communicated point/data list additions/choices, the point/data naming convention, the alarming/trending requirements (including alarm priority levels), the schedules required, and/or any other items listed below regardless of their level of definition in the design.

B. Submit for approval a list of the graphic/report screens to be provided; and, for each screen, provide a conceptual layout of the screen and data, including those linkages to other pages/screens. Details on the required graphics/reports are in Part 3 of the specification.1. All Subsystem data shall be represented or listed.2. The point/data naming convention to be used.3. All operator interface functions required by the specification shall be represented.



4. For Subsystems that are not BTL-listed (and/or do not support BACnet Alarm & Event services, Schedule/Calendar objects, and/or Trend Log objects):a. Include an alarm list that defines the messages to be used for each class of alarms, and

the routing (i.e., to what printers/terminal) of each class of alarms.b. If applicable, include a start/stop schedule list that defines each unique schedule to be

provided, the details of the schedule, and the equipment affected by the schedule.c. Include a list of all points/data to be trended.

5. For each screen proposed include a list of all setpoints and other operating parameters to be available via the IBAS.

6. The data to be trended.7. Coordinate the above effort with the Subsystems’ contractors to ensure that it properly

represents the designs.8. System Test Plan – Submit the plan and forms to be used in the System Test procedures

described in Part 3.9. Commissioning: Provide for approval all materials as required by the Commissioning

Specification.10. Any product data sheets, if applicable.

C. Upon acceptance of the system installation submit the following as-built documentation:1. Completed test forms.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer shall guarantee the work to be free from defects in workmanship under normal use for a period of 24 months from date of acceptance of system by Owner.

B. Modify any defective workmanship within guarantee period, immediately, without cost to Owner.

1.06 COMMISSIONING

A. Commissioning shall comply with Sections 01915 – Commissioning, and 15995 – Mechanical Commissioning.

B. The Commissioning specifications shall include requirements to test all communications functions between the IBAS and the Subsystems.

C. The IBAS Contractor shall participate in the Commissioning tasks as specified. These tasks shall not be a substitute for proper start-up and testing of the IBAS functions for this project.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Communications wiring, routers, gateways, switches, etc. specified/installed under other section. Unless otherwise determined no hardware or software products/installation, (e.g., routers, gateways, communications wiring/devices) are required in this section for IBAS operation.

B. The IBAS is not capable of executing any control sequences. All building Subsystem sequences shall be executed by the Subsystems’ controls.

C. Failure of the IBAS shall not interrupt normal operation of any of the building Subsystems.



2.02 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. System Level:1. Each of the following Subsystems, when IBAS integration is included in the project , shall be

specified with a separate point of interface to the IBAS.a. HVAC System

1) Note – All HVAC equipment controls (including that provided with the equipment) shall be integrated to the DDC System. The DDC System in turn communicates all required IBAS points/data to the IBAS.

b. Plumbing Systemc. Fire Alarm and Notificationd. Energy and Utility Managemente. Lightingf. Electrical System

B. Building Level:1. All Subsystems shall communicate to the IBAS via BACnet/IP or JCI N1 (the latter is only

acceptable if explicitly specified).. 2. Exceptions/Clarifications:

a. Any Subsystem not available with BACnet/IP (or N1) communications shall be integrated to the DDC System using BACnet MS/TP, Modbus, etc. The Subsystem’s points/data shall in turn be routed to the IBAS via the DDC System.

b. HVAC equipment controls provided with the equipment (i.e., chiller controls) shall communicate directly with the IBAS if the equipment is provided with a BACnet/IP interface. However, the DDC System shall still be responsible for simultaneous communications with this equipment for use in meeting the 15985 Sequence of Operation.

c. Plumbing system integration functions (typically alarm contact closures) are best accomplished via connection to the DDC System. This includes chilled/hot/steam flow/BTU metering which shall be specified under 15950.

d. Certain energy metering functions are best accomplished via connection to the DDC System. This includes chilled/hot/steam flow/BTU metering which shall be specified under 15950.

C. IBAS Enterprise Level:1. The Subsystems in each DPS building shall communicate with the IBAS via the DPS

intranet.

2.03 NETWORK ROUTERS & GATEWAYS

A. All communications hardware/software needed for communicating BACnet/IP data to the IBAS is provided under other sections.

B. All communications hardware/software needed for other interfaces (e.g., BACnet MS/TP, Modbus, etc.) is provided under other sections.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. No work shall disturb the operation of the IBAS for use in operating other DPS school’s.

B. Work on the IBAS shall be scheduled in advance with the DPS Controls Application Engineer.



C. Time Synchronization – All 15950 controllers with real-time clocks shall be synchronized from the real-time clock in the IBAS at least once every 24 hours.

D. Develop IBAS graphic screens and other functions in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.02 POINT/DATA INTEGRATION

A. General1. Points/data to be mapped are listed in 15985, on the drawings and/or in the Subsystem

specifications.a. The final list of points/data to be integrated shall be defined by the submittal process as

defined in Part 1.2. All DDC System input and output points shall be mapped into the IBAS. .3. Physical points shall be mapped into the appropriate BACnet I/O point objects. If possible.4. Equipment modes (e.g., economizer, warm-up, etc.) and setpoints shall be mapped into

BACnet MD, BD or AD objects.5. Map any other data required for operation of the IBAS functions (i.e., start/stop schedule

data).6. BACnet objects shall use the BACnet standard’s object instance numbering scheme.7. Point/Data Operator Override - Any manual operator actions described by the DDC System

or other Subsystem sequences shall be available from the IBAS.

B. Alarms1. The following applies to Subsystems that are BTL-listed as B-BC or AAC devices and/or

support BACnet Alarm & Event services.a. Subsystems that are not BTL-listed or support the above services shall be polled by the

IBAS for any alarms.b. Alarms algorithms shall be set up in the IBAS for any Subsystems that do not perform

alarm monitoring of its system points (i.e., the target object shall be polled by the IBAS and compared to high/low limits or normal/off-normal states by the IBAS).

2. Alarms (i.e. limits, messages, priorities) shall be set up in each Subsystem by the Subsystem contractor.

3. Alarms shall be automatically communicated from the Subsystem to the IBAS in real-time.4. When requested by the IBAS, the Subsystem shall provide an alarm summary.5. Alarm priority – Coordinate with the Subsystem contractor concerning the specific alarm

priority values to be used.

C. Historical Data Trending1. The following applies to Subsystems that are BTL-listed as a B-BC and/or supports the

BACnet Trend Log object.a. Subsystems that are not BTL-listed or support the Trend object shall be polled by the

IBAS for trending requirements.2. Trends shall be set up in the Subsystem by the Subsystem contractor.3. The IBAS shall read trend data (i.e., via the BACnet Trend Log object) every 48 hours (or

sooner if the trend log has reached capacity), or whenever needed to fulfill an operator display request (i.e., to display a trend report on the IBAS).

3.03 ALARM REPORTING AND MANAGEMENT

A. Set up the IBAS so that the alarms for this project are properly received, processed and routed.

B. Receipt of an alarm shall be indicated on any graphic that includes associated point data. This indication shall be both textual and graphical (i.e., the point name and/or associated device shall change color, flash, and/or etc.).



C. The alarm shall be identified by the IBAS as being received from this building and routed to the alarm summary for this building.

3.04 GRAPHIC SCREENS

A. The system shall be provided with color graphic screens that show all of the controlled systems with all associated points, setpoints and modes of operation. including:1. Opening screen graphic showing the building, campus, facility, etc.2. Each HVAC air and water system monitored or controlled.3. Each floor and zone controlled (floor plan) - both HVAC and smoke detectors where appli-

cable.4. Each VAV box with DDC controls.5. Each electrical subsystem monitored or controlled.6. Each prime mover equipment (boilers, chillers, heat exchangers, pumps, towers, and

distribution system).7. Utility consumption and outdoor condition logs.8. Fuel oil and generator systems.9. Each miscellaneous monitored or controlled point.10. Screens for any Subsystems not listed above with all points/data represented.11. Menu penetrations: “buttons” shall be provided to allow the user to easily move among the

various graphics and menus. At any time, the operator shall be able to return to the main menu with one mouse click and shall switch from graphic to other modes within two mouse clicks.

B. The final selection and design of graphic screens shall be determined as part of the submittal process as defined in Part 1.

3.05 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE

A. The tests described herein are to be performed after Contractor has performed their own system start-up testing performed as a necessary part of the installation, startup, and debugging process.

B. The testing required below shall be observed by the Owner, and coordinated with the Owner and Subsystem contractors. The Subsystem contractors shall participate in the tests associated with their system.

C. Testing:1. The IBAS work shall be tested for proper operation.2. The Contractor shall use a protocol packet analyzer (i.e., Wireshark or any other “sniffer”

with a BACnet message decoding capabilities) to:a. Verify that the IBAS communications is not generating excessive network traffic (i.e.,

high packet reject rates), excessive polling by the IBAS, excessive alarm/event messages sent by the Subsystems.

b. Verify that all messages between the IBAS and the Subsystems are properly formed.3. Testing shall demonstrate the end-to-end integrity of all data communications and user

commands between the Subsystem(s) and the IBAS.4. Selected time schedules, set point and control mode modifications, and output overrides

shall be verified by changing the schedule and observing the correct response of the controlled outputs.

5. Communication with each Subsystem controller with a testing of the operation of sample of messages/services expectedI.

6. Specified IBAS reports and trend logs shall be demonstrated.7. Alarms shall be demonstrated, along with the output to the alarm GUI.8. Workstation commands and operating screens shall be explained and demonstrated.



D. Owner and Engineer shall review installation and operation of IBAS, and prepare a list describing any deficiencies (punch list).

E. Upon receipt of list of deficiencies from Owner, Contractor shall prepare written report indicating by Subsystem each outstanding item on list. Contractor shall correct items appearing on installation-inspection report and present written request for re-inspection and approval to Owner.

F. Upon satisfactory completion of punch list and successful demonstration of operation for all components, Owner shall provide acceptance of IBAS. The date of Owner acceptance shall constitute the start of the warranty period.

G. On the date of acceptance, Contractor shall provide the project record documentation.

3.06 INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING

A. Upon completion of work and acceptance by Owner, IBAS representatives shall provide 16 hours of instruction/training to 4 of Owner’s operating personnel. This instruction/training shall, at a minimum, consist of a review of the GUI screens created for the project, operator capabilities, as-built documentation, the specific IBAS Interface technology utilized plus a walk through of the Project to identify equipment locations and to answer site questions.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLSValdez Elementary HVAC HYDRONIC SYSTEMSOZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 23 21 00 - 1

SECTION 23 21 00

HVAC HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL



B. Refer to Section 23 05 00: Pipes, Valves and Piping Specialties.


A. Types of equipment specified in this section include the following:1. Hydronic Piping and Specialties.2. HVAC Pumps.3. Unit Heaters.4. Cabinet Unit Heaters.5. Pre-Startup Cleaning of HVAC Piping Systems.6. Chemical System Water Treatment.7. Closed System Water Treatment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 BASIC PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS

A. General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping specialties of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Provide materials and products complying with ASME B31.9 Code for Building Services Piping where applicable, base pressure rating on hydronic piping systems maximum design pressures. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in hydronic piping systems. Provide pipes and pipe fittings complying with Division 23, Section 23 05 00.

2.02 BASIC VALVES

A. General: Provide valves complying with Section 23 05 00 and in accordance with the following listing:

B. Shutoff Valves:1. 3" and smaller: Ball valves.2. 4" and larger: Butterfly valves only.

C. Drain Valves:1. 3" and smaller: Ball valves.2. 4" and larger: Butterfly valves only.

D. Check Valves:1. Refer to “Part 3 – Execution” section of this Specification section for check valve

requirements.



E. Balance Valves:1. 2" and smaller: Venturi type.2. 2" and smaller: Variable CV/Orifice type.3. 2-1/2" and larger: Plug or ball eccentric type valve upstream of flow measuring station or as

indicated on drawings. See Section 23 05 00 for flow measuring station.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers: Refer to Division 23, Section 23 05 00.

2.03 AIR VENT VALVES

A. Manual Air Vent Valves: Provide manual vent valves designed to be operated manually with screwdriver or thumbscrew, 1/8" NPS connection.

B. Automatic Air Vent Valves: Provide automatic vent valves designed to vent automatically with float principle, stainless steel float and mechanisms, cast-iron body, pressure rated for 125 psi, ½" NPS inlet and outlet connections.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Bell & Grossett ITT.2. Hoffman Specialty ITT.3. John Wood Company.4. Spirax Sarco.5. Thrush.

2.04 MICRO-BUBBLE AIR ELIMINATOR AND DIRT SEPARATOR

A. General: Provide air and dirt separation fittings as indicated. 1. All fittings shall be fabricated steel, rated for 150 psig design pressure and be selected for

less than 1 foot of water pressure drop and velocity not to exceed 4 feet per section through the unit at specified GPM.

2. Units to include internal copper coalescing medium to facilitate maximum air and dirt separation and suppress turbulence.

3. Provide integral high capacity float actuated air vent at top fitting of tank.4. Units shall have bottom blowdown connection.5. Air Eliminators shall be capable of removing 100% of the free air, 100% of the entrained air,

and up to 99.6% of the dissolved air in the system fluid. 6. Units shall have the bottom of the vessel extended for dirt separation with the system

connection nozzles equidistant from the top and bottom of the vessel and include a blowdown tank connection and valve.

7. Dirt separation shall be at least 80% of all particles 30 micron and larger within 100 passes.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Spirotherm.2. Prior Approved Equal.

2.05 EXPANSION TANKS

A. General: Provide diaphragm expansion tanks of size and number as indicated. Construct tank of welded steel, constructed, tested, and stamped in accordance with Section VIII of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for working pressure of 125 psi and 375 F maximum temperature. Furnish National Board Form U-1 denoting compliance. Provide specially compounded heavy duty butyl flexible diaphragm securely sealed into tank to permanently separate air charge from system water, and to maintain design expansion capacity. Provide pressure gage, air-charging fitting, and drain fitting.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:



1. Amtrol, Inc.2. Bell & Gossett ITT.3. Wessels.4. Armstrong.

2.06 PUMP SUCTION DIFFUSERS

A. General: Provide pump suction diffusers as indicated. Construct unit with angle pattern cast-iron body, threaded for 2" and smaller, flanged for 2-1/2" and larger, pressure rated for 175 psi. Provide inlet vanes with length 2-1/2 times pump suction diameter or greater. Provide cylinder strainer with 3/16" diameter openings with total free area equal to or greater than 5 times cross-sectional area of pump suction, designed to withstand pressure differential equal to pump shutoff head. Provide disposable fine mesh start-up strainer to fit over cylinder strainer. Provide permanent magnet located in flow stream, removable for cleaning. Provide adjustable foot support designed to carry weight of suction piping. Provide blowdown tapping in bottom, gage tapping in side.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.2. Bell & Gossett ITT.

2.07 PUMP DISCHARGE VALVES (TRIPLE DUTY VALVES)

A. General: Provide pump discharge valves as indicated. Provide non-slam check valve with spring-loaded disc and calibrated adjustment feature permitting regulation of pump discharge flow and shutoff. Design valves to permit repacking under full line pressure, and with bolt-on bonnet. Each valve shall be equipped with brass readout valves for taking differential pressure readings across the orifice for balancing. Provide flanged cast-iron valve body, pressure rated for 175 psi, maximum operating temperature of 250°F. Provide straight or angle pattern as indicated.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.2. Bell & Gossett ITT.3. Flow Design.

2.08 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES

A. General: Provide pressure relief valves as indicated, of size and capacity as selected by Installer for proper relieving capacity, in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Combined Pressure-Temperature Relief Valves: Bronze body, Teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code IV certified and labeled.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Kunkle2. Lonegren3. Lunkenheimer4. McDonnel and Miller5. Watts Regulator Co.

2.09 PUMPS

A. General: Provide factory-tested pumps, thoroughly cleaned, and painted with one coat of machinery enamel prior to shipment. Type, size, and capacity of each pump is listed in pump schedule. Provide pumps of same type by same manufacturer.



B. In-line Wet Rotor Circulator Pumps:1. General: Provide in-line circulator pumps where indicated, and of capacities as scheduled.2. Type: Horizontal mount, radially split case, oil-lubricated, designed for 125 psi working

pressure, and 225°F continuous water temperature.3. Body: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gage tappings.4. Shaft: Hardened alloy steel.5. Bearings: Oil-lubricated bronze journal bearings.6. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon seal ring and ceramic seat.7. Motor: Non-overloading at any point on pump curve, open, drip- proof, oil-lubricated journal

bearings, resilient mounted construction, built-in thermal overload protection on single phase motors. Refer to motor specification 230010 for additional requirements.

8. Coupling: Self-aligning, flexible coupling.9. Impeller: Enclosed type, hydraulically and dynamically balanced, and keyed to shaft.10. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Grundfosb. Prior Approved Wet Rotor

C. Split Coupled Vertical In-Line Pumps:1. Single stage, single or double suction type, with pump characteristics which provide rising

heads to shut off. Refer to pump schedule for pump flows and heads and motor speed, enclosure, efficiency and power requirements and other system conditions.

2. Pump Construction: Pump Casing - Cast Iron with 125 psig ANSI/PN16 flanges for working pressure below 175 psig at 150°F and Ductile Iron with 250 psig ANSI/PN25 flanges for working pressures to 375 psig at 150°F. Suction and discharge connections shall be flanged and the same size and shall be drilled and tapped for seal flush and gauge connections.

3. Impeller - Bronze, fully enclosed type. Dynamically balanced. Two-plane balancing is required where installed impeller diameter is less than 6 times the impeller width.

4. Shaft - Provide Stainless Steel pump shaft.5. Coupling - Rigid spacer type of high tensile aluminum alloy. Coupling to be designed to be

easily removed on site to reveal a space between the pump and motor shafts sufficient to remove all mechanical seal components for servicing and to be replaced without disturbing the pump or motor.

6. Mechanical Seals - Shall be Stainless Steel multi-spring outside balanced type with secondary seal, carbon rotating face and silicon carbide stationary seat. Provide 316 stainless steel gland plate. Provide factory installed flush line with manual vent.

7. All split coupled pumps shall be provided with a lower seal chamber throttle bushing to ensure seals maintain positively cooling and lubrication.

8. Seal flush line accessories, if required to improve seal chamber cleanliness: Supply in the flush line to the mechanical seal a 50 micron cartridge filter and sight flow indicator, to suit the working pressure encountered.

9. Filters shall be changed, by the installing contractor, after system is flushed and on a regular basis until turned over to the owner.

10. Alternately, a maintenance-free accessory needing pump differential pressures exceeding 70 ft./30 psig/200 kPa for effective operation: Supply in the flush line to the mechanical seal a maintenance-free sediment separator, with sight flow indicator.

11. Motor: Non-overloading at any point on pump curve, open, drip-proof, with regreasable ball bearings, secured to mounting frame with adjustable alignment. Refer to motor specification230010 for additional requirements.

12. Vibration shall be such that the value of self-excited vibration velocity is less than 0.10 inch/second when measured with a vibration meter on the frame or bearings of the pump assembly in any of the three axes. The pump and motor assemblies shall be both statically and dynamically balanced so as not to exceed the vibration limits specified.

13. Acceptable Manufacturers:a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.b. Grundfos



2.10 UNIT HEATERS

A. General: Provide unit heaters in locations as indicated, and of capacities, style, and having accessories as scheduled.

B. Horizontal Unit Heaters:1. Casings: Construct of steel, phosphatized inside and out, and finished with baked enamel.

Provide motor-mounted panel, minimum of 14-gauge steel. Fabricate casing to enclose coil, louvers, and fan blades. Provide louvers for 4-way air diffusion.

2. Fans: Construct of aluminum, and factory-balance. Provide fan inlet orifice, smooth, and drawn into casing back panel.

C. Vertical Unit Heaters:1. Casings: Construct of steel, phosphatized inside and out, and finished with baked enamel.

Design casing to enclose fan, motor, and coil, design fan orifice formed into discharge panel. Provide air diffusers as scheduled.

2. Fans: Construct of aluminum and factory-balance. Design so motor and fan assembly is removable through fan outlet panel.

D. Coils: Construct of plate-type aluminum fins, mechanically bonded to copper tubes. Design coil for use in hot water applications.

E. Motors: Provide totally enclosed motors, with built-in overload protection, having electrical characteristics as scheduled.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. McQuay Inc.2. Sterling Radiator.3. Trane (The) Co.

2.11 CABINET UNIT HEATERS

A. General: Provide cabinet heaters having cabinet sizes and in locations as indicated, and of capacities, style, and having accessories as scheduled. Include in basic unit chassis, coil, fanboard, fan wheels, housings, motor, and insulation.

B. Chassis: Galvanized steel wrap-around structural frame with edges flanged.

C. Insulation: Faced, heavy density glass fiber.

D. Cabinet: 14-gauge removable front panel, 14-gauge top and side panels. Insulate front panel over entire coil section. Provide locking access door on coil connection side. Clean cabinet parts, bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on primer. White finish on white ceilings. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard color chart.

E. Water Coils: Construct of 5/8" seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to configurated aluminum fins. Design for 300 psi and leak test at 300 psi under water. Provide same end connections for supply and return.

F. Fans: Provide centrifugal, forward curved double width fan wheels constructed of non-corrosive, molded, fiberglass- reinforced thermo-plastic material. Construct fan scrolls of galvanized steel.

G. Motors: Provide shaded pole motors with integral thermal overload protection, and motor cords for plug-in to junction box in unit. Provide 3-speed switch.

H. Filters: Provide 1" thick throwaway type filters in fiberboard frames.



I. Accessories: Provide the following accessories as indicated and/ or scheduled:1. Wall Boxes: Provide aluminum wall boxes with integral eliminators and insect screen.2. Recessing Flanges: Provide 18-gauge steel flanges for recessing cabinet heaters into wall or

ceiling.3. Duct Collars: Provide duct collars where specified.4. Sub-bases: Provide 18-gauge steel sub-base for vertical units, height as indicated.5. Extended Oilers: Provide plastic motor oiler tubes extending to beneath top discharge grille.6. Provide unit mounted disconnect switch.

J. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. McQuay Inc.2. Sterling Radiator.3. Trane (The) Co.4. Vulcan Radiator Co.

2.12 PRE-STARTUP CLEANER

A. Provide a pre-startup liquid alkaline dispersant cleaner for the flushing and cleaning of all HVACwater systems to remove oil and foreign matter from the piping and equipment prior to the final filling of the systems. This chemical shall not be injurious to persons, piping, pipe joint compounds, packings, coils, valves, pumps, and their mechanical seals, tubes or other parts of the system.

B. Furnish complete instruction dictating the quantities of the cleaner to use, methods, and durations of the operation.

2.13 BYPASS CHEMICAL POT FEEDERS

A. General: Provide where indicated or otherwise necessary, bypass feeders of size and capacity noted on the drawings.

B. Provide a bypass feeder for adding chemical to the closed water system. The feed shall have (2) 3/4" NPT, female pipe connections, a 3/4" NPT female drain pipe connection, and a 3 1/2" top opening cap, with an "O" ring seat. The feeder shall have a continuous threaded closure requiring 2 1/2 turns to close and seal. Capacity of the feeder shall be 5 gallons, capable of operating at 200 psig and at a temperature up to 200°F. Provide feeder with a built in support and mounting for cartridge filter.

C. The by-pass feeder shall be provided with mounting legs to elevate the feeder off the floor. The legs shall have holes to allow mounting by anchor bolts.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. A&F Machine.2. Neptune.3. Vector.4. Wingert.

2.14 CLOSED SYSTEM WATER TREATMENT CHEMICALS

A. Provide liquid nitrite corrosion inhibitor treatment for the prevention of corrosion in closed systems at 700 PPM total nitrite level.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which hydronic systems materials and products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to the installer.

3.02 ELECTRICAL WIRING

A. General: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and

installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF HYDRONIC PIPING

A. Install eccentric reducers where pipe is reduced in size in direction of flow, with tops of both pipes and reducer flush.

B. Install piping level with no pitch.

C. Connect branch-feed piping to mains at top of mains, connect run-out piping to branches at horizontal center line of branches.

D. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and servicing of valves.

E. Copper piping joints shall have pipe cut square, and reamed with burrs removed. Clean with medium grit emory cloth, flux pipe and fitting with nokorode paste. Use only 95-5 solder.

F. Refer to Section 23 05 00 for hanger and support requirements.


A. Shutoff Valves: Install on inlet and outlet of each mechanical equipment item, and elsewhere as indicated.

B. Drain Valves: Install on each mechanical equipment item located to completely drain equipment for service or repair. Install at base of each riser, at base of each rise or drop in piping system, and elsewhere where indicated or required to completely drain hydronic piping system.

C. Install wafer checks on all pump applications (inline pumps, base mounted pumps, pumped coils). Install swing check valves for all other applications. All swing check valves shall be installed in the horizontal position. Vertical installation is not acceptable.

D. Balance Valves: Install balance valve on outlet of each hydronic terminal, on end of each hydronic zone circuit, on discharge of each hydronic pump, and elsewhere as indicated. After hydronic system balancing has been completed, permanently mark final balanced position with memory stop or yellow lacquer across body.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

A. Vent Valves:



1. Manual Vent Valves: Install manual vent valves on each hydronic terminal at highest point, and on each hydronic piping drop in direction of flow for mains, branches, and runouts, and elsewhere as indicated.

2. Install a full size air chamber and pipe down with 1/4" copper tubing to a petcock or key vent. If the vent is above ceiling, install the petcock 6" above the ceiling. Provide manual air vent fittings on all hydronic coils. Extend air vents to workable levels in gymnasium.

3. Automatic Vent Valves: (mechanical rooms only) Install automatic vent valves at top of each hydronic riser and elsewhere as indicated. Install shutoff valve between riser and vent valve, pipe outlet to suitable plumbing drain, or as indicated.

B. Flow Control Valves: Install flow control valves on discharge of each pump serving hydronic heating system or zone, and elsewhere as indicated. Install with check mechanism in upright position, with adequate clearance for service and replacement. Screw check down for automatic operation.

C. Diverting Fittings: Install diverting fittings as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Position fittings on supply and return mains with proper orientation for flow.

D. Air Separators:1. Dip Tube Fittings: Install dip tube fittings in boiler outlet in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. Run piping to compression tank with 1/4" per foot (2%) upward slope towards tank. Connect boiler outlet piping.

2. In-line Air Separators: Install in-line air separators in pump suction lines. Connect inlet and outlet piping. Run piping to compression tank with 1/4" per foot (2%) upward slope towards tank. Install drain valve on units 2" and over and extend drain piping to floor drain.

3. Combination Separator/Strainer: Install external combination air separators/strainers in pump suction lines. Connect inlet and outlet piping. Run piping to compression tank with 1/4" per foot (2%) upward slope towards tank. Install shut-off valve on drain connection and extend drain piping to floor drain. Remove and clean strainer after 24 hours and again after 30 days of system operation.

E. Diaphragm-Type Expansion Tanks: Install diaphragm-type expansion tanks on floor as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Suspend horizontal tanks from building structure with all threaded rods and trapeze support channels. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, charge tank with proper air charge as recommended by manufacturer.

F. Pump Suction Diffusers: At Installer's option, install pump suction diffusers on each pump suction line in lieu of reducing elbow, entrance pipe, and pressure gage outlet. Install on pump suction inlet, adjust foot support to carry weight of suction piping. Install nipple and shutoff valve in blowdown connection. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping system, but before balancing of hydronic piping system, remove disposable fine mesh strainer.

G. Pump Discharge Valves (Triple-Duty Valves): Install pump discharge valves on each pump discharge line in lieu of check valve and balance cock. Install in horizontal or vertical position with stem in upward position; allow clearance above stem for check mechanism removal. After hydronic system has been completed, mark calibrated name plate with stripe of yellow lacquer to permanently mark final balanced position. Use of triple-duty valve does not eliminate requirement of separate shut-off valve on discharge of pump.

H. Bypass Pot Feeders: Install bypass pot feeders on each hydronic system at pump discharge or elsewhere, as indicated. Install in upright position with top of pot not more than 48" above floor. Connect pot feeder to pump discharge with unions and ball valves. Provide sight glass on inlet of pot feeder. Install shut-off valve in pump discharge line between connections to the pot feeder. Provide drain with ball shut-off valve and a hose end connection.



I. Pressure Relief Valves: Install for each hot water boiler or heat exchanger as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Pipe discharge to floor drain.

J. Control Components: Install control valves, flow switches, flow sensors, thermowells and pressure/temperature taps furnished by the temperature control contractor in accordance with the manufactures recommendations.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS

A. General: Install HVAC pumps where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructions, complying with recognized industry practices to ensure that HVAC pumps comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.

B. Access: Provide access space around HVAC pumps for service as indicated, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer.

C. Install vertical inline pumps supported from floor mounted stands with a mason industries waffle pad (or approved equal) under the stands and a 4" concrete housekeeping pad under the pump.

D. Install in-line circulator pumps, supported separately from the piping system so piping is not supported from the pumps.

E. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and

installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer.

F. Alignment: Check alignment, and where necessary, realign shafts of motors and pumps within recommended tolerances by manufacturer, and in presence of manufacturer's service representative.

G. Flexible Connectors: Install flexible connectors as indicated on the drawigns. Flexible connectors shall not be used to correct for mis-alignment of piping. Provide documentation that the pump is installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommended tolerances. The flexible connector braiding shall not be used to compensate for offsets and alignment of the piping. The flexible connector shall not be compressed.

H. Start-Up: Lubricate pumps before start-up. Start-up in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove start-up strainer and install permanent strainer. Verify that the pumps controls are correct for the required application.

3.07 INSTALLATION OF UNIT HEATERS

A. General: Install unit heaters as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Uncrate units and inspect for damage. Verify that nameplate data corresponds with unit designation.

C. Hang units from building substrate, not from piping. Mount as high as possible to maintain greatest headroom possible unless otherwise indicated.

D. Support units with rod-type hangers anchored to building substrate.



E. Install piping as indicated.

F. Protect units with protective covers during balance of construction.

3.08 INSTALLATION OF CABINET HEATERS

A. General: Install cabinet heaters as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Locate cabinet heaters as indicated, coordinate with other trades to assure correct recess size for recessed units.

C. Install piping as indicated.

D. Protect units with protective covers during balance of construction.

E. Install ceiling mounted units with rubber-in-shear vibration isolation.


A. Mechanical contractor shall obtain approval in writing from Balancing Contractor for all balancing devices.

B. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test

pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be

capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

C. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: 1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to

freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used. 2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release trapped air. Use

drains installed at low points for complete draining of liquid. 3. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is full of

water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design

pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing. Testing report shall be submitted to the DPS Project Manager for approval.

7. Water Analysis: submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at Project site. Refer to Specification Section 15548 Water Treatment for additional requirements.

D. ADJUSTING



1. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.

2. Perform these adjustments before operating the system: a. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves. b. Check pump for proper direction of rotation. c. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure. d. Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating

freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). e. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. f. Check operation of automatic bypass valves. g. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to design

requirements. h. Lubricate motors and bearings.

3. Submit written documentation to the DPS Project Manager that the pump adjustments have been made prior to balancing of the system by the Test and Balance Contractor.

E. CLEANING1. General: After construction is completed, including painting, clean unit exposed surfaces,

vacuum clean terminal coils and inside of cabinets.2. Retouch any marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish materials

furnished by manufacturer.3. Install new filter units for terminals requiring same.

F. SYSTEM START-UP1. The Water Treatment Supplier shall put the treatment equipment into operation, and make

adjustments necessary for proper operation.2. The Water Treatment Supplier shall provide a written report to the Division 23 Contractor

indicating that the start-up has been completed and that all equipment is operating properly.

G. CLEANING NOTIFICATION.1. Notify the DPS project manager five working days in advance of the start of cleaning of any

system. Cleaning and flushing of all systems shall take place in the presence of the DPS project manager and or a representative from Maintenance. The Certification of work Certificate documents the cleaning procedure and personnel involved. The designated Maintenance Personal observing the cleaning process shall sign the certification. School personnel or custodial staff are not authorized to certify the procedure.

3.10 PRE-START CLEANING OF CLOSED LOOP PIPING SYSTEMS.

A. Closed loop systems, hot and chilled water shall be cleaned using a cold alkaline cleaning solution at normal system pumping pressures. At the contractors option, use either chemicals furnished by the Owner (at no additional cost to the contractor) or use commercially available chemicals furnished by the contractor (at no additional cost to the Owner)

a. If the contractor furnishes system cleaning chemicals use the following formula or functionally equivalent mixture.

Chemical Ounces Per 100 GallonsOf System Volume

Trisodium phosphate 16Sodium hydroxide 1Sodium Sulfite (Oxygen Scavenger)

1

Dishwashing detergent (liquid surfactant)

1

b. The cleaning solution must begin with a minimum pH of 12.0c. Procedure to clean an entire hydronic system:



d. Isolate the expansion tank from all cleaning solutions.e. Fill the system with water and add the alkaline cleaning solutions.f. Circulate the alkaline cleaning solution in any hot or chilled water system for 48 hours.g. Drain the alkaline cleaning solution and fill the system with domestic cold water.

Circulate and flush as necessary until the circulated water reaches a pH of 8.5 or less at all end points of the hydronic system.

h. When the rinse water reaches 8.5 pH or less, remove and clean all piping strainers throughout the system. Do not drain the rinse water from the system until the system is ready to be filled. The designated DPS Maintenance person must verify and approve the cleanliness of the system. A minimum of three samples will be taken of each hydronic system. the contractor and owner will each retain one sample and one will be sent for chemical analysis.

i. In no case shall the system being cleaned be left in an untreated condition for more than eight hours.

j. The water treatment contractor shall certify in writing that the system was cleaned and treated in conformance with the specification.

k. Drain the rinse water from the system and fill the heating water system and chilled water system with clean domestic water. Sample and install water treatment chemicals into the system- pH buffer, oxygen scavenger, and corrosion inhibiting surfactant.

l. Drain the rinse water from the system and partially fill the MUA-1 hydronic system with clean domestic water. Install uninhibited propylene glycol to a concentration of 30%. Sample and install water treatment chemicals into the system- pH buffer, oxygen scavenger, and corrosion inhibiting surfactant.1) Before using the glycol feeder, thoroughly clean the tank of oil, grease and solids.

Fill the tank completely with domestic cold water and one gallon of chlorine bleach. Allow to stand overnight. Rinse tank free of chlorine.

2) Fill the specified propylene glycol mixture3) Report system volume and glycol/water mixture added.4) At the end of the 18 month warrantee glycol concentrations should be at 30%

3.11 SYSTEM VOLUME:

A. The mechanical contractor shall determine each systems volume by the use of a flow meter or volume metric dye testing. The volume of each system shall be recorded in the O&M Manual. System volume will be used to determine the amount of chemical quantities for the systems.

3.12 OPERATOR TRAINING AND SERVICE

A. The Water Treatment Supplier shall instruct the Owner's operating personnel so as to familiarize them with all treatment equipment and procedures per Maintenance Service specified in Part 1 of this Section.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLSValdez Elementary AIR DISTRIBUTIONOZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 23 30 00 - 1

SECTION 23 30 00

AIR DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 GENERAL




A. Types of equipment specified in this section include the following:1. Metal Ductwork.2. Ductwork Accessories.3. Grilles, Registers & Diffusers.4. Louvers and Dampers.5. Fans.6. Blower Coil Air Handling Units.7. Variable Air Volume Terminals.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Within 30 days after award of contract, submit a shop drawing for approval to the structural engineer showing size and location of all openings through roof and structural members. Do not proceed until the shop drawing has been reviewed, approved and returned.

1.04 TEST AND BALANCE COORDINATION

A. Prior to starting work, the contract documents shall be given to the Test and Balance contractor for his review. If there are any areas of the air distribution system that cannot be balanced, due to the configuration of the system, a Request for Clarification shall be made in a timely manner to allow revisions to the documents before the systems are installed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 METAL DUCTWORK

A. Galvanized Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel, lockforming quality; with G 90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 653; and mill phosphatized for exposed locations.

2.02 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS

A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork system requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment.

B. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks,



roller marks, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting.

C. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15 degree change of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45 degree laterals and 45 degree elbows for branch takeoff connections. Where 90 degree branches are indicated, provide conical type tees.

D. Duct Liner:1. Duct Liner: Fibrous glass, complying with Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association

(TIMA) AHC-101; of 1" thick. The liner shall meet the Life Safety Standards as established by NFPA 90A and 90B. The 1” duct liner shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 1071, with a NRC not less than .70 and a thermal conductivity no higher than .25 at 75°F mean temperature. The surface coating shall contain an immobilized EPA registered anti-microbial agent as tested in accordance with ASTM-G-21 and 423 “Type A Mountain.” The liner shall meet erosion test method described in UL-181. Shop or field cut of insulation shall be coated with a sealant approved for use in duct systems.

2. Round Duct Liner: Fibrous glass, complying with Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association (TIMA) AHC-101; of 1" thick. The liner shall meet the Life Safety Standards as established by NFPA 90A and 90B. The 1” duct liner shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 1071, with a NRC not less than .70 and a thermal conductivity no higher than .25 at 75°F mean temperature. The surface coating shall contain an immobilized EPA registered anti-microbial agent as tested in accordance with ASTM-G-21 and 423 “Type A Mountain.” The liner shall meet erosion test method described in UL-181. Shop or field cut of insulation shall be coated with a sealant approved for use in duct systems. The liner shall be provided with factory-made, evenly spaced kerfs to allow the material to conform to the inside diameter of round air ducts.

3. Acceptable Manufacturers:a. Certain-teed b. Johns Manvillec. Owens Corning

E. Duct Sealant: Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant, type applicable for fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for sealing joints and seams in ductwork.

F. Duct Cement: Non-hardening migrating mastic or liquid neoprene based cement, type applicable for fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for cementing fitting components, or longitudinal seams in ductwork.

G. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide trapeze duct supports constructed with hot-dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim, unistrut and angles.

H. Flexible Ductwork:1. Low Pressure Flexible Ducts: Duct shall be factory pre-insulated with a solid inner liner

formed by a reinforced aluminum laminate material mechanically locked or bonded together by a corrosive resistant galvanized steel helix, covered with a minimum 1-1/2" thick fiberglass blanket and sheathed in a polyethylene vapor barrier. The insulation shall have a maximum 0.23 "C" factor, to meet FHA/HUD requirements and a vapor barrier permeability of 0.10 perms (ASTM E96-Procedure A). The duct shall have a positive working pressure rating of 6" w.g. (all diameters), negative working pressure rating of 1" w.g. (all diameters) and at a maximum operating temperature of 180°F (all diameters). Pressure rating based on test with temperature and velocity applied. the duct shall comply with the latest NFPA 90A Bulletin and be UL-181 listed as a Class I Air Duct.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers:



a. Flexmaster.b. Glenflex.c. Hercules Industries.

I. Spin-in Fittings: Conical, bellmouth spin-in fittings shall be used for duct taps and shall include quadrant dampers on all lines to air devices (diffusers and grilles) even though a volume damper may be specified for the air device. (This does not apply for high pressure duct). The spin collar fitting shall be made from G-90 galvanized sheet metal. The construction shall have a fabricated minimum overall length of 7". The location of spin-in fittings in the ducts shall be determined after terminals are hung or the location of the light fixtures is known so as to minimize flexible duct lengths and sharp bends.

2.03 DUCTWORK FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate ductwork of gages and reinforcement complying with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards".

B. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with centerline radius equal to associated duct width; and fabricate to include turning vanes in elbows where shorter radius is necessary. Limit angular tapers to 30 degrees for contracting tapers and 20 degrees for expanding tapers.

C. Fabricate ductwork with duct liner in each section of duct where indicated. Laminate liner to internal surfaces of duct in accordance with instructions by manufacturers of lining and adhesive, and fasten with mechanical fasteners.

D. Miscellaneous Materials: Provide miscellaneous materials and products as required to comply with ductwork system requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment.

E. Heat Sensitive Tape: Must comply with UL 181 A H.

F. Pressure Sensitive Tape: Pressure sensitive aluminum tape, 2-1/2" wide, complying with SMACNA Performance Standard AFDS-100-73, and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B or UL 181, Class 1 requirements. Tape must read UL181 A P.

G. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork.

2.04 DAMPERS

A. Low Pressure Balancing Dampers: Provide dampers of single blade type or multiblade type, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards".

B. Counterbalanced Relief Dampers: Provide dampers with parallel blades, counterbalanced and factory-set to relieve at indicated static pressure. Construct blades of 16-gauge aluminum, provide 1/2" diameter ball bearings, 1/2" diameter steel axles spaced on 9" centers. Construct frame of 2" x 1/2" x 1/8" steel channel for face areas 25 sq. ft. and under; 4" x 1-1/4" x 16-gauge channel for face areas over 25 sq. ft. Provide galvanized steel finish on frame with aluminum touch-up.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Air Balance, Inc.2. American Warming & Ventilating, Inc.3. Arrow Louver and Damper; Div. of Arrow United Industries, Inc.4. Greenheck



5. Ruskin Mfg. Co.

2.05 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Fire Dampers: Provide fire dynamic type dampers, of sizes indicated. Dampers shall be constructed and tested in accordance with the current edition of UL-555 Standard For Fire Dampers. Provide fusible link rated at 165°F unless otherwise indicated. Blades to be mounted outside of the air stream. Each dynamic fire damper shall be marked with a UL classified 1-1/2 hour fire protection rating, the maximum velocity/pressure rating for each horizontal and vertical installation and “for use in dynamic systems.” Dampers marked “for use in static systems only” are not permitted. Each dynamic fire damper shall include a steel sleeve and retaining angles furnished by the damper manufacturer to ensure appropriate installation. Submittal information shall include the fire protection rating, maximum velocity/pressure ratings and the manufacturer’s UL installation instructions. The dampers shall be installed in accordance with these instructions.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Greenheck.2. Ruskin Mfg. Co.

2.06 TURNING VANES

A. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Provide turning vanes constructed of 1-1/2" wide single wall curved blades set at 3/4" o.c., supported with bars perpendicular to blades set at 2" o.c., and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ductwork.

B. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Provide acoustic turning vanes constructed of airfoil shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fiberglass fill.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Aero Dyne Co.2. Airsan Corp.3. Anemostat Products Div.; Dynamics Corp. of America.4. Barber-Colman Co.5. Duro Dyne Corp.

2.07 QUADRANT LOCKS

A. Provide for each damper, quadrant lock device on one end of shaft; and end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 12". Provide extended quadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for externally insulated ductwork.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Ventfabrics, Inc.2. Young Regulator Co.

2.08 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. General: Provide duct access doors of size required.

B. Construction: Construct of same or greater gage as ductwork served, provide insulated doors for insulated ductwork. Provide flush frames for uninsulated ductwork, extended frames for externally insulated duct. Provide one side hinged, other side with one handle-type latch for doors 12" high and smaller, 2 handle-type latches for larger doors. Provide 12 x 12 for hand access and 24 x 24 for head and shoulder access.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers:



1. Air Balance Inc.2. Ruskin Mfg. Co.3. Ventfabrics, Inc.

2.09 PRESSURE RELIEF DOOR

A. Provide pressure relief door in the ductwork where indicated on the plans or where the ductwork could be subject to excessive pressure build-up due to quick closure of fire dampers. The door shall be constructed of 12 gauge galvanized steel with a 12 gage galvanized steel frame. The door shall be sealed with a ¼” thick gasket. The door shall be insulated with 1” fiberglass 1 ½ lb. insulation or as consistent with the duct insulation. The door shall have a spring-loaded mechanism to automatically close the door after pressure has been relieved. Door shall be adjustable for pressures of 3” w.c. to 8” w.c. The door pressure setting shall be adjustable in the field. The door shall be welded to the ductwork or installed with high pressure sealing cement and screws.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Kees.2. Ruskin.

2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. General: Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibration isolated equipment. Construct flexible connections of neoprene-coated flameproof fabric crimped into duct flanges for attachment to duct and equipment. Make airtight joint. Provide adequate joint flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement, and also capable of absorbing vibrations of connected equipment.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. American/Elgen Co.; Energy Div.2. Duro Dyne Corp.3. Flexaust (The) Co.4. Ventfabrics, Inc.

2.11 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard air device where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.

B. Performance: Provide air devices that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data.

C. Ceiling/Wall Compatibility: Provide air devices with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling/wall systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling/wall construction with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling/wall construction which will contain each type of air device.

D. Types: Provide air device of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as listed on grilles, register and diffuser schedule.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Krueger Mfg. Co.2. Price.3. Titus Products Div.; Philips Industries, Inc.



4. Air Concepts.

2.12 LOUVERS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard louvers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.

B. Performance: Provide louvers that have minimum free area as scheduled, and minimum pressure drop for each type as listed in manufacturer's current data, complying with louver schedule. Performance data must bear AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for Air Performance and Water Penetration.

C. Substrate Compatibility: Provide louvers with frame and sill styles that are compatible with adjacent substrate, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings with accurate fit and adequate support, for weatherproof installation. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of substrate which will contain each type of louver.

D. Materials: 1. Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T52. Weld units or use stainless steel fasteners.

E. Louver Screens: On inside face of exterior louvers, provide 1/2" square mesh for outside air louvers and exhaust air louvers and 1/4" square mesh for combustion air louvers. Mesh shall be anodized aluminum wire bird screens mounted in removable extruded aluminum frames. Delete square mesh when louver is used in a return air application.

F. Finishes: Louver finishes and custom color shall be by architect.

G. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Greenheck2. Ruskin Mfg. Co.

2.13 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS

A. General: Provide AMCA certified centrifugal roof type, curb mounted, power ventilators of type, size, and capacity as scheduled, and as specified herein.

B. Type: Centrifugal fan, direct or belt driven as scheduled. Provide aluminum, galvanized steel, or fiberglass weatherproof housings as scheduled. Provide square base to suit roof curb. Provide permanent split-capacitor type motor for direct driven fans; capacitor-start, induction-run type motor for belt driven fans. Provide backward inclined wheels, adjustable pitch cast-iron pulleys, and fan motor isolated from the exhaust stream.1. Housing Design: Hooded dome type.2. Housing Design: Upblast type.

C. Bearings: Provide permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self aligning bearings.

D. Electrical: Provide factory-wired non-fusible type disconnect switch at motor in fan housing. Provide thermal overload protection in fan motor. Provide conduit chase within unit for electrical connection.

E. Bird Screens: Provide removable bird screens, 1/2" mesh, 16- gauge aluminum or brass wire.

F. Provide stainless steel quick release fasteners for removable top cap.



G. Dampers: Provide gravity-actuated dampers in curb bases as scheduled on drawings.

H. Dampers: Provide motorized dampers with linkage in curb base as scheduled on drawings.

I. Roof Curb: Provide galvanized steel factory roof curb with 1-1/2" rigid fiberglass insulation adhered to the inside of the walls.

J. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Greenheck.2. Loren Cook Co.

2.14 BLOWER COIL AIR HANDLING UNIT

A. General: Provide factory fabricated, factory tested air handlers as indicated herein.

B. Casing:1. Casings shall be constructed of 18-gauge galvanized steel, insulated with one-inch, 1-1/2 lb.

density fiberglass fire resistant and odorless glass fiber material to provide thermal and acoustical insulation.

2. Fan housing sides shall be directly attached to the air handler top and bottom panels. Coil access panels shall be located on both sides of the air handler to allow easy removal of the internal coils and drain pan. Main access panels provide access to the fan, motor and drive from both sides of the air handler.

C. Direct Expansion Coils:1. DX coils shall use R410A refrigerant and have ½” OD x 0.016” W round seamless copper

tubes expanded into full fin collars for permanent fin-tube bond. DX coils shall use aluminum fins, mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes. The coil casing shall be 16-gauge galvanized steel.

2. Suction headers shall have bottom connections to aid drainage of any oil that may collect in the coil. Liquid line and suction connections to be outside the unit casing (on the same side of the unit) to facilitate field piping.

3. Coils shall have a single venturi type distributor assembly designed with a vertical downflow feed for low pressure drops.

4. Coils shall be proof tested at 450 psig and leak tested at 300 psig air-under-water. Coils shall be dehydrated and sealed with a dry nitrogen charge. Coils shall be designed and tested per ARI 410.

D. Fans:1. Fans shall be forward curved, centrifugal blower type equipped with heavy-duty adjustable

speed V-belt drive. The fan shaft shall be supported by heavy duty, permanently sealed ball bearings. All fans to be dynamically balanced.

E. Drain Pan:1. The drain pans shall be noncorrosive and double-sloped to allow condensate drainage. The

drainpan construction shall be polymer or optional stainless steel. 2. Coils to mount above the drain pan, not in the drain pan to allow the drain pan to be fully

inspected and cleaned. The drain pan shall also be removable for cleaning. 3. The polymer drain pan connections shall be unthreaded ¾” schedule 40 PVC for solvent

bonding. The stainless steel drain pan connection shall be ¾” NPT schedule 40 stainless steel pipe. An auxiliary drain connection shall be provided on the same side as the main connection.

F. Filters:1. One-inch standard efficiency throwaway filters.



2. Units shall have a standard filter rack that is sized for less than 500 feet per minute at nominal airflow.

3. All units and filter racks shall use standard filter sizes.

G. Motors:1. Multi-tap ECM motors:

a. Voltage and phase as scheduled. b. Motors shall be factory installed and wired to the air handler junction box.

H. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Carrier A/C Group; Carrier Corp.

2.15 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINALS

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated and tested air terminals as indicated, selected with performance characteristics which match or exceed those indicated on schedule.1. Terminal unit performance and sound rating shall be tested and rated in accordance with

ARI 880: Industry Standard for air terminals" and shall bear the ARI certification seal.2. Terminals shall be in compliance with UL-181 and NFPA 90A and shall meet bacteriological

standards of ASTM C665.

B. Casings:1. Construct of die-cast aluminum (.034”) or sheet metal (22 gauge) 2. Provide hanger brackets for attachment of supports.3. Linings: Line inside surfaces of casings with lining material to provide acoustic performance,

thermal insulation, and to prevent condensation on outside surfaces of casing. Provide minimum thickness of 1/2". Secure lining to prevent delamination, sagging, or settling. (ASTM C 1071)a. Cover liner surfaces and edges with coating or perforated metal.

4. Access: Provide removable panels in casings to permit access to air dampers and other parts requiring service, adjustment, or maintenance.

5. Leakage: Construct casings such that when subjected to 0.5-in w.g. pressure for low pressure units, and 3.0-in w.g. pressure for high pressure units, total leakage does not exceed 4% of specified air flow capacity with outlets sealed and inlets wide open. Construct air dampers such that when subjected to 6.0-in w.g. inlet pressure with damper closed, total leakage does not exceed 10% of specified air flow capacity.

6. Controls enclosure: Provide a NEMA 1 controls enclosure with a removable cover for protection of electronic controls. Enclosure shall have double backplane construction and shall have no exposed screw tips.

C. Air Dampers: Construct of materials that cannot corrode, do not require lubrication, nor require periodic servicing. Provide maximum volume dampers, both pressure dependent and pressure compensated, that are calibrated in cfm, set to specified air capacities. Provide mechanism to vary air volume through damper from minimum setpoint to maximum setpoint, in response to signal from thermostat.

D. “Pinch Down” Air Terminals: Provide the following features and accessories indicated on Drawings and schedule:1. Hot Water Heating Coils: Provide heating coils constructed of copper tubes and aluminum

fins with galvanized steel casing. 2. Construct coils with copper tubing primary surface and aluminum secondary surface bonded

to tubes in accordance with ASTM B 75. Provide coils with threaded connections. Fin spacing shall be 12 fins per inch or less, unless otherwise indicated.a. All coils shall be designed and tested per ASHRAE 33 and ARI 410.b. Coils shall have a working pressure of 200 psi at 325 degrees F.



c. Coils shall have a minimum tube diameter of 0.625" and a minimum tube wall thickness of 0.02"

d. Coil frame shall be galvanized-steel channel frame 0.052" minimum.

E. Controls:1. Provide electronic controls, compatible with direct digital control system.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Environmental Technologies.2. Krueger.3. Price Industries.4. Trane (The) Co.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories and equipment are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK

A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with SMACNA Seal Class “A” and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true-to-shape and to prevent buckling. Support vertical ducts at every floor.

B. Inserts: Install concrete inserts for support of ductwork in coordination with framework, as required to avoid delays in work.

C. Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shop-fabricated work and accommodate installation requirements.

D. Field Modifications: Ductwork modified in the field shall maintain the same free area as shown on the Drawings. In no case shall the aspect ratio of modified ductwork exceed 4 to 1 without permission of the Engineer.

E. Routing: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not obstruct useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to ½" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.

F. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not route ductwork through transformer vaults and their electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.



G. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2". Fasten to duct and substrate.1. Where ducts pass through fire-rated floors, walls, or partitions, provide firestopping between

duct and substrate, in accordance with requirements of Division 07 Section "Firestopping".

H. Installation: Install metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards as follows:1. All supply, return and exhaust: Galvanized sheet metal.

I. Sealant: Seal all supply, return and exhaust ductwork with duct sealant or duct cement in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

J. All ductwork with wrapped insulation shall be supported using hangers in contact with the insulation. The insulation shall separate the ductwork and the hanger when wrapped ductwork is used.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF DUCT LINER

A. General: Install duct liner in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Duct sizes shown on plans are clear inside dimensions. Increase duct sizes accordingly.

B. Extent of Duct Liner:1. All transfer air ductwork.2. All transfer air boots.3. Where shown otherwise.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Maximum Length: For any duct run using flexible ductwork, do not exceed 6' - 0" extended length or as required by local authorities.

B. Installation: Install in accordance with Section III of SMACNA's, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible".

3.05 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function.

B. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90 degree elbows in supply, return and exhaust air systems, and elsewhere as indicated.

C. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either side, except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter.

D. Install access doors for the following:1. Access to dampers.2. Access to fire dampers and smoke-fire dampers (one on each side of damper) in duct.3. Access to heating coils (one on each side of coil) in duct.4. Access to control devices.



3.06 INSTALLATION OF FIRE DAMPERS

A. Install fire dampers per the manufacturer’s installation instructions and in accordance with the current edition of UL-555 Standard for Fire Dampers.

B. Fire Damper Identification: Access points, i.e. access doors, access panels, lay-in ceiling tile, etc., shall be permanently identified on the exterior of the access point by a label having letters not less than 0.5” in height reading “FIRE DAMPER”.

3.07 INSTALLATION OF GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS

A. General: Install grilles, registers and diffusers in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended functions.

B. Locate ceiling grilles, registers and diffusers, as indicated on general construction "Reflected Ceiling Plans".

C. Provide code approved support for grilles, registers and diffusers in lay-in ceilings.

3.08 INSTALLATION OF FANS

A. General: Install fans where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that fans comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.

B. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and

installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Ensure that rotation is in direction indicated and intended for proper performance. Do not proceed with fan start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to fan Installer.

3.09 INSTALLATION OF POWER AND GRAVITY VENTILATORS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated or specified, install ventilators in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and recognized industry practices to ensure that ventilators serve their intended function.1. Solder bottom joints and up 2" of side joints of duct under roof ventilator to retain any

moisture entering ventilator.

B. Roof Curbs: Furnish roof curbs to roofing Installer for installation.

C. Remove shipping bolts and temporary supports within ventilators. Adjust dampers for free operation.

3.10 INSTALLATION OF AIR TERMINALS

A. General: Install air terminals as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Location: Install each unit level and accurately in position indicated in relation to other work; and maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer.



C. Test terminal unit coils for leakage. Fill coil with water and inspect for leaks. Repair or replace any leaking components.

D. Start units to confirm proper operation. Remove and replace any malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.11 INSTALLATION OF AIR HANDLING UNITS

A. General: Install air handling units where indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published installation instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that units comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.

B. Support: Install indoor air handling unit as indicated on drawings. Coordinate type of support with General Contractor prior to installation.

C. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and

installation requirements of Division-26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer.

3.12 EXTRA STOCK

A. Provide one complete extra set of filters for each air handling system. If system is designed to include pre-filters and after- filters, provide only pre-filters. Install new filters at completion of air handling system work, and prior to testing, adjusting, and balancing work. Obtain receipt from Owner that new filters have been installed.


A. Leakage Tests: After each duct system which is constructed for duct classes over 3" is completed, test for duct leakage in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Repair leaks and repeat tests until total leakage is less than 1% of system design air flow.

B. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance.

C. Upon completion of installation of equipment and after motor has been energized with normal power source, test equipment to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Where possible, field correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.

D. Upon completion of installation and prior to initial operation, test and demonstrate that air terminals, and duct connections to air terminals, are leak-tight.

E. Repair or replace air terminals and duct connections as required to eliminate leaks, and retest to demonstrate compliance.

3.14 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. General: Connect metal ductwork to equipment as indicated, provide flexible connection for each ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and/or equipment containing rotating machinery. Provide access doors as indicated.



3.15 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean ductwork internally, unit by unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration.

B. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed.

C. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings, install fusible links in fire dampers and adjust for proper action.

D. Clean breechings internally during installation, removing dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal.

E. Temporary Closure: At ends of breeching which are not connected to equipment or stacks at time of installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed.

3.16 SPARE PARTS

A. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, 3 operating keys for each type of air outlet and inlet that require them.

B. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, one spare set of belts for each belt driven centrifugal fan.

C. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, one set of filters for each unit requiring filters.

3.17 TRAINING OF OWNER’S PERSONNEL

A. Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative for 1/2 day to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of heating and cooling units.1. Schedule training with Owner, provide at least 7-day notice to Contractor and Engineer of

training date.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLSValdez Elementary ROOFTOP UNITSOZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 23 73 00 - 1

SECTION 23 73 00

MECHANICAL ROOFTOP UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following rooftop air conditioners:1. Packaged rooftop units with gas fired furnace heating, DX cooling, and modulating power

exhaust.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each model indicated, including rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For rooftop air conditioners to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.04 WARRANTY

A. Warranty on Compressor and Heat Exchanger: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer, agreeing to replace/repair, within warranty period, compressors and/or heat exchangers with inadequate and defective materials and workmanship, including leakage, breakage, improper assembly, or failure to perform as required; provided manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining units have been adhered to during warranty period. Replacement shall be component replacement and labor for removal and reinstallation.1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of substantial completion.

1.05 DATE OF SHIPMENT

A. Mechanical Contractor shall notify General Contractor and Owner of shipping date within two weeks of being awarded a contract. Rooftop Unit ship date shall not delay the final completion date.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS

A. Packaged rooftop unit shall include compressors, evaporator coils, filters, supply fans, dampers, air-cooled condenser coils, condenser fans, gas heaters, exhaust fans, and unit controls.



B. Casing: Manufacturer's standard double wall galvanized steel, foam injected, thermally brokenconstruction with exterior enamel paint finish, hinged access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, minimum R-13, 2 lb. thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections, exterior condensate drain connection, and lifting lugs.

C. Indoor Fan: Direct drive, backward curved plenum, grease-lubricated ball bearings, and motor. Mount fan and motor assembly on base with rubber isolators.

D. Exhaust Fan: Provide integral power exhaust fan, sized for 100% relief. Fan shall be belt drive, backward curved plenum, statically and dynamically balanced, grease-lubricated ball bearings, and motor.

E. Condenser Coil Fan: Propeller type, directly driven by permanently lubricated motor.

F. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in galvanized-steel casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor and thermal expansion valve; tested to 450 psig and leak tested to 300 psig with air under water. Insulate coil section. Provide double sloped stainless-steel drain pan under indoor coil.

G. Compressor(s): Semi-hermetic compressors with integral vibration isolators, internal overcurrent and overtemperature protection, internal pressure relief.

H. Refrigeration System:1. R-410a Refrigerant.2. Compressor(s).3. Outside coil and fan.4. Indoor coil and fan.5. Suction line accumulator.6. Check valves.7. Expansion valves with replaceable thermostatic elements.8. Refrigerant dryers.9. High-pressure switches.10. Low-pressure switches.11. Thermostats for coil freeze-up protection during low-ambient temperature operation or loss

of air.12. Independent refrigerant circuits. (If applicable.)13. Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines.14. Charge of refrigerant.15. Timed Off Control: Automatic-reset control shuts compressor off after five minutes.16. Refrigerant Circuits: Interlaced refrigerant-coil circuiting with circuit for each compressor.17. Capacity Control: variable capacity scroll compressor on the lead circuit.18. Compressor Motor Overload Protection: Manual reset.19. Antirecycling Timing Device: Prevents compressor restart for five minutes after shutdown.20. Oil pressure switch: Designed to shut down compressors on low oil pressure.

I. Heat Exchangers: Provide manufacturer's standard construction for gas-fired heat exchangers and burners.1. Controls: Provide the following controls:

a. Redundant gas valve.b. Intermittent pilot ignition.c. Electronic spark ignition system.d. High limit cutout.e. Forced draft proving switch.f. Modulating gas valves and adjustable speed combustion blowers.

J. Filters: 2-inch thick, throwaway filters in filter rack; 30 percent average arrestance.



K. Outside Air/Economizer:1. Unit shall include a 100% economizer consisting of the following:

a. Damper frames shall be constructed of 18 gauge galvanized steel.b. Damper blades shall be parallel type and constructed of 18 gauge galvanized steel.c. Outdoor air intake dampers shall be low leak not to exceed 3% at 1-in. wg pressure

differential and include stainless steel side seal and neoprene edge seal.

L. Power Connection: Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in circuit breaker.

M. Unit Controls: Solid-state control board and components contain at least the following features:1. Indoor fan on/off delay.2. Default control to ensure proper operation after power interruption.3. Service relay output.4. Unit diagnostics and diagnostic code storage.5. Minimum run time.6. Low-refrigerant pressure control.7. Refer to Section 23 09 23 and drawing M6-1 for the minimum points required by the DDC

control.

N. Controls1. Factory Installed and Factory Provided Controller

a. Unit controller shall be capable of controlling all features and options of the unit. Controller shall be factory installed in the unit controls compartment and factory tested. Controller shall be capable of stand alone operation with unit configuration, setpoint adjustment, sensor status viewing, unit alarm viewing, and occupancy scheduling available without dependence on a building management system.

b. Controller shall have an onboard clock and calendar functions that allow for occupancy scheduling.

c. Controller shall include non-volatile memory to retain all programmed values without the use of a battery, in the event of a power failure.

d. Variable Air Volume Controller1) Unit shall utilize a variable capacity compressor system and a variable speed

supply fan system to modulate cooling and airflow as required to meet space temperature cooling loads and to save operating energy. Supply fan speed shall modulate based on supply air duct static pressure. Cooling capacity shall modulate based on supply air temperature.

2) Unit shall modulate heating with constant airflow to meet space temperature heating loads. Modulating heating capacity shall modulate based on supply air temperature.

e. Unit configuration, setpoint adjustment, sensor status viewing, unit alarm viewing, and occupancy scheduling shall be accomplished with connection to interface module with LCD screen and input keypad, interface module with touch screen, or with connection to PC with free configuration software. Controller shall be capable of connection with other factory installed and factory provided unit controllers with individual unit configuration, setpoint adjustment, sensor status viewing, and occupancy scheduling available from a single unit. Connection between unit controllers shall be with a modular cable. Controller shall be capable of communicating and integrating with a BACnet network.

O. Optional Accessories:1. Service Outlets: One, 115-V, ground-fault, circuit-interrupter type.2. Dirty-filter switch.3. Steel hail guards, on condenser coils.



P. Roof Curb: Steel with corrosion-protection coating, gasketing, and factory-installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards; minimum height of 14 inches. Provide curb with minimum of 2” of rigid internal insulation with a minimum rating of R-8.7.

Q. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. AAON (Basis of Design)2. Trane Co. (Deduct Alternate)3. McQuay (Deduct Alternate).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF ROOFTOP UNITS

A. General: Install rooftop units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

B. Support: Install units on roof curb, in accordance with National Roofing Contractor's Association (NRCA) installation recommendations.

C. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and

installation requirements of Division-26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment Installer.

D. Start-up rooftop units, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Grounding:1. Provide positive equipment ground for rooftop unit components.

3.02 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:1. Install ducts to termination in a rooftop unit.2. Install heating water piping to preheat coil in unit.3. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under

entire roof curb. Duct penetration through opening in existing roof decking shall be resiliently sealed to mitigate transfer of noise.

4. Connect supply ducts to rooftop unit with flexible duct connectors as specified in Division 23Section "Duct Accessories."

5. Terminate return-air duct through roof structure and insulate space between roof and bottom of unit with 2-inch thick, acoustic duct liner.

C. Electrical System Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls.

D. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."



E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

END OF SECTION

100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 1 of 9

SECTION 26 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

1.01 PART 1 - GENERAL

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-

tions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. National Electrical Contractors Association

1. NECA 1: Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting

1.03 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all materials and equipment and provide all labor and supplies necessary for the installa-

tion of the complete electrical system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. Provide all other work and miscellaneous items not specifically mentioned but reasonably inferred for a complete installation including all accessories and appurtenances required for testing the sys-tems.

B. It is the intent of these documents that the entire electrical installation be complete and opera-tional in every respect and any minor items omitted but obviously necessary to accomplish this intent shall be furnished and installed as if they were included in the documentation.

1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The electrical drawings which constitute an integral part of this contract shall serve as working

drawings. The indicate the general diagrammatic layout of the complete electrical system includ-ing arrangement of feeders, circuits, outlets, switches, controls, panelboards, service equipment, fixtures, and all other work.

B. Field verification of any scale dimensions is directed since actual locations, distances, and levels will be governed by actual field conditions.

C. The contractor is shall review all the drawings – architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, and low voltage systems – and report any errors or omissions to the Architect or Engineer prior to bidding. Architectural drawings shall govern.

D. The contractor shall be responsible for the exact fittings of all materials and equipment.

1.05 CODES, REGULATIONS, AND STANDARDS A. The electrical installation shall be in compliance with the requirements of the latest editions of In-

ternational Building Codes (IBC), the National Electrical Code (NEC), and other applicable Na-tional Fire Protection Codes (NFPA) including amendments and regulations adopted by the local jurisdiction.

B. The equipment and installation shall be in compliance with the latest editions of the standards listed in the other sections of these specifications.

C. The Contractor and electrical installation shall fully comply with all applicable Federal, State, City, and County laws, ordinances, and regulations.

D. If there is a conflict between codes, local ordinances, or laws and the contract documents (speci-fications and drawings), the most stringent requirements shall apply.

1.06 LICENSES, FEES, AND PERMITS A. All required permits shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. B. All fees and costs for services of inspections authorities shall be paid by the Contractor.



C. The Contractor shall cooperate fully with the local utility companies with respect to installation of their services to the building.

1.07 OBSERVATION A. The work shall be subject to observation by the Owner, Engineer, or their representatives at all

times. In the event of questionable work, their decisions will be final.

1.08 GUARANTEE A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Summary” for information about Guarantees. B. All electrical work, items of equipment, and materials provided by the Electrical Contractor shall

be guaranteed for a minimum period of one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion of the project. Longer guarantee periods required in other sections of these specifications shall govern over the minimum period specified in this section.

1.09 SAFETY AND INDEMNITY A. The Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site including

safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement will apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours.

B. No act, service, drawing review, construction observation by the Owner, Engineers, or their con-sultants is intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractor’s safety measures in, on, or near the construction site.

1.10 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Summary” for information about Specification and Drawing Con-

ventions.

1.11 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data” for information about preparation

and content of Operations and Maintenance Manuals to be submitted for this project. B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care

and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance

data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for

each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional

manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only

sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data ap-plicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and

where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the rela-tionship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to en-sure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manu-

als.



F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

1.12 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents” for information about preparation and

content of record documents to be submitted for this project. B. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and

Shop Drawings. 1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies

from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints.

a) Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b) Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c) Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup

before enclosing concealed installations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIAL STANDARDS A. The design, manufacture, and testing of all electrical equipment and materials shall conform to

or exceed the latest applicable standards of NEMA, IEEE, and ANSI. B. All materials unless otherwise noted shall be new. All materials shall be UL listed and bear the

UL label. Materials that are not covered by UL testing standards shall be tested and approved by an Independent Testing Laboratory or Governmental Agency acceptable to the Owner, Engi-neer, and Local Code Enforcing Agency.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. The listing of manufacturers in this specification does not imply acceptance of their products that

do not meet the specific ratings, features, and functions. B. Manufacturers listed are not relieved from meeting the requirements of these specifications in

their entirety. Products in compliance with the specification and manufactured by others will only be considered if submitted for review by the Engineer as a substitution for the specified manu-facturer(s).

2.03 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS A. Where the specifications call for an installation to be made in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations, a copy of such recommendations shall be kept in the job superintendant’s field office at all times and shall be available for review by the Owner’s representative or Engi-neer.

B. The Contractor shall follow the manufacturer’s instruction and recommendations where they cover points not specifically indicated on the drawings, in the specifications, or as required for code compliance. If the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations are in conflict with the drawings or specifications, the Contractor shall obtain clarification from the Engineer before be-ginning work.



2.04 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Substitution Procedures” for information about making substitutions

for equipment and materials specified for use on this project. B. It is the intent of the specifications to establish quality standards of materials and equipment to

be installed on this project. Hence, specific items are identified by manufacturer, trade name, and/or catalog designation or number.

C. The listing of specific manufacturers does not imply acceptance of products that do not meet the specified ratings, features, or functions. Manufacturers listed are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety.

D. Should the Contractor purpose to furnish materials and equipment other than those specified as permitted by the “or approved equal” and “or equivalent” clauses, the Contractor shall submit a written request for each substitution complete with documentation as required in Division 01 Section “Substitution Procedure.”

E. When substitutions alter the design, conduit, wiring, or space requirements indicated on the plans the Contractor shall include all items of cost necessary for revising the design and con-struction.

F. Acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitutions shall be at the discretion of the Engineer. Under no circumstances will the Engineer be required to prove that an item proposed for substi-tution is not equal to the specified item. It is mandatory that the Contractor submit all evidence required to support the contention that the item proposed for substitution is equal to the item in-dicated on the drawings or indentified in the specifications.

G. If requested by the Engineer the Contractor shall submit samples for inspection of the item pro-posed for substitution.

2.05 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures” for information about making submittals for

this project. B. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare submittals required by individual Specifi-

cation Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Partial submittals for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has

received prior approval from the Engineer. D. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned

without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. F. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project Man-

agement and Coordination." G. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of

firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact in-formation of architects and owners, and other information specified.

H. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating current product produced by manufac-turer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

I. Field Test Reports: Submit reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed ei-ther during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

J. Contractor’s Review: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimen-sions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Engineer and Construction Manager. 1. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project

name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of re-viewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been re-viewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit

for wall-mounting items. C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange

and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facili-tate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope. F. Provide labeling of all power distribution equipment marked to indicate the device or equipment

where the power supply originates as required per NEC 408.

3.02 COORDINATION A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce head-room are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other in-stallations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of ob-

structions and of the working and access space of other equipment. B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete,

masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Details of equipment furnished under other Divisions of this specification but installed as part of

the Division 26 work will be found on the drawings and in the specification sections associated with the Division supplying the equipment.

D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished sur-faces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

E. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping. Fire-stopping is specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

F. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid conflict and to provide correct rough-in anc connec-tions for equipment furnished by others that require electrical connections. Inform contractors of other trades about the required access to and clearances around electrical equipment to comply with code and maintain serviceability.

G. Verify equipment dimensions and requirements with provisions specified under this section. Check actual job conditions before fabricating work. Changes or additions subject to additional compensation which are made without written authorization by the Owner on an agreed upon price shall be at the Contractor’s risk and expense.

H. Provide products and equipment which are compatible with other work requiring mechani-cal/electrical interface including electrical connections control devices, water, drain and other piping connections. Verify electrical characteristics, fuel requirements and other interface re-quirements before ordering equipment and resolve conflicts that may arise. Coordinate the pro-vision and installation of work by mechanical & others per the following schedule.



I. FA = Fire Detection System Installer

J. FP = Fire Protection Installer

K. C = Controls Installer

L. I = Installer of equipment requiring service

M. E = Electrical Installer

N. M = Mechanical Installer Furnished Set Power Control By By Wiring Wiring

Other Equipment Motors I I E I Mechanical Equipment Motors M M E M Magnetic Motor Starters: Automatically controlled, with or Without HOA switches M M E -- Automatically controlled, with or Without HOA switches and furnished As part of factory wired equipment M M E M Manually Controlled I I E C Manually controlled an furnished As part of factory wired equipment I I E C Fused and unfused disconnect switches E2 E2 E - Line voltage (120V) thermostats, time clocks, etc., not connected to panel systems M M E M Interface of mechanical systems and devices with the fire alarm systems E E E E Electric thermostats, time clocks, remote bulb thermostats, motor valves, float controls, etc. which are an integral part of or directly attached to ducts, pipes, etc. M M E M Temperature control panels and time switches mounted on Temperature control panes M M E M

Furnished Set Power Control By By Wiring Wiring

Motor Valves, damper motors, M M E M solenoid valves, EP & PE switches, etc. Alarm Bells -3 -3 E C Low voltage controls, thermostats, valves dampers, etc. M M M M Fire protection controls & switches FP FP E E Fire and smoke detectors, including relays for fan shutdown duct mounted E M E1 FA Boiler controls, boiler burner control panels, internally wired M M E M Pushbutton stations, pilot lights M M E M



Disconnect switches, thermal overload switches, manual operating switches E E E E Multi-speed switches M M E M Contactors I I E M Control relays, transformers I I E M

Notes: Motor driven units which are controlled from line voltage automatic controls such as line voltage thermostats, float switches or time switches which conduct full load current of the motor shall be wired for both power and control circuit under the electrical contract. However, if the control device does not conduct full load current, then the responsibility shall be that set forth in the above schedule. (Example: a 208 volt, 3-phase, 3-wire motor required 120 volt control. Electrical Installer shall furnish a 120 volt circuit for control and 208 volt circuit for power and wire the power circuit. Mechanical Installer shall wire the control circuit.) Note No 1: Wiring from alarm contacts to alarm system under Division 26; control function wiring under Division 23. Note No 2: Disconnects for AH units are factory mounted. Note No 3: Supplied with equipment.

3.03 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Temporary Facilities and Controls” for information about establish-

ing and installing temporary electrical facilities for use on this project. B. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in

the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Archi-tect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Retain paragraph below and delete paragraph above if utilities are available on-site and Owner will pay for their use for construction operations.

D. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

E. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each tem-porary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

F. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage installer of the permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of the permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned respon-sibilities.

G. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

H. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

I. Retain subparagraph below if Owner is willing to permit use of building's existing electric service. J. Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition accepta-

ble to Owner. K. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for

construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. L. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without

operating entire system. M. Retain the following subparagraph if there will be an illuminated project sign. N. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all

construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office. O. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has end-

ed, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Sub-stantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have



been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean ex-posed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. 2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during con-

struction period.

3.04 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Refer to Division 02 Section “Selective Demolition” for information about demolition of existing

equipment and materials on this project. B. Existing systems to remain within the scope of work must be tested prior to commencement of

work to verify system integrity and proper operation. Systems include, but are not limited to fire alarm security systems, lighting control systems. Test results and any system deficiencies shall be reported to the Owner prior to commencement of work. Contractor shall assume responsibil-ity for system functionality if testing has not been performed.

C. All outlets, fixtures, equipment, etc. in existing areas to be remodeled are to be removed, capped, or abandoned except where found to be usable under the new construction.

D. All outlets and wiring which are to remain shall be reconnected to remain operable. Rework and extend existing circuits, conduit, and relocate outlets as necessary to maintain functionality of all items to remain.

E. Existing items that conflict with new construction shall be reworked and relocated to avoid con-flicts with the new construction.

F. All wiring except where indicated to be reused shall be disconnected from both the supply and utilization equipment and be removed from the conduit.

G. All exposed conduit, boxes, and outlets shall be removed. Conduit that is not accessible shall be cut, capped, and abandon in place.

H. Equipment, light fixtures, and devices removed shall be the Owner’s property and shall be stored in the building at a location directed by the Owner. Provide a written inventory of the items re-moved indicating quantity, description, and condition of the items removed.

I. Items not wanted by the Owner shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be re-moved from the site.

J. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdic-tion.

K. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Con-duct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

L. Consider retaining the following paragraph and subparagraph unless it is definitely known that there will be no hazardous materials encountered in the demolition process.

M. Hazardous Materials: It is unknown whether hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;

immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract.

N. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selec-tive demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demoli-tion operations began.

3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Cutting and Patching” for information about performing required

cutting and patching on this project. B. All cutting and patching work shall be laid out in advance. C. Where cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, or other sur-

faces is necessary for proper installation, support, or anchorage of raceways, outlets, or other electrical equipment the work shall be carefully done.

D. Any damage to woodwork, metalwork, or finished surface shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trades involved at no additional cost to the Owner.



E. Any required openings in concrete walls or floors shall be core drilled. F. The Contractor not cut or drill any structural member without first obtaining written approval of

the Structural Engineer. G. The Contractor shall do no cutting, channeling, or drilling of unfinished masonry, tile, etc., unless

permission is first obtained from the Owner. If permission is granted, the Contractor shall per-form this work in a manner approved by the Owner.

H. Existing Utility Services and Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to pre-vent interruption to occupied areas.

3.06 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Demonstration and Training” for information about required

demonstration and training to be provided on this project. B. At completion of the project at such time designated by the owner, the Contractor shall instruct

the Owner as to the location and operation of all electrical equipment and systems installed as part of this contract. The Contractor shall also brief the Owner on the routing of feeders to major pieces of mechanical equipment and other large equipment provided by other trades and con-nected under Division 26.

C. The Contractor shall also provide demonstration of operation to the Owner of all special systems including items installed by the Contractor or under the Contractor’s supervision.

D. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires sea-sonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner, through Construction Manager, with at least seven days' ad-

vance notice. E. Provide demonstration and training as required by individual Specification Sections.

3.07 OUTAGES A. Retain this section if outages of various systems will be required to accommodate installation or

switchover to new systems. Edit as required by the project. B. The entire facility must remain operational during the work. One or more outages of the electrical

distribution system within the building and fire detection and alarm system may be required to complete installation and connection of the new distribution equipment and fire alarm devices . The number and length of these outages must be kept to a minimum.

C. The Contractor shall be required to prepare a detailed Method of Procedure (MOP) for each out-age. Each MOP shall detail the start and end times for the outage, the steps to be performed during the outage, the approximate time allotted for each step, and a back-out procedure should something unexpected occur or be discovered during the outage.

D. The MOP shall be prepared sufficiently in advance of the outage to permit review and comment by the Owner, Engineer. The Contractor shall incorporate all comments into the MOP and submit copies for final review and signoff by all parties. Once approved, the Contractor shall notify the Owner 72 hours in advance of the outage and receive final written permission to proceed.

END OF SECTION 26 05 00


GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1 of 326 05 26260526

SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-tions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. ASTM International 1. ASTM B 3: Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire 2. ASTM B 8: Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-

Hard or Soft 3. ASTM B 33: Specification for Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes

C. The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. 1. IEEE 81: Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Po-

tentials of a Ground System 2. IEEE C2: National Electrical Safety Code (ANSI)

D. InterNational Electrical Testing Association 1. NETA MTS: Maintenance Testing Specifications

E. NFPA 1. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code 2. NFPA 70B: Recommended Practice for Electrical Equipment Maintenance 3. NFPA 780: Installation of Lightning Protection Systems

F. Telecommunications Industry Association/Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions 1. TIA/ATIS J-STD-607-A: Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Require-

ments for Telecommunications (ANSI) G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

1. UL 96: Lightning Protection Components 2. UL 467: Grounding and Bonding Equipment 3. UL 891: Switchboards

1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Grounding systems and equipment.

1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

a. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for in-tended use.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Sizes and types of conductors in four subparagraphs below are typical examples. 28-kcmil

bonding cable in first subparagraph below is slightly larger than No. 6 AWG. 5. Bonding Cable: 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 6. Bonding Conductor: Copper, stranded conductor, sized as indicated on the drawings. If not

indicated, provide conductors sized as required by Article 250 of the NEC.



7. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

2.02 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of con-ductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted compression-type, with at least two bolts. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe, bronze.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for ma-terials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Compression Connectors: Irreversible compression type made with copper extrusions, rods, and seamless tubing capable of carrying the equivalent or greater current than the capacity of the conductors; listed in conformance with UL 467.

E. Ground Bushings: OZ type BLO or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3. Connections to Reinforcing Steel in Concrete: Welded connections. 4. Connections to Ground Bars: Two-hole compression connectors bolted to bar. 5. Exposed Indoor Connections: Compression connectors.

3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. Provide

full-sized equipment ground conductor in all feeders, regardless of type of raceway. Provide equipment grounding conductor in all branch circuit conduits.

B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidi-fiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and con-nected metallic piping.

C. Ground each separately-derived system neutral (transformer secondary) to nearest effectively-grounded metallic cold water pipe, effectively grounded building structural steel (preferred source) or ground bus.

D. Provide communications system grounding conductor at point of service entrance and connect to service grounding electrode system. Provide minimum #6 AWG copper conductor in conduit for each communications service grounding conductor. Terminate communications service ground-ing conductor on ground bar in MDF and IDF rooms and then terminate other end at building grounding electrical system.

3.03 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise

indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate

any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bond-

ing so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, if a disconnect-type connection is

required, use a bolted clamp.



C. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of asso-ciated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

3.04 LABELING A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" Article for

instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Contractor to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,

test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been ener-gized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Coordinate subparagraph below with "Informational Submittals" Article; revise to suit Project. E. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. G. Report measured ground resistances that exceed 5ohms. H. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify engineer

promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.



HANGARS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1 of 426 05 29260529

SECTION 26 05 29260529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-tions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. American Welding Society 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M: Structural Welding Code - Steel

C. ASTM International 1. ASTM A 36/A 36M: Carbon Structural Steel 2. ASTM A 325: Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength 3. ASTM A 780: Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized

Coatings D. Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

1. MSS SP-58: Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture 2. MSS SP-69: Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application

E. Metal Framing Manufacturers Association 1. MFMA-4: Metal Framing Standards Publication

F. National Electrical Contractors Association 1. NECA 1: Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2. NECA 101: Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT)

G. NFPA 1. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code

H. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings 1. SSPC-PA 1 : Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of

Steel 1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering

analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design crite-ria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported sys-tems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding

Code - Steel." B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items

are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories..



C. Coordinate size and location of hangers and supports with other trades so as to avoid conflicts. Coordinate with installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations as required to avoid conflicts.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a) Allied Tube & Conduit. b) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c) ERICO International Corporation. d) Thomas & Betts Corporation. e) Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

2. Retain one or more coating systems in first three subparagraphs below. If retaining more than one, specify in Part 3 where each coating system is required.

3. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating ap-

plied according to MFMA-4. 5. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4. 6. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. 7. If retaining first paragraph and subparagraphs below, coordinate with Part 3 and with Draw-

ings to indicate where nonmetallic channel is to be used. Plastic support systems are not normally specified, so normally delete this section.

8. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items.

9. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles. 10. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated

fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded

body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in ris-er conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for support-ed loads and building materials where used. a) Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers of-

fering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

i. Hilti Inc. ii. ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. iii. MKT Fastening, LLC. iv. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for sup-ported loads and building materials in which used.



b) Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers of-fering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

v. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. vi. Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. vii. Hilti Inc. viii. ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. ix. MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.02 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions

of supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes

and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspend-ed ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

E. Do not install raceway on or above roofs except as specifically allowed on drawings. If allowed install 12” above roof & derate conductors per NEC 310.15 or install 36” above roof without de-rating conductors.

3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Arti-

cle. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC

may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength

will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods un-less otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. (For luminaire support wires only)



5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or great-er. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, pan-

elboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate .

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

F. Provide vibration insulation pads for vibrating equipment such as transformers. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.04 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both direc-tions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi , 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base. 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting

drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be em-bedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.05 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvaniz-ing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1 of 1026 05 33260533

SECTION 26 05 33260533

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. American National Standards Institute 1. ANSI C80.1: Rigid Steel Conduit - Zinc Coated (GRC) 2. ANSI C80.3: Electrical Metallic Tubing - Zinc Coated (EMT) 3. ANSI C80.5: Aluminum Rigid Conduit - Zinc Coated (ARC) 4. ANSI C80.6: Intermediate Metal Conduit - Zinc Coated (IMC)

C. ASTM International 1. ASTM A 53/A 53M: Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded

and Seamless

D. International Organization for Standardization (1, rue de Varembe, Case postale 56, CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland; +41-22-749-01-11; www.iso.ch/iso/en/ISOOnline.frontpage )

1. ISO 9000: Quality Management 2. ISO 10012: Measurement Management Systems

E. National Electrical Contractors Association 1. NECA 1: Standard Practice for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction

F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association 1. NEMA 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) 2. NEMA FB 1: Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic

Tubing and Cable 3. NEMA OS 1: Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports 4. NEMA OS 2: Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports 5. NEMA RN 1: Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit

and Intermediate Metal Conduit 6. NEMA TC 2: Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit 7. NEMA TC 3: PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing 8. NEMA TC 13: Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (ENT)

G. NFPA 1. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code

H. Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (140 Phillips Rd., Exton, PA 19341-1318; 800-542-5040; 610-363-6888; www.scte.org )

1. SCTE 77: Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity

I. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1. UL 514B: Fittings for Cable and Conduit 2. UL 886: Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified) 3. UL 1660: Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit 4. UL 2024: Optical Fiber Cable Raceway



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 3. Surface raceways. 4. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.

C. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

D. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

E. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

F. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

G. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

H. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

I. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

J. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Source quality-control reports.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Electri-Flex Company. 5. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 6. Picoma Industries, a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc. 7. Republic Conduit. 8. Robroy Industries. 9. Southwire Company. 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 11. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 12. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company.

B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.

E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

F. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated GRC. 1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.

G. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

H. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

I. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

J. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70. 2. Fittings for EMT:

a) Material: Steel. b) Type: Setscrew.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with over-lapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

K. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.



2.02 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 or Type 3Runless otherwise indicated on the drawings, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.03 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a) Panduit Corp. b) Wiremold / Legrand. c) Thomas & Betts Corporation d) Walker Systems

2.04 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 2. EGS/Appleton Electric. 3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 4. FSR Inc. 5. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 6. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division. 7. Kraloy. 8. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 9. Mono-Systems, Inc. 10. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 11. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 12. Robroy Industries. 13. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 14. Wiremold / Legrand.



B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

E. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.

F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

H. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

I. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.

J. Gangable boxes are allowed.

K. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 3Rwith continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

L. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front,

finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing

agency, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: GRC . 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Elec-

tric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R][.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC.



3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the following: a) Loading dock. b) Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c) Mechanical rooms. d) Gymnasiums. e) Rooftop.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT]. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Elec-

tric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet loca-tions.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel

in damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless oth-

erwise indicated. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of

conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT Conduits: Use steel set-screw fittings for accessible concealed joints in dry indoor loca-tions and steel compression type fittings for all other locations.

4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete.

F. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

G. Do not install nonmetallic.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.



G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement.

Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure race-ways to reinforcement at maximum10-foot intervals.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Some authorities having jurisdiction may not permit nonmetallic tubing in fire-rated slabs in

subparagraph below. Coordinate with structural engineer. 4. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions. 5. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for

each specific location.

J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in

an enclosure.

K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

L. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

M. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

N. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

O. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

P. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

Q. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

R. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

S. Surface Raceways: 1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding

48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.



T. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

U. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spac-es.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

V. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

W. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature

change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet.

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a) Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. b) Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. c) Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

temperature change. d) Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected ac-cording to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of in-stallation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

X. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

Y. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

Z. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

AA. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

BB. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.



CC. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

DD. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

3.03 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.04 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

B. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming ma-terials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.

D. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating

items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrat-

ing items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce

smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

E. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Manage-ment of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.

F. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

G. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged



or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recom-

mended by manufacturer.



SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

260544- 1 of 426 05 44260544

SECTION 26 05 44260544


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends.

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.



260544- 2 of 426 05 44260544

D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:

1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

2.02 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. CALPICO, Inc. c. Metraflex Company (The). d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. Proco Products, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDMrubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length required

to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.03 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Presealed Systems.

2.04 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.



260544- 3 of 426 05 44260544

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.05 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below.

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or

cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used.

Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.



260544- 4 of 426 05 44260544

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.02 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.



IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1 of 9 26 05 53260553

SECTION 26 05 53260553

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. American National Standards Institute

1. ANSI A13.1: Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems 2. ANSI Z535.1: Safety Color Code 3. ANSI Z535.2: Environmental and Facility Safety Signs 4. ANSI Z535.3: Criteria for Safety Symbols 5. ANSI Z535.4: Product Safety Sign and Label (The last standard above provides guidelines

for the design of safety signs and labels for application to products. It includes a color chart. It is referenced in NFPA 70, Article 110-16 FPN.)

6. ANSI Z535.5: Safety Tags and Barricade Tapes

C. ASTM International

1. ASTM D 638: Tensile Properties of Plastics 2. ASTM D 882: Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting

D. Code of Federal Regulations

1. 29 CFR - Labor, Part 1910 - "Occupational Safety and Health Standards," Section 1910.144 - "Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards.".

2. 29 CFR - Labor, Part 1910 - "Occupational Safety and Health Standards," Section 1910.145 - "Specifications for Accident Prevention Signs and Tags.".

3. 29 CFR - Labor, Part 1926 - "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction," Section 1926.403 - "General Requirements," Subpart K - "Electrical.".

E. The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.

1. IEEE C2: National Electrical Safety Code

F. NFPA

1. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code

G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

1. UL 94: Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances 2. UL 969: Marking and Labeling Systems



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products.


A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. Provide the number of submittals as listed in the Division 01 specifications.

B. Identification required in this section shall apply to equipment furnished by other Divisions as applicable.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. Provide identifying devices on acoustical ceiling grid members for devices above ceiling, such as fire alarm devices and control relays.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Provide products by the following:

1. Ideal Industries, Inc. 2. LEM Products, Inc. 3. 3M Company 4. Panduit 5. W.H. Brady, Co. 6. Brother 7. Kroy

2.02 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on a white field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage, source equipment designation, and circuit numbers and system or

service type.

C. Colors for Raceways carrying FIRE ALARM circuits / cabling:

1. White letters on a red field 2. Legend: Indicating “FIRE ALARM”

D. Colors for Raceways carrying GROUND conductors / cabling:

1. White letters on a green field 2. Legend indicating “GROUND”

E. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

2.03 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size.

B. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around cable it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F. Comply with UL 224.

C. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.



D. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

2.04 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

B. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

C. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around conductor it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F. Comply with UL 224.

2.05 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. 2-inch- wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay.

2.06 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.

3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.

C. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:

1. Weather-resistant, non-fading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.

3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches.

D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."

3. <



2.07 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face . 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.

2.08 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. Plates shall be punched for mechanical fasteners.. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

1. Black letters on a white background – normal power 2. Red letters on a white background – emergency power 3. White letters on a green background – grounding systems 4. Black letters on a yellow background – UPS systems.

B. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

1. Black letters on a white background – normal power 2. Red letters on a white background – emergency power 3. White letters on a green background – grounding systems 4. Black letters on a yellow background – UPS systems.

2.09 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.

B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black.

C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi. 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F. 5. Color: Black.



2.10 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

2.11 ADHESIVE MARKING TAPE FOR DEVICE COVERPLATES

A. 3/8” Kroy tape or Brother Labels with 3/16 inch minimum height letters. Embossed Dymo-Tape labels are not acceptable.

1. Black letters on a clear background – Normal Power 2. Red letters on a clear background – Emergency Power

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used in electrical identification work with corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering, and colors as approved in submittals and as required by the NEC.

B. Install identification devices in accordance with manufacturers written instructions and requirements of the NEC.

C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

D. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

F. Attach signs and plastic labels with mechanical fasteners.

G. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

H. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

I. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.



3.02 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, and more Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil 4-inch- wide black stripes on 10-inch centers over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- high black letters on 20-inch centers. Stop stripes at legends. Apply to the following finished surfaces:

1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches of a floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.

2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall. 3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in the

building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. Color code shall be same as conduits for pressure sensitive labels. All fire alarm box covers shall be painted RED. System legends shall be as follows:

1. Emergency Power. 2. Power. 3. UPS. 4. Fire Alarm.

C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and hand holes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for PhaseIdentification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. 4) Neutral: White 5) Ground: Green

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. 4) Neutral: Grey 5) Ground: Green

D. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

E. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-laminating polyester labelswith the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination.

F. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations provide heat-shrink preprinted tubeswith the conductor designation.



G. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

H. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

I. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Baked-enamel warning signs.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment

including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections. c. Lighting Control Systems d. Building Automation System

J. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

K. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor. d. Fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or

NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or



melamine label on front cover of panel. Provide additional identification on inside cover of panel. Panelboards shall be labeled with source information.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Enclosed switches. e. Enclosed circuit breakers. f. Enclosed controllers. g. Push-button stations. h. Contactors. i. Monitoring and control equipment. j. Disconnect switches.



PANELBOARDS 262616 - 1 of 8 26 24 16262416

SECTION 26 24 16262416

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.

1. IEEE 344: Recommended Practice for Seismic Qualification of Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations (ANSI)

2. IEEE C62.41: Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit 3. IEEE C62.41.2: Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage

(1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits

C. InterNational Electrical Testing Association

1. NETA Acceptance Testing Specification: Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems

D. National Electrical Contractors Association

1. NECA 1: Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting (ANSI) 2. NECA 407: Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards (ANSI)

E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association

1. NEMA 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) 2. NEMA FU 1: Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses 3. NEMA ICS 2: Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays

Rated 600 Volts 4. NEMA KS 1: Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts

Maximum) 5. NEMA PB 1: Panelboards 6. NEMA PB 1.1: General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of

Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less (ANSI)

F. NFPA

1. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code 2. NFPA 70E: Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace

G. Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers

1. SEI/ASCE 7: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

H. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.


PANELBOARDS 262616 - 2 of 8 26 24 16262416

1. UL 67: Panelboards (ANSI) 2. UL 489: Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker

Enclosures (ANSI) 3. UL 1449: Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors 4. UL 1699: Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupters

1.02 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 3. Load centers.


A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components. 6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.

1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:


PANELBOARDS 262616 - 3 of 8 26 24 16262416

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407


A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F. b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:


PANELBOARDS 262616 - 4 of 8 26 24 16262416

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than 7 days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. 3. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1 . b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R c. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4 .

2. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover (door-in-door construction).

3. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim.

4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent protective cover.


PANELBOARDS 262616 - 5 of 8 26 24 16262416

B. Incoming Mains Location: Locate as required by construction and panel location

C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box.

D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.

E. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices to the full capacity of the panel.

F. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

2.02 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following :

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: As indicated on drawings.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

F. Column-Type Panelboards: Not allowed.

2.03 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following :


B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.


PANELBOARDS 262616 - 6 of 8 26 24 16262416

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

4. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

5. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials. c. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup

and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. d. Shunt Trip: 24V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75] percent of

rated voltage. e. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a

single unit. f. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on

or off position. g. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.

C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.

1. Fuses: Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Fuses." 2. Fused Switch Features and Accessories: Standard ampere ratings and number of poles. 3. Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open and normally closed contact(s) that operate with

switch handle operation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.

B. Mount top of trim so that the handle of the highest circuit breaker does not exceed 78 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.


PANELBOARDS 262616 - 7 of 8 26 24 16262416

C. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

D. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

F. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.

G. Comply with NECA 1.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

E. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included , Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.


PANELBOARDS 262616 - 8 of 8 26 24 16262416

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the

facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

SECTION 16799 – KITCHEN HOOD FIRE CONTROL PANEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Operating Sequences: Operating sequences outlined below are a guideline only. Modify operating sequences as appropriate for each building and each project. 1. Initial State: This state would exist anytime there is a power outage, control power is

off, or after an alarm condition has been cleared. 2. Gas Reset Condition: After power is restored and/or all alarm conditions are reset, the

automatic gas valve must be manually reset (to avoid standing pilot gas entering the kitchen). Manual reset of the gas valve cannot be accomplished unless all alarm conditions are normal, the control power is on, and the hood exhaust fan is running. Standing pilots shall be lit manually.

3. Cooking State: This is the normal condition. The kitchen hood exhaust fan must be turned on in order to activate the make-up air fan (automatically started) and to enable the electrical power under the hood. Hood lights can be controlled manually independent of the kitchen hood exhaust fan operation by a wall mounted toggle switch.

4. Ansul Activation: This is activated by either melting the fusible link under the range hood or by manual pull at the Ansul system pull station. Activation of the Ansul system allows discharge of fire suppression chemicals on the range, fryers or other under-hood equipment where code- required fire suppression is mandatory. Ansul system activation will also turn on the hood exhaust fan (if not on already), turn off the make-up air unit, close the automatic gas valve, shut down all electrical power under the hood, turn off the hood lights and signal the building fire alarm system that an alarm condition exists.

5. Panic Button Activation: The panic button is located adjacent to the exterior exit from the kitchen. Pressing the panic button creates an alarm condition. The alarm will cause fans, under-hood power, under-hood lights, gas valve, and fire alarm conditions to be the same as those during Ansul activation, except that no fire suppression chemicals are discharged.

6. Fire Detection Activation: Detection of a fire condition by any of the fire detectors within the kitchen will cause the fire alarm system to go into alarm. Detection of a fire condition by any kitchen fire detectors will also cause the fans, under-hood power, under-hood lights, and the gas valve conditions to be the same as if the Ansul system was activated, except that no fire suppression chemicals would be discharged.

B. Relay Logic: 1. Reference drawing at end of section for relay ladder diagram operation described below. 2. A motorized gas valve is installed in the gas piping serving the appliances under the

hood. The gas valve opens when power is applied to it. To reset the gas valve, power is applied to relay R2 by pressing the momentary pushbutton energizing R2 and closing contact R2-2, which will hold in relay R2. Whenever the gas valve is energized, a green LED on the front of the panel turns on indicating “GAS VALVE ON”.

3. To turn on the hood exhaust fan, make-up air fan and electrical circuits for appliances under the hood, turn on the fan switch. This energizes relay R1, which closes contacts R1-1, R1-2 and R1-3. R1-1 energizes a multi-pole contactor that controls electric circuits serving equipment under the hood, such as steamers, fryers, and stoves. When the contactor is energized, a green LED on the front of the panel indicates


“APPLIANCES ON”. Contact R1-2 allows the gas valve to open once the exhaust fan is running. Contact R1-3 automatically starts the make-up air fan. Once the make-up air fan is running, it automatically starts the hood exhaust fan. A green LED on the front of the panel indicates “HOOD EXHAUST FAN ON”. Another green LED on the front of the panel indicates “MAKE-UP AIR FAN ON”.

4. When the chemical fire suppression system (Ansul system) is activated, relay A1 is energized. Contact A1-3 opens, which de-energizes relay TD and closes the gas valve. Contact A1-5 closes turning on the hood exhaust fan (if it is not on already). Contact A1-1 opens, de-energizing relay EC and opening the contactor, which de-energizes all electric circuits under the hood. Contact A1-4 opens and turns off the make-up air fan. Contact A1-3 energizes sending an alarm to the building fire alarm system (dedicated zone). Contact A1-2 will also open de-energizing the lights under the hood.

5. Power is removed from the under-hood lights when the wet chemical system is activated or the emergency pushbutton is struck, or a kitchen detector goes into alarm through the FACP.

6. Pushing the panic button or a signal from the FACP duplicates all functions described above when the Ansul system is activated.

7. TABLE OF STATES FOR VARIOUS CONDITIONS

ACTION

EXHAUST HOOD FAN

MAKE- UP AIR FAN

UNDER HOOD POWER

UNDER HOOD LIGHTS

GAS VALVE

FIRE ALARM

ANSUL SYSTEM

Initial state (control power off)

OFF OFF Automatic OFF ON/OFF Closed Normal Normal

Gas (Reset) Activation

ON ON Automatic ON ON/OFF Open Normal Normal

Cooking State (normal)

ON

Autom atic ON

Automatic ON

ON/OFF

Open

Normal

Normal

Ansul Activation

Auto ON Auto OFF

Auto OFF

Auto OFF

Auto Closed

Alarm

Activated

Panic-Button Activation

Auto ON Auto OFF

Auto OFF

Auto OFF

Auto Closed

Alarm

Normal

Fire Detection Activated

Auto ON Auto OFF

Auto OFF

Auto OFF

Auto Closed

Alarm

Normal

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: 1. Component and accessories list. 2. Submit shop drawings of the kitchen hood fire control panel showing all relays,

contacts and contactors required for the operation of the system. 3. Shop drawings must be coordinated with the range hood submittal, make-up air unit

submittal, automatic gas valve submittal, etc. B. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Provide complete ladder diagram of the panel operation, which includes relay


numbers and the devices they control. Relays within the panel must be numbered to correspond to the diagram. Provide a diagram for the Operations and Maintenance Manual and install a diagram within the panel.

2. Provide documentation of the panel re-start procedure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRICATION

A. Panel Manufacturer: Easter Owens or pre-approved equivalent. B. Fabricate the panel from commercially available parts. Panel shall not be fabricated

in the field. Panel shall be fabricated by a panel shop and shall be UL listed as an assembly or Factory Mutual label or other third party label acceptable to the State of Colorado Electrical Board for the use intended.

C. The panel shall be a surface-mounted steel or aluminum box with a keyed lock. Comply with Section 260500.

2.02 PANIC BUTTON

A. Provide a red, mushroom-head, pushbutton to be located near the kitchen exit door. The

push button shall be a maintained red LED illuminated type. Provide a shroud, similar to Stopper II, to prevent accidental activation of the button.

2.03 INDICATING LIGHTS A. Provide LED type indicating lights to show the conditions of the system per diagram at end

of section. 2.04 IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING

A. Comply with Section 262416 for panel and wiring identification. B. Label components, such as relays and pushbuttons in the panel, as well.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall install panel and interconnect wiring with range hood, makeup air unit, underhood lights and power, range hood control panel, fire suppression panel, gas reset buttons, fire alarm system, and exhaust hood.

B. Top of panel mounted maximum 6’-6” above finished floor. 3.02 TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION

A. The completed system must be tested in the presence of the DPS Project Manager. The proper operation of the panel must be demonstrated, including the re-start procedure.

B. Panel testing and demonstration for DPS personnel will be in addition to tests and inspections required by Code Authorities having jurisdiction.

END OF SECTION 16799


WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1 of 726 27 26262726

SECTION 26 27 26262726

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. The Institute for Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.

1. IEEE C62.41.2: Characterization of Surges in Low- Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits

2. IEEE C62.45: Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low- Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits

C. National Electrical Contractors Association

1. NECA 1: Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting.

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association

1. NEMA 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) 2. NEMA FB 11: Plugs, Receptacles, and Connectors of the Pin and Sleeve Type for

Hazardous Locations 3. NEMA WD 1: General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices 4. NEMA WD 6: Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements

E. National Fire Protection Association

1. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code 2. NFPA 99: Health Care Facilities

F. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance

1. TIA/EIA-568-B.1: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 1: General Requirements (ANSI)

G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

1. UL 20: General-Use Snap Switches 2. UL 498: Attachment Plugs and Receptacles 3. UL 943: Ground- Fault Circuit-Interrupters 4. UL 1010: Receptacle- Plug Combinations for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations 5. UL 1436: Outlet Circuit Testers and Similar Indicating Devices 6. UL 1449: Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors 7. UL 1472: Solid-State Dimming Controls 8. UL 1863: Communications-Circuit Accessories 9. UL 1917: Solid-State Fan Speed Controls



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Weather-resistant receptacles.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.



B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.


A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: The following manufacturers are acceptable unless noted otherwise in specific sections of part 2:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).



B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer

2.02 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


2.03 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles : Heavy-duty specification–grade rated 125 volts, 20A NEMA 5-20R configuration. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex). c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).

2.

2.04 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:

1. Straight blade, non-feed-through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer

provides proper GFCI protection.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cooper; VGF20. b. Hubbell; GFR5352L. c. Pass & Seymour; 2095. d. Leviton; 7590.

2.05 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:



a. Single Pole:

1) Cooper; AH1221. 2) Hubbell; HBL1221. 3) Leviton; 1221-2. 4) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1.

b. Two Pole:


c. Three Way:


d. Four Way:


C. Pilot-Light Switches, 20 A:


a. Cooper; AH1221PL for 120 and 277 V. b. Hubbell; HBL1201PL for 120 and 277 V. c. Leviton; 1221-LH1. d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1RPL for 120 V, PS20AC1RPL7 for 277 V.

2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "off."

D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; AH1221L. b. Hubbell; HBL1221L. c. Leviton; 1221-2L. d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.

2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

E. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches: 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors.


a. Cooper; 1995.



b. Hubbell; HBL1557. c. Leviton; 1257. d. Pass & Seymour; 1251.

F. Key-Operated, Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches: 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.


a. Cooper; 1995L. b. Hubbell; HBL1557L. c. Leviton; 1257L. d. Pass & Seymour; 1251L.

2.06 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplasticwith spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and

labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.07 FINISHES

A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White , unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red .

B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted on drawings.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.



2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left, unless noted otherwise on the drawings. In existing installations, match existing device mounting orientations.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

3.02 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.



3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.


1. Perform the following tests and inspections. 2. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 3. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout

or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the

circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

C. Test straight blade for the retention force of the grounding blade according to NFPA 99. Retention force shall be not less than 4 oz.

D. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.



FUSES 262813 - 1 of 326 28 13262813

SECTION 26 28 13262813

FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association

1. NEMA FU 1: Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses

C. NFPA


D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

1. UL 248-11: Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 11: Plug Fuses (ANSI)

1.02 SUMMARY


1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in enclosed switches. 2. Plug fuses rated 125-V ac and less for use in plug-fuse-type enclosed switches and

fuseholders.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material, dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.

a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.

b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment calculations are based.

2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings.


FUSES 262813 - 2 of 326 28 13262813


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Ambient temperature adjustment information. 2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Comply with UL 248-11 for plug fuses.


A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 degrees F or more than 100 degrees F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Edison Fuse, Inc. 3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 4. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.02 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.


FUSES 262813 - 3 of 326 28 13262813

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.



ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1 of 7 26 28 16262816

SECTION 26 28 16262816

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute

1. ASCE/SEI 7: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

C. ASME International

1. ASME A17.1: Safety Code for Elevators and Escala

D. InterNational Electrical Testing Association

1. NETA Acceptance Testing Specification: Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems

E. National Electrical Contractors Association

1. NECA 1: Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting (ANSI)

F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association

1. NEMA 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) 2. NEMA AB 1: Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker

Enclosures 3. NEMA AB 3: Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Their Application 4. NEMA FU 1: Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses 5. NEMA KS 1: Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts

Maximum)

G. NFPA

1. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code 2. NFPA 70E: Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace 3. NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm Code

H. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

1. UL 50: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (ANSI) 2. UL 98: Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (ANSI) 3. UL 489: Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker

Enclosures (ANSI) 4. UL 1053: Ground-Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment (ANSI)



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Receptacle switches. 4. Shunt trip switches. 5. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 6. Molded-case switches. 7. Enclosures.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Field quality-control reports.

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.


E. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to all or any portion of facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Prepare a detailed Method of Procedure (MOP) for each outage as described in Division 26 Section “Common Work Results for Electrical.”

2. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

3. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 4. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. 5. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.09 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following:




B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.02 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES



B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.03 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS



B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

D. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.



E. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

F. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker and trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse compartment door.

G. Ground-Fault, Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

H. Ground-Fault, Equipment-Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

I. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting

loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits. 4. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact. 5. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be

removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

2.04 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 3. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.



C. Install fuses in fusible devices.

D. Comply with NECA 1.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.



3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.



INTERIOR LIGHTING 261500 - 1 of 626 51 00265100

SECTION 26 51 00265100

INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. American National Standards Institute

1. ANSI C78.41: Electric Lamps - Low-Pressure Sodium Lamp 2. ANSI C78.42: Electric Lamps - High-Pressure Sodium Lamps 3. ANSI C78.43: Electric Lamps - Single-Ended Metal Halide Lamps 4. ANSI C82.1: For Lamp Ballast - Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast 5. ANSI C82.4: Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps

(Multiple Supply Type) 6. ANSI C82.11: High-Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts

C. ASTM International

1. ASTM A 580/A 580M: Specification for Stainless Steel Wire 2. ASTM A 641/A 641M: Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire

D. Code of Federal Regulations

1. 29 CFR - Labor, Chapter XVII - Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor, Part 1910 - "Occupational Safety and Health Standards," Subpart A - "General," Section 1910.7 - "Definition and Requirements for a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory."

2. 47 CFR - Telecommunication, Chapter I - Federal Communications Commission, Part 18 - "Industrial, Scientific, and Medical Equipment," Subpart C - "Technical Standards."

E. The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.

1. IEEE C62.41.1: Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits (ANSI)

2. IEEE C62.41.2: Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits (ANSI)

F. Military Specification and Standards (U.S. Department of Defense)

1. MIL-STD-461E: Requirements for the Control of Electromagnetic Interference Characteristics of Subsystems and Equipment

G. National Electrical Manufacturers Association

1. NEMA 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) 2. NEMA LE 4: Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility 3. NEMA LE 5: Procedure for Determining Luminaire Efficacy Ratings for Fluorescent

Luminaire



4. NEMA LE 5A: Procedure for Determining Luminaire Efficacy Ratings for Commercial, Non-Residential Downlight Luminaire

5. NEMA LE 5B: Procedure for Determining Luminaire Efficacy Ratings for High-Intensity Discharge Industrial Luminaire

H. NFPA

1. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code 2. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code

I. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

1. UL 924: Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment 2. UL 935: Fluorescent Lamp Balla 3. UL 1029: High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts 4. UL 1598: Luminaires

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Emergency lighting units. 2. Exit signs. 3. Lighting fixture supports.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 26 Section “Common Work Results for Electrical” 2. Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

C. CRI: Color-rendering index.

D. HID: High-intensity discharge.

E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.


A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Manufacturer Information and catalog numbers. 2. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 3. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 4. Ballast, including BF.



5. Energy-efficiency data. 6. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps.

a. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from manufacturer.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.


C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.08 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years.



2. Warranty Period for Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings.

2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS

A. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

B. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

D. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple,

etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BT56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires.

d. Start type (rapid start, instant start, programmed rapid start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

E. Each light fixture shall have UL label for the location of the fixture installed.

2.03 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying with UL 924.

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to 80

percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay



disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

6. Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures. Provide where indicated on drawings.

7. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 15minutes when power is restored after an outage.

8. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.04 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage.

F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Provide and install all fixtures complete, including lamps, and ready for service.

B. Verify ceiling type and conditions, and order fixtures for proper application required by the type of ceiling installed.

C. Determine exact location and height of fixtures by the structural and mechanical limitations of the building. Install fixtures in such a manner as to avoid such obstructions and to give proper illumination result. Verify layouts with Architect.

D. Outlet box for surface or stem mounted fixtures shall be provided with fixture stud as well as tapped and drilled canopy covers. All outlets shall finish flush with walls or ceiling except when in ceiling tiles. Locate these in the center of the tile, unless noted otherwise on the electrical drawings.



3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures:

1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall. 1.

C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building

structure. 4. Provide above ceiling supports per the manufacturers recommendations adequate for the

weight of the luminaire.

D.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.



DENVER PUBILC SCHOOLS

SECTION 26 56 00

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Electrical Site Drawings

C. American Architectural Manufacturers Association

1. AAMA 611: Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum

D. American National Standards Institute 1. ANSI C78.43: Electric Lamps - Single-Ended Metal Halide Lamps 2. ANSI C82.1: For Lamp Ballast - Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast

E. ASTM International

1. ASTM A 36/A 36M: Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 2. ASTM A 48/A 48M: Specification for Gray Iron Castings 3. ASTM A 123/A 123M: Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products 4. ASTM A 500: Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural

Tubing in Rounds and Shapes 5. ASTM B 209: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate 6. ASTM B 209M: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric] 7. ASTM B 429/B 429M: Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube 8. ASTM B 660: Practices for Packaging/Packing of Aluminum and Magnesium Products

F. Code of Federal Regulations

1. 29 CFR - Labor, Chapter XVII - Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor, Part 1910 - "Occupational Safety and Health Standards," Subpart A - "General," Section 1910.7 - "Definition and Requirements for a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory."

G. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America

1. IESNA LM-5: Photometric Measurements of Area and Sports Lighting Installations 2. IESNA LM-64: Photometric Measurements of Parking Areas 3. IESNA LM-72: Directional Positioning of Photometric Data

H. The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.

1. IEEE C2: National Electrical Safety Code 2. IEEE C62.41.1: Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less) AC

Power Circuits (ANSI) 3. IEEE C62.41.2: Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage

(1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits (ANSI)



I. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers

1. Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products.

J. National Electrical Manufacturers Association

1. NEMA 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) 2. NEMA LE 5: Procedure for Determining Luminaire Efficacy Rating for Fluorescent

Luminaires 3. NEMA LE 5A: Procedure for Determining Luminaire Efficacy Ratings for Commercial, Non-

Residential Downlight Luminaires 4. NEMA LE 5B: Procedure for Determining Luminaire Efficacy Ratings for High-Intensity

Discharge Industrial Luminaires

K. NFPA


L. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings

1. SSPC-SP 1: Surface Preparation Specification No. 1: Solvent Cleaning 2. SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1: Joint Surface Preparation Standard SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1:

White Metal Blast Cleaning 3. SSPC-SP 8: Surface Preparation Specification No. 8: Pickling

M. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

1. UL 773: Plug-in, Locking Type Photocontrols for Use with Area Lighting 2. UL 773A: Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control 3. UL 1029: High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts 4. UL 1598: Luminaires

1.02 SUMMARY


1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. 2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays. 3. Poles and accessories.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 265100 Section "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings.

2. Division 260500 Section “Common Work Results” 3. Division 260526 Section “Grounding and Bonding” 4. Division 260533 Section “Raceways & Boxes for Electrical Systems” 5. Division 260923 Section “Lighting Control Devices 6. Division 260519 Section Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color-rendering index.



C. HID: High-intensity discharge.

D. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

E. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

F. Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination.

G. Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above.

1.04 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION

A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.

B. Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf, distributed as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.

C. Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft., applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M Ice Load Map.

D. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire and banners and banner arms, calculated and applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.

1. Basic wind speed for calculating wind load for poles exceeding 49.2 feet in height is 100 mph.

a. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0 . b. Minimum Design Life: 50 years . c. Velocity Conversion Factors: 1.0 .

2. Basic wind speed for calculating wind load for poles 50 feet high or less is 100 mph .

a. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0 . b. Minimum Design Life: 25 years . c. Velocity Conversion Factors: 1.0 .

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Name of manufacturer and catalog information for each item 2. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area,

and verification of indicated parameters. 3. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories (brackets). 4. Details of installation and construction. 5. Luminaire materials. 6. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with indicated

lamps, ballasts, and accessories.

a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.

b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.



7. Photoelectric relays. 8. Ballasts, including energy-efficiency data. 9. Lamps, including life, output, CCT, CRI, lumens, and energy-efficiency data. 10. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles. 11. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for

components involved. 12. Anchor bolts for poles and base plate dimensions. 13. Manufactured pole foundations.

14. Mast Arm information

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer. 3. Design calculations, certified by a qualified professional engineer, indicating strength of

screw foundations and soil conditions on which they are based. 4. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Pole and Support Component Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of poles, certifying that products are designed for indicated load requirements in AASHTO LTS-4-M and that load imposed by luminaire and attachments has been included in design. The certification shall be based on design calculations by a professional engineer.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and poles to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

G. Site photometric Calculation: If a different manufacturer or model number is utilized for the site lighting equipment, the Electrical Contractor shall submit the following information to the Engineer for review:

1. A site photometric calculation showing footcandle levels on a 10x10 grid for all parking areas, walkways, and areas adjacent to the exit discharge.

2. A numeric summary of the values shall be submitted electronically (utilizing the lighting calculation program AGI) showing the following:

a. Average Illuminance (fc) b. Maximum Illuminance (fc) c. Minimum Illuminance (fc) d. Uniformity Ratio Maximum: Minimum e. Uniformity Ratio Average: Minimum

3. The lumen value utilized for each fixture type for the calculation 4. Manufacturers product data for each fixture 5. The contractor shall revise the COMCHECK file as applicable for the new information.

H. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.




A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."


F. UL Compliance: The electrical contractor shall comply with UL standards, including UL 486A pertaining to roadway and parking area lighting. All lighting components and fittings shall be UL listed and labeled.

G. Comply with ANSI/ASTM: The electrical contractor shall comply with applicable requirements of ANSI C2, “National Electrical Safety Code, “pertaining to construction and installation of lighting poles and standards.

H. Comply with AASHTO: The electrical contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials Standard LTS-1; “Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals”.

I. Comply with NEMA: The electrical contractor shall comply with the NEMA Standards Publication No. LE2 and TT1 pertaining to parking area lighting units, materials and installation.

J. IES Compliance: The electrical contractor shall comply with applicable requirements of RP-20, “Parking Facilities Lighting”.


A. Exterior lighting products, fixtures & fittings shall be shipped and stored in factory-fabricated containers or wrappings, which properly protect the products from damage.

B. Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B 660.

C. Store poles on decay-resistant-treated skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation. Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.

D. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.

E. The Contractor shall handle the exterior metal lighting standards and brackets carefully to prevent breakage, denting, damage, and scoring finish. The Contractor shall not install damaged units or components, and shall be required to replace them with new products.



1.08 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain, perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage.

1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for Poles: Repair or replace lighting poles and standards that fail in finish,

materials, and workmanship within manufacturer's standard warranty period, but not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. The Electrical Contractor shall be required to coordinate with other electrical work including wires / cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceways to properly interface the installation of the exterior lighting work with other areas of work.

B. The Electrical Contractor shall sequence the exterior site lighting work with other work to minimize the possibility of damage and soiling during the remainder of the construction period.

1.10 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Data: The electrical contractor shall submit the maintenance data and parts list for each exterior site lighting fixture and accessory; including “trouble shooting” maintenance guide. Include in that data, product data, and shop drawings in a maintenance manual; in accordance with the Division 01 information.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. The listing of specific manufacturers does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features, and functions. Manufacturers listed are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. Products in compliance with the specification and manufactured by others not named will be considered only if pre-approved by the Engineer.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings.

2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES

A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. LER Tests Incandescent Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A. 2. LER Tests Fluorescent Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and

NEMA LE 5A as applicable. 3. LER Tests HID Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.



B. Lateral Light Distribution Patterns: Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.

G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.

H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.

J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials.

M. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.

a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard catalog of colors.

N. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.



2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax.

3. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

4. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

a. Color: Dark bronze .

O. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. "USES ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple), base

type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for

HID luminaires. d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent

luminaires. e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.03 LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS

A. Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A.

B. Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc and off at 4.5 to 10 fc with 15-second minimum time delay. Relay shall have directional lens in front of photocell to prevent artificial light sources from causing false turnoff.

1. Relay with locking-type receptacle shall comply with ANSI C136.10. 2. Adjustable window slide for adjusting on-off set points.

2.04 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS AND LAMPS

A. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:

1. Temperatures 0 Deg F (Minus 17 Deg C) and Higher: Electronic or electromagnetic type rated for 0 deg F(minus 17 deg C) starting and operating temperature with indicated lamp types.

2. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F (Minus 29 Deg C) and Higher: Electromagnetic type designed for use with indicated lamp types.

3. Maximum Voltage variation +/- 10%. 4. Maximum Wattage variation +/- 5% 5. Power factor not less than 90% thru the rated life. 6. Lamp Failure: The ballast and lamp starting circuit shall be capable of protecting itself and

operating under short or open circuit conditions for extended periods of time of operation up to 6 months without significant loss of ballast life.



B. Ballast Characteristics:

1. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum. 2. Sound Rating: Class A 3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 4. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1, energy-saving, high power factor,

Class P, automatic-reset thermal protection. 5. Case Temperature for Compact Lamp Ballasts: 65 deg C, maximum. 6. Transient-Voltage Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A

or better. 7. Maximum Voltage variation +/- 10%. 8. Maximum Wattage variation +/- 5% 9. Power factor not less than 90% thru the rated life. 10. Lamp Failure: The ballast and lamp starting circuit shall be capable of protecting itself and


C. Low-Temperature Lamp Capability: Rated for reliable starting and operation with ballast provided at temperatures minus 20 deg F (minus 29 deg C) and higher.

2.05 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS

A. Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open-circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F (Minus 30 deg C). 3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F (40 deg C). 4. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current

ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer. 5. Maximum Voltage variation +/- 10%. 6. Maximum Wattage variation +/- 5% 7. Power factor not less than 90% thru the rated life. 8. Lamp Failure: The ballast and lamp starting circuit shall be capable of protecting itself and


9. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40 deg F (Minus 40 deg C).

2.06 HID LAMPS

A. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.43, with minimum CRI 65, and CCT color temperature 4000 K.

B. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and CCT color temperature 4000 K.

C. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and CCT color temperature 4000 K.

2.07 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4-M.

1. Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure, permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in "Structural Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article.



2. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be used in pole selection strength analysis.

B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated.

C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components.

1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. 2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication

unless otherwise indicated. 3. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.

D. Hand hole: Oval-shaped, with minimum clear opening of 2-1/2 by 5 inches, with cover secured by stainless-steel captive screws. Provide on all, except wood poles.

E. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

F. Power-Installed Screw Foundations: Factory fabricated by pole manufacturer, with structural steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M; and with top-plate and mounting bolts to match pole base flange and strength required to support pole, luminaire, and accessories.

G. Breakaway Supports: Frangible breakaway supports, tested by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, according to AASHTO LTS-4-M.

2.08 STEEL POLES

A. Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000 psig; one-piece construction up to 40 feet in height with access hand hole in pole wall.

1. Shape: [Round, tapered] [Round, straight] [Square, tapered] [Square, straight]. 2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway support.

B. Steel Mast Arms: [Single-arm] [Truss] [Davit] type, continuously welded to pole attachment plate. Material and finish same as pole.

C. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, cantilever, without under brace.

1. Adapter fitting welded to pole, allowing the bracket to be bolted to the pole mounted adapter, then bolted together with [stainless] [galvanized]-steel bolts.

2. Cross Section: Tapered oval, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire. 3. Match pole material and finish.

D. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and securely fastened to pole top.

E. Steps: Fixed steel, with nonslip treads, positioned for 15-inch vertical spacing, alternating on opposite sides of pole; first step at elevation 10 feet above finished grade.

F. Intermediate Hand hole and Cable Support: Weather tight, 3-by-5-inch hand hole located at midpoint of pole with cover for access to internal welded attachment lug for electric cable support grip.



G. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through hand hole.

H. Cable Support Grip: Wire-mesh type with rotating attachment eye, sized for diameter of cable and rated for a minimum load equal to weight of supported cable times a 5.0 safety factor.

I. Platform for Lamp and Ballast Servicing: Factory fabricated of steel with finish matching that of pole.

J. Prime-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

K. Galvanized Finish: After fabrication, hot-dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M.

L. Factory-Painted Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or with SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

2. Interior Surfaces of Pole: One coat of bituminous paint, or otherwise treat for equal corrosion protection.

3. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.

a. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations .

2.09 ALUMINUM POLES

A. Poles: Seamless, extruded structural tube complying with ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6 with access hand hole in pole wall.

B. Poles: ASTM B 209, 5052-H34 marine sheet alloy with access hand hole in pole wall.

1. Shape: [Round, tapered] [Round, straight] [Square, tapered] [Square, straight]. 2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway support.

C. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and securely fastened to pole top.

D. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through hand hole.

E. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, with pole and adapter fittings of cast aluminum. Adapter fitting welded to pole and bracket, and then bolted together with stainless-steel bolts.

1. Tapered oval cross section, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire. 2. Finish: Same as [pole] [luminaire].

F. Prime-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

G. Aluminum Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.



1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax.

3. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

4. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

5. <Insert finish>.

a. Color: [Light bronze] [Medium bronze] [Dark bronze] [Black] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range].

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. The Electrical Contractor shall be required to examine areas and conditions under which parking area lighting equipment and components are to be installed. Do not allow work to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION

A. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.

1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer.

C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources, favoring a north orientation.

3.03 POLE INSTALLATION

A. Alignment: Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their mounting provisions on the pole.

B. Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and underground features unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:

1. Fire Hydrants and Storm Drainage Piping: 60 inches . 2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet . 3. Trees: 15 feet from tree trunk. 4. .

C. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."



D. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level recommended by pole manufacturer.

1. Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer.

2. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete grout firmly packed to fill space.

3. Install base covers unless otherwise indicated. 4. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch- diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange to

drain condensation from interior of pole.

E. Embedded Poles with Tamped Earth Backfill: Set poles to depth below finished grade indicated on Drawings, but not less than one-sixth of pole height.

1. Dig holes large enough to permit use of tampers in the full depth of hole. 2. Backfill in 6-inch layers and thoroughly tamp each layer so compaction of backfill is equal to

or greater than that of undisturbed earth.

F. Embedded Poles with Concrete Backfill: Set poles in augured holes to depth below finished grade indicated on Drawings, but not less than one-sixth of pole height.

1. Make holes 6 inches in diameter larger than pole diameter. 2. Fill augured hole around pole with air-entrained concrete having a minimum compressive

strength of 3000 psi at 28 days, and finish in a dome above finished grade. 3. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch- diameter pipe to make a drain hole through concrete dome.

Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole. 4. Cure concrete a minimum of 72 hours before performing work on pole.

G. Poles and Pole Foundations Set in Concrete Paved Areas: Install poles with minimum of 6-inch- wide, unpaved gap between the pole or pole foundation and the edge of adjacent concrete slab. Fill unpaved ring with [pea gravel] <Insert material> to a level 1 inch below top of concrete slab.

H. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable).

3.04 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.

B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap.

3.05 GROUNDING

A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

1. Install grounding electrode for each pole unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding system.

B. Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

1. Install grounding electrode for each pole.



2. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector. 3. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations.


A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source.

1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.

C. Illumination Tests:

1. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST standards. Comply with the following IESNA testing guide(s):

a. IESNA LM-5, "Photometric Measurements of Area and Sports Lighting Installations." b. IESNA LM-50, "Photometric Measurements of Roadway Lighting Installations." c. IESNA LM-52, "Photometric Measurements of Roadway Sign Installations." d. IESNA LM-64, "Photometric Measurements of Parking Areas." e. IESNA LM-72, "Directional Positioning of Photometric Data."

D. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.



DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR Valdez Elementary COMMUNICATIONS SSG MEP, Inc. Project No. 13034.00 Section 27 05 00 - 1

SECTION 27 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. ASTM International 1. ASTM A 53/A 53M-01: Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated

Welded and Seamless 2. ASTM C 1107-02: Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)

C. National Electrical Contractors Association 1. NECA 1-00: Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting

D. Denver Public Schools Design and Construction Standards

1.2 Scope of Work

A. Denver Public Schools (DPS) will provide and install the following: 1. Telephone system switch 2. Rack mounted data equipment 3. Make final connections to paging system amplifiers 4. Make final terminations to telephone switch, patch panels and rack mounted equipment 5. DPS Department of Technology Services (DoTS) shall assist the Contractor in determining

quantity and lengths of patch cables 6. Wide area network components 7. Local area network switches 8. Telephone system and telephone handsets

B. Electrical Contractor will provide and install the following: 1. Telecommunications pathways including but not limited to conduits, sleeves, and cabletrays 2. Telecommunications wiring and cable. This work shall be performed by a Panduit Enhanced

Certified Installer 3. Station, fiber and coax terminations, wire management, frames/racks, surface mounted

raceways, clocks, speakers, clock/speaker housing and paging system speakers 4. Patch cables 5. Fire stopping of conduit sleeves

1.3 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Communications equipment coordination and installation. 2. Sleeves for pathways and cables. 3. Sleeve seals. 4. Grout.



5. Common communications installation requirements.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of communications equipment: 1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce

headroom are indicated. 2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other

installations. 3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting pathways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of

obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for communications items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."."

1.7 SCOPE OF WORK – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Denver Public Schools (DPS) Department of Technology Services (DoTS) shall provide and install the following: 1. Telephone system switch 2. Rack mounted data equipment 3. Connect amplifiers for paging equipment 4. Make final terminations to telephone switch and any rack mounted equipment 5. Patch panel to patch panel connections 6. DoTS shall assist the contractor in determining quality and lengths of patch cables 7. Wide area network components 8. Local area network switches 9. Telephone system and telephone sets

B. The electrical/telecom contractor shall provide and install the following: 1. Conduits, sleeves, outlet boxes and other raceways necessary to connection the

telecommunications system 2. All wire and cable necessary to connect the telecommunications system. This work must be

performed by a Panduit Enhanced Certified Installer



3. Station, fiber and coax terminations, wire management, frames/racks, surface mounted raceway, clocks, speakers, and paging system speakers

4. Patch cords 5. Fire caulking of interior and exterior conduit sleeves 6. Provide and install paging system amplifier(s)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR PATHWAYS AND CABLES

A. PVC Pipe Sleeves: Schedule 80.

B. EMT: 4” with end bushing for interior sleeves.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with beveled edges.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch .

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch .

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. Jackmoon - Tyco

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit.

Include type and number required for material and size of pathway or cable. 3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel . Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required

to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.3 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION


B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both communications equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS

A. Communications penetrations occur when pathways, cables, wireways, or cable trays penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 4 inches above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pathway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry 1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed

surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants".

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pathway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal pathway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."



K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual pathways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pathway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pathway or cable material and size. Position pathway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pathway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for communications installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATION Valdez Elementary SYSTEMS SSG MEP, Inc. Project No. 13034.00 Section 27 05 28 - 1

SECTION 27 05 28

PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings. 3. Optical-fiber-cable pathways and fittings. 4. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 5. Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters. 6. Surface pathways. 7. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 8. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 05 43 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior

ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction. 2. Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for conduits, wireways,

surface raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, handholes, and faceplate adapters serving electrical systems.

3. Section 28 05 28 "Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security" for conduits, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving electronic safety and security.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.

B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.


A. Product Data: For surface pathways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.





A. Coordination Drawings: Cabletray routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: 1. Structural members in paths of pathway groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with

common supports.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

C. Source quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Alpha Wire Company. 4. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 5. Electri-Flex Company. 6. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 7. Picoma Industries; Subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc. 8. Republic Conduit. 9. Robroy Industries. 10. Southwire Company. 11. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 12. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 13. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company.

B. General Requirements for Metal Conduits and Fittings: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for

intended location and application. 2. Comply with TIA-569-B.




F. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit. 1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.


H. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70. 2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel.



b. Type: Setscrew.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL-467, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

I. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Arnco Corporation. 5. CANTEX Inc. 6. CertainTeed Corp. 7. Condux International, Inc. 8. Electri-Flex Company. 9. Kraloy. 10. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 11. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 12. RACO; a Hubbell company. 13. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. General Requirements for Nonmetallic Conduits and Fittings: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for


C. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.

D. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.

E. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B.

F. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14.

G. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

H. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

I. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."



2.3 OPTICAL-FIBER-CABLE PATHWAYS AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Alpha Wire Company. 2. Arnco Corporation. 3. Endot Industries Inc. 4. IPEX. 5. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

B. Description: Comply with UL 2024; flexible-type pathway, approved intended installation unless otherwise indicated.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Comply with TIA-569-B.


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. 1. Comply with TIA-569-B.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated.


2.5 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Allied Moulded Products, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 4. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc.

B. General Requirements for Nonmetallic Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for




C. Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, and having snap-on cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners.

D. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

E. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

F. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.6 SURFACE PATHWAYS

A. General Requirements for Surface Pathways: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for


B. Surface Metal Pathways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect]. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Mono-Systems, Inc. b. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. c. Panduit Corp. d. Wiremold / Legrand.

C. Tele-Power Poles: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Mono-Systems, Inc. b. Panduit Corp. c. Wiremold / Legrand.

2. Material: Galvanized steel with ivory baked-enamel finish]. 3. Fittings and Accessories: Dividers, end caps, covers, cutouts, wiring harnesses, devices,

mounting materials, and other fittings shall match and mate with tele-power pole as required for complete system.


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Adalet. 2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 6. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division. 7. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 8. Milbank Manufacturing Co.



9. Molex; Woodhead Brand. 10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 12. RACO; a Hubbell company. 13. Robroy Industries. 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries. 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 17. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets:

1. Comply with TIA-569-B. 2. Boxes, enclosures and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet

locations.

C. Sheet-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloyType FD, with gasketed cover.

E. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

F. Metal Floor Boxes: 1. Material: Cast metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

G. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, rectangular. 1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

H. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

I. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

J. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.

K. Gangable boxes are prohibited.

L. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

M. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

N. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front,

finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.



3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing


2.8 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND CABLING

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes: 1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as

defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application. 2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Comply with TIA-569-B.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2.

a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. CDR Systems Corporation; Hubbell Power Systems. d. NewBasis. e. Oldcastle Precast, Inc.; Christy Concrete Products. f. Synertech Moulded Products; a division of Oldcastle Precast, Inc.

3. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 4. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated. 5. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 6. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 7. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "COMMUNICATIONS. 8. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for

secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 9. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long (300 mm Wide by 600 mm Long and Larger:

Have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance

with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied. 1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency. 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing

agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.

3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PATHWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: GRC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVCinstalled as indicated on the drawings. 4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Pathway locations include the

following: a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c. Mechanical rooms. d. Gymnasiums e. .

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMTor innerduct. 5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 6. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental Air:

EMT. 7. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications-Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: EMT. 8. Pathways for Concealed General-Purpose Distribution of Optical-Fiber or Communications

Cable: EMT. 9. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 1, except use NEMA 250 Type 4 stainless steel in

institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Pathway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. Minimum size for optical-fiber cables is 1 inch.

D. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of


3. EMT: Use setscrewsteelfittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

F. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings.

G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, NECA 101, and TIA-569-B for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum pathways. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep pathways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.


F. Install no more than the equivalent of two 90-degree bends in any pathway run. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. Utilize long radius ells for all optical-fiber cables.



I. Pathways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure pathways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.

2. Arrange pathways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Arrange pathways to keep a minimum of 3 of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for

each specific location. 5. Change from ENT to GRC before rising above floor.

J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for pathways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in

an enclosure.

K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of pathway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

L. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated pathway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install insulated bushings on conduits terminated with locknuts.

N. Install pathways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.



O. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length.

Q. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lbtensile strength. Leave at least 12 inchesof slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground pathways designated as spare above grade alongside pathways in use.

R. Surface Pathways: 1. Install surface pathway for surface telecommunications outlet boxes only where indicated on

Drawings. 2. Install surface pathway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. 3. Secure surface pathway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding

48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight pathway section. Support surface pathway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

S. Pathways for Optical-Fiber and Communications Cable: Install pathways, metal and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows: 1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 50 feet. 2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. 3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of pathway

unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.

T. Install pathway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

U. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all pathways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces. 2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

V. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings.

W. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature

change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet.

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.



3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of

length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.


5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

X. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

Y. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

Z. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

AA. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

BB. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

CC. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

DD. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench

bottom as specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of

conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow.

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase

coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the coupling.



b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits, but a minimum of 6 inches below grade. Align planks along centerline of conduit.

7. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, minimum 36-inches below grade.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.

F. Field cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 27 05 44 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling."

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." Firestopping shall be installed after all telecommunication systems testing has been completed and final acceptance has been given by DPS.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage or deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating

recommended by manufacturer.



END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Valdez Elementary SSG MEP, Inc. Project No. 13034.00 Section 27 05 36 - 1

SECTION 27 05 36

CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Ladder cable trays. 2. Wire-basket cable trays. 3. Single-rail cable trays.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 260536 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems" for cable trays and accessories serving

electrical systems.


A. Product Data: For each type of cable tray. 1. Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable tray indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray. 1. Show fabrication and installation details of cable trays, including plans, elevations, and

sections of components and attachments to other construction elements. Designate components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice-plate connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings.


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Include scaled cable tray layout and relationships between components and adjacent

structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. 2. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions. 3. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays. 4. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or below bottom of ceiling structure.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design cable tray .

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes in cable tray installed outdoors. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLE TRAYS

A. Cable Trays and Accessories: Identified as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended location, application, and grounding. 1. Source Limitations: Obtain cable trays and components from single manufacturer.

B. Sizes and Configurations: See the Cable Tray Schedule on Drawings for specific requirements for types, materials, sizes, and configurations.

C. Structural Performance: See articles for individual cable tray types for specific values for the following parameters: 1. Uniform Load Distribution: Capable of supporting a uniformly distributed load on the

indicated support span when supported as a simple span and tested according to NEMA VE 1.

2. Concentrated Load: A load applied at midpoint of span and centerline of tray. 3. Load and Safety Factors: Applicable to both side rails and rung capacities.

2.3 LADDER CABLE TRAYS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 2. Chalfant Manufacturing Company. 3. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 4. Mono-Systems, Inc. 5. MP Husky. 6. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 7.

B. Description: 1. Configuration: Two I-beam side rails with transverse rungs welded to side rails. 2. Rung Spacing: 6 inches] o.c. 3. Radius-Fitting Rung Spacing: 9 inches at center of tray's width. 4. Minimum Cable-Bearing Surface for Rungs: 7/8-inch width with radius edges. 5. No portion of the rungs shall protrude below the bottom plane of side rails. 6. Structural Performance of Each Rung: Capable of supporting a maximum cable load, with a

safety factor of 1.5, plus a 200-lb concentrated load, when tested according to NEMA VE 1. 7. Minimum Usable Load Depth: [6 inches. 8. Straight Section Lengths: 10 feet] except where shorter lengths are required to facilitate tray

assembly. 9. Width: 6 inchesunless otherwise indicated on Drawings.



10. Fitting Minimum Radius: 24 inches. 11. Class Designation: Comply . 12. Splicing Assemblies: Bolted type using serrated flange locknuts. 13. Hardware and Fasteners: Steel, zinc plated according to ASTM B 633. 14. Splice Plate Capacity: Splices located within support span shall not diminish rated loading

capacity of cable tray.

2.4 WIRE-BASKET CABLE TRAYS


1. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 2. Cablofil/Legrande. 3. Chalfant Manufacturing Company. 4. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 5. Enduro Systems, Inc. 6. Mono-Systems, Inc. 7. MP Husky. 8. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 9. Snaketray. 10. Wiremaid Products Division; Vutec Corporation. 11.

B. Description:

1. Configuration: Wires are formed into a standard 2-by-4-inch wire mesh pattern with intersecting wires welded together. Mesh sections must have at least one bottom longitudinal wire along entire length of section.

2. Materials: High-strength-steel longitudinal wires with no bends. 3. Safety Provisions: Wire ends along wire-basket sides (flanges) rounded during

manufacturing to maintain integrity of cables and installer safety. 4. Sizes:

a. Straight sections shall be furnished in standard 118-inch lengths. b. Wire-Basket Depth: 4-inch usable loading depth by 8 inches wide.

5. Connector Assemblies: Bolt welded to plate shaped to fit around adjoining tray wires and mating plate. Mechanically joins adjacent tray wires to splice sections together or to create horizontal fittings.

6. Connector Assembly Capacity: Splices located within support span shall not diminish rated loading capacity of cable tray.

7. Hardware and FastenersSteel, zinc plated according to ASTM B 633.

2.5 SINGLE-RAIL CABLE TRAYS


1. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 2. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. MP Husky.



5. .

B. Description:

1. Configuration: Center rail with extruded-aluminum rungs arranged symmetrically about the center rail.

2. Construction: Aluminum rungs mechanically connected to aluminum center rail in at least two places, with ends finished to protect installers and cables.

3. Rung Spacing: 6 inches o.c. 4. Radius-Fitting Rung Spacing: 9 inches at center of tray's width. 5. Straight Section Lengths: 10 feetexcept where shorter lengths are required to facilitate tray

assembly. 6. Width: 12 inches unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 7. Support Point: Splice fittings shall be hanger support point. 8. Support Spacing: Support each section at midpoint. Support wall-mounted sections a

maximum of one-sixth of the section length from each end. 9. Loading Depth: 6 inches. 10. Maximum Loads: 25 lb/ft.] . 11. 12. Splicing Assemblies: Bolted type using serrated flange locknuts. 13. Splicing Assembly Capacity: Splices located within support span shall not diminish rated

loading capacity of cable tray. 14. Hardware and Fasteners: Steel, zinc plated according to ASTM B 633. 15. Splices and Connectors: Protect cables from edges of center rail and do not intrude into

cable fill area.

2.6 MATERIALS AND FINISHES

A. Steel: 1. Straight Section and Fitting Side Rails and Rungs: Steel complies with the minimum

mechanical properties of ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Grade 33, Type 2. 2. Steel Tray Splice Plates: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, HSLAS, Grade 50, Class 1. 3. Fasteners: Steel complies with the minimum mechanical properties of ASTM A 510/A 510M,

Grade 1008. 4. Finish: Mill galvanized before fabrication.

a. Standard: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90. b. Hardware: Chromium-zinc plated, ASTM F 1136.

5. Finish: Electrogalvanized before fabrication. a. Standard: Comply with ASTM B 633. b. Hardware: Galvanized, ASTM B 633.

6. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. a. Standard: Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M, Class B2. b. Hardware: Chromium-zinc plated, ASTM F 1136.

7. Finish: Powder-coat enamel paint. a. Powder-Coat Enamel: Cable tray manufacturer's recommended primer and

corrosion-inhibiting treatment, with factory-applied powder-coat paint. b. Hardware: Chromium-zinc plated, ASTM F 1136].

8. Finish: Black oxide finish for support accessories and miscellaneous hardware according to ASTM D 769.

B. Aluminum: 1. Materials: Alloy 6063-T6 according to ANSI H 35.1/H 35.1M for extruded components and

Alloy 5052-H32 or Alloy 6061-T6 according to ANSI H 35.1/H 35.1M for fabricated parts. 2. Hardware: Chromium-zinc-plated steel, ASTM F 1136.



3. Hardware for Aluminum Cable Tray Used Outdoors: Stainless steel, Type 316, ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594.

C. Stainless Steel:

1. Materials: Low-carbon, passivated, stainless steel, Type 304L or Type 316L, ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594.

2. Hardware for Stainless-Steel Cable Tray Used Outdoors: Stainless steel, Type 316, ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594.

2.7 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES

A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and finishes as cable tray.

B. Covers: Solid type made of same materials and with same finishes as cable tray.

C. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as for cable tray.

D. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray manufacturer.

2.8 WARNING SIGNS

A. Lettering: 1-1/2-inch- high, black letters on yellow background with legend "Warning! Not To Be Used as Walkway, Ladder, or Support for Ladders or Personnel."

B. Comply with requirements for fasteners in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Test and inspect cable trays according to NEMA FG 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION

A. Install cable trays according to NEMA FG 1.

B. Install cable trays as a complete system, including fasteners, hold-down clips, support systems, barrier strips, adjustable horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, crosses, cable dropouts, adapters, covers, and bonding.

C. Install cable trays so that the tray is accessible for cable installation and all splices are accessible for inspection and adjustment.

D. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays.

E. Join aluminum cable tray with splice plates; use four square neck-carriage bolts and locknuts.



F. Fasten cable tray supports to building structure.

G. Design fasteners and supports to carry cable tray, the cables, and a concentrated load of 200 lb. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

H. Place supports so that spans do not exceed maximum spans on schedules and provide clearances shown on Drawings. Install intermediate supports when cable weight exceeds the load-carrying capacity of the tray rungs.

I. Construct supports from channel members, threaded rods, and other appurtenances furnished by cable tray manufacturer. Arrange supports in trapeze or wall-bracket form as required by application.

J. Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading.

K. Install center-hung supports for single-rail trays designed for 60 versus 40 percent eccentric loading condition, with a safety factor of 3.

L. Locate and install supports according to NEMA FG 1. Do not install more than one cable tray splice between supports.

M. Support wire-basket cable trays with trapeze hangers.

N. Support trapeze hangers for wire-basket trays with 3/8-inch- diameter rods.

O. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable trays and to equipment. Support cable trays independent of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable trays on equipment enclosure.

P. Install expansion connectors where cable trays cross building expansion joints and in cable tray runs that exceed dimensions recommended in NEMA FG 1. Space connectors and set gaps according to applicable standard.

Q. Make changes in direction and elevation using manufacturer's recommended fittings.

R. Make cable tray connections using manufacturer's recommended fittings.

S. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

T. Install capped metal sleeves for future cables through firestop-sealed cable tray penetrations of fire and smoke barriers.

U. Install cable trays with enough workspace to permit access for installing cables.

V. Install barriers to separate cables of different systems, such as power, communications, and data processing; or of different insulation levels, such as 600, 5000, and 15 000 V.

W. Install permanent covers, if used, after installing cable. Install cover clamps according to NEMA VE 2.

X. Clamp covers on cable trays installed outdoors with heavy-duty clamps.

Y. Install warning signs in visible locations on or near cable trays after cable tray installation.



3.2 CABLE TRAY GROUNDING

A. Ground cable trays according to NFPA 70 unless additional grounding is specified. Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Cable trays with communications cable shall be bonded together with splice plates listed for grounding purposes or with listed bonding jumpers.

C. Cable trays with control conductors shall be bonded together with splice plates listed for grounding purposes or with listed bonding jumpers.

D. When using epoxy- or powder-coat painted cable trays as a grounding conductor, completely remove coating at all splice contact points or ground connector attachment. After completing splice-to-grounding bolt attachment, repair the coated surfaces with coating materials recommended by cable tray manufacturer.

E. Bond cable trays to power source for cables contained within with bonding conductors sized according to NFPA 70, Article 250.122, "Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors."

3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Install cables only when each cable tray run has been completed and inspected.

B. Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties according to NEMA VE 2. Tighten clamps only enough to secure the cable, without indenting the cable jacket. Install cable ties with a tool that includes an automatic pressure-limiting device.

C. Fasten cables on vertical runs to cable trays every 18 inches.

D. Fasten and support cables that pass from one cable tray to another or drop from cable trays to equipment enclosures. Fasten cables to the cable tray at the point of exit and support cables independent of the enclosure. The cable length between cable trays or between cable tray and enclosure shall be no more than 72 inches.

E. Tie MI cables down every 36 inches where required to provide a 2-hour fire rating and every 72 inches elsewhere.

F. In existing construction, remove inactive or dead cables from cable trays.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Remove paint from all connection points before making connections. Repair paint after the connections are completed.

B. Connect pathways to cable trays according to requirements in NEMA VE 2 and NEMA FG 1.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for

compliance with requirements.



2. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in cable trays, vibrations, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may cause or have caused damage.

3. Verify that the number, size, and voltage of cables in cable trays do not exceed that permitted by NFPA 70. Verify that communications or data-processing circuits are separated from power circuits by barriers or are installed in separate cable trays.

4. Verify that there are no intruding items such as pipes, hangers, or other equipment in the cable tray.

5. Remove dust deposits, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any blockage of tray ventilation.

6. Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and retorque in suspect areas.

7. Check for improperly sized or installed bonding jumpers. 8. Check for missing, incorrect, or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace

with specified hardware. 9. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify that all

takeoff raceways are bonded to cable trays. Test entire cable tray system for continuity. Maximum allowable resistance is 1 ohm.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed cable trays and cables. 1. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays to safeguard exposed cables against

falling objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and cable tray can be constructed of wood or metal materials and shall remain in place until the risk of damage is over.

2. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable tray manufacturer.

3. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by cable tray manufacturer.

END OF SECTION27 05 36


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS Valdez Elementary PATHWAYS AND CABLING SSG MEP, Inc. Project No. 13034.00 Section 27 05 44 - 1

SECTION 27 05 44

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for pathway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants.


1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.



B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For sealants, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:





B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.




F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:

1. Material: Galvanized-steel sheet. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.


A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable.


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. CALPICO, Inc. c. Metraflex Company (The). d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. Proco Products, Inc. f.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDMrubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.



1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Presealed Systems. b. .

2.4 GROUT



C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.



A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below.

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.

2. Sealant shall have VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

3. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION




C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."




2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pathway or

cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used.


5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual pathways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pathway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at pathway entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pathway or cable material and size. Position pathway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pathway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.








DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT Valdez Elementary ROOM FITTINGS SSG MEP, Inc. Project No. 13034.00 Section 27 11 00 - 1

SECTION 27 11 00

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Telecommunications mounting elements. 2. Backboards. 3. Telecommunications equipment racks and cabinets. 4. Grounding.


1. Section 270536 "Cable Trays for Communications Systems" for cable trays and accessories. 2. Section 271300 "Communications Backbone Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated

with system panels and devices. 3. Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated

with system panels and devices. 4. Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for voice and

data cabling associated with system panels and devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

B. LAN: Local area network.

C. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for equipment racks and cabinets.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room fittings. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.




2. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access for cable connections.

3. Grounding: Indicate location of grounding bus bar and its mounting detail showing standoff insulators and wall mounting brackets.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For equipment frames from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. Base certification on the maximum number of components capable of being mounted in each rack type. Identify components on which certification is based.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.


A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.

1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings shall be under the direct supervision of RCDD.

2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Registered Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site.

3. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as [Commercial Installer, Level 2 to perform the on-site inspection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

1.

2.2 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 6’ wide by 8’ wide painted to match room. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels specified in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."

2.3 EQUIPMENT FRAMES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Panduit Corp. 2.



B. General Frame Requirements:

1. Distribution Frames: Freestanding and wall-mounting, modular-steel units designed for telecommunications terminal support and coordinated with dimensions of units to be supported.

2. Module Dimension: Width compatible with EIA 310-D standard, 19-inch panel mounting. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked-polyester powder coat.

C. Floor-Mounted Racks: Modular-type, aluminum construction.

1. Vertical and horizontal cable management channels, top and bottom cable troughs, grounding lug.

2. Baked-polyester powder coat finish.

D. Cable Management for Equipment Frames:

1. Metal, with integral wire retaining fingers. 2. Baked-polyester powder coat finish. 3. Vertical cable management panels shall have front and rear channels, with covers. 4. Provide horizontal crossover cable manager at the top of each relay rack, with a minimum

height of two rack units each.

2.4 POWER STRIPS

A. Power Strips: Comply with UL 1363.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Rack mounting. 3. Ten (10) rear mounted , 20-A, 120-V ac, NEMA 5-20R receptacles and Two (2) front

mounted 20A 120VAC NEMA 5-15R receptacles. 4. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 5. LED indicator lights for reverse polarity and open outlet ground. 6. Circuit Breaker and Thermal Fusing: When protection is lost, circuit opens and cannot be

reset. 7. Circuit Breaker and Thermal Fusing: Unit continues to supply power if protection is lost. 8. Cord connected with 15-foot line cord. 9. Rocker-type on-off switch, illuminated when in on position. 10. 2840 joules/60,000 amp network-grade AC surge suppression with EMI/RFI filtering.

2.5 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors.

B. Telecommunications Main Bus Bar:

1. Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression -type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

2. IDF Ground Bus Bar: Copper, 1/4 inch thick by 2 inches wide by 6” long with four (4) ¼” holes.



3. MDF Ground Bus Bar: Copper, minimum 1/4 inch thick by 2 inches wide by 6” long with four (4) ¼” holes Add 1” in length to ground bar for each additional hole required for each addition IDF connection.

4. Stand-Off Insulators: 3/8” by 16 by 1.5” long standoff insulator studs. Comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

C. Comply with J-STD-607-A.

2.6 LABELING

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES

A. Coordinate modifications to existing communications entrance with DoTS.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for materials and installation requirements for undergroundpathways.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Comply with BICSI TDMM for layout and installation of communications equipment rooms.

C. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

D. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with local exchange carrier.

1. Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers, local exchange carrier representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces.

2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other participants. 3. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels

in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment.

4. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, electronic safety and security, and related systems that share space in the equipment room.

E. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications equipment requiring electrical power to operate.



3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 270544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling."

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Comply with TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping."

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.

B. Comply with J-STD-607-A.

C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground.

D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor.

1. Bond the shield of shielded cable to the grounding bus bar in communications rooms and spaces.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

C. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with DPS DoTS requirements.

D. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type.



DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CALBING Valdez Elementary SSG MEP, Inc. Project No. 13034.00 Section 27 13 00 - 1

SECTION 27 13 00

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pathways. 2. UTP cable. 3. 50/125-micrometer, optical fiber cabling. 4. Coaxial cable. 5. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects. 6. Cabling identification products.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection.

C. DPS: Denver Public Schools

D. DoTS: Department of Technology Services

E. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

F. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

G. LAN: Local area network.

H. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

I. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.



1.4 BACKBONE CABLING DESCRIPTION

A. Backbone cabling system shall provide interconnections between communications equipment rooms, main terminal space, and entrance facilities in the telecommunications cabling system structure. Cabling system consists of backbone cables, intermediate and main cross-connects, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for backbone-to-backbone cross-connection.

B. Backbone cabling cross-connects may be located in communications equipment rooms or at entrance facilities. Bridged taps and splitters shall not be used as part of backbone cabling.


A. General Performance: Backbone cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-B.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used:

a. Nominal OD. b. Minimum bending radius. c. Maximum pulling tension.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and format selected by Owner.

2. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the cabling and asset identification system of the software.

3. Cabling administration drawings and printouts. 4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics including the following:

a. Cross-connects. b. Patch panels. c. Patch cords.

5. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and physical relationship between the installed components.

6. Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the following:

a. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions. b. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays. c. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure. d. Load calculations to show dead and live loads as not exceeding manufacturer's rating

for tray and its support elements.





B. Source quality-control reports.


D. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.



1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, Cabling Administration Drawings, and field testing program development by an RCDD.


3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.

C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50or less.


E. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

F. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.




A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.

1. Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use [ Fluke model DSP-4300 cable analyzer with Fluke DSP-FTA420 Multimode Fiber Module set.

2. Test optical fiber cable while on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector, including the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data.

3. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.12 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

1.13 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years.

B. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software.

1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PATHWAYS

A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

B. Cable Support: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6 cabling, designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable.

1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets. 2. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings. 3. Straps and other devices.

C. Cable Trays:




a. Cable Management Solutions, Inc. b. Cablofil Inc. c. Cooper B-Line, Inc. d. Cope - Tyco/Allied Tube & Conduit. e. GS Metals Corp. f. .

2. Cable Tray Material: Metal, suitable for indoors, and protected against corrosion by [electroplated zinc galvanizing, complying with ASTM B 633, Type 1, not less than 0.000472 inches (0.012 mm) thick] [hot-dip galvanizing, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M, Grade 0.55, not less than 0.002165 inches (0.055 mm) thick].

a. Basket Cable Trays: 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 2 inches (50 mm) deep . Wire mesh spacing shall not exceed 2 by 4 inches (50 by 100 mm).

b. Trough Cable Trays: Nominally 6 inches (150 mm) wide. c. Ladder Cable Trays: Nominally 18 inches (455 mm) wide, and a rung spacing of 12

inches (305 mm) . d. Channel Cable Trays: One-piece construction, nominally 4 inches (100 mm) < wide.

Slot spacing shall not exceed 4-1/2 inches (115 mm) o.c.

D. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems

1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 3 inches (75 mm) high, and 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) deep.

2.2 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated,3/4” by 6’ wide by 8’ high, painted to match room. Comply with requirements in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.

2.3 UTP CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

1. Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division. 2. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. 3. CommScope, Inc. 4. Draka USA. 5. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. 6. KRONE Incorporated. 7. Mohawk; a division of Belden CDT. 8. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies. 9. Superior Essex Inc. 10. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope Inc. brand. 11. 3M. 12. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd. 13. <Insert manufacturer's name>.



B. Description: 100-ohm, 100-pair UTP, formed into 25-pair binder groups covered with a[ gray] thermoplastic jacket[ and overall metallic shield].

1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying

with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:

a. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or CMG. b. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262. c. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR, complying with UL 1666. d. Communications, Limited Purpose: Type CMX. e. Multipurpose: Type MP or MPG. f. Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262. g. Multipurpose, Riser Rated: Type MPR, complying with UL 1666.

2.4 UTP CABLE HARDWARE


1. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc. 2. Dynacom Corporation. 3. Hubbell Premise Wiring. 4. KRONE Incorporated. 5. Leviton Voice & Data Division. 6. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc. 7. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies. 8. Panduit Corp. 9. Siemon Co. (The). 10. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd. 11. .

B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.

C. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.

D. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables.

1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.

E. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.

1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated.

F. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals.



G. Patch Cords: Factory-made, 4-pair cables ; terminated with 8-position modular plug at each end. Coordinate quantities and lengths with DPS DoTS.

1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure Category 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging.

2. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.

2.5 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE


1. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. 2. CommScope, Inc. 3. Corning Cable Systems. 4. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 5. Mohawk; a division of Belden CDT. 6. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies. 7. Optical Connectivity Solutions Division; Emerson Network Power. 8. Superior Essex Inc. 9. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope Inc. brand. 10. 3M. 11. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd. 12.

B. Description: Multimode, 50/125-micrometer, 24 -fiber, nonconductive, tight buffer, optical fiber cable.

1. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with [TIA/EIA-492AAAA-B] [TIA/EIA-492AAAA-A] for detailed specifications. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying

with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types:

a. General Purpose, Nonconductive: Type OFN or OFNG. b. Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP, complying with NFPA 262. c. Riser Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNR, complying with UL 1666. d. General Purpose, Conductive: Type OFC or OFCG. e. Plenum Rated, Conductive: Type OFCP, complying with NFPA 262. f. Riser Rated, Conductive: Type OFCR, complying with UL 1666.

5. Conductive cable shall be [steel] [aluminum] armored type. 6. Maximum Attenuation: 3.50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm. 7. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.

C. Jacket:

1. Jacket Color: Aqua for 50/125-micrometer cable or as required by DPS DoTS. 2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA/EIA-598-B. 3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed

40 inches (1000 mm).



2.6 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE


1. ADC. 2. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc. 3. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. 4. Corning Cable Systems. 5. Dynacom Corporation. 6. Hubbell Premise Wiring. 7. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc. 8. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies. 9. Optical Connectivity Solutions Division; Emerson Network Power. 10. Siemon Co. (The). 11.

B. Cross-Connects and Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered, duplex cable connectors.

1. Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.

C. Patch Cords: Factory-made, dual-fiber cables. Coordinate quantities and lengths with DPS DoTS.

D. Cable Connecting Hardware:

1. Comply with Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications of TIA/EIA-604-2, TIA/EIA-604-3-A, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3.

2. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, Type SC connectors. Insertion loss not more than 0.75 dB.

3. Type SFF connectors may be used in termination racks, panels, and equipment packages.

2.7 COAXIAL CABLE


1. Alpha Wire Company. 2. Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division. 3. Coleman Cable, Inc.. 4. CommScope, Inc. 5. Draka USA.

B. General Coaxial Cable Requirements: Broadband type, recommended by cable manufacturer specifically for broadband data transmission applications. Coaxial cable and accessories shall have 75-ohm nominal impedance with a return loss of 20 dB maximum from 7 to 806 MHz.

C. RG-11/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV.

1. No. 14 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor. 2. Gas-injected, foam-PE insulation. 3. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 60 percent aluminum braid. 4. Jacketed with sunlight-resistant, black PVC or PE.



5. Suitable for outdoor installations in ambient temperatures ranging from minus 40 to plus 85 deg C.

D. RG59/U: NFPA 70, Type CATVR.

1. No. 20 AWG, solid, silver-plated, copper-covered steel conductor. 2. Gas-injected, foam-PE insulation. 3. Triple shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 95 percent aluminum braid;

covered by aluminum foil with grounding strip. 4. Color-coded PVC jacket.

E. RG-6/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV or CM.

1. No. 16AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE insulation. 2. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 60 percent aluminum braid. 3. Jacketed with black PVC or PE. 4. Suitable for indoor installations.

F. RG59/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV.

1. No. 20 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE insulation. 2. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 40 percent aluminum braid. 3. PVC jacket.

G. RG59/U (Plenum Rated): NFPA 70, Type CMP.

1. No. 20 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; foam fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.

2. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 65 percent aluminum braid. 3. Copolymer jacket.

H. NFPA and UL compliance, listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 1655 and with NFPA 70, "Radio and Television Equipment" and "Community Antenna Television and Radio Distribution" Articles. Types are as follows:

1. CATV Cable: Type CATV. 2. CATV Plenum Rated: Type CATVP, complying with NFPA 262. 3. CATV Riser Rated: Type CATVR, complying with UL 1666. 4. CATV Limited Rating: Type CATVX.

2.8 COAXIAL CABLE HARDWARE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

1. Aim Electronics; a brand of Emerson Electric Co. 2. Leviton Voice & Data Division. 3. Siemon Co. (The).

B. Coaxial-Cable Connectors: Type BNC, 75 ohms.



2.9 GROUNDING


B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

2.10 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.

B. Factory test cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.

D. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A and TIA/EIA-568-B.3.

E. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Coordinate modifications to the existing communications entrance with DPS DoTS.

3.2 WIRING METHODS

A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.

1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceway

and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.



3.3 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS

A. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A.

B. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks specified in Section 271100 "Communications Equipment Room Fittings." Drawings indicate general arrangement of pathways and fittings.

C. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for installation of conduits and wireways.

E. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.

F. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms:

1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood is installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room.

2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions. 3. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead. 4. Extend conduits 3 inches (76 mm above finished floor. 5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to

grounding system.

G. Backboards: Install backboards with 8’ dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly, and form smooth gap-free corners and joints. Paint to match room.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF CABLES


B. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 4. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations

only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. 5. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches

(760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

6. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.

7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Use lacing bars and distribution spools.

8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.



10. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot- (3-m-) long service loop on each end of cable.

11. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.

C. UTP Cable Installation:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) from the point of termination to

maintain cable geometry.

D. Optical Fiber Cable Installation:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3. 2. Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted.

E. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway, a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches (1524 mm apart.

3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items.

F. Outdoor Coaxial Cable Installation:

1. Install outdoor connections in enclosures complying with NEMA 250, Type 4X. Install corrosion-resistant connectors with properly designed O-rings to keep out moisture.

2. Attach antenna lead-in cable to support structure at intervals not exceeding 36 inches (915 mm).

G. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.

H. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm). b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300

mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches (610 mm).

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm). b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300 mm).



4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches (76 mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).

5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm).

6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm).

3.5 FIRESTOPPING


B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping."


3.6 GROUNDING


B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2-inch (50-mm) clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground.


3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Administration Class: 2. 2. Color-code cross-connect fields and apply colors to voice and data service backboards,

connections, covers, and labels.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

C. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 2 level of administration including optional identification requirements of this standard.



D. Comply with requirements in Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cable and asset management software.

E. Cable Schedule: Install in a prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project.

F. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables,]terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors.

G. Cable and Wire Identification:

1. Label each cable within 4 inches (100 mm) of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.

2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet.

3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet (4.5 m).

4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.

a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips and identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device with name and number of particular device as shown.

b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.

5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.

H. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA 606-A, for the following:

1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent.



B. Perform tests and inspections as required by DPS Design and Construction Standards, Section 17700

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.



2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

3. Test UTP copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection.

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

4. Optical Fiber Cable Tests:

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests:

1) Horizontal and multimode backbone link measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in 1 direction according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper.

2) Attenuation test results for backbone links shall be less than 2.0 dB. Attenuation test results shall be less than that calculated according to equation in TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

D. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.

E. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

F. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.



DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING Valdez Elementary SSG MEP, Inc. Project No. 13034.00 Section 27 15 00 - 1

SECTION 27 15 00271500271500271500

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. UTP cabling. 2. 50/125-micrometer, optical fiber cabling. 3. Coaxial cable. 4. Multiuser telecommunications outlet assemblies. 5. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects. 6. Telecommunications outlet/connectors. 7. Cabling system identification products. 8. Cable management system.


1. Section 271300 "Communications Backbone Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices.

2. Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. Consolidation Point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways.

C. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection.

D. DPS: Denver Public Schools

E. DoTS: Department of Technology Services

F. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

G. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

H. LAN: Local area network.



I. MUTOA: Multiuser telecommunications outlet assembly, a grouping in one location of several telecommunications outlet/connectors.

J. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable terminates.

K. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

L. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at each work area.



1. For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used:

a. Nominal OD. b. Minimum bending radius. c. Maximum pulling tension.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and format selected by Owner.

2. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the cabling and asset identification system of the software.

3. Cabling administration drawings and printouts. 4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including the following:

a. Cross-connects. b. Patch panels. c. Patch cords.

5. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and physical relationship between the installed components.








A. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.

B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 5.



1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, Cabling Administration Drawings, and field testing program development by an RCDD.


3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.



1. Test optical fiber cables to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use Fluke model DSP-4300 cable analyzer with Fluke DSP-FTA420 Multimode Fiber Module set.

2. Test optical fiber cables while on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector; including the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION

A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called a "permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols.

1. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 requires that a minimum of two telecommunications outlet/connectors be installed for each work area.



2. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more than one transition point or consolidation point between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications outlet/connector.

3. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling. 4. Splitters shall not be installed as part of the optical fiber cabling.

B. A work area is approximately 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m), and includes the components that extend from the telecommunications outlet/connectors to the station equipment.

C. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet (90 m). This maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet (4.9 m) to the workstation equipment or in the horizontal cross-connect.


A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-B.1 when tested according to test procedures of this standard.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.


D. Grounding: Comply with J-STD-607-A.

2.3 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, [fire-retardant treated, ]3/4” by 6’ wide by 8’ high, painted to match room. Comply with requirements in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.

2.4 UTP CABLE


1. ADC. 2. Belden Inc. 3. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. 4. CommScope, Inc. 5. Draka Cableteq USA. 6. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. 7. Mohawk; a division of Belden Networking, Inc. 8. Superior Essex Inc. 9. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand. 10. 3M Communication Markets Division. 11. Tyco Electronics Corporation; AMP Products.

B. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP, formed into 25-pair, binder groups covered with a blue thermoplastic jacket.



1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying

with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:

a. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or CMG. b. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262. c. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR, complying with UL 1666. d. Communications, Limited Purpose: Type CMX e. Multipurpose: Type MP or MPG. f. Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262. g. Multipurpose, Riser Rated: Type MPR, complying with UL 1666.



1. ADC. 2. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Dynacom Inc. 5. Hubbell Premise Wiring. 6. Leviton Commercial Networks Division. 7. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc. 8. Panduit Corp. 9. Siemon Co. (The). 10. Tyco Electronics Corporation; AMP Products. 11. .

B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.

C. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.

D. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables.

1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.

E. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.

1. Number of Jacks per Field: Onefor each four-pair UTP cable indicated.

F. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals.

G. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair ; terminated with eight-position modular plug at each end. Coordinate quantities and lengths with DPS DoTS.



1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure Category 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging.

2. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.



1. Belden Inc. 2. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. 3. CommScope, Inc. 4. Corning Cable Systems. 5. CSI Technologies Inc. 6. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 7. Mohawk; a division of Belden Networking, Inc. 8. Superior Essex Inc. 9. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand. 10. 3M Communication Markets Division. 11. Tyco Electronics Corporation; AMP Products.

B. Description: Multimode, 50/125-micrometer, 24-fiber, nonconductive, tight buffer, optical fiber cable.

1. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with [TIA-492AAAB] [TIA-492AAAA-A] for detailed specifications. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying

with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types:

a. General Purpose, Nonconductive: Type OFN or OFNG. b. Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP, complying with NFPA 262. c. Riser Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNR, complying with UL 1666. d. General Purpose, Conductive: Type OFC or OFCG. e. Plenum Rated, Conductive: Type OFCP, complying with NFPA 262. f. Riser Rated, Conductive: Type OFCR, complying with UL 1666.

5. Maximum Attenuation: 3.50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm. 6. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.

C. Jacket:

1. Jacket Color: Aqua for 50/125-micrometer cable or as required by DPS DoTS. 2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA-598-C. 3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed

40 inches (1000 mm).


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. ADC. 2. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc.



3. Belden Inc. 4. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. 5. Corning Cable Systems. 6. CSI Technologies Inc. 7. Dynacom Inc. 8. Hubbell Premise Wiring. 9. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc. 10. Siemon Co. (The). 11. .

B. Cross-Connects and Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered, duplex cable connectors.

1. Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.

C. Patch Cords: Factory-made, dual-fiber cables. Coordinate quantities and lengths with DPS DoTS.

D. Cable Connecting Hardware:

1. Comply with Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications of TIA-604-2-B, TIA-604-3-B, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3.

2. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, Type SCconnectors. Insertion loss not more than 0.75 dB.

3. Type SFF connectors may be used in termination racks, panels, and equipment packages.

2.8 COAXIAL CABLE


1. Alpha Wire Company. 2. Belden Inc. 3. Coleman Cable, Inc. 4. CommScope, Inc. 5. Draka Cableteq USA. 6.

B. Cable Characteristics: Broadband type, recommended by cable manufacturer specifically for broadband data transmission applications. Coaxial cable and accessories shall have 75-ohm nominal impedance with a return loss of 20 dB maximum from 7 to 806 MHz.

C. RG-11/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV.

1. No. 14 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor. 2. Gas-injected, foam-PE insulation. 3. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 60 percent aluminum braid. 4. Jacketed with sunlight-resistant, black PVC or PE. 5. Suitable for outdoor installations in ambient temperatures ranging from minus 40 to plus 85

deg C.

D. RG59/U: NFPA 70, Type CATVR.

1. No. 20 AWG, solid, silver-plated, copper-covered steel conductor.



2. Gas-injected, foam-PE insulation. 3. Triple shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 95 percent aluminum braid;


E. RG-6/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV or CM.

1. No. 16 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE insulation. 2. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 60 percent aluminum braid. 3. Jacketed with black PVC or PE. 4. Suitable for indoor installations.

F. RG59/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV.

1. No. 20 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE insulation. 2. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 40 percent aluminum braid. 3. PVC jacket.

G. RG59/U (Plenum Rated): NFPA 70, Type CMP.

1. No. 20 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; foam fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.

2. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 65 percent aluminum braid. 3. Copolymer jacket.

H. NFPA and UL compliance, listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 1655 and with NFPA 70 "Radio and Television Equipment" and "Community Antenna Television and Radio Distribution" Articles. Types are as follows:

1. CATV Cable: Type CATV. 2. CATV Plenum Rated: Type CATVP, complying with NFPA 262. 3. CATV Riser Rated: Type CATVR, complying with UL 1666. 4. CATV Limited Rating: Type CATVX.


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirementsavailable manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Emerson Network Power Connectivity Solutions. 2. Leviton Commercial Networks Division. 3. Siemon Co. (The). 4. <


2.10 CONSOLIDATION POINTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following] [provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. Panduit Corp.



B. Description: Consolidation points shall comply with requirements for cable connecting hardware.

1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables. 2. Number of Connectors per Field:

a. One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated. b. Onefor each four-pair conductor group of indicated cables, plus 25 percent spare

positions.

3. Mounting: Recessed in ceiling. 4. NRTL listed as complying with UL 50 and UL 1863. 5. When installed in plenums used for environmental air, NRTL listed as complying with

UL 2043.

2.11 MULTIUSER TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET ASSEMBLY (MUTOA)

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Panduit Corp. 2. .

B. Description: MUTOAs shall meet the requirements for cable connecting hardware.

1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables. 2. Number of Connectors per Field:

a. One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated. b. One for each four-pair conductor group of indicated cables, plus 25 percent spare

positions.

3. Mounting: Recessed in ceiling. 4. NRTL listed as complying with UL 50 and UL 1863. 5. Label shall include maximum length of work area cords, based on TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 6. When installed in plenums used for environmental air, NRTL listed as complying with

UL 2043.

2.12 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS

A. Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

B. Workstation Outlets: [Four-port-connector assemblies mounted in single faceplate.

1. Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Section 262726 "Wiring Devices."

2. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP, optical fiber, and coaxial work area cords.

a. Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle. 3. Legend: Machine printed, in the field, using adhesive-tape label.



2.13 GROUNDING




A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



B. Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.


D. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA-526-14-A and TIA/EIA-568-B.3.

E. Factory-sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test the frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing the results.

F. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Coordinate modifications to the existing entrance facility with DPS DoTS.

3.2 WIRING METHODS

A. Install cables in pathways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal pathways and cables except in unfinished spaces.

1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Comply with requirements in Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems." 3. Comply with requirements in Section 270536 "Cable Trays for Communications Systems."

B. Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.



C. Wiring within Enclosures:

1. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii.

2. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 3. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure.



B. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 4. MUTOA shall not be used as a cross-connect point. 5. Consolidation points may be used only for making a direct connection to telecommunications

outlet/connectors:

a. Do not use consolidation point as a cross-connect point, as a patch connection, or for direct connection to workstation equipment.

b. Locate consolidation points for UTP at least 49 feet (15 m) from communications equipment room.

6. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.

7. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

8. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.

9. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.



12. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot- (3-m-) long service loop on each end of cable.


C. UTP Cable Installation:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) from the point of termination to

maintain cable geometry.

D. Optical Fiber Cable Installation:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3.



2. Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted.

E. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches (1524 mm apart.

3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items.

F. Outdoor Coaxial Cable Installation:

1. Install outdoor connections in enclosures complying with NEMA 250, Type 4X. Install corrosion-resistant connectors with properly designed O-rings to keep out moisture.

G. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.

H. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm). b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300

mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches (610 mm).

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm). b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300 mm).

4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches (76 mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).

5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm).

6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm).

3.4 FIRESTOPPING




B. Comply with TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping."


3.5 GROUNDING



C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2-inch (50-mm) clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground.


3.6 IDENTIFICATION


1. Administration Class: 2. 2. Color-code cross-connect fields. Apply colors to voice and data service backboards,

connections, covers, and labels.

B. Using cable management system software specified in Part 2, develop Cabling Administration Drawings for system identification, testing, and management. Use unique, alphanumeric designation for each cable and label cable, jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects with same designation. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as-built conditions.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

D. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 2 level of administration, including optional identification requirements of this standard.

E. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project.

F. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors. Follow convention of TIA/EIA-606-A. Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in software and format selected by Owner.

G. Cable and Wire Identification:



1. Label each cable within 4 inches (100 mm) of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.

2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet.

3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet (4.5 m).

4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.

a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device shall be identified with name and number of particular device as shown.

b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.

5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.

6. Uniquely identify and label work area cables extending from the MUTOA to the work area. These cables may not exceed the length stated on the MUTOA label.

H. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA-606-A.

1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent.



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2. Visually confirm Category 6, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels.


4. Test UTP backbone copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection.

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

5. Optical Fiber Cable Tests:



a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests:

1) Horizontal and multimode backbone link measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in 1 direction according to TIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper.

2) Attenuation test results for backbone links shall be less than 2.0 dB. Attenuation test results shall be less than that calculated according to equation in TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

6. UTP Performance Tests:

a. Test for each outlet and MUTOA. Perform the following tests according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2:

1) Wire map. 2) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements). 3) Insertion loss. 4) Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss. 5) Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss. 6) Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT). 7) Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT). 8) Return loss. 9) Propagation delay. 10) Delay skew.

7. Optical Fiber Cable Performance Tests: Perform optical fiber end-to-end link tests according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.3.

8. Coaxial Cable Tests: Conduct tests according to Section 274133 "Master Antenna Television System."

9. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTP and optical fiber]systems after the complete communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed.

a. Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go off-hook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test number is available, make and receive a local, long distance, and digital subscription line telephone call.

b. Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection to the network.

D. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.

E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.




DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS EDUCATIONAL INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND Valdez Elementary PROGRAM SYSTEMS SSG MEP, Inc. Project No. 13034.00 Section 27 51 23.50 - 1

SECTION 27 51 23

EDUCATIONAL INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND PROGRAM SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: the following components compatible with existing equipment: 1. Loudspeakers/speaker microphones. 2. Conductors and cables. 3. Raceways.



B. Shop Drawings: For educational intercommunications and program systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, required clearances, method

of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Include scaled drawings for station arrangement of built-in equipment. 3. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

a. Identify terminals to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance. b. Single-line diagram showing interconnection of components. c. Cabling diagram showing cable routing.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency.





A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For educational intercommunications and program systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. A record of final matching transformer-tap settings and signal ground-resistance

measurement certified by Installer. 2. A record of Owner's equipment-programming option decisions.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified agency, with the experience and capability to conduct testing indicated.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NICET as Audio Systems [Level II] [Level III] Technician.

2. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: <Insert qualification>.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain educational intercommunications and program systems from single source from single manufacturer.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for location and application.


1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted speaker microphones and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements and compatible with the existing equipment, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Bogen Communications, Inc. 2. Dukane Communication Systems; part of GE Infrastructure, Security. 3. Jeron Electronic Systems, Inc. 4. Rauland-Borg Corporation.



2.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF MANUALLY SWITCHED SYSTEMS

A. Speakers: Free of noise and distortion during operation and when in standby mode.

2.3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF MICROPROCESSOR-SWITCHED SYSTEMS

A. Speakers: Free of noise and distortion during operation and when in standby mode.

2.4 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF TELEPHONE/INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

A. Integrated central system is existing. DPT DoTS shall provide additional telephone equipment and handsets.

B. Speakers: Free of noise and distortion during operation and when in standby mode.

2.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. Coordinate features and select components to form an integrated system. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions.

2.6 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conductors: Jacketed, twisted pair and twisted multipair, untinned solid copper. Sizes as recommended by system manufacturer, but no smaller than No. 22 AWG.

B. Insulation: Thermoplastic, not less than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) thick.

C. Shielding: For speaker-microphone leads and elsewhere where recommended by manufacturer; No. 34 AWG, tinned, soft-copper strands formed into a braid or equivalent foil.

1. Minimum Shielding Coverage on Conductors: 60 percent.

D. Plenum Cable: Listed and labeled for plenum installation.

2.7 RACEWAYS

A. Educational Intercommunication and Program System Raceways and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

B. .

C. Outlet boxes shall be not less than 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 3 inches (75 mm) high, and 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) deep.

D. Flexible metal conduit is prohibited.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WIRING METHODS

A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.

1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceway

and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for installation of conduits and wireways.

B. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.



B. General Requirements:

1. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at outlets and terminals.

2. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Arrange on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Cables may not be spliced.

3. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

4. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.


6. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used.

C. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunication spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

2. Suspend speaker cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above ceiling by cable supports not more than 60 inches (1524 mm apart.



3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or be in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items.

D. Separation of Wires: Separate speaker-microphone, line-level, speaker-level, and power wiring runs. Install in separate raceways or, where exposed or in same enclosure, separate conductors at least 12 inches (300 mm) apart for speaker microphones and adjacent parallel power and telephone wiring. Separate other intercommunication equipment conductors as recommended by equipment manufacturer.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal interfaces. Provide matching networks where required.

B. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Color-code conductors and apply wire and cable marking tape to designate wires and cables so they identify media in coordination with system wiring diagrams.

C. Weatherproof Equipment: For units that are mounted outdoors, in damp locations, or where exposed to weather, install consistent with requirements of weatherproof rating.

D. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment cabinet. Isolate from power system and equipment grounding.

C. Install grounding electrodes as specified in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.6 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING

A. Programming: Fully brief Owner on available programming options. Record Owner's decisions and set up initial system program. Prepare a written record of decisions, implementation methodology, and final results.



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.



1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Schedule tests with at least seven days' advance notice of test performance. 2. After installing educational intercommunications and program systems and after electrical

circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 3. Operational Test: Test originating station-to-station, all-call, and page messages at each

intercommunication station. Verify proper routing and volume levels and that system is free of noise and distortion. Test each available message path from each station on system.

4. Frequency Response Test: Determine frequency response of two transmission paths, including all-call and paging, by transmitting and recording audio tones. Minimum acceptable performance is within 3 dB from 150 to 2500 Hz.

5. Signal-to-Noise Ratio Test: Measure signal-to-noise ratio of complete system at normal gain settings as follows:

a. Disconnect speaker microphone and replace it in the circuit with a signal generator using a 1000-Hz signal. Measure signal-to-noise ratio at paging speakers.

b. Repeat test for three speaker microphones, one master station microphone, and for each separately controlled zone of paging loudspeakers.

c. Minimum acceptable ratio is 45 dB.

6. Distortion Test: Measure distortion at normal gain settings and rated power. Feed signals at frequencies of 150, 200, 400, 1000, and 2500 Hz into each intercom, paging, and all-call amplifier. For each frequency, measure distortion in the paging and all-call amplifier outputs. Maximum acceptable distortion at any frequency is 5 percent total harmonics.

7. 8. Power Output Test: Measure electrical power output of each paging amplifier at normal gain

settings of 150, 1000, and 2500 Hz. Maximum variation in power output at these frequencies is plus or minus 3 dB.

9. Signal Ground Test: Measure and report ground resistance at system signal ground. Comply with testing requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

E. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. Prepare a list of final tap settings of paging and independent room speaker-line matching transformers.

F. Educational intercommunications and program systems will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.8 STARTUP SERVICE

A. [Perform startup service and system programming.

1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements.

2. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.



3.9 ADJUSTING

A. On-Site Assistance: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, resetting transformer taps, and adjusting controls to meet occupancy conditions.

END OF SECTION27 51 23.50275123.50


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS CLOCK SYSTEMS Valdez Elementary SSG MEP, Inc. Project No. 13034.00 Section 27 53 13 - 1

SECTION 27 53 13

CLOCK SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Wi-fi clocks.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NIST: The National Institute of Science and Technology.

B. PC: Personal computer.

C. UTC: Universal time coordinated. The precisely measured time at zero degrees longitude; a worldwide standard for time synchronization.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes (including available colors) for each product indicated and describe features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual, for the following: 1. Wi-fi clocks.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For clock to include operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.



DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS CLOCK SYSTEMS Valdez Elementary SSG MEP, Inc. Project No. 13034.00 Section 27 53 13 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Wi-fi Clocks

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. American Time & Signal Co.

B. System Functions and Features: 1. Up to five years battery life using AA lithium batteries 2. Supports 2 SNTP servers for redundancy 3. Compatible with 802.11b/g/n; wireless security using WEP and WPA/WPA2 (AES and TKIP) 4. DHCP or static IP addressing 5. Limited access point operation for configuration 6. Clocks may be pre-configured (SSID, passphrase, time zone, time servers) for plug and play

installation 7. Status LED 8. Staggered wake times for reduced network load 9. Wi-Fi Alliance Radio/FCC/ICC certified 10. RoHS Compliant

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Mount system components with fastening methods and devices designed to resist the seismic forces indicated in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform operational-system tests to verify compliance with the Specifications and make adjustments to bring system into compliance. Include operation of all modes of clock correction and all programming and manually programmed signal and relay operating functions.

2. Verify that units and controls are properly .

B. Clock system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Program system according to Owner's requirements. Set system so signal devices operate on Owner-required schedules and are activated for durations selected by Owner.



DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS COMMON WORK RESULTS Valdez Elementary FOR ELECTRICAL SAFETY AND SECURITY SSG MEP, Inc. Project # 13043.00 Section 28 05 00 - 1

SECTION 28 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. ASTM International 1. ASTM A 53/A 53M-01: Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and

Seamless 2. ASTM C 1107-02: Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)

C. National Electrical Contractors Association 1. NECA 1-00: Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting

D. Denver Public Schools Design and Construction Standards.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Electronic safety and security equipment coordination and installation. 2. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 3. Sleeve seals. 4. Grout. 5. Common electronic safety and security installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

.

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electronic safety and security equipment:


1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations. 3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of obstructions and

of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electronic safety and security items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."."

1.6 EXISTING SYSTEMS AND SUBSYSTEMS

A. Electronic Access Control System (EACS) 1. The primary system for centrally managed physical access control within DPS is the (TBD Ac-

cess Control) Management System, manufactured by (TBD). The deployed card readers are proximity card readers supported by the EACS. The system generally comprises a wide-area data network, enterprise server, enterprise administrative and monitoring clients, communications client, remote system controllers, and card readers.

2. The (TBD Access Control) system is integrated with a Video Insight Video management system (VMS), to provide automatic call-up and pre-positioning of cameras associated with alarm and emergency event activity. New devices installed as part of this work must replicate this level of integration.

3. Modifications to the existing EACS System a. The Contractor shall use and expand, as necessary, the existing (TBD Access Control)

system as part of this work, including but not limited to the addition of servers, workstations, input/output modules, control keyboards, computers, software, software licensing for new equipment, system programming, wiring, and system controllers.

b. Contractor shall subcontract with the Owner’s EACS service and maintenance providers to ensure new and modified systems are fully and seamlessly integrated into the existing system.

c. The system shall support existing HID and XceedID proximity card readers and card population.

B. Video Management System (VMS) 1. Video Insight Digital Video System

a. The primary system for recording and monitoring Owner cameras is the digital video surveillance system manufactured by Video Insight. The system provides visual monitoring of strategic areas of Owner sites, grounds and/or facilities, and is entirely LAN network-based, using TCP/IP en-coders, digital recording media, network video recorders and viewing software.

b. Command and Control: The VMS system is monitored and managed from the Department of

Safety & Security Communications Center, via workstations and the appropriate viewing software. Connectivity is made via the DPS Network Wide Area Network (WAN).



c. The VMS system is integrated with the access control system and intrusion detection system to provide automatic call-up, real-time recording, and pre-positioning of cameras associated with alarm and detection events.

2. Modifications to the Existing System a. The Video Insight expansion shall be fully integrated with the existing system and shall provide

services and functions identical to the existing system in addition to any new functions and ser-vices specified herein. b. Local Monitoring and Control: The system may be monitored by any suitably configured

computer workstation with the appropriate Video Insight viewing client software by this project.

c. The Contractor shall use and expand, as necessary, the existing system as part of this work, including but not limited to servers, encoders, recorders, input/output modules, control key-boards, workstations, software, software licensing, wiring, cameras, and appurtenances.

d. Contractor shall subcontract with the Owner’s service and maintenance providers to ensure new and modified systems are fully and seamlessly integrated into the existing system.

C. Electronic Intrusion Detection System (EIDS)

1. The primary system for Electronic Intrusion Detection System (EIDS) includes the Honeywell Ademco Vista panels. The system provides remote monitoring of security alarm and trouble signals to the DPS Safety and Security Communication Center.

2. The (EIDS) is integrated with a Video Insight Video management system (VMS), to provide automatic call-up and pre-positioning of cameras associated with alarm and emergency event activity. New devices installed as part of this work must replicate this level of integration.

D. Contractor and Manufacturer shall guarantee in writing equipment and software which is added as

part of this work is fully compatible with the existing system, is fully supported by the existing system manufacturer(s), and is configured as described in the specifications. New equipment shall be fully warranted by the Contractor as specified herein.

E. Contractor shall ensure all hardware and software is fully integrated into the existing system to

present a single, seamless operating system. Contractor shall fully develop and support all hardware and software integration schemes.

F. Control components which require unique, or proprietary, hardware or software interfaces to

achieve parity with the existing system architecture are not acceptable.

G. If records exist, drawings and diagrams of the existing systems will be made available, through the Owner, to the Contractor. The Contractor shall survey, research and confirm the existing equipment and configuration in-place, and coordinate expansion of the systems with the Owner to avoid any interruption in services.

H. Contractor shall guarantee the existing equipment and software, including (user programming,

cardholder and tenant databases) shall be protected from corruption or damage during the installa-tion, programming and commissioning process.

1.6 SCOPE OF WORK – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Systems: Provide an Electronic Access Control System (EACS) expansion to the (TBD Access Control) system, a Video Management System (VMS) expansion of the Video Insight system, Security Intercom System (SIS), Emergency Phone system, Electronic Intrusion Detection, Duress Monitoring


System, and/or Security Communications Local Intercom System complete per the contract schedule, and with acceptable engineering and installation practices as described herein.

B. Areas of work include, but are not limited to:

1.

Safety & Security Communication Command Center

2.

Buildings identified on the plans

C.

Services: Contractor shall provide the following services complete and as scheduled:

1.

Project Planning and Management

2.

Shop Engineering and Documentation

3.

Wiring and Installation Diagrams

4.

Submittals

5.

System Installation

6. System Integration

7. Training

8. Start-up Testing

9. Commissioning

10. Close out As-Build documentation

11. Warranty

BID RESPONSE

A. Bidders Responsibility

1. Contractor is responsible for verifying actual conditions by visiting the site, reviewing the Speci-fications and drawings, and to advise the Owner in writing of any conditions which may ad-versely affect the work. If any necessary exceptions are discovered, Contractor shall immedi-ately notify the Owner for resolution prior to any change in the design or the scope, and any re-sultant claim for additional compensation.

2. The Bid Response must fulfill the intent of the Drawings and Specifications to the satisfaction of

the Owner to qualify as an acceptable Bid Response.

B. Substitutions

1. Catalog and/or model numbers for Owner approved equipment and systems are included as a part of these specifications.

2. Any substitution proposed by Contractor for catalog numbers and brands or trade names noted or

specified herein shall be solely at the Contractors risk. The Owner maintains sole authority to hold



a review of substitutions, and sole authority to approve or disapprove of substitutions for any rea-son.

3. The Owner’s acceptance of substitutions shall not relieve Contractor from complying with the re-

quirements of the drawings and Specifications. Contractor shall be responsible, at Contractor's sole expense, for any changes resulting from Contractor's substitutions that affect other parts of Contractor's own work or the work of others.

C. Technical Bid Submission: At bid submission, submit one (1) copy of the following

1. An equipment list with names of Manufacturers of primary systems (EACS, VMS, SIS, EP, IDS)

including model numbers and technical information on equipment proposed.

2. A letter from the manufacturer(s) stating that the system Contractor is an authorized distributor or installer of the proposed primary systems (EACS, VMS).

3. Indicate complete and total compliance with the provisions of these Specifications by letter or by

submittal of the bid response forms, signed by an officer of the corporation, or a principal if other ownership currently exists. If there are exceptions to the specifications, submit a statement listing every technical and operational parameter wherein the submitted equipment or system may vary from that which was originally specified. If the submitter fails to list a particular variance and his


submittal is accepted, but is subsequently deemed to be unsatisfactory because of the unlisted variance, the submitter must replace or modify such equipment at once and without cost to the Owner.

4. Failure of Contractor to submit the above information shall be considered non-responsive to the

bid requirements and sufficient cause for bid rejection. .

D. Examination of Site and Verification of Existing Conditions

1. Contractor shall have visited the site and familiarized himself with existing conditions prior to submitting his bid and shall be prepared to carry out the work within the existing limitations. Failure or neglect to do so shall not relieve Contractor of his responsibilities nor entitle him to additional compensation for work overlooked and not included in his bid.

2. Existing structures and utilities shown on the contract drawings are obtained from project

drawings and exploratory field examination. Contractor shall verify existing conditions and re-quired dimensions, including those shown on the drawings, by measurement at the job site. Contractor shall notify the Owner of exceptions before proceeding with the work.

3. Contractor shall confirm the availability of the proper power source for each piece of specified

equipment, through site visits and drawings as necessary. Where proper power does not exist, Contractor shall identify this situation to the Owner for guidance. Should the Owner direct Con-tractor to provide the necessary power, it shall be provided using equipment and methods au-thorized by the Owner.

E. Data Accuracy: Absolute accuracy of information regarding existing conditions cannot be guar-

anteed. The Drawings and Specifications are for the assistance and guidance of Contractor and ex-act locations, distances, and elevations will be governed by actual field conditions. Where variations from the bid documents are required, such variations shall be approved by the Owner.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

A. General

1. The approved Contractor shall be responsible for satisfactory operation of the system and its certification.

2. Approval of the Owner is required of products or services of the proposed manufacturer,

suppliers and installers and will be based upon conformance to the specifications.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications

1. System components shall be furnished by manufacturers of established reputation and experi-ence who shall have produced similar equipment and who shall be able to refer to similar instal-lations rendering satisfactory service.

2. The manufacturer's products shall have been in satisfactory operation on at least three similar

installations for not less than three years. Contractor shall submit a list of similar installations.



3. Components including, but not limited to, card access controllers, cameras, intercoms, comput-ers, and power supplies shall have been tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Factory Mutual Systems, or other approved independent testing laboratory.

C. Contractor Qualifications


1. Contractor shall be a pre-qualified supplier of DPS purchasing and Construction Services departments.

2. Hold current legally required Colorado State Contractor's licenses necessary to accomplish the

installation and activation of the described system at the facilities indicated. Contractor shall submit copies of licenses to Owner prior to the start of work.

3. Hold current legally required state registrations required to meet local requirements for submittal

drawings.

4. Have manufacturers trained and certified engineering, field technicians and programming staff.

5. Indicate complete and total compliance with the provisions of these Specifications by letter or by submittal of the bid response forms, signed by an officer of the corporation, or a principal if other ownership exists. In addition, the letter or forms shall include a complete listing of exceptions, if any.

1.9 PHASING PLAN

A.

1.

The work may be performed in phases. Each phase of work shall include, but not be limited to the provision of applicable conduit, power,

equipment, programming and documentation to provide a complete, operational system, asdescribed herein.

2.

Coordinate work phasing with the Owner

3.

Within 14 days after award of the project, submit a preliminary phasing plan to the Owner for review. The Shop Drawings shall reflect the process of the phasing plan.

B.

The Phasing Plan shall be designed to allow the continuation of Owner business and activities, tosupport uninterrupted electronic Access Control services, where possible, and to limit down-time of critical systems, during construction. Each system element shall be addressed individually. Phases and system elements may be combined, or rearranged, based upon planned work schedules and available labor to perform the work.

C. Work which requires shut-down of, or any part, of the Security Systems shall be scheduled and

performed between the hours of 11:30 PM to 5:30 AM unless written approval for alternate time is provided by the Owner.

D. Phasing Plan: The proposed phasing plan should address the upgrades with the following

approach:

1. Install or coordinate with the Owner on the installation of the required network connectivity.

2. Install, power, and test the control equipment, including but not limited to video recorders, EACS controllers, computer workstations, and application software. Where new equipment will replace existing equipment in the same location, provide temporary installation of the new equipment.

3. Install conduit, cable, and new devices. Connect to controls, and test.



4. Install conduit, cable, and devices which replace existing devices. Connect to controls, and test.


5. Where new equipment replaces existing equipment in the same location, remove existing and

install the new equipment. Reconnect pre-tested devices, and test again. 6.

Program, configure, test and commission the system as required by the Owner and these specifications.

E.

Modifications to the Phasing plan may be submitted by the Contractor, after the Shop Drawings

and Equipment Submittals have been reviewed and accepted for installation. The Contractors’ modified phasing plan shall be based upon Contractor’s actual proposed equipment, project schedule and installation planning. The proposed phasing plan shall be designed to achieve the same goals as the phasing plan contained herein, including but not limited to, the successful upgrade of existing Ac-cess Control systems while maintaining full Access Control at the facility. The Contractors’ plan must be accepted by the Owner prior to any demolition or installation of equipment and cable. The Owner reserves the right to modify the proposed plan, or any part thereof.

1.10 GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. Contract Compliance: Provide the Systems and Services in accordance with the conditions and

system descriptions as described in Part 1 of each specification section. Provide specified or Owner approved equivalent alternate products as described in Part 2 of each specification section. Utilize specified procedures and practices as described in Part 3 of each specification section.

B. Codes: Furnish material and workmanship for this work in conformance with applicable legal and

code requirements.

C. Inclusive Work: Provide sufficient time, material and manpower to verify, revise or refine the Bid Drawings as necessary to develop fully engineered Shop Drawings as required by the General Re-quirements and in order for this work to realize complete, stable and safe operation.

1.11 RELATED WORK

A. General

1.

Observe interface procedures to related work.

2.

Coordinate with the Owner on aspects of aesthetic interface.

3.

Coordination: Coordinate this work with related work by other contractors.

4.

Coordinate with existing construction, equipment and field devices.

5.

Equipment provided under this project shall be installed in a manner consistent with architectural, operational, service and maintenance considerations.

6.

"Coordinate" related work not specifically mentioned below.

B.

Owner’s General Provisions and Work Contract

1.

Division 01, General Requirements: Coordinate this work with applicable sections of the Owner’sGeneral Requirements and General Provisions.



2.

Division 08, Openings: Coordinate this work with applicable sections of Division 08, Openings, including but not limited to the following.


a. Schedules for Openings

Coordinate Access Control requirements with door, frame, and hardware schedules.

b. Section 08 70 00 – Hardware.

c. Door hardware, door and frame modifications shall be provided by the Contractor. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on requirements and interfaces with Access Control hardware.

C. Access Doors: Coordinate with the Owner for the provision of access doors where needed to

gain access to wiring, boxes, panels and enclosures in walls or ceilings.

D. Finishes: Coordinate this work with applicable Owner requirements for Finishes, including but not limited to the following.

1. Painting/Patching: Provide painting, patching and repair services to match existing conditions.

2.

Painting of walls shall be from corner of nearest wall across repair area to nearest wall on opposite side of repair area.

E.

Division 14, Conveying Equipment: Coordinate this work with applicable Owner requirements of,Conveying Equipment, including but not limited to the following.

1.

Owners requirements for Elevator Equipment and Controls

2.

Elevator work shall be provided by the Contractor.

3.

Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on requirements and interfaces with elevator equipment.

F.

Division 16 (26 00 00), Electrical

1.

Coordinate this work with applicable sections of Division 16 (26 00 00), Electrical, including but not limited to the following.

a. Electrical power distribution sources for existing buildings shall be by the Owner unless

otherwise noted. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to identify and verify 120-volt power service requirements with the first shop drawing submittal.

b. Conduit, boxes, and rough-in material shall be provided and installed by the Contractor,

unless otherwise noted.

c. Specialty boxes shall be provided by the Contractor and installed by the Contractor, unless otherwise noted.

G. Division 17 (27 00 00), Communications

1. General: Coordinate this work with applicable sections of Division 17 (27 00 00), Communica-

tions, including but not limited to structured cabling, fiber optic cabling. telephone, and data communications requirements. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to identify and veri-



fy shared cable/pathway, LAN ports, and bandwidth requirements with the first shop drawing submittal.

2. Section 27 32 26 Emergency Phone


Provide equipment and services required by related Sections pursuant to the requirements of Section 27 32 26, Emergency Phone

3. Section 27 51 00 Security Local Intercom System

Provide equipment and services required by related Sections pursuant to the requirements of Section 27 51 00, Local Intercom System

H. Division 28 00 00, Electronic Safety and Security

1. Existing Systems: Coordinate with Owner and Owner’s existing Service Provider to ensure the

existing system(s) are kept in active operation during the course of this project, in keeping with appropriate phases of work. Coordination may require reconfiguration and reprogramming of ex-isting controllers and other system elements. This work will be coordinated by the Contractor, and provided by the Owner’s Service Provider.

2. Section 28 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security

a. Provide equipment and services required by related Sections pursuant to the require-

ments of Section 28 05 00, Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security.

3. Section 28 08 00 – Testing and Commissioning

a. Provide equipment and services required by related Sections pursuant to the requirements of Section 28 08 00, Testing and Commissioning.

4. Section 28 13 00 - Electronic Access Control System

a. Provide equipment and services required by Section 28 13 00, Alarm and Access Control

System, pursuant to the requirements of this section.

5. Section 28 16 00 Electronic Intrusion Detection System

a. Provide equipment and services required by Section 28 16 00, Electronic Intrusion Detection System, pursuant to the requirements of this section

6. Section 28 23 00 - Video Surveillance System

a. Provide equipment and services required by Section 28 23 00, Video Surveillance

System, pursuant to the requirements of this section.

7. Section 17700 (27 00 00) – Telecommunications System Infrastructure

a. Provide equipment and services required by Section 17700, Telecommunications System Infrastructure, pursuant to the requirements of this section.

I. Coordinate related work with existing door hardware including automatic motorized door opening,

power assisted door opening and powered panic hardware.

1.12 PRECEDENCE



A. If any statement in this or any other Security System specification is in conflict with any provision

of the General Terms and Conditions of the contract, the provision stated in the General Terms and


Conditions shall take precedence. Any questions that result from such potential conflict, which require additional interpretation and guidance shall be immediately brought to the Owner’s attention.

B. Obtain, read and comply with Division 16 (26 00 00), Electrical and applicable sub-sections of the

contract specifications. Where a discrepancy may exist between any applicable Division 16 (26 00 00) sub-sections and directions as contained herein, this section shall govern.

C. Architectural drawings shall have precedence over other drawings in regard to dimensions and

location.

1.13 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. The edition of the appropriate code or standard at the time of permitting shall govern all applications.

B. Standards: Perform the work in accordance with the following standards:

1. UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., UL 294, UL 1076, ULC

2. EIA Electrical Industries Association.

3. NTSC National Television Standards Committee.

4. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

5. NECA National Electrical Contractor's Association, Standards of Installation.

6. NFPA National Fire Protection Association 101 Life Safety Code

7. IBC 2006 w/ 2008 Denver Building Code Amendments

8. NEB 2008 w/ 2008 Denver Building Code Amendments

9. ADA Americans With Disabilities Act

10. FCC Part 15, Part 68

11. IEEE RS 0 variable standard NTSC (color camera broadcast)

12. OSHPD Office of State Health Planning Department {Omit if the project is not clinic related)

C. Where more than one code or regulation is applicable, the more stringent shall apply.

D. Cable installation, identification and termination shall be performed in accordance with manufacturer's installation manuals in addition to the above applicable codes and Owner specifications.

E. In the absence of manufacturer's recommendations on conductor applications, the Contractor

shall ensure that the cable selected meets all technical requirements of the location of its installation, and of the equipment to be installed.



1.14 SHOP DRAWING & EQUIPMENT SUBMITTAL


A. General: Bid documents, including drawings, details and specifications are considered

conceptual in nature, and provide direction on products and project requirements. Contractor is given a choice of methods that may be incorporated into the system. These choices may affect the overall design, configuration and installation of the proposed system.

B. Contractor Responsibility: Prepare and submit shop drawings, rendered in the latest AutoCAD

format, which show details of all work to insure proper installation of the work using those materials and equipment specified or allowed under the approved plans and specifications. A complete Shop Drawing submittal package shall consist of Drawings, Equipment Data Sheet Submittals and an Acceptance Testing Plan.

C. Completeness: The Equipment Submittals, Acceptance Testing Plan and the Shop Drawings

should be submitted as a complete and contiguous package. Partial or unmarked submittals will not be accepted for review.

D. Scheduling: A schedule of shop drawing submissions shall be submitted for the Owner’s review

on a form acceptable to the Owner within ten (10) days after award of the Contract. The schedule of shop drawing submissions shall include as a minimum, but not limited to the requirements stated herein.

E.

1.

Requirements: Provide the following information complete, and in the manner described herein: Hardware, Application Software, and Network Requirements: A system description including

analysis and calculations used in sizing equipment required by the Access Control systems. Thedescription shall show how the equipment will operate as a system to meet the performance requirements of the systems. The following information shall be supplied as a minimum:

a. Server(s) processor(s), disk space and memory size [expansion of existing]

b. Workstation(s) processor(s), disk space and memory size

c. Description of site (field) control equipment (Controllers/Field Panels, NVR’s, Modules)

and their configuration

d. Operating System(s) Software, where software is provided or upgraded

e. Application Software, with Optional and Custom Software Modules supplied in this project

f. Integration Schemes: Proposed connectivity, software, development requirements, and

SDK information, for inter-system communication.

g. Network bandwidth and reliability requirements

h. Number and location of LAN ports required

i. Other specific network requirements, preferences, and constraints

j. Backup/archive system size and configuration

k. Start-up operations



l. System power requirements and Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) sizing


m. Device/component environmental requirements (cooling and or heating parameters)

2. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall be numbered consecutively and shall accurately and

distinctly present the following information:

a. Title Sheet

b. Floor Plans: Showing devices, pull boxes, cabinets, conduits and conductors in their proposed locations with device numbering scheme.

c. Riser Diagram: Showing all conduit relationships between devices shown on the Floor

Plans. Show all power sources.

d. Single-Line/Block Diagrams: Show signal relationships of controls and devices within the system.

e. Custom Assembly Diagrams: For each custom assembly such as Access Control Ter-

minal Cabinets, receptacle assemblies, or door control panels, provide an assembly drawing illustrating the appearance of the assembled device. Include dimensions, assembly compo-nents, and functional attributes (momentary or alternate action switch, lens color, panel fin-ish)

f.

1.

Component Connection Diagrams For each equipment component such as a computer, video switcher, camera or video

recorder, show the rear elevation of the device and all connectors/terminations as apictorial.

2.

Show the wire designations on connectors. [Typical wiring detail where multiple of same device is provided.

3.

Show a schedule of the wire colors connected to the pins on each device connector.

g.

Equipment Wiring Diagrams

1.

Show a pictorial illustration of each equipment enclosure and/or terminal cabinet, including terminals, components and wiring devices.

2.

Show the device nomenclature exactly as shown on the single line diagrams.

3.

Terminations: Show every termination and terminating cable, with applicable cable and wire numbers matching the single line diagrams.

a) Every termination in the system must be documented.

b) Termination information may be rendered as a wiring list(s), if properly

coordinated with, and referenced to, typical component and single-line diagrams. Otherwise, the Shop Drawings shall show a pictorial of every component in the system, with its terminations.

4. Show wire colors for each terminal.



5. For each wire exiting the enclosure, show the destination of the wire by floor, room

number and the drawing number of the panel where the wire terminates.


h. Provide working dimensions and erection dimensions.

i. Arrangements and sectional views

j. Necessary details, including complete information for making connections between work under this Contract, existing work, and work under other Contracts.

k. Stock or standard drawings will not be accepted for review unless full identification and

supplementary information is shown thereon in ink or typewritten form.

l. Duplicate of design drawings may be used where each sheet is modified to reflect contractor coordination, specific requirements of the project and multidiscipline conditions.

m. Each Drawing or page shall include:

1. Project name, Project Number and descriptions.

2. Submittal date and space for revision dates.

3. Identification of equipment, product or material.

4. Name of Contractor and Subcontractor.

5. Name of Supplier and Manufacturer.

6. Relation to adjacent structure of material.

7. Physical dimensions, clearly identified.

8. ASTM and Specifications references.

9. Identification of deviations from the Contract Documents.

10. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, dated and certifying to review of submittal,

certification of field measurements and compliance with Contract.

11. Location at which the equipment or materials are to be installed. Location shall mean both physical location and location relative to other connected or attached material.

3. Equipment Submittals

a. Provide a Title Page, with project name, Contractors name and address, contact

information, date of submission, and submission revision number.

b. Provide a Parts List, for proposed equipment, materials, components and devices, listing the following information for each line item:

i. The system type

ii. Model number



iii. Specification sheet page reference


c. Provide Manufacturers Specification Sheet with descriptive information for equipment,

materials, components and devices. Number each page, to correspond with the Parts List.

d. Clearly delineate (with highlighter, arrow, or underline) on each specification sheet, specific model numbers, options and configurations being proposed for this project.

e. Indicate kinds of materials and finishes for equipment where more than one option is presented.

4. Acceptance Testing Plan

a. Submit a written document detailing the test procedures to be followed in evaluating and

proving the installed system(s).

b. Provide a sample of the test forms to be used for each system and for each component of each system.

c. Include all tests required by the equipment manufacturer and by this Specification.

5. Include where requested by Owner [Spare Parts List: Submit a list of recommended spare parts.

Spare parts shall comprise a minimum of 5% or minimum of 2 each of field devices, device termination boards and a minimum of 1 system controller boards. ]

6. Training Program

a. Submit a training program 10 working days prior to scheduled training to be followed in

training key employees in the operation and maintenance of the installed system at the pro-ject site. The proposed training program shall be designed to provide a level of basic compe-tence with the system for selected personnel. These selected personnel shall then be ex-pected to train other personnel as required, utilizing the training that they have been given and the body of training documentation provided by Contractor. This plan shall comply with the requirements stated in the “Training” section, of these Specifications, all stated hours of which shall be considered to be classroom hours.

b. Submit a curriculum to account for, and relate, each subject to actual training time. All

required hours shall be accounted for in this curriculum.

c. The training plan shall cover the overall system, each individual system, each subsystem, and each component. The plan shall also cover procedures for database management, nor-mal operations, and failure modes with response procedures for each failure. Each procedural item must be applied to each equipment level.

F. The Owner will return unchecked any submittal which does not contain complete data on the

work and full information on related matters.

G. Verification: The contractor shall check and acknowledge all shop drawings, and shall place his signature on all shop drawings submitted to the Owner. Contractor's signature shall constitute a rep-resentation that all quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, performance criteria and similar data have been verified and that, in his opinion, the submittal fully meets the requirements of the Contract Documents.



H. Timeliness: The Contractor shall schedule, prepare and submit a complete shop drawing as-sembly in accordance with a time-table that will allow his suppliers and manufacturers sufficient time to fabricate, manufacture, inspect test and deliver their respective products to the project site in a timely manner so as to not delay the complete performance of the work.


I. Departure from Contract Requirements: If shop drawings show departures from the Contract re-quirements, the Contractor shall make specific mention thereof in his letter of transmittal, otherwise review of such submittals shall not constitute review of the departure. Review of the drawings shall constitute review of the specific subject matter for which the drawings were submitted and not of any other structure, materials, equipment, or apparatus shown on the drawings.

J. Contractor Responsibility: The review of shop drawings will be general and shall not relieve the

Contractor of responsibility for the accuracy of such drawings, nor for the proper fitting and con-struction of the work, nor for the furnishing of materials or work required by the Contract. No con-struction called for by shop drawings shall be initiated until such drawings have been reviewed and approved.

K. Shop Drawing Submittal Review: The procedure in seeking review of the shop drawings shall be

as follows:

1. The Contractor shall submit four (4) complete sets of shop drawings with equipment submittals and other descriptive data with one copy of a letter of transmittal to the Owner for review thirty (30) working days after award of the contract. The letter of transmittal shall contain the project name, the Owner’s Project Number, the name of the Contractor, the list of drawings submitted including numbers and titles, requests for any review of departures from the contract require-ments and any other pertinent information. Drawings submitted for review shall be full- sized drawings, rolled and included with the equipment submittals.

2.

Drawings or descriptive data will be stamped "Reviewed", "Furnish as Corrected", "Revise and Resubmit", "Rejected" or ‘Submit Specific Item’ and one copy with a Letter of Transmittal will be transmitted to the Contractor with the return of submitted documents.

3.

If a shop drawing or data is stamped "Reviewed" or "Furnish as Corrected", no additional submittal is required for that shop drawing.

4.

If a shop drawing or data is stamped "Revise and Resubmit" or “Rejected”, the Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the documents as required above. The letter transmitting corrected documents shall indicate that the documents are re-submittals.

5.

If any corrections, other than those noted by the Owner, are made on a shop drawing prior to resubmittal, such changes should be pointed out by the Contractor upon resubmittal.

6.

The Contractor shall revise and resubmit the shop drawing as required, until they are stamped either "Reviewed" or "Furnish as Corrected."

7.

After the Contractor's submittal or resubmittal of shop drawings, the Owner shall be provided with fifteen (15) working days for review. Should the Owner require additional review time above and beyond the stated fifteen (15) working days, the Contractor may ask for a time extension and/or monetary compensation, if they can present valid, factual evidence that actual damages were in-curred by the Contractor. The Owner shall determine the amount of the time extension and/or the monetary compensation to be awarded the Contractor.

8.

The Owner will not issue a "Notice to Proceed" until shop drawings are reviewed, unless otherwise approved by the Owner.



L.

The Contractor shall be responsible for extra costs incurred by the Owner caused by the Contractor's failure to comply with the procedure outline above.


1.15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: RECORD DOCUMENTS)

A. Phase One: Notwithstanding requirements specified elsewhere, submit the following labeled as

the "Operating and Maintenance Manual" within thirty (30) days after Final Acceptance of the Instal-lation:

1. Record Drawings: Submit two (2) copies of revised versions of drawings as submitted in the

"Shop and Field" and "Equipment Wiring Diagrams" Submittals showing actual device locations, conduit routing, wiring and relationships as they were constructed. Include nomenclature showing as-built wire designations and colors. Drawings shall include room numbers coinciding with Owner space planning numbering. Drawings shall be submitted in electronic editable AutoCAD 2011 files, in “.dwg” format, on CD or DVD disks.

2. Manuals: Submit two (2) copies of each of the following materials in bound manuals, or electronic

PDF copies, with labeled dividers:

a. A final Bill of Material for each system . b. Equipment Instruction Manuals: Complete, project specific comprehensive instructions

for the operation of devices and equipment provided as part of this work.

c. Manufacturers Instruction Manuals: Specification sheets, brochures, Operation Manuals and service sheets published by the manufacturers of the components, devices and equip-ment provided.

d. Include information for testing, repair, troubleshooting, assembly, disassembly and

recommended maintenance intervals.

e. Provide a replacement parts list with current prices. Include list of recommended spare parts, tools, and instruments for testing and maintenance purpose.

f. Performance, Test and Adjustment Data: Comprehensive documentation of performance

verification according to parameters specified herein.

g. Warranties: Provide an executed copy of the Warranty Agreement and copies of all manufacturer’s Warranty Registration papers as described herein.

B. Phase Two: Within fourteen (14) days of receipt of engineer reviewed Operating and

Maintenance Manual (Phase One), submit three (3) electronic copies in AutoCAD 2011 editable .dwg format of the reviewed Record Drawings and three (3) copies of the reviewed Operating and Mainte-nance Manuals to the Owner, on CD or DVD disks.

1. Within each equipment enclosure and/or terminal cabinet, the contractor shall place a Single Line

drawing of the system(s) and the respective Terminal Cabinet Wiring Diagram in a clear plastic sleeve permanently attached to the inside cover of the terminal cabinet.

2. In each equipment enclosure the contractor shall place a drawing providing device locations

served by the equipment within the enclosure with identification that is identical to the wiring tags and with the software description of each point.



3. The contractor shall provide to the Owner one (1) copy of new executive and user software, including required graphical maps, on CD-ROM disks.


4. Sufficient information, (detailed schematics of subsystems, assemblies and subassemblies to

component level) clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications.

1.16 CHANGES

Before proceeding with changes or claims for extras, Contractor shall provide written notice, secure prior written approval from the Owner, and substantiate actual cost of each change or claim.

1.17 NOTIFICATION

Contractor shall not shut off any existing systems. Contractor shall give the Owner at least 10 calendar days notice of any requirement to shut off or interfere with existing alarm, access control, regulating, computer or other service systems. The Owner will arrange and execute any shutdown. All work such as splicing where approved, connections, necessary to establish or re-establish any system shall be com-pleted by Contractor in close coordination with the Owner.

1.18 INTERFERENCE WITH THE FACILITY

Transportation and storage of materials at the facility, work involving the facility, and other matters af-fecting the habitual use by the Owner of its buildings, shall be conducted so as to cause the least pos-sible interference’s, and at times and in a manner acceptable to the Owner. Contractor shall make every effort to deliver equipment per the schedule required by the project.

1.19 WARRANTY

A. Furnish and guarantee maintenance, repair and inspection service for the system using factory

trained authorized representatives of the manufacturer of the equipment for a period of two years after final acceptance of the installation.

B. Third Party Device warranties are transferred from the manufacturer to the contractor, which may

then transfer third party warranties to the Owner. Specific third party warranty details, terms and con-ditions, remedies and procedures, are either expressly stated on, or packaged with, or accompany such products. The warranty period may vary from product to product. These products include but are not limited to devices that are directly interconnected to the field hardware or com-puters and are purchased directly from the manufacturer. Examples may include but not be limited to; servers, cameras, video recorders, card readers, and computers.

C. Purpose

1. The Contractor shall repair any system malfunction or installation deficiency discovered by the

Owner or their representatives during the burn in and warranty period.

2. The Contractor shall correct any installation deficiencies found against the contract drawings and specifications discovered by the Owner or their representatives during the warranty period.

D. The service contract shall cover equipment and software related to this contract, and shall

provide for the following parts and services, without additional cost to the Owner:

1. Quarterly Inspection, Preventative Maintenance and Testing of equipment and components



2. Regular Service, Emergency Service, and Call-Back Service

3. Labor and Repairs


E.

4. 1.

Equipment and Materials Response Time: Response time for service calls.

Emergency service calls where system is not responding to staff directed commands through the

computer systems shall be within 2 hours to the project site. 2.

Emergency service calls where controllers are not reporting shall be within 2 hours to the project site.

3.

Normal service calls for device malfunctions shall be within 24 hours during normal working hours to the site.

F.

Repair Time: Contractor shall stock parts in sufficient quantities such that repair or replacement

shall be guaranteed within 12-hours. Temporary replacements within this time period shall be acceptable, provided temporary replacements do not compromise system functionality, and provided permanent replacement is achieved within 72 hours. [Contractor may contact owner representative for use of owner supplied spare parts where delay of system repair will have negative impact on sys-tem performance]

G. Commencement: The warranty begins at the time of issuance of the statement of "Final

Acceptance of the Installation" by the Owner.

H. Transferability: The warranty shall be transferable to any person or persons at the discretion of the Owner.

I. Transmittal: A copy of this Warranty shall be delivered to, and signed for by the Owner's repre-

sentative whose primary responsibility is the operation and care of these systems. A copy of the signed Warranty document shall be delivered for review as part of the Final Submittals.

J. Registration: Register Warranty papers for all equipment and software in the name of the Owner.

Furnish reproductions of all equipment Warranty papers to the Owner with the Final Submittals.

K. Sub-Contracting: Warranty service work may not be sub-contracted except with specific permission and approval by the Owner.

L. Resolution of Conflicts

1. The Owner retains the right to resolve unsatisfactory warranty service performance at any time

by declaring the work unsatisfactory, stating specific areas of dissatisfaction in writing.

2. If the Contractor or his approved subcontractor does not resolve such stated areas of dissatisfac-tion within thirty (30) days, the Owner may appoint any alternative service agency or person to fulfill the terms of the Warranty; the cost of which shall be borne by the contractor. This action may be taken repeatedly until the Owner is satisfied that Warranty service performance is satis-factory. Satisfactory resolution of a malfunction shall be considered adequate when the device, equipment, system or component which is chronically malfunctioning is brought into compliance with the standards of performance as contained herein and published by the manufacturers of the equipment installed.



1.20 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS


A. Responsibility: Obtain permits and inspections required for the work. Permit and inspection costs

will be borne by the Contractor.

B. Performance: Perform tests required herein, or as may be reasonably required to demonstrate conformance with the Specifications or with the requirements of any legal authority having jurisdic-tion.

C. Review: Obtain approvals from authorities responsible for enforcement of applicable codes and

regulations to establish that the work is in compliance with all requirements of reference codes indi-cated herein and required by the appropriate jurisdiction. Make corrections, changes or additions as required and deliver certificates of acceptance, operation, and/or compliance with the "Operating and Maintenance Manuals" as described herein.

1.21 TRAINING

A. On-Site Training

1. General: Present, review and describe equipment and materials to the Owner and Owner's

operating personnel and fully demonstrate the operation and maintenance of the systems, equipment and devices specified herein.

2. Include with new systems [Contractor to arrange and provide for video recording of each onsite

training session.]

a. Provide professional video and audio recording of each software screen option with Owner approval of content.

b. Provide end user video recording for Department of Safety & Security approved

processes.

c. Provide Security Systems Specialists approved recording of maintenance and troubleshooting process.

3. Training shall comprise two separate levels of training;

a.

1.

User Group upon substantial completion of the project. User group training shall include a site/building walk through indicating locations of

equipment and their usage.

2.

User group training shall include the operation of workstation capability of system monitoring, command override and report generation.

b.

Maintenance Group upon completion of the project prior to close out.

1.

Maintenance group training shall include a site/building walk through indicating locations of equipment and their usage.

2.

Review of as-build documentation at each controller location.

3.

Troubleshooting techniques in hardware and software.



4. The training shall cover the overall system, each individual system, each subsystem, and each

component. The training shall also cover procedures for database management, normal


operations, and failure modes with response procedures for each failure. Each procedural item must be applied to each equipment level.

5. Duration: Provide at least 2 hours of on-site training on each system for each group of designated

representatives of the Owner at a location convenient to the Owner.

6. On-site training shall commence as follows:

a. EACS: Just prior to completion of the first phase of work which establishes the new EACS control over systems entry and exit portals.

b. VMS: Just prior to completion of the first phase of work which establishes the new VMS

control over fixed or positionable cameras.

1.22 SAFEGUARDS AND PROTECTION

A. Barriers: Provide and maintain suitable barriers, guards, fences and signs where necessary to accommodate the safety of others relative to and/or for the protection of this work.

B. Regulations: Comply with OSHA, Federal, State, and local regulations and standards pursuant to

this work.

C. Protection: Protect all materials and equipment to prevent the entry or adhesion of any and all foreign material. If necessary, cover equipment with temporary protective material suitable for this purpose.

D. Finishing: Check, clean and remove defects, scratches, fingerprints and smudges if necessary

from all equipment and devices immediately prior to Acceptance of the Installation.

E. Damage: Replace all damaged or defective material or work at no additional cost prior to Final Acceptance.

F. Documentation: Provide written description of accidents by workers, students and staff of any in-

cident occurring on the project. Report incident in writing to Owners representative immediately and to the Project Manager for follow up.

1.23 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery: Unless otherwise noted, pre-testing or configuration is required by the contractor, de-

liver materials to the job site in manufacturer's original unopened containers, clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name and equipment model identification number.

B. Storage and Handling: Store and protect equipment in a manner which will preclude damage.

1.24 EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY REQUIREMENTS

While individual items of equipment may meet the equipment specifications and in fact meet the system specifications, the total system shall be designed so that the combination of equipment actually employed does not produce any undesirable effects such as signal distortion, noise, transients or crosstalk interfer-ence’s when electrically associated with itself or other equipment.

1.25 OWNER’S RIGHT TO USE EQUIPMENT

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS VALDEZ ELEMENTARY SCHOOL

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280500 - 37

The Owner reserves the right to use equipment, material and services provided as part of this work prior to Acceptance of the Work, without incurring additional charges and without commencement of the Warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. PVC Pipe Sleeves: Schedule 80.

B. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

C. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

D. EMT: 4” with end bushing for interior sleeves.

E. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with beveled edges.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more than 16 inches , thickness shall be 0.052 inch .

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches , thickness shall be 0.138 inch .

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. Jackmoon - Tyco f. <

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

VALDEZ ELEMENTARY SCHOOL

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel . Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.3 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY INSTALLATION


B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electronic safety and security equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PENETRATIONS

A. Electronic safety and security penetrations occur when raceways, pathways, cables, wireways, or cable trays penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS VALDEZ ELEMENTARY SCHOOL

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280500 - 39

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants.".

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electronic safety and security installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

VALDEZ ELEMENTARY SCHOOL

END OF SECTION 280500


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR Valdez Elementary ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SSG MEP, Inc. Project # 13043.00 Section 28 05 13 - 1

SECTION 28 05 13

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. UTP cabling. 2. 50/125-micrometer, multimode optical fiber cabling. 3. Coaxial cabling. 4. RS-232 cabling. 5. RS-485 cabling. 6. Low-voltage control cabling. 7. Control-circuit conductors. 8. Fire alarm wire and cable. 9. Identification products.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. DPS: Denver Public Schools

C. DoTS: Department of Technology Services

D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

E. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

F. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.

G. Open Cabling: Passing telecommunications cabling through open space (e.g., between the studs of a wall cavity).

H. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used:

a. Nominal OD.



b. Minimum bending radius. c. Maximum pulling tension.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise

on-site testing.



1. Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Fluke model DSP-4300 cable analyzer with Fluke DSP-FTA420 Multimode Fiber Module set.

2. Test optical fiber cable on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector; include the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data.


1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install conductors and cables that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that wire and cables are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration and sagging of factory packing materials.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install UTP, optical fiber, and coaxial cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.




2.2 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4” by 6’ wide by 8’ high, painted to match room. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."

2.3 UTP CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. ADC. 2. AMP Netconnect; a brand of Tyco Electronics Corporation. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. 5. CommScope, Inc. 6. Draka Cableteq USA. 7. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. 8. Mohawk; a division of Belden Networking, Inc. 9. Superior Essex Inc. 10. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand. 11. 3M; Communication Markets Division.

B. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP, covered with a blue thermoplastic jacket. 1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying

with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or CMG. b. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262. c. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR, complying with UL 1666. d. Communications, Limited Purpose: Type CMX. e. Multipurpose: Type MP or MPG. f. Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262. g. Multipurpose, Riser Rated: Type MPR, complying with UL 1666.


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Panduit Corp.

B. UTP Cable Connecting Hardware: IDC type, using modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of the same category or higher.

C. Connecting Blocks: 110-style for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.





products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AMP Netconnect; a brand of Tyco Electronics Corporation. 2. Belden Inc. 3. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. 4. CommScope, Inc. 5. Corning Incorporated; Corning Cable Systems. 6. CSI Technologies Inc. 7. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 8. Mohawk; a division of Belden Networking, Inc. 9. Superior Essex Inc. 10. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand. 11. 3M; Communication Markets Division.

B. Description: Multimode, 50/125-micrometer, 24-fiber, nonconductive, tight buffer, optical fiber cable. 1. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA-492AAAB for detailed specifications. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying

with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. General Purpose, Nonconductive: Type OFN or OFNG. b. Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP, complying with NFPA 262. c. Riser Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNR, complying with UL 1666. d. General Purpose, Conductive: Type OFC or OFCG. e. Plenum Rated, Conductive: Type OFCP, complying with NFPA 262. f. Riser Rated, Conductive: Type OFCR, complying with UL 1666.

5. Maximum Attenuation: 3.50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm. 6. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.

C. Jacket: 1. Jacket Color: Aqua for 50/125-micrometer cable or as required by DPS DoTS. 2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA-598-C. 3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed

40 inches.


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. ADC. 2. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. 5. Corning Incorporated; Corning Cable Systems. 6. CSI Technologies Inc. 7. Dynacom Inc. 8. Hubbell Incorporated; Hubbell Premise Wiring. 9. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc. 10. Siemon.



B. Cable Connecting Hardware: Meet the Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards

(FOCIS) specifications of TIA-604-2-B, TIA-604-3-B, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3. 1. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, Type SC connectors. Insertion loss not more than 0.75

dB. 2. Type SFF connectors may be used in termination racks, panels, and equipment packages.

2.7 COAXIAL CABLE


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Alpha Wire Company. 2. Belden Inc. 3. Coleman Cable, Inc. 4. CommScope, Inc. 5. Draka Cableteq USA.

B. General Coaxial Cable Requirements: Broadband type, recommended by cable manufacturer specifically for broadband data transmission applications. Coaxial cable and accessories shall have 75-ohm nominal impedance with a return loss of 20 dB maximum from 7 to 806 MHz.

C. RG-11/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV. 1. [o. 14 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor. 2. Gas-injected, foam-PE insulation. 3. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 60 percent aluminum braid. 4. Jacketed with sunlight-resistant, black PVC or PE. 5. Suitable for outdoor installations in ambient temperatures ranging from minus 40 to plus 85

deg C.

D. RG59/U: NFPA 70, Type CATVR. 1. No. 20 AWG, solid, silver-plated, copper-covered steel conductor. 2. Gas-injected, foam-PE insulation. 3. Triple shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 95 percent aluminum braid;


E. RG-6/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV or CM. 1. No. 16 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE insulation. 2. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 60 percent aluminum braid. 3. Jacketed with black PVC or PE. 4. Suitable for indoor installations.

F. RG59/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV. 1. No. 20 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE insulation. 2. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 40 percent aluminum braid. 3. PVC jacket.

G. RG59/U (Plenum Rated): NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. No. 20 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; foam fluorinated ethylene propylene

insulation. 2. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 65 percent aluminum braid. 3. Copolymer jacket.



H. NFPA and UL Compliance: Coaxial cables shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 1655, and with NFPA 70 "Radio and Television Equipment" and "Community Antenna Television and Radio Distribution" Articles. Types are as follows: 1. CATV Cable: Type CATV. 2. CATV Plenum Rated: Type CATVP, complying with NFPA 262. 3. CATV Riser Rated: Type CATVR, complying with UL 1666. 4. CATV Limited Rating: Type CATVX.



products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Emerson Network Power Connectivity Solutions; AIM Electronics Brand. 2. Leviton Commercial Networks Division. 3. Siemon. 4. <


2.9 RS-232 CABLE

A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM. 1. Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors. 2. Polypropylene insulation. 3. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned copper drain

wire. 6. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.

B. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors. 2. Plastic insulation. 3. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage. 4. Plastic jacket. 5. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned copper drain

wire. 6. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.

2.10 RS-485 CABLE

A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM. 1. Paired, 2 pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors. 2. PVC insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.

B. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.



1. Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors. 2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test.

2.11 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE

A. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG. 1. One pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned copper conductors. 2. PVC insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.

B. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. One pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned copper conductors. 2. PVC insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.

2.12 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, complying with UL 83, in raceway.

B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, complying with UL 83, in raceway.

C. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TW or TF, complying with UL 83.

2.13 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Comtran Corporation. 2. Draka Cableteq USA. 3. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. 4. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corp. 5. West Penn Wire.

B. General Wire and Cable Requirements: NRTL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760.

C. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, size as recommended by system manufacturer. 1. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70, Article 760, Classification CI, for

power-limited fire alarm signal service Type FPL. NRTL listed and labeled as complying with UL 1424 and UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.

D. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation.



1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum. 2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum. 3. Multiconductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70, Type MC, copper conductors, Type TFN/THHN

conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with outer jacket with red identifier stripe, NTRL listed for fire alarm and cable tray installation, plenum rated, and complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.



products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Brady Worldwide, Inc. 2. HellermannTyton North America. 3. Kroy LLC. 4. Panduit Corp.

B. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



B. Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.


D. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA-526-14-A and TIA/EIA-568-B.3.

E. Factory sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test the frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing the results.

F. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for installation of supports for cables.

3.2 WIRING METHOD

A. Install wiring in metal pathways and wireways.



1. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch. Control and data transmission wiring shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems.

2. Comply with requirements in Section 280528 "Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security." 3. Comply with requirements in Section 260536 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems."

B. Install cable, concealed in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors when possible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: 1. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding

manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. 2. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 3. Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended in writing by

manufacturer. 4. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure. 5. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated

with intrusion system to terminal blocks. 6. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams. 7. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal

blocks, or plug connectors.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


B. Conductors: Size according to system manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

C. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations

only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels. 4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches

and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

5. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.




D. UTP Cable Installation: Install using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with Category 6]rating of components and that ensure Category 6 performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end. 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. 2. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 3. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable

geometry.



E. Optical Fiber Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3. 2. Cable shall be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted.

F. Outdoor Coaxial Cable Installation: 1. Install outdoor connections in enclosures complying with NEMA 250, Type 4X. Install

corrosion-resistant connectors with properly designed O-rings to keep out moisture. 2. Attach antenna lead-in cable to support structure at intervals not exceeding 36 inches.

G. Open-Cable Installation: 1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with

terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. 2. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by

cable supports not more than 60 inches apart. 3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other

potentially damaging items.

H. Separation from EMI Sources: 1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B recommendations for separating unshielded

copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.

4. Separation between cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.

5. Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.

6. Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches.

3.4 FIRE ALARM WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 72.

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." 1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system shall

be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable.

C. Wiring Method: 1. Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring associated

with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable.



2. Fire-Rated Cables: Use of 2-hour, fire-rated fire alarm cables, NFPA 70, Types MI and CI, is[ not] permitted.

3. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables shall not be installed in the same cable or raceway as signaling line circuits.

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

E. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.

F. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and another for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.

G. Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum one-hour-rated wall, so the loss of one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signals from other floors or zones.

H. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch conduit between the fire alarm control panel and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function.

3.5 POWER AND CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. 120-V Power Wiring: Install according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" unless otherwise indicated.

B. Minimum Conductor Sizes: 1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG. 2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG. 3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 12 AWG.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 281643 "Perimeter Security Systems" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 281600 "Intrusion Detection" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 281300 "Access Control" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 282300 "Video Surveillance" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.



E. Comply with requirements in Section 284619 "PLC Electronic Detention Monitoring and Control Systems" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.

F. Comply with requirements in Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.

G. Comply with requirements in Section 283500 "Refrigerant Detection and Alarm" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.

3.7 FIRESTOPPING


B. Comply with TIA-569-B, "Firestopping" Annex A.


3.8 GROUNDING

A. For communications wiring, comply with J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.

B. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.9 IDENTIFICATION




B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings.

Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.


3. Test UTP cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2.

Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.



4. Optical Fiber Cable Tests: a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests: 1) Multimode Link Measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in one direction

according to TIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper. 2) Attenuation test results for links shall be less than 2.0 dB. Attenuation test

results shall be less than that calculated according to equation in TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

5. Coaxial Cable Tests: Comply with requirements in Section 274133 "Master Antenna Television System."

D. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.

E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC Valdez Elementary SAFETY AND SECURITY SSG MEP, Inc. Project # 13043.00 Section 28 05 28 - 1

SECTION 28 05 28

PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Optical-fiber-cable pathways and fittings. 4. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 5. Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters. 6. Surface pathways. 7. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 8. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for conduits, wireways,

surface raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, handholes, and faceplate adapters serving electrical systems.

2. Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving communications systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.

B. DoTS: Department of Technology Services


D. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

E. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.


A. Product Data: For surface pathways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.





A. Coordination Drawings: Pathway routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: 1. Structural members in paths of pathway groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with

common supports.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

C. Source quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Alpha Wire Company. 4. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 5. Electri-Flex Company. 6. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 7. Picoma Industries; Subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc. 8. Republic Conduit. 9. Robroy Industries 10. Southwire Company. 11. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 12. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 13. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company.

B. General Requirements for Metal Conduits and Fittings: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for





F. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit. 1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.


H. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

I. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.



J. K. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70. 2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel. b. Type: Setscrew.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 467, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

L. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Arnco Corporation. 5. CANTEX Inc. 6. CertainTeed Corp. 7. Condux International, Inc. 8. Electri-Flex Company. 9. Kraloy. 10. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 11. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 12. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 13. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. General Requirements for Nonmetallic Conduits and Fittings: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for


C. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.

D. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.

E. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.

F. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.

G. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B.

H. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14.

I. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

J. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.



K. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

L. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.3 OPTICAL-FIBER-CABLE PATHWAYS AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Alpha Wire Company. 2. Arnco Corporation. 3. Endot Industries Inc. 4. IPEX. 5. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

B. Description: Comply with UL 2024; flexible-type pathway, approved for plenum, riseror] [general-use installation unless otherwise indicated. 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for



A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. 1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with TIA-569-B.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated.




2.5 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Allied Moulded Products, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 4. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc.

B. General Requirements for Nonmetallic Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for


C. Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, and having snap-on cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners.

D. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

E. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

F. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.6 SURFACE PATHWAYS

A. General Requirements for Surface Pathways: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for


B. Surface Metal Pathways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Mono-Systems, Inc. b. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. c. Panduit Corp. d. Wiremold / Legrand.

C. Surface Nonmetallic Pathways: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Product shall comply with UL 94 V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing characteristics. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the

following: a. Panduit Corp.

D. Tele-Power Poles:



1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following a. Panduit Corp.

2. Material: Galvanized steel with ivory baked-enamel finish. 3. Fittings and Accessories: Dividers, end caps, covers, cutouts, wiring harnesses, devices,

mounting materials, and other fittings shall match and mate with tele-power pole as required for complete system.


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Adalet. 2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 6. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division. 7. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 8. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 9. Molex, Woodhead Brand 10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 12. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 13. Robroy Industries. 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries. 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 17. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: 1. Comply with TIA-569-B. 2. Boxes, enclosures and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet

locations.

C. Sheet-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

E. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

F. Metal Floor Boxes: 1. Material: Cast metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.



H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

I. Device Box Dimensions: 4-inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep>.

J. Gangable boxes are prohibited.

K. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

L. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures:

a. Material: Plastic. b. Finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.

3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

M. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front,

finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing


2.8 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND CABLING

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes: 1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as

defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application. 2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Comply with TIA-569-B.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass or a combination of the two. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. CDR Systems Corporation; Hubbell Power Systems. d. NewBasis. e. Oldcastle Precast, Inc.; Christy Concrete Products. f. Synertech Moulded Products; a division of Oldcastle Precast, Inc.

2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.



6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." 7. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for

secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 8. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks

and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES

A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance

with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied. 1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency. 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing

agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.

3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PATHWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: GRC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, [direct buried] [concrete encased]. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Pathway locations include the

following: a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c. Mechanical rooms. d. Gymnasiums

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric-Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 7. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental Air:

EMT. 8. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications-Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: EMT. 9. Pathways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical-Fiber or Communications

Cable: EMT. 10. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel

in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.



C. Minimum Pathway Size: 3/4-inch] trade size. Minimum size for optical-fiber cables is 1 inch.

D. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of


3. EMT: Use setscrew, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

F. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings.

G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, NECA 101, and TIA-569-B for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum pathways. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep pathways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.


F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications wiring conduits for which only two 90-degree bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.



I. Pathways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement.

Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure pathways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.

2. Arrange pathways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Arrange pathways to keep a minimum of 3 inches of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for

each specific location. 5. Change from ENT to GRC before rising above floor.



J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for pathways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in

an enclosure.

K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of pathway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

L. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated pathway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install insulated bushings on conduits terminated with locknuts.

N. Install pathways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

O. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to conduit assembly to assure a continuous ground path.

P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length.

Q. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground pathways designated as spare above grade alongside pathways in use.

R. Surface Pathways: 1. Install surface pathway for surface electrical outlet boxes only where indicated on Drawings. 2. Install surface pathway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. 3. Secure surface pathway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding

48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight pathway section. Support surface pathway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

S. Pathways for Optical-Fiber and Communications Cable: Install pathways, metal and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows: 1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 50 feet. 2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. 3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of pathway

unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.

T. Install pathway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

U. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all pathways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces.



2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

V. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings.

W. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMCconduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet.

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.


5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

X. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

Y. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

Z. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

AA. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

BB. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

CC. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

DD. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

EE. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.



3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench

bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of

conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout the length of elbow.

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase

coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the coupling.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits, but a minimum of 6 inches below grade. Align planks along centerline of conduit.

7. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, minimum 36 inches below grade.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.

F. Field cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.



3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electronic Safety and Security Pathways and Cabling."

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating

recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRONIC Valdez Elementary SAFETY AND SECURITY PATHWAYS AND CABLING SSG MEP, Inc. Project # 13043.00 Section 28 05 44 - 1

SECTION 28 05 44

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PATHWAYS AND CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Sleeves for pathway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-

resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.

2. penetration firestopping installed in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.



B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For sealants, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:





B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.




F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: 1. Material: Galvanized-steel sheet. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and with no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).


A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. CALPICO, Inc. c. Metraflex Company (The). d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. Proco Products, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in

concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Presealed Systems.



2.4 GROUT



C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.



A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below. 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal

surfaces that are not fire rated. 2. Sealant shall have VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,

Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 3. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department

of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based, liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION




C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls: 1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."


2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm annular clear space between sleeve and

pathway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used.


5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.



D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: 1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved

opening. 2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual pathways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pathway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at pathway entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pathway or cable material and size. Position pathway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pathway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.






END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS INSTRUSION DETECTION Valdez Elementary SSG MEP, Inc. Project No. 13043.00 Section 28 16 00 - 1

SECTION 28 16 00

INTRUSION DETECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Intrusion detection with communication links to perform monitoring, alarm, and control

functions. 2. Integration of other electronic and electrical systems and equipment.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for cabling

between master control units and field-mounted devices and control units. 2. Section 281643 "Perimeter Security Systems" for outdoor intrusion detection devices,

including lighting and communications associated with chain-link fence gates. 3. Section 282300 "Video Surveillance" for CCTV cameras that are used as devices for video

motion detection.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCTV: Closed-circuit television.

B. DoTS: Department of Technology Services


D. PIR: Passive infrared.

E. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

F. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.

G. Control Unit: System component that monitors inputs and controls outputs through various circuits.

H. Master Control Unit: System component that accepts inputs from other control units and may also perform control-unit functions. The unit has limited capacity for the number of protected zones and is installed at an unattended location or at a location where it is not the attendant's primary function to monitor the security system.

I. Monitoring Station: Facility that receives signals and has personnel in attendance at all times to respond to signals. A central station is a monitoring station that is listed.



J. Protected Zone: A protected premises or an area within a protected premises that is provided with means to prevent an unwanted event.

K. Standard Intruder: A person who weighs 100 lb (45 kg) or less and whose height is 60 inches (1525 mm) or less; dressed in a long-sleeved shirt, slacks, and shoes.

L. Standard-Intruder Movement: Any movement, such as walking, running, crawling, rolling, or jumping, of a "standard intruder" in a protected zone.

M. Systems Integration: The bringing together of components of several systems containing interacting components to achieve indicated functional operation of combined systems.

N. Zone. A defined area within protected premises. It is a space or area for which an intrusion must be detected and uniquely identified. The sensor or group of sensors must then be assigned to perform the detection, and any interface equipment between sensors and communication must link to master control unit.


A. Product Data: Components for sensing, detecting, systems integration, and control, including dimensions and data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail assemblies of standard components that are custom assembled for specific application on this Project. 1. Functional Block Diagram: Show single-line interconnections between components

including interconnections between components specified in this Section and those furnished under other Sections. Indicate methods used to achieve systems integration. Indicate control, signal, and data communication paths and identify control interface devices and media to be used. Describe characteristics of network and other data communication lines. a. Indicate methods used to achieve systems integration. b. Indicate control, signal, and data communication paths and identify PLCs, networks,

control interface devices, and media to be used. c. Describe characteristics of network and other data communication lines. d. Describe methods used to protect against power outages and transient voltages

including types and ratings of isolation and surge suppression devices used in data, communication, signal, control, and ac and dc power circuits.

2. Raceway Riser Diagrams: Detail raceway runs required for intrusion detection. Include designation of devices connected by raceway, raceway type and size, and type and size of wire and cable fill for each raceway run.

3. UPS: Sizing calculations. 4. Site and Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet and device locations, routing of raceways, and

cables inside and outside the building 5. Master Control-Unit Console Layout: Show required artwork and device identification. 6. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming. 7. System Wiring Diagrams: Include system diagrams unique to Project. Show connections

for all devices, components, and auxiliary equipment. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified.

8. Details of surge-protection devices and their installation. 9. Sensor detection patterns and adjustment ranges.

C. Equipment and System Operation Description: Include method of operation and supervision of each component and each type of circuit. Show sequence of operations for manually and automatically initiated system or equipment inputs. Description must cover this specific Project; manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are unacceptable.




A. Qualification Data: For Installer, intrusion detection systems integrator and testing agency.


C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

D. Other Information Submittals: 1. Test Plan and Schedule: Test plan defining all tests required to ensure that system meets

technical, operational, and performance specifications within 60 days of date of Contract award.

2. Examination reports documenting inspections of substrates, areas, and conditions. 3. Anchor inspection reports documenting inspections of built-in and cast-in anchors.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For intrusion detection system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Data for each type of product, including features and operating sequences, both automatic

and manual. 2. Master control-unit hardware and software data.


A. Installer Qualifications: 1. An employer of workers, at least one of whom is a technician certified by the National

Burglar & Fire Alarm Association. 2. Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units

required for this Project.

B. Intrusion Detection Systems Integrator Qualifications: An experienced intrusion detection equipment supplier and Installer who has completed systems integration work for installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.


E. Control Units, Devices, and Communications with Monitoring Station: Listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency for compliance with SIA CP-01.

F. FM Global Compliance: FM-Approved and -labeled intrusion detection devices and equipment.

G. Comply with NFPA 70.




A. Environmental Conditions: Capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability:

1. Altitude: Sea level to 5280 feet. 2. Master Control Unit: Rated for continuous operation in an ambient of 60 to 85 deg F (16 to

29 deg C) and a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent, noncondensing. 3. Interior, Controlled Environment: System components, except master control unit, installed

in temperature-controlled]interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambients of 36 to 122 deg F (2 to 50 deg Cdry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.

4. Interior, Uncontrolled Environment: System components installed in non-temperature-controlled interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambients of 0 to 122 deg F (minus 18 to plus 50 deg C)] <Insert temperature range> dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.

5. Exterior Environment: System components installed in locations exposed to weather shall be rated for continuous operation in ambients of minus 30 to plus 122 deg F (minus 34 to plus 50 deg C dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, condensing. Comply with UL 294 and UL 639 for outdoor-use equipment. Rate for continuous operation when exposed to rain as specified in NEMA 250, winds up to 85 mph (137 km/h) and snow cover up to 24 inches (610 mm) thick.

6. Hazardous Environment: System components located in areas where fire or explosion hazards may exist because of flammable gases or vapors, flammable liquids, combustible dust, or ignitable fibers or flyings shall be rated, listed, and installed according to NFPA 70.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of intrusion detection devices and equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENT REQUIREMENTS

A. Compatibility: Detection devices and their communication features, connecting wiring, and master control unit shall be selected and configured with accessories for full compatibility with the following equipment: 1. All existing low voltage systems to remain.. 2. Door hardware specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." 3. Door hardware specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)." 4. Elevators specified in Section 142100 "Electric Traction Elevators." 5. Lighting controls specified in Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices." 6. Intercom and program systems specified in Section 275123 "Intercommunications and

Program Systems." 7. Access control system specified in Section 281300 "Access Control." 8. Fire alarm system specified in Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System." 9. Perimeter security system specified in Section 281643 "Perimeter Security Systems." 10. Video surveillance system specified in Section 282300 "Video Surveillance."



B. Surge Protection: Protect components from voltage surges originating external to equipment housing and entering through power, communication, signal, control, or sensing leads. Include surge protection for external wiring of each conductor entry connection to components. 1. Minimum Protection for Power Lines 120 V and More: Auxiliary panel suppressors

complying with requirements in Section 264313 "Transient-Voltage Suppression for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits."

2. Minimum Protection for Communication, Signal, Control, and Low-Voltage Power Lines: Listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency for compliance with NFPA 731.

C. Intrusion Detection Units: Listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency for compliance with UL 639.

D. Interference Protection: Components shall be unaffected by radiated RFI and electrical induction of 15 V/m over a frequency range of 10 to 10,000 MHz and conducted interference signals up to 0.25-V rms injected into power supply lines at 10 to 10,000 MHz.

E. Tamper Protection: Tamper switches on detection devices, control units, annunciators, pull boxes, junction boxes, cabinets, and other system components shall initiate a tamper-alarm signal when unit is opened or partially disassembled and when entering conductors are cut or disconnected. Master control-unit alarm display shall identify tamper alarms and indicate locations.

F. Self-Testing Devices: Automatically test themselves periodically, but not less than once per hour, to verify normal device functioning and alarm initiation capability. Devices transmit test failure to master control unit.

G. Antimasking Devices: Automatically check operation continuously or at intervals of a minute or less, and use signal-processing logic to detect blocking, masking, jamming, tampering, or other operational dysfunction. Devices transmit detection of operational dysfunction to master control unit as an alarm signal.

H. Addressable Devices: Transmitter and receivers shall communicate unique device identification and status reports to master control unit.

I. Remote-Controlled Devices: Individually and remotely adjustable for sensitivity and individually monitored at master control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition.

2.2 ENCLOSURES

A. Interior Sensors: Enclosures that protect against dust, falling dirt, and dripping noncorrosive liquids.

B. Interior Electronics: NEMA 250, Type 12.

C. Exterior Electronics: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.

D. Corrosion Resistant: NEMA 250, Type 4X, PVC.

E. Screw Covers: Where enclosures are readily accessible, secure with security fasteners of type appropriate for enclosure.



2.3 SECURE AND ACCESS DEVICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 1. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. 2. Corby Industries, Inc. 3. Crow Electronic Engineering, Inc. 4. DAQ Electronics, Inc. 5. Digital Security Controls Ltd.; a business unit of Tyco Safety Products. 6. Edwards Signaling & Security Systems; part of GE Security. 7. Honeywell International Inc.; Honeywell Security. 8. Visonic Inc. 9. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

B. Keypad and Display Module: Arranged for entering and executing commands for system-status changes and for displaying system-status and command-related data.

C. Key-Operated Switch: Change protected zone between secure and access conditions.

2.4 DOOR AND WINDOW SWITCHES


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Aleph America Corporation. 2. General Electric Company; GE Security, Inc. 3. George Risk Industries. 4. Honeywell International Inc.; Honeywell Security. 5. Honeywell International Inc.; Honeywell Video Systems. 6. Optex Inc. 7. Potter Electric Signal, LLC. 8. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

C. Description: Balanced-magnetic switch, complying with UL 634, installed on frame with integral overcurrent device to limit current to 80 percent of switch capacity. Bias magnet and minimum of [two] [three] encapsulated reed switches shall resist compromise from introduction of foreign magnetic fields.

D. Flush-Mounted Switches: Unobtrusive and flush with surface of door and window frame.

E. Overhead Door Switch: Balanced-magnetic type, listed for outdoor locations, and having door-mounted magnet and floor-mounted switch unit.

F. Remote Test: Simulate movement of actuating magnet from master control unit.



2.5 PIR SENSORS


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Aleph America Corporation. 2. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. 3. Crow Electronic Engineering, Inc. 4. Digital Security Controls Ltd.; a business unit of Tyco Safety Products. 5. General Electric Company; GE Security, Inc. 6. Honeywell International Inc.; Honeywell Security. 7. Visonic Inc. 8. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

C. Listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency for compliance with SIA PIR-01.

D. Description: Sensors detect intrusion by monitoring infrared wavelengths emitted from a human body within their protected zone and by being insensitive to general thermal variations. 1. Wall-Mounted Unit Maximum Detection Range: 125 percent of indicated distance for

individual units and not less than 50 feet (15 m).[ Provide adjustable coverage pattern as indicated.]

2. Ceiling-Mounted Unit Spot-Detection Pattern: Full 360-degree conical. 3. Ceiling-Mounted Unit Pattern Size: 84-inch (2135-mm) diameter at floor level for units

mounted 96 inches (2440 mm) above floor; 18-foot (5.5-m) diameter at floor level for units mounted 25 feet (7.6 m) above floor.

E. Device Performance: 1. Sensitivity: Adjustable pattern coverage to detect a change in temperature of 2 deg F

(1 deg C) or less, and standard-intruder movement within sensor's detection patterns at any speed between 0.3 to 7.5 fps (0.09 to 2.3 m/s) across two adjacent segments of detector's field of view.

2. Test Indicator: LED test indicator that is not visible during normal operation. When visible, indicator shall light when sensor detects an intruder. Locate test enabling switch under sensor housing cover.

3. Remote Test: When initiated by master control unit, start a test sequence for each detector element that simulates standard-intruder movement within sensor's detection patterns, causing an alarm.

2.6 MICROWAVE INTRUSION DETECTORS (INTERIOR)


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. 2. Crow Electronic Engineering, Inc. 3. Digital Security Controls Ltd.; a business unit of Tyco Safety Products. 4. General Electric Company; GE Security, Inc.



5. Visonic Inc. 6. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

C. Device Performance: Microwave transmitter establishes an electromagnetic field in an adjustable detection pattern and detects intrusion by monitoring changes in that pattern. 1. Sensitivity: Adjustable, able to detect standard-intruder movement within sensor's detection

pattern at any speed between 0.3 to 7.5 fps (0.09 to 2.3 m/s). Sensor sensitivity adjustments shall be accessible only when sensor housing is removed, and sensors shall comply with 47 CFR 15.

2. Activation Indicator: LED indicator shall not be visible during normal operation. Indicator shall light when sensor detects a standard intruder. Locate test-enabling switch under sensor housing cover.


2.7 ACOUSTIC-TYPE, GLASS-BREAK SENSORS


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Crow Electronic Engineering, Inc. 2. Digital Security Controls Ltd.; a business unit of Tyco Safety Products. 3. General Electric Company; GE Security, Inc. 4. Honeywell International Inc.; Honeywell Security. 5. International Electronics, Inc. 6. Potter Electric Signal, LLC. 7. Visonic Inc. 8. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

C. Listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency for compliance with SIA GB-01.

D. Device Performance: Detect unique, airborne acoustic energy spectrum caused by breaking glass. 1. Sensor Element: Microprocessor-based, digital device to detect breakage of plate, laminate,

tempered, and wired glass while rejecting common causes of false alarms. Detection pattern shall be at least a 20-foot (6-m) range.

2. Hookup Cable: Factory installed, not less than 72 inches (1830 mm). 3. Activation Indicator: LED on sensor housing that lights when responding to vibrations,

remaining on until manually reset at sensor control unit[ or at master control unit]. 4. Control Unit: Integral with sensor housing or in a separate assembly, locally adjustable by

control under housing cover. 5. Glass-Break Simulator: A device to induce frequencies into protected glass pane that

simulate breaking glass without causing damage to glass.

2.8 PIEZOELECTRIC-TYPE, GLASS-BREAK SENSORS




B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: 1. General Electric Company; GE Security, Inc. 2. Honeywell International Inc.; Honeywell Security. 3. Potter Electric Signal, LLC. 4. Visonic Inc. 5. <Insert manufacturer's name>.


D. Device Performance: Detect unique, high-frequency vibrations caused by breaking glass. 1. Sensor Element: Piezoelectric crystals in a housing designed to mount directly to glass

surface with adhesive provided by element manufacturer. Circular detection pattern, with at least a 60-inch (1525-mm) radius on a continuous glass pane. Sensor element shall not be larger than 4 sq. in. (25.80 sq. cm).

2. Hookup Cable: Factory installed, not less than 72 inches (1830 mm). 3. Activation Indicator: LED on sensor housing that lights when responding to vibrations,

remaining on until manually reset at sensor control unit[ or at master control unit]. 4. Control Unit: Integral with sensor housing or in a separate assembly, locally adjustable by

control under housing cover. 5. Glass-Break Simulator: A device to induce frequencies into protected glass pane that


2.9 VIBRATION SENSORS


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: 1. General Electric Company; GE Security, Inc. 2. Honeywell International Inc.; Honeywell Security. 3. Potter Electric Signal, LLC. 4. <Insert manufacturer's name>.


D. Description: A sensor control unit and piezoelectric crystal sensor elements that are designed to be rigidly mounted to structure being protected.

E. Device Performance: Detects high-frequency vibrations generated by use of such tools as oxyacetylene torches, oxygen lances, high-speed drills and saws, and explosives that penetrate a structure while not responding to any other mechanical vibration. 1. Circular detection pattern, with at least a 72-inch (1830-mm) radius on protected structure. 2. Hookup Cable: Factory installed, not less than 72 inches (1830 mm). 3. Control Unit: Integral with sensor housing or in a separate assembly, locally adjustable by

control under housing cover. 4. Glass-Break Simulator: A device to induce frequencies to protected glass pane that




2.10 PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Aleph America Corporation. 2. General Electric Company; GE Security, Inc. 3. Honeywell International Inc.; Honeywell Security. 4. Optex Inc. 5. Potter Electric Signal, LLC. 6. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

C. Device Performance: Detect an interruption of a pulsed, infrared, light beam that links transmitter and receiver.

1. Sensitivity: Detect standard-intruder movement within sensor's detection patterns at any speed of less than 7.5 fps (2.3 m/s) though the beam. Allow installation of multiple sensors within same protected zone that will not interfere with each other.

2. Activation Indicator: LED indicator shall not be visible during normal operation. Indicator shall light when sensor detects a standard intruder. Locate test enabling switch under sensor housing cover.


2.11 MICROWAVE-PIR DUAL-TECHNOLOGY SENSORS


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Aleph America Corporation. 2. General Electric Company; GE Security, Inc. 3. Honeywell International Inc.; Honeywell Security. 4. Visonic Inc. 5. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

C. Description: Single unit combining a sensor that detects changes in microwave signals and a PIR sensor that detects changes in ambient level of infrared emissions caused by standard-intruder movement within detection pattern.

D. Listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency for compliance with SIA PIR-01.

E. Device Performance: An alarm is transmitted when either sensor detects a standard intruder within a period of three to eight seconds from when the other sensor detects a standard intruder. 1. Minimum Detection Pattern: A room 20 by 30 feet (6 by 9 m). 2. PIR Sensor Sensitivity: Adjustable pattern coverage to detect a change in temperature of 2

deg F (1 deg C) or less, and standard-intruder movement within sensor's detection patterns



at any speed between 0.3 to 7.5 fps (0.09 to 2.3 m/s) across two adjacent segments of detector's field of view.

3. Microwave Sensor Sensitivity: Adjustable, able to detect standard-intruder movement within sensor's detection pattern at any speed between 0.3 to 7.5 fps (0.09 to 2.3 m/s). Sensor sensitivity adjustments shall be accessible only when sensor housing is removed, and sensors shall comply with 47 CFR 15.

4. Activation Indicator: LED indicator shall not be visible during normal operation. Indicator shall light when sensor detects a standard intruder. Locate test enabling switch under sensor housing cover.


2.12 DURESS-ALARM SWITCHES


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: 1. General Electric Company; GE Security, Inc. 2. Honeywell International Inc.; Honeywell Security. 3. Visonic Inc. 4. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

C. Description: A switch with a shroud over the activating lever that allows an individual to covertly send a duress signal to master control unit, with no visible or audible indication when activated. Switch shall lock in activated position until reset with a key. 1. Minimum Switch Rating: 50,000 operations. 2. Foot Rail: Foot activated, floor mounting. 3. Push Button: Finger activated, suitable for mounting on horizontal or vertical surface.

2.13 VIDEO MOTION SENSORS (INTERIOR)


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Aleph America Corporation. 2. General Electric Company; GE Security, Inc. 3. Visonic Inc. 4. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

C. Device Performance: Detect changes in video signal within a user-defined protected zone. Provide an alarm output for each video input.

1. Detect movement within protected zone of standard intruders wearing clothing with a reflectivity that differs from that of background scene by a factor of 2. Reject all other changes in video signal.



2. Modular design that allows for expansion or modification of number of inputs. 3. Controls:

a. Number of detection zones. b. Size of detection zones. c. Sensitivity of detection of each protected zone.

4. Mounting: Standard 19-inch (480-mm) rack as described in EIA/ECA 310-E.

2.14 MASTER CONTROL UNIT


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. 2. DAQ Electronics, Inc. 3. Digital Security Controls, Inc.; a business unit of Tyco Safety Products. 4. General Electric Company; GE Security, Inc. 5. Honeywell International Inc.; Honeywell Security. 6. Honeywell International Inc.; Honeywell Video Systems. 7. Visonic Inc. 8. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

C. Description: Supervise sensors and detection subsystems and their connecting communication links, status control (secure or access) of sensors and detector subsystems, activation of alarms and supervisory and trouble signals, and other indicated functions. 1. System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasable programmable

read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies.

2. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and printer. 3. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status. 4. Control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment in response to an alarm.

D. Construction: [Freestanding equipment rack] [Desk-mounted console], modular, with separate and independent alarm and supervisory system modules. [Alarm-initiating protected zone boards shall be plug-in cards. ]Arrangements that require removal of field wiring for module replacement are unacceptable.

E. Comply with [UL 609] [UL 1023] [UL 1076].

F. Console Controls and Displays: Arranged for interface between human operator at master control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu. 1. Annunciator and Display: LCD, [one] [two] [three] line(s) of [40] [80] characters, minimum. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control

commands. 3. Control-Unit Network: Automatic communication of alarm, status changes, commands, and

other communications required for system operation. Communication shall return to normal after partial or total network interruption such as power loss or transient event. Total or partial signaling network failures shall identify the failure and record the failure at the annunciator display and at the system printer.

4. Field Device Network: Communicate between the control unit and field devices of the system. Communications shall consist of alarm, network status, and status and control of



field-mounted processors. Each field-mounted device shall be interrogated during each interrogation cycle.

5. Operator Controls: Manual switches and push-to-test buttons that do not require a key to operate. Prevent resetting of alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals while alarm or trouble condition persists. Include the following: a. Acknowledge alarm. b. Silence alarm. c. System reset. d. LED test. e. <Insert operator functions>.

6. Timing Unit: Solid state, programmable, 365 days. 7. Confirmation: Relays, contactors, and other control devices shall have auxiliary contacts

that provide confirmation signals to system for their on or off status. Software shall interpret such signals, display equipment status, and initiate failure signals.

8. Alarm Indication: Audible signal sounds and an LED lights at master control unit identifying the [protected zone] [addressable detector] originating the alarm.[ Annunciator panel displays a common alarm light and sounds an audible tone.]

9. Alarm Indication: Audible signal sounds and a plain-language identification of the [protected zone] [addressable detector] originating the alarm appears on [LED] [or] [LCD] display at master control unit.[ Annunciator panel displays a common alarm light and sounds an audible tone.]

10. Alarm Indication: Audible signal sounds and a plain-language identification of the [protected zone] [addressable detector] originating the alarm appears on [LED] [LCD] [or] [cathode-ray-tube] display at master control unit.[ Annunciator panel alarm light and audible tone identify protected zone signaling an alarm.]

11. Alarm activation sounds a [bell] [siren] [strobe] [bell or siren and strobe].

G. Protected Zones: Quantity of alarm and supervisory zones as indicated, with capacity for expanding number of protected zones by a minimum of [25] <Insert number> percent.

H. Power Supply Circuits: Master control units shall provide power for remote power-consuming detection devices. Circuit capacity shall be adequate for at least a [25] <Insert number> percent increase in load.

I. UPS: Comply with Section 263353 "Static Uninterruptible Power Supply." UPS shall be sized to provide a minimum of six hours of master control-unit operation.

J. Cabinet: Lockable, steel enclosure arranged so operations required for testing, normal operation, and maintenance are performed from front of enclosure. If more than a single cabinet is required to form a complete control unit, provide exactly matching modular enclosures. Accommodate all components and allow ample gutter space for field wiring. Identify each enclosure by an engraved, laminated, phenolic-resin nameplate. Lettering on enclosure nameplate shall not be less than 1 inch (25 mm) high. Identify, with permanent labels, individual components and modules within cabinets.

K. Transmission to Monitoring Station: A communications device to automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to the monitoring station, operating over a standard voice grade telephone leased line. Comply with UL 1635.

L. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events. Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble) and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications. Also print system reset event, including same information for device, location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printing of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events.



2.15 AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM DEVICES


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Alarm Controls Corporation. 2. Cooper Wheelock. 3. Edwards Signaling & Security Systems; part of GE Security. 4. Honeywell International Inc.; Honeywell Security. 5. Potter Electric Signal, LLC. 6. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

C. Bell: 10 inches (254 mm) in diameter, rated to produce a minimum sound output of 84 dB at 10 feet (3 m) from master control unit. 1. Enclosure: Weather-resistant steel box equipped with tamper switches on cover and on

back of box.

D. Klaxon Weatherproof Motor-Driven Hooter: UL listed, rated to produce a minimum sound output of 120 dB at 3 feet (1 m), plus or minus 3 dB, at a frequency of 470 Hz. Rated for intermittent use: two minutes on and five minutes off. 1. Designed for use in industrial areas and in high-noise, severe-weather marine environments.

E. Siren: 30-W speaker with siren driver, rated to produce a minimum sound output of 103 dB at 10 feet (3 m) from master control unit. 1. Enclosure: Weather-resistant steel box with tamper switches on cover and on back of box.

F. Strobe: Xenon light complying with UL 1638, with a clear polycarbonate lens. 1. Light Output: 115 cd, minimum. 2. Flash Rate: 60 per minute.

2.16 SECURITY FASTENERS

A. Operable only by tools produced for use on specific type of fastener by fastener manufacturer or other licensed fabricator. Drive system type, head style, material, and protective coating as required for assembly, installation, and strength.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Acument Global Technologies North America. 2. Safety Socket LLC. 3. Tamper-Pruf Screws. 4. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

D. Drive System Types: [Pinned Torx-Plus] [pinned Torx] [or] [pinned hex (Allen)].

E. Socket Flat Countersunk Head Fasteners:



1. Heat-treated alloy steel, ASTM F 835 (ASTM F 835M). 2. Stainless steel, ASTM F 879 (ASTM F 879M), Group 1 CW.

F. Socket Button Head Fasteners: 1. Heat-treated alloy steel, ASTM F 835 (ASTM F 835M). 2. Stainless steel, ASTM F 879 (ASTM F 879M), Group 1 CW.

G. Socket Head Cap Fasteners: 1. Heat-treated alloy steel, ASTM A 574 (ASTM A 574M). 2. Stainless steel, ASTM F 837 (ASTM F 837M), Group 1 CW.

H. Protective Coatings for Heat-Treated Alloy Steel: 1. Zinc chromate, ASTM F 1135, Grade 3 or Grade 4, for exterior applications and interior

applications where indicated. 2. Zinc phosphate with oil, ASTM F 1137, Grade I, or black oxide unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of intrusion detection.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations of intrusion detection connections before intrusion detection installation.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of intrusion detection.

D. Inspect built-in and cast-in anchor installations, before installing intrusion detection, to verify that anchor installations comply with requirements. Prepare inspection reports.

1. Remove and replace anchors where inspections indicate that they do not comply with requirements. Reinspect after repairs or replacements are made.

2. Perform additional inspections to determine compliance of replaced or additional anchor installations. Prepare inspection reports.

E. For material whose orientation is critical for its performance as a ballistic barrier, verify installation orientation.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 SYSTEM INTEGRATION

A. Integrate intrusion detection system with the following systems and equipment:

1. Electronic door hardware. 2. Elevators. 3. Network lighting controls. 4. Intercommunications and program systems. 5. Public address and mass notification systems. 6. Access control. 7. Fire-alarm system.



8. Perimeter security system. 9. Video surveillance. 10. <Insert applicable systems and equipment>.

3.3 SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Comply with UL 681 and NFPA 731.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install master control unit on finished floor with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor.

1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor.

1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing perimeter security system is operational before making changes or connections.

1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building. 2. Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the Supervising Station. 3. Expand, modify, and supplement existing [control] [monitoring] equipment as necessary to

extend existing [control] [monitoring] functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system.

E. Security Fasteners: Where accessible to inmates, install intrusion detection components using security fasteners with head style appropriate for fabrication requirements, strength, and finish of adjacent materials except that a maximum of two different sets of tools shall be required to operate security fasteners for Project.[ Provide stainless-steel security fasteners in stainless-steel materials.]

3.4 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceways according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." Conceal raceway except in unfinished spaces and as indicated. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch (13 mm). Control and data transmission wiring shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems.

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceways according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems," except in accessible indoor ceiling spaces and in interior hollow gypsum board partitions where cable may be used. Conceal raceways and wiring except in unfinished spaces and as indicated. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch (13 mm). Control and data transmission wiring shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems.

C. Wiring Method: Cable, concealed in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors when possible.

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Use lacing bars and distribution spools. Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides



and back of enclosure. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with intrusion system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

E. Wires and Cables:

1. Conductors: Size as recommended in writing by system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

2. 120-V Power Wiring: Install according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" unless otherwise indicated.

3. Control and Signal Transmission Conductors: Install unshielded, twisted-pair cable unless otherwise indicated or if manufacturer recommends shielded cable, according to Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security."

4. Data and Television Signal Transmission Cables: Install according to Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security."

F. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

G. Install power supplies and other auxiliary components for detection devices at control units unless otherwise indicated or required by manufacturer. Do not install such items near devices they serve.

H. Identify components with engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for master control unit and each terminal cabinet, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with identification requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Install instructions frame in a location visible from master control unit.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. Ground the master control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to master control unit.

B. Ground system components and conductor and cable shields to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

C. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet. Isolate from power system and equipment grounding. Provide [5] <Insert value>-ohm ground. Measure, record, and report ground resistance.

D. Install grounding electrodes of type, size, location, and quantity indicated. Comply with installation requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."




A. Pretesting: After installation, align, adjust, and balance system and perform complete pretesting to determine compliance of system with requirements in the Contract Documents. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for systematic recording of acceptance test results.

1. Report of Pretesting: After pretesting is complete, provide a letter certifying that installation is complete and fully operable; include names and titles of witnesses to preliminary tests.

B. Testing Agency: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

D. Perform tests and inspections.


E. Tests and Inspections: Comply with provisions in NFPA 731, Ch. 9, "Testing and Inspections."

1. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.

2. Test Methods: Intrusion detection systems and other systems and equipment that are associated with detection and accessory equipment shall be tested according to Table "Test Methods" and Table "Test Methods of Initiating Devices."

F. Documentation: Comply with provisions in NFPA 731, Ch. 4, "Documentation."

G. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components for which tests have been satisfactorily completed.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within [12] <Insert number> months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to [three] <Insert number> visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.[ Visits for this purpose shall be in addition to any required by warranty.]

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. [Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train] [Train] Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the intrusion detection system. Comply with documentation provisions in NFPA 731, Ch. 4, "Documentation and User Training."

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS VIDEO SURVEILLANCE Valdez Elementary SSG MEP, Inc. Project No. 13034.00 Section 28 23 00 - 1

SECTION 28 23 00

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes a video surveillance system consisting of cameras, digital video recorder, data transmission wiring, and a control station with its associated equipment.

B. Video surveillance system shall be integrated with monitoring and control system specified in Section 28 16 00 "Intrusion Detection which specifies systems integration.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AGC: Automatic gain control.

B. BNC: Bayonet Neill-Concelman - type of connector.

C. B/W: Black and white.

D. CCD: Charge-coupled device.

E. FTP: File transfer protocol.

F. IP: Internet protocol.

G. LAN: Local area network.

H. MPEG: Moving picture experts group.

I. NTSC: National Television System Committee.

J. PC: Personal computer.

K. PTZ: Pan-tilt-zoom.

L. RAID: Redundant array of independent disks.

M. TCP: Transmission control protocol - connects hosts on the Internet.

N. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.

O. WAN: Wide area network.




A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensions and data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For video surveillance. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.


2. Functional Block Diagram: Show single-line interconnections between components for signal transmission and control. Show cable types and sizes.

3. Dimensioned plan and elevations of equipment racks, control panels, and consoles. Show access and workspace requirements.

4. UPS: Sizing calculations. 5. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Equipment List: Include every piece of equipment by model number, manufacturer, serial number, location, and date of original installation. Add pretesting record of each piece of equipment, listing name of person testing, date of test, set points of adjustments, name and description of the view of preset positions, description of alarms, and description of unit output responses to an alarm.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For video surveillance, cameras, camera-supporting equipment, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.


C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cameras, power supplies, infrared illuminators, monitors, videotape recorders, digital video recorders, video switches, and control-station components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended to be stored at the site for ready access.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.



B. Comply with NECA 1.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. Electronic data exchange between video surveillance system with an access-control system shall comply with SIA TVAC.


A. Environmental Conditions: Capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability:

1. Control Station: Rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of 60 to 85 deg F and a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent, noncondensing.

2. Interior, Controlled Environment: System components, except central-station control unit, installed in temperature-controlled interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of 36 to 122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing. Use NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosures.

3. Interior, Uncontrolled Environment: System components installed in non temperature-controlled interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of 0 to 122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing. Use NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosures.

4. Exterior Environment: System components installed in locations exposed to weather shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of minus 30 to plus 122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, condensing. Rate for continuous operation when exposed to rain as specified in NEMA 250, winds up to 85 mph. Use NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosures.

5. Security Environment: Camera housing for use in high-risk areas where surveillance equipment may be subject to physical violence.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of cameras, equipment related to camera operation, and control-station equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. All equipment shall meet Denver Public School (DPS) specifications and requirements. Equipment removed during demolition and designated to be reused by DPS shall be reinstalled in locations as determined by DPS.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Check raceways and other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerance, hazards to camera installation, and other conditions affecting installation.

B. Examine roughing-in for LAN, WAN, and IP network before device installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 WIRING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." B. C. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways unless otherwise indicated.

1. Except raceways are not required in accessible indoor ceiling spaces and attics. 2. Except raceways are not required in hollow gypsum board partitions. 3. Conceal raceways and wiring except in unfinished spaces.

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.

E. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and control wiring, use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

F. For LAN connection and fiber-optic and copper communication wiring, comply with Section 27 13 00 "Communications Backbone Cabling" and Section 27 15 00 "Communications Horizontal Cabling."

G. Grounding: Provide independent-signal circuit grounding recommended in writing by manufacturer.

3.3 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install cameras and infrared illuminators level and plumb.

B. Install cameras with 84-inch- minimum clear space below cameras and their mountings. Change type of mounting to achieve required clearance.

C. Set pan unit and pan-and-tilt unit stops to suit final camera position and to obtain the field of view required for camera. Connect all controls and alarms, and adjust.

D. Install power supplies and other auxiliary components at control stations unless otherwise indicated.

E. Install tamper switches on components indicated to receive tamper switches, arranged to detect unauthorized entry into system-component enclosures and mounted in self-protected, inconspicuous positions.



F. Avoid ground loops by making ground connections only at the control station. 1. For 12- and 24-V dc cameras, connect the coaxial cable shields only at the monitor end.

G. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."




C. Perform tests and inspections.


D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled, and

that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. 2. Pretesting: Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to verify

that they comply with specified requirements. Conduct tests at varying lighting levels, including day and night scenes as applicable. Prepare video-surveillance equipment for acceptance and operational testing as follows: a. Prepare equipment list described in "Informational Submittals" Article. b. Verify operation of auto-iris lenses. c. Set back-focus of fixed focal length lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate nighttime

lighting conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that produces a clear image. Adjust until image is in focus with and without the filter.

d. Set back-focus of zoom lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate nighttime lighting conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that produces a clear image. Additionally, set zoom to full wide angle and aim camera at an object 50 to 75 feet away. Adjust until image is in focus from full wide angle to full telephoto, with the filter in place.

e. Set and name all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel. f. Set sensitivity of motion detection. g. Connect and verify responses to alarms. h. Verify operation of control-station equipment.

3. Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pretesting has been successfully completed and system has been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days. Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice of test schedule.

4. Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system complies with Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test equipment for proper operation in all functional modes.

E. Video surveillance system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.




3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 24 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Tasks shall include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Check cable connections. 2. Check proper operation of cameras and lenses. Verify operation of auto-iris lenses and

adjust back-focus as needed. 3. Adjust all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel. 4. Recommend changes to cameras, lenses, and associated equipment to improve Owner's

use of video surveillance system. 5. Provide a written report of adjustments and recommendations.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean installed items using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer.

B. Clean video-surveillance-system components, including camera-housing windows, lenses, and monitor screens.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM Valdez Elementary SYSTEM SSG MEP, Inc. Project No. 13034.00 Section 28 31 11 - 1

SECTION 28 31 11

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Mechanical drawings and specifications pertaining to requirements for the following systems and devices: 1. Duct detectors in air handling units, make-up air units, and computer room air conditioning units

for unit shutdown. 2. Duct detectors for operation of fire/smoke and smoke dampers. 3. Smoke control, pressurization, and exhaust systems. 4. Ansul fire protection system.

C. Architectural drawings and specifications pertaining to locations and interconnection requirements for the following systems and devices: 1. Rollup fire and fire/smoke doors. 2. Electrical and magnetic door locks. 3. Door hold-open equipment including any integral smoke detectors provided as door hardware. 4. Elevator recall and power shut down. 5. Dumbwaiter power shut down. 6. Kitchen hood extinguishing systems.

D. Security drawings and specifications pertaining to locations and interconnection requirements for the following systems and devices: 1. Access control system affecting the exit and egress from the building. 2. Video surveillance systems. 3. Intrusion detection systems.

E. Division 28 Section “Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security”.

F. Division 28 Section “Conductors and Cables for Fire Alarm”.

G. American National Standards Institute 1. ANSI S1.4 with Amendment S1.4A: Sound Level Meters 2. ANSI S3.41: Audible Emergency Evacuation Signal 3. ANSI A117.1: Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities

H. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines

I. National Electrical Contractors Association 1. NECA 1: Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction (ANSI)

J. National Electrical Manufacturers Association 1. NEMA 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)



K. National Fire Protection Association 1. NFPA 25: Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems 2. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code 3. NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm Code 4. NFPA 90A: Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 5. NFPA 92A: Recommended Practice for Smoke Control Systems 6. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code

L. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1. UL 38: Manual Signaling Boxes for Fire Alarm Systems 2. UL 44: Thermoset Insulated Wires and Cables 3. UL 83: Thermoplastic Insulated Wires and Cables 4. UL 217: Single and Multiple Station Smoke Alarms 5. UL 268: Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Signaling 6. UL 268A: Smoke Detectors for Duct Application 7. UL 444: Communications Cables 8. UL 464: Audible Signal Appliances 9. UL 521: Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 10. UL 864: Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems 11. UL 969: Marking and Labeling Systems 12. UL 1424: Cables for Power Limited Fire Alarm Circuits 13. UL 1480: Speakers for Fire Alarm, Emergency, and Commercial and Professional Use 14. UL 1581: Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords 15. 16. UL 1711: Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 17. UL 1971: Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired

M. Denver Public Schools Design and Construction Standards.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The intent of this section is to provide specifications for fire alarm detection, notification, ancillary and accessory devices fully compatible with the existing-to-remain fire alarm system. The system supplier shall be responsible for the fire alarm system design and testing, including compliance with all applicable codes and local fire department requirements. The supplier shall be responsible for preparation of design and submittal documents for review by the Architect/Engineer and for fire department review and approval. The drawings prepared by the supplier shall be sealed by their professional engineer.

B. Section Includes: 1. Manual fire-alarm boxes. 2. System smoke detectors. 3. Heat detectors. 4. Notification appliances. 5. Firefighters' two-way telephone communication service. 6. Magnetic door holders. 7. Remote annunciator. 8. Addressable interface device.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.



B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

C. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 volts or for remote control and signaling power limited circuits.

D. NRTL: Nationally recognized testing laboratory.

E. RES: Radio Enhancement System

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The existing fire alarm and notification system shall be modified and/or expanded as required by the modifications being made under this renovation project. Existing fire alarm devices and equipment may be removed and reused as applicable. New equipment and devices shall be completely compatible with the existing fire alarm system and shall function in a similar manner to the existing devices.

B. The complete fire alarm system shall comply with the requirements of the International Building Code (IBC), International Fire Code (IFC), and NFPA 101 editions listed in the Code Review on the architectural drawings or specified herein, including any amendments, policies, and ordinances adopted by the local authority for the type of construction and occupancies identified.

C. Fire alarm systems provided under this section shall be designed and installed in compliance with NFPA 72 and be UL certified.

D. In addition to code requirements, the fire alarm system shall incorporate the following special requirements. Any of the requirements that are more stringent than the code requirements shall take precedence over the code requirements. 1. Even if not required by code, the fire alarm system shall provide full detection throughout the

building in addition to interfacing with other fire suppression, mechanical, architectural, and security systems or devices.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Submittals when reviewed the Architect/Engineer will be for general conformance to with the design concepts of the project as presented in the contract documents. By reviewing this submittal, the Architect/Engineer does not assume responsibility for the design, including but not limited to its technical accuracy or professional competency, provided by the fire alarm supplier based on the contract documents.

2. Submittals shall be approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum. c. Licensed or certified as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Product Data: Provide cut sheets for each type of product being provided.



C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits. 3. Include battery-size calculations. 4. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that each

detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

5. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

6. Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, grounding schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For smoke and heat detectors indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the supplier’s qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Drawings showing the location of each smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the detector.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 26 “Common Work Results for Electrical” include the following:

1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.

3. Record copy of site-specific software. 4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of the

same name and include the following:

a. Frequency of testing of installed components. b. Frequency of inspection of installed components. c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. d. Manufacturer's user training manuals.

5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. 6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit. 7. Copy of NFPA 25.




A. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel with a minimum NICET certification as a fire-alarm Level II technician.

B. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system equipment and components from single source or single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as, an extension of existing system.


D. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company.


A. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to all or any portion of facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated:

1. Prepare a detailed Method of Procedure (MOP) for each outage as described in Division 26

Section “Common Work Results for Electrical”. 2. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than 14 days in advance of proposed interruption of

fire-alarm service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Owner's written permission.

1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until new equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service and label existing fire-alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building.

B. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of new fire-alarm system, remove existing disconnected fire-alarm equipment and wiring.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products compatible with the existing fire alarm system.

2.2 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible



indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box. 1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, breaking-glass or plastic-

rod type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch. 3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit

lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation.

4. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.

2.3 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors: 1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Detectors shall be type compatible with the existing fire alarm system. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or

trouble) and sensitivity level to fire-alarm control unit. 4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist-

lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and power-on status.

7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit. a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unit for

15 or 20 deg F per minute. b. Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be

settable at fire-alarm control unit to operate at 135 or 155 deg F. c. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector: a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

C. Ionization Smoke Detector: 1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify

the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. 2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to

manually access the following for each detector: a. Primary status.



b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector: a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector.

4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific duct

size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

2.4 HEAT DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.

B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg Fper minute unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or

trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

C. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed temperature of 190 deg F 1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or

trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

D. Continuous Linear Heat-Detector System: 1. Detector Cable: Rated detection temperature [155 deg F] <Insert temperature>. NRTL listed

for "regular" service and a standard environment. Cable includes two steel actuator wires twisted together with spring pressure, wrapped with protective tape, and finished with PVC outer sheath. Each actuator wire is insulated with heat-sensitive material that reacts with heat to allow the cable twist pressure to short- circuit wires at the location of elevated temperature.

2. Control Unit: Two-zone or multizone unit as indicated. Provide same system power supply, supervision, and alarm features as specified for fire-alarm control unit.

3. Signals to Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Any type of local system trouble shall be reported to fire-alarm control unit as a composite "trouble" signal. Alarms on each detection zone shall be individually reported to central fire-alarm control unit as separately identified zones.

4. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.



2.5 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

B. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol.

C. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens. 1. Rated Light Output:

a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field. 2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined with

guards in place. 4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, [red] [white].

D. Voice/Tone Notification Appliances: 1. Appliances shall comply with UL 1480 and shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL. 2. High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W for use in areas with high ambient noise levels. 3. Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W for use in areas with low ambient noise levels. 4. Mounting: [Flush] [semirecessed] [or] [surface mounted and bidirectional]. 5. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment of speaker location.

2.6 FIREFIGHTERS' TWO-WAY TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION SERVICE

A. Dedicated, two-way, supervised, telephone voice communication links between fire-alarm control unit, the fire command center, and remote firefighters' telephone stations. Supervised telephone lines shall be connected to talk circuits by controls in a control module. Provide the following: 1. Common-talk type for firefighter use only. 2. Selective-talk type for use by firefighters and fire wardens. 3. Controls to disconnect phones from talk circuits if too many phones are in use simultaneously. 4. Audible Pulse and Tone Generator, and High-Intensity Lamp: When a remote telephone is

activated, it causes audible signal to sound and high-intensity lamp to flash. 5. Selector panel controls shall provide for simultaneous operation of up to six telephones in

selected zones. Indicate ground faults and open or shorted telephone lines on the panel front by individual LEDs.

6. Display: Graphic to indicate location of caller. 7. Remote Telephone Cabinet: Flush- or surface-mounted cabinet as indicated, factory-standard

red finish, with handset. a. Install one-piece handset to cabinet with vandal-resistant armored cord. Silk-

screened or engraved label on cabinet door, designating "Fire Emergency Phone." b. With "break-glass" type door access lock.



8. Remote Telephone Jack Stations: Single-gang, stainless-steel-plate mounted plug, engraved"Fire Emergency Phone."

9. Handsets: Provided by the owner.

2.7 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS

A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with matching doorplate.

1. Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf holding force. 2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. Rating: coordinate voltage and electrical requirements with the existing fire alarm control unit..

B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware.

2.8 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing. 1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1.

B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights shall match those of fire-alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge an alarm, silence a trouble signal, and test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals.

C. Graphic Map: A graphic representation of the building showing the location of every initiating device with its zone identification and the location of each fire alarm control unit associated with a special fire suppression system. Provide a legend identifying the symbol used for each device and control unit.

D. A remote annunciator associated with any dedicated fire alarm control unit serving a specific area, room, or special fire suppression system shall show a graphic representation of the area or room being protected with every initiating device represented by a red LED. A yellow LED shall be provided to indicate a system trouble. A lamp test function will be provided on the annunciator to test all LED’s.

2.9 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

2.10 DEVICE GUARDS

A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, or other device requiring protection. 1. Factory fabricated and furnished by manufacturer of device. 2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.



2.11 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Comtran Corporation. 2. Draka Cableteq USA. 3. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. 4. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corp. 5. West Penn Wire; a brand of Belden Inc.

B. General Wire and Cable Requirements: NRTL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760.

C. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, not less than size as recommended by system manufacturer.

D. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation. 1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum. 2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum. 3. Multiconductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70, Type MC, copper conductors, Type TFN/THHN

conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with outer jacket with red identifier stripe, NTRL listed for fire alarm and cable tray installation, plenum rated, and complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : 1. Brady Corporation. 2. HellermannTyton. 3. Kroy LLC. 4. PANDUIT CORP.

B. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

C. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install fire-alarm control unit on finished floor with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches ) above the finished floor.

C. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor.

D. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making changes or connections.



1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building. 2. Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising station. 3. Expand, modify, and supplement existing [control] [and] [monitoring] equipment as necessary

to extend existing [control] [and] [monitoring] functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system.

E. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing: 1. Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices"

Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing. 2. Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices"

Chapter, for heat-detector spacing. 3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet . 4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high ceiling

areas shall be determined according to either Annex A or Annex B in NFPA 72. 5. HVAC: The minimum separation of detectors from air-supply diffusers or return-air openings

shall be [3 feet][determined by air velocity and the throw of the diffuser]. Coordinate with the equipment being supplied by the mechanical contrator.

6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than [12] inches from any part of a lighting fixture.

F. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct.

G. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler rating and location.

H. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.

I. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Comply with NFPA 72 and ADA requirements. Install bells, speakers, and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.

J. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Comply with NFPA 72 and ADA requirements. Devices may be mounted on or adjacent to wall mounted audible devices.

K. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

L. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

M. Generator Rooms or Enclosures: Install a minimum of one smoke and one flame detector in each generator room. Additional detector pairs may be added based on the area of the room.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system. 1. Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm system in this Section

before making connections.



B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled. 1. Smoke dampers in air ducts. 2. Elevator recall system and components.

3. Emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 4. Valve supervisory switches. 5. Low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe or pre-action sprinkler system. 6. Elevator shunt trip breaker. 7. Fire-pump power failure including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition. 8. Fire-pump engine control panel. 9. Non-addressable smoke and heat detection devices.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." for installation of conduits and wireways.

B. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.


A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." for installation of supports for pathways, conductors and cables.

3.5 FIRE ALARM WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 72.

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." 1. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system shall

be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable.

2. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables may be installed in the same cable or raceway as signaling line circuits if permitted by the manufacturer.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

D. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.



E. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and another for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.

F. Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum one-hour-rated wall, so the loss of one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signals from other floors or zones.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction .


C. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter.

b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.



E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


END OF SECTION


SECTION 31 10 00

SITE CLEARING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Removing existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants, grass, and other vegetation. 2. Clearing and grubbing. 3. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 4. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 5. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities. 6. Removing existing fill.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading. 2. Division 31 Section “Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control” for storm water erosion and sediment mitigation.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials.

B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated.

1.03 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain on Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

B. Record drawings, identifying and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. Information required may also be included in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents."


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary SITE CLEARING OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 3110 00 - 1


A. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as directed by Owner’s Representative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with requirements, which may also be included in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing indicated removal and alteration work on property adjoining Owner’s property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract. Authority and permits for performing indicated removal and alteration work on adjacent rights-of-way shall be obtained by Contractor.

1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed in writing by Owner’s Representative.

C. Protect improvements on adjacent and Owner’s property.

D. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated.

E. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing.

F. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place.

G. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to parties having jurisdiction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Section "Earth Moving," (PART 2 – PRODUCTS).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks, survey control points, monuments, property line pins and other reference points from disturbance during construction. If disturbed or destroyed, restore or replace at no cost to Owner.



B. Provide erosion control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust from leaving project site.

C. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.

D. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore or replace damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

3.02 TREE PROTECTION

A. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain before starting site clearing. Remove fence when construction is complete.

1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area. 2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area. 3. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash.

B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Where excavation for new construction is required within drip line of trees, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible.

1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and

covered with soil. 3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter with emulsified asphalt

or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. 4. Cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying and backfill with soil as

soon as possible.

D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Owner’s Representative.

1. Employ a qualified arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, to submit details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs.

2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by the qualified arborist.

3.03 UTILITIES

A. Contractor will locate, identify, arrange for disconnect and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed before site clearing.

1. Verify that utilities indicated as abandoned have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing.

2. Arrange with utility companies having jurisdiction to shut off indicated utilities.

B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:



1. Notify Owner’s Representative not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s Representative’s written permission.

C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.

D. Removal of underground utilities may also be included in Division 2 Sections covering site utilities. Removal of underground utilities may also be included in Division 15 Mechanical or Division 16 Electrical Sections.

E. After removal of underground utilities, as indicated, properly cap and/or plug existing lines to remain in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction.

3.04 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots.

1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner

where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 3. Grind stumps and completely remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth

of 18 inches below exposed subgrade. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees. 5. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earth moving is indicated.

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches (200 mm), and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.05 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered or as determined by Geotechnical Engineer in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials.

1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches unless authorized by Owner’s Representative.

2. Do not stockpile topsoil within drip line of remaining trees. 3. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal. 4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading a thicker layer of topsoil.


100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014 3.06 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above and below grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction.

B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated on plans.

1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.

2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion.

C. Remove existing fill. Refer to Geotechnical Investigation and/or drawings for information regarding suitability for re-use and estimates of location/extent of existing fill.

3.07 DISPOSAL

A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 31 20 00

EARTH MOVING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Additional information concerning earth moving may be found on the civil drawings, in the project geotechnical report and City and County of Denver construction standards. In case of conflict between the drawings, jurisdictional criteria and the information specified herein, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

B. Additional information concerning earth moving may be found in the geotechnical investigation report by HP Geotech dated January 27, 2014. All requirements of this report shall be followed. The information shown in this report is for information and it shall be the contractors responsibility to field verify conditions indicated.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Preparing and grading subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns and

grasses, and exterior plants. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures including overexcavation of existing

unsatisfactory on-site soil materials and replacement with structural fill. 3. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade. 4. Subbase and base course for asphalt or concrete paving. 5. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling

topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities. 2. Division 33 Section "Subdrainage " for drainage of foundations, and landscaped areas. 3. Division 22 Section “Trenching” for excavating and backfilling of utilities. 4. Division 31 Section “Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control” for erosion and

sedimentation control measures.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: soil material used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial backfill: backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to

support sides of pipe. 2. Final backfill: backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base course: course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding course: course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D. Borrow soil: satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill approved by geotechnical engineer.

E. Drainage course: course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water.

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary EARTH MOVING OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 3120 00 - 1


F. Excavation: removal of all material of whatever character required for the work encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated, including boulders. See section 3.4 for definition of unclassified and classified excavation.

G. Authorized additional excavation: excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed or approved by owners representative and the testing and inspections agency to correct unsatisfactory conditions. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to contract provisions for changes in the work.

H. Bulk excavation: excavation more than 10 feet in width and more than 30 feet in length.

I. Unauthorized excavation: excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by owners representative. Unauthorized excavation including disposition of overexcavated materials and other work resulting from slides, cave-ins, swelling, upheaval, or remedial work, as well as remedial work directed by owners representative, shall be without additional compensation.

J. Fill: fill is all material placed to raise the grade of the site or to backfill excavation, upon which the geotechnical engineer has made sufficient tests and observations to enable him to issue a written statement that, in his opinion; the fill has been placed and compacted in accordance with the requirements of these specifications.

K. Structural fill: select granular material for use below floor slabs and to 5’-0” beyond building lines. On-site material may be used if approved by the geotechnical engineer.

L. Underslab gravel: imported class 6 road base per colorado department of transportation standard specifications for road and bridge construction (1999) or material approved by geotechnical engineer.

M. Rock excavation: rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. for footing, trench, and pit excavation which in the geotechnical engineer’s opinion cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted: 1. Excavation of footings, trenches, and pits: late-model, track-mounted hydraulic

excavator; equipped with a 42-inch wide, maximum, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 138-hp flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 28,090 lbf and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,650 lbf measured according to SAE J-1179.

2. Bulk excavation: late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 210-hp flywheel power and developing a minimum of 48,510-lbf breakout force with a general-purpose bare bucket; measured according to SAE J-732.

N. Structures: buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

O. Subbase course: course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

P. Subgrade: surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.



Q. Utilities: include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Material Test Reports: Provided by Owner from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site or borrow soil material proposed

for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site or borrow soil

material proposed for fill and backfill.

B. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earth moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins.


A. Comply with applicable codes, ordinances, regulations, references and standards in effect at bid date: 1. Uniform Building Code (UBC) or International Building Code (IBC) per jurisdiction criteria. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (test methods as specified hereafter)(ASTM). 3. State and local codes.

B. In case of conflict between the above codes, regulations, references and standards and these specifications, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

C. Testing Agency: The Owner will employ a qualified independent Geotechnical testing agency. Contractor shall furnish testing agency access to work, facilities and incidental labor required for testing. Notify the testing and inspection agency not less than 48 hours in advance of all work requiring testing.

D. Geotechnical Engineer: All materials and operations under this section of the specifications shall be executed under the supervision of a Geotechnical Engineer who will place qualified personnel on the site during earth moving operations as necessary.

The Geotechnical Engineer shall approve all foundation excavations and give written approval of the completed foundations to the Owner’s Representative at the following times: 1. When excavations are first open. 2. Just prior to placing of concrete, shall test and control the fill compaction, approve the

materials and method of placing and compacting and give written approval to the Owner’s Representative that all bearing surfaces and fill requirements have been inspected.

3. The Contractor shall be responsible to notify the Geotechnical Engineer when tests are to be made.

E. For approval of imported or on-site fill material, notify the Geotechnical Engineer at least four (4) working days in advance of intention to import material, designate the proposed borrow area and permit the Geotechnical Engineer to sample as necessary from the borrow area for the purpose of making acceptance tests to prove the quality of the material. The Geotechnical Engineer report on the acceptability shall be final and binding.

F. Reference Standards:

Compaction Standard: Standard Proctor Density ASTM D698.



G. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as directed by Owner’s Representative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with requirements, which may also be included in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

H. Overlot grading contractor to provide as-built survey of grading ensure compliance with grading plan. Storm water management to be turned over to site contractor with signed off agreement on site grading.


A. Existing Utilities: Locations, sizes and depths or invert elevations of existing utilities as shown on the drawings are based on information provided by others, and believed to be correct, but may not be absolutely so. Such information is therefore presented only as approximations, and should be verified prior to construction. Protect from damage any sewer, water, gas, electric, phone or other pipe lines or conduits uncovered during the work until they have been examined by the Owner’s Representative. If such lines are found to be abandoned and not in use, remove affected sections without extra cost. If such lines are found to be in use, carefully protect and carry on work around them. If Owner’ Representative deems it advisable to move such lines, Owner will pay cost of moving. Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Owner’s Representative and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. 1. Contact utility-locator service for area where project is located before excavating. 2. Notify Owner’s Representative not less than two days in advance of proposed utility

interruptions. 3. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s Representative's written

permission.

B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.

C. Remove all existing fill deemed by Geotechnical Engineer to be unsatisfactorily placed.

D. Existing Contours and Elevations: Contours and spot elevations of existing ground elevations at the site, and approximate elevations of finish grade cuts, fills, and excavations for the Work are shown on Drawings. Contours and elevations for existing ground lines are based on information provided by others, and are believed to be correct, but may not be absolutely so. Existing contours and elevations should therefore be considered approximate, and should be verified at the site prior to construction.

E. Verification of Existing Conditions: Visit the site prior to submission of bids. Verify existing conditions, elevations, and contours. In the event of discrepancies between existing conditions and those indicated on the Contract Documents or survey, contact the Owner’s Representative for clarification.

F. Existing Benchmarks: Carefully preserve and maintain existing benchmarks, monuments, property line pins, and other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, restore or replace by a Professional Land Surveyor at no additional cost to Owner.

G. Frost Protection: When freezing temperatures may be expected, do not excavate to the full depth indicated unless the footing or slabs are to be poured immediately after the

excavation has been completed. If placing of concrete is delayed, protect the bottoms of excavations from frost until concrete is placed.


100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014 1.07 WARRANTY

A. Settlement in backfill, fill or in structures built over backfill or fill, which may occur within the specified project warranty period, shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner. Any structures damaged by settlement shall be restored to their original condition by the Contractor, at no cost to the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Section "Earth Moving," (PART 2 – PRODUCTS).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks, survey control points, monuments, property line pins and other reference points from disturbance during construction. If disturbed or destroyed, restore or replace at no cost to Owner.

B. Provide erosion control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust from leaving project site.

C. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.

D. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1. Restore or replace damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to

Owner.

3.02 TREE PROTECTION

A. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain before starting site clearing. Remove fence when construction is complete. 1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area. 2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area. 3. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash.

B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Where excavation for new construction is required within drip line of trees, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. 1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated

and covered with soil. 3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter with emulsified asphalt

or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. 4. Cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying and backfill with soil

as soon as possible.



D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Owner’s Representative. 1. Employ a qualified arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, to submit

details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs. 2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined

by the qualified arborist.

3.03 UTILITIES

A. Contractor will locate, identify, arrange for disconnect and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed before site clearing. 1. Verify that utilities indicated as abandoned have been disconnected and capped before

proceeding with site clearing. 2. Arrange with utility companies having jurisdiction to shut off indicated utilities.

B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner’s Representative not less than two days in advance of proposed utility

interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s Representative’s written

permission.

C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.

D. Removal of underground utilities may also be included in Division 2 Sections covering site utilities. Removal of underground utilities may also be included in Division 15 Mechanical or Division 16 Electrical Sections.

E. After removal of underground utilities, as indicated, properly cap and/or plug existing lines to remain in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction.

3.04 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots. 1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be

relocated. 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful

manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 3. Grind stumps and completely remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a

depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees. 5. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earth moving is indicated. 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches (200

mm), and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.05 TOPSOIL STRIPPING



A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered or as determined by Geotechnical Engineer in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. 1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots,

and other waste materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches unless authorized by Owner’s

Representative. 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within drip line of remaining trees. 3. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal. 4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading a thicker layer of topsoil.

3.06 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above and below grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction.

B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated on plans. 1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of

existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically. 2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion.

C. Remove existing fill. Refer to Geotechnical Investigation and/or drawings for information regarding suitability for re-use and estimates of location/extent of existing fill.

3.07 DISPOSAL

A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable

materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 31 23 19

DEWATERING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Additional Information may be found in the Geotechnical study by HP Geotech dated January 27, 2014. All requirements of this study shall be followed unless noted otherwise.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes construction dewatering.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utilities and support facilities may be included.

2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading.

3. Division 33 Section "Subdrainage" for permanent foundation wall, underfloor, and footing drainage.

4. Division 22 Section “Trenching” for excavating and backfilling of utilities. 5. Division 31 Section “Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control” for storm water and

sediment mitigation. 6. Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment (CDPHE), Standards and

specifications.

C. Erosion Control: The Erosion and Sedimentation Control Drawings included in the Contract Documents is the minimum requirement to be implemented. Provide additional control as necessary to meet applicable local and State criteria.


A. Dewatering Performance: Design, obtain permits, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and maintain dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control ground-water flow into excavations and allow construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades.

1. Maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion control, stability of excavations and constructed slopes, that excavation does not flood, and that damage to subgrades and permanent structures is prevented.

2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. 3. Accomplish dewatering without damaging existing buildings adjacent to excavation. 4. Remove dewatering system when no longer required for the project.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings for Information: For dewatering system, show arrangement, locations, and details of wells and well points, locations of headers and discharge lines, and means of discharge and disposal of water.

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary DEWATERING OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 312319 - 1


1. Include layouts of piezometers and flow-measuring devices for monitoring performance of dewatering system.

2. Include a written report outlining control procedures to be adopted if dewatering devices fail or problems arise.

3. Include Shop Drawings signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

B. Qualification Data: For installer and professional engineer.

C. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by dewatering operations.

D. Record drawings at project closeout identifying and locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions performed during dewatering.

1. Note locations and capping depth of wells and well points.

E. Field Test Reports: Before starting excavation, submit test results and computations demonstrating that dewatering system is capable of meeting performance requirements.

F. Copy of Permit from governing jurisdiction/agency.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment (CDPHE) and all other applicable requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as directed by Owner’s Representative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with requirements, which may also be included in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Owner’s Representative and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated by the Owner’s Representative.

B. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of the geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data.

1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for dewatering.

2. The geotechnical report was prepared by HP Geotech and dated January 27, 2014.

C. Survey adjacent structures and improvements, employing a qualified professional engineer or land surveyor, establishing exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations.

1. During dewatering, regularly resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify Owner’s Representative if



changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent improvements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by dewatering operations.

1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding site and surrounding area.

2. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation.

B. Install dewatering system to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner’s Representative and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install dewatering system utilizing wells, well points, or similar methods complete with pump equipment, standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances, water disposal, and surface-water controls.

B. Before excavating below ground-water level, place system into operation to lower water to specified levels. Operate system continuously until drains, sewers, and structures have been constructed and fill materials have been placed, or until dewatering is no longer required.

C. Provide an adequate system to lower and control ground water to permit excavation, construction of structures, and placement of fill materials on dry subgrades. Install sufficient dewatering equipment to drain water-bearing strata above and below bottom of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations.

1. Do not permit open-sump pumping that leads to loss of fines, soil piping, subgrade softening, and slope instability.

D. Reduce hydrostatic head in water-bearing strata below subgrade elevations of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations.

1. Maintain piezometric water level a minimum of 60 inches below surface of excavation.

E. Dispose of water removed by dewatering according to local and State construction dewatering criteria and in a manner that avoids endangering public health, property, waters of State interest, and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water in a manner that avoids inconvenience to others. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow-control devices as



required by authorities having jurisdiction. Disposal of water shall meet all requirements of the dewatering permit from governing agencies.

F. Provide standby equipment on-site, installed and available for immediate operation, to maintain dewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails. If dewatering requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering system, restore damaged structures and foundation soils at no additional expense to Owner.

1. Remove dewatering system from Project site upon completion of dewatering. Plug or fill well holes with sand or cut off and cap wells a minimum of 36 inches below overlying construction.

G. Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering operations.

3.03 OBSERVATION WELLS

A. Provide measurements and maintain at least the minimum number of observation wells or piezometers indicated on the shop drawings and additional observation wells as may be required by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Observe and record daily elevation of ground water and piezometric water levels in observation wells.

C. Repair or replace, within 24 hours, observation wells that become inactive, damaged, or destroyed. Suspend construction activities in areas where observation wells are not functioning properly until reliable observations can be made. Add or remove water from observation well risers to demonstrate that observation wells are functioning properly.

1. Fill observation wells, remove piezometers, and fill holes when dewatering is completed.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 31 63 29

DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Drilling of drilled piers. 2. Casing of drilled piers as required for groundwater conditions encountered. 3. Cleaning and dewatering of drilled holes for piers. B. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Drilled Pier Top Forms: Section 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories. 2. Concrete Reinforcing: Section 03 20 00. 3. Concrete: Section 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete. 4. Anchor Bolts and Rods for Steel Columns: Section 05 05 23 Metal Fastenings and Section

05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing.. C. Related Requirements: 1. General Notes on Structural Drawings. 2. Layout: Section 01 71 23.14 Construction Layout and Control. 3. Quality Control: Section 01 45 00. 4. Reinforcing Work: Section 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing. 5. Concrete Work: Section 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. No extra cost will be allowed nor credit expected for overrun or underrun of drilled pier length.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Reference Standards: Comply with following except as modified by supplementary requirements of this Project Specification. 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) Standards:

a. ACI 117-10 – Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. b. ACI 336.1-01 - Specification for the Construction of Drilled Piers.

B. Guide References and Standard Practices: 1. Common Ground Alliance – Excavation Best Practices 6.0;

www.CommonGroundAlliance.com. 1.04 COORDINATION

A. Reinforcing Steel:

1. Coordinate with reinforcing steel supplier to ensure that reinforcing bars are supplied in stock lengths sufficiently in excess of design shaft lengths so that reinforcing bar splicing will not be required for piers if actual bedrock elevation is found to be lower than that estimated on Drawings.

2. Ensure reinforcing bars and ties are on-site and prepared for placement in drill holes immediately after each drill hole is drilled, cleaned, and observed by Geotechnical Engineer.

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 31 63 29 - 1

http://www.commongroundalliance.com/


B. Concrete: Coordinate with concrete supplier to ensure that concrete is delivered to site in time to be placed immediately after each drill hole is drilled, cleaned, observed and reinforcing steel is set.

1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Submit for review, acceptance and return in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings indicating drilled pier layout, and indicating at each drilled pier,

diameter, reinforcement, bearing plates, anchor bolts, and estimated drilled pier length. 1. Coordinate with structural steel shop drawings for determination of anchor bolt sizes,

numbers and locations in relation to drilled piers. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Drilling Personnel: Experienced and properly equipped to drill piers of indicated diameters

and lengths. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Reinforcing Steel: Deliver and store in accordance with Section 03 20 00. Unload and store

reinforcing bars in manner to keep bars free of mud. Store on timber skids while awaiting use. B. Concrete: Comply with Section 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Test Holes: A series of test holes have been made for Owner by its separate consultant. Log

and report are believed to be accurate; however, neither Owner nor Architect guarantees information contained therein nor do they guarantee conditions indicated to exist at locations of test holes will prevail at other locations on site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Steel: Supplied and fabricated under Section 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement. B. Concrete: Supplied under Section 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete. C. Anchor Bolts for Steel Columns: Section 05 05 23 and Section 05 12 00. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Drilled Pier Top Forms: Supplied under Section 03 10 00 Concrete Formwork. B. Steel Pipe Casings: ASTM A252, Grade 2 or ASTM A36.

1. Inside Diameter: Match drilled pier diameter indicated on Structural Drawings.


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014 PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Pier Locations: Staked out under Section 01 71 23.14. B. Locating Underground Facilities: Comply with applicable state law and regulations and with the

Common Ground Alliance Excavation Best Practices. 1. Unless otherwise specified in state law, call the One Call Center for facility location at least

two working days, not to include the day of notice, and no more than ten working days prior to beginning drilling. a. Utility Notification Center of Colorado: 800/922-1987; www.uncc.org.

2. Prior to drilling, verify locate markings and check for evidence of unmarked utilities. 3. Underground Facility Avoidance: Plan drilling to avoid damage to and minimize interference

with existing underground facilities in or near the work area. 4. Marking Preservation: Protect and preserve staking, marking, and other designations for

underground facilities until no longer required for proper and safe excavation. C. Mobilization: 1. Mobilize drilling equipment in good condition and of sufficient capacity to complete the work. 2. Mobilize equipment of sufficient size and operating condition to achieve required penetration

through cobbles and boulders and hard bedrock. 3. Prepare for rock coring and for dewatering and casing of piers. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Regulatory Requirements: : 1. Excavation: Comply with Colorado Division of Labor Rules and Regulations. B. Drilling: Drill pier holes into bedrock stratum at depths indicated or as directed by on-site

Geotechnical Engineer. Diameters shall be substantially as indicated. 1. Drill holes for closely spaced piers only after adjacent piers are completed and concrete is

allowed to set. 2. Minimum Penetration into Firm or Harder Bedrock: 7 feet. Provide deeper penetrations if so

indicated on Structural Drawings. 3. Minimum Total Shaft Length: 25 feet. Provide longer shafts where required to provide

specified penetration into bedrock. 4. Refusal: If refusal to pier drilling is encountered before reaching depth required to provide

indicated minimum pier length or minimum penetration into competent bedrock indicated on the Drawings, confer with Geotechnical Engineer and receive direction prior to proceeding with concrete placement.

C. Casing: 1. Insert removable steel casings where necessary to prevent entry of soil or water into pier

excavation during drilling or pouring. Provide casings sufficient to case entire depth of each pier hole if necessary.

2. Use of mud slurry to lubricate casings or seal off water allowed only with prior approval of Geotechnical Engineer.

D. Cleaning and Dewatering: Thoroughly dewater and clean holes of debris before placing

concrete. Immediately pump or bail out water found in piers. Keep piers free from water to maximum extent possible.

1. Take measures and furnish equipment and labor necessary to control flow, drainage and accumulation of water as required to permit completion of work. Provide pumps of proper type and capacity for this type of work and sufficient hose to carry water away from excavations.


http://www.uncc.org/

CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014 2. Dewater holes so that no more than three inches of water exists in bottom of hole when

placement of concrete is started. E. Reinforcement: Place accurately and symmetrically about axis of pier. Check exact locations of

dowels and reinforcement using surveying instrument. Hold securely in place during concreting operations.

1. Obtain approval of installed reinforcement by Geotechnical Engineer before depositing concrete.

2. Reinforcing Placement Tolerances: For pier reinforcing, maintain minimum clear cover as indicated on Drawings. For dowels and reinforcing extending into adjacent construction, comply with requirements of ACI 117 Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.

F. Concrete Placement: Comply with Section 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1. Place concrete only with approval of Geotechnical Engineer. 2. Fill hole with concrete immediately after it is drilled, cleaned and inspected. Do not leave

pier holes open overnight. 3. Place concrete with tremie or otherwise direct concrete down center of pier hole to avoid

segregation caused by striking reinforcing or sides of hole. 4. Place continuously without construction joints for full height of drilled pier. Vibrate top 4 feet

of each pier. 5. Provide drilled pier top forms where required to prevent mushrooming of concrete due to

caving soil at ground surface. Mushrooming of concrete at top of pier not allowed. G. Casing Removal: Pull temporary casing with smooth vertical motion maintaining casing in plumb

position. During pulling maintain concrete level minimum 5 feet above bottom of casing. H. Drilled Pier Installation Tolerances: Comply with following: 1. Location Tolerances: Maximum of 5 percent of pier diameter but not to exceed 1-1/2 inches. 2. Plumb Tolerance: Maximum of 2 inches in any 10 foot length. 3. Shaft Diameter Tolerance: Within plus 1-inch, minus 0-inch of specified cross section

dimension. 4. Top Elevation Tolerance: Plus 0-inch, minus 2 inches. I. Embedments: Place accurately, immediately after placement of drilled pier concrete, at locations

and elevations indicated for connections to structural steel columns, precast wall panels, and other structural members. Check exact locations and elevations after placement using surveying instrument. Vibrate or otherwise consolidate concrete at top of drilled pier around embedded anchors.

1. Anchor Bolts: Set perpendicular to the theoretical bearing surface, and hold in place with templates.

2. Installation Tolerances: a. Plus or minus 1/8 inch center-to-center of any two bolts within an anchor bolt group

where an anchor bolts group is defined as the set of anchor bolts which receive a single fabricated steel shipping piece.

b. Plus or minus ¼ inch center-to-center of adjacent anchor bolt groups. c. Maximum allowable accumulation of ¼ inch per hundred feet along the established

column line of multiple anchor bolt groups, but not to exceed a total of 1 inch, where the established column line is the actual field line most representative of the centers of the as-built anchor bolt groups along line of columns.

d. Plus or minus ¼ inch from the center of any anchor bolt group to the established column line through that group.

e. The tolerances of above paragraphs apply to offset dimensions shown on the Drawings, measured parallel and perpendicular to the nearest established column line for individual columns shown on the Drawings to be offset from established column lines.


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014 f. Plates supplied by others for embedment in concrete shall be set in accordance with

the tolerance requirements of the AISC Code of Standard Practice. 3.03 SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Comply with Section 01 45 00 Quality Control.

1. Notifications: Contractor shall notify Architect and DPS Project Manager minimum three days prior to drilling.

B. Site Tests: 1. Testing Agency: Concrete testing during pier drilling operations will be conducted by testing

laboratory. See Sections 01 45 00 and 03 30 00. 2. Concrete Testing: Comply with Section 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete. C. Inspection: Pier drilling operations and related concrete work shall be observed by Testing

Agency who will place qualified personnel on site full time during drilling operations. See Section 01 45 29.

D. Special Inspection: See Section 01 45 00 Quality Control. Special Inspection is required for the

following work under this Section. 1. Drilling and casing of drilled piers. 2. Placement of reinforcing steel in drilled piers. 3. Placement of concrete in drilled piers. 4. Placement of bearing plates and anchor bolts. E. Record Documentation: Daily Reports (Drilling Log): Distributed in accordance with Section

01 45 00. Daily reports (Drilling Log) shall contain following information: 1. Identification mark. 2. Shaft diameter. 3. Design bottom elevation. 4. Actual bottom elevation. 5. Top elevation. 6. Deviation from plan location and plumb. 7. Overrun or underrun. 8. Bearing strata description and condition of bearing strata. 9. Length and location of casing used. 10. Nature and location of obstructions. 11. Water conditions during drilling and at time of concrete placement. 12. Unusual occurrences during drilling, reinforcement, concrete placement or casing removal. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Mislocated Piers: If piers are placed at incorrect locations or otherwise exceed specified

allowable tolerances, immediately inform Architect and Structural Engineer. Additional drilled pier placements and other foundation adjustments required due to incorrectly placed piers shall be executed at no cost to the Owner.

3.05 WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Material Removed During Pier Drilling: Promptly remove from site.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 31 66 15

HELICAL FOUNDATION PILES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel helical pile foundation system. B. Related Requirements: 1. Field Testing and Special Inspection Procedures: Section 01 45 00 Field Quality Control. 2. Layout: Section 01 71 23.14 Construction Layout and Control. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Helical Pile: Manufactured steel deep foundation element consisting of a central shaft and

one or more helical bearing plates. A helical pile is installed by rotating it into the ground. Each helical bearing plate is formed into a screwthread with a uniform defined pitch.

B. Reference Standards: See Section 01 42 00. Comply with the following: 1. American Welding Society (AWS) Standards: a. AWS D1.1/D1.1M – 2010 Structural Welding Code – Steel. 2. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. – AC358 - Acceptance Criteria for Helical Foundation Systems

and Devices, July 1, 2007. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Submit for review, acceptance and return in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog cut and data sheets. 1. Include data on corrosion protection to be provided. C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings for helical piles and all components. Include the following. 1. Helical pile number, location and pattern by assigned identification number. 2. Design load for each helical pile. 3. Type and size of central steel shaft. 4. Helix Configuration: Number and diameter of helix plates. 5. Minimum effective installation torque. 6. Minimum overall length. 7. Inclination of helical pile. 8. Cut-off elevation. 9. Details of helical pile attachment to structure relative to grade beam, column pad, pile cap,

etc. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Submit for information and verification in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. Certificates: 1. Installer Qualifications: Submit Manufacturer's certification of helical pile system installer.

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary HELICAL FOUNDATION PILES OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 31 66 15 - 1

CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014 C. Installation Records: Submit helical pile installation records within 24 hours after each installation

is completed. Formal copies shall be submitted on a weekly basis. These installation records shall include, but are not limited to, the following information.

1. Project name and location. 2. Name of authorized and certified dealer and installer. 3. Name of installer’s foreman or representative witnessing the installation. 4. Date of installation. 5. Location of helical pile by assigned identification number, including deviation, if any, from

indicated locations. 6. Description of lead section including number and diameter of helices and extensions used. 7. Overall depth of installation from a known reference point. 8. Installation torque at termination of pier. 9. Load transfer device. 10. Comments pertaining to interruptions, obstructions, or other relevant information. 11. Rated load capacities. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be done by an manufacturer-authorized installation

contractor. 2. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be performed only by certified welding operators

currently qualified in accordance with the testing procedures of AWS D1.1 for the weld types and positions required for the installations indicated.

B. Preconstruction Testing: Install a minimum of one test pile at location directed by Independent

Testing Agency. Install using methods and keep records as specified for foundation piles. Before beginning foundation pile installation, obtain Independent Testing Agency’s determination of allowable load carrying capacity of proposed helical piles, correlated with torsional resistance, based on results of test pile installation and evaluation criteria of ICC-ES AC358.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General Requirements: Comply with Section 01 60 00. B. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Steel: Store members above ground on platforms, skids or other supports and to prevent

twisting and corrosion. 1.07 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Test Holes: A series of test holes have been made for Owner by its separate consultant. See

Document 00 30 00. Log and report are believed to be accurate; however, neither Owner nor Architect guarantees information contained therein nor do they guarantee conditions indicated to exist at locations of test holes will prevail at other locations on site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS

A. Acceptable Helical Pile Manufacturers and Systems: 1. Alpine Site Services, Inc. – AES Screwpiles. 2. Chance Civil Construction, a Division of Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.; www.abchance.com -

The Chance Helical Pier Foundation System. 3. I.M.R., Inc., Denver, Colorado - HELI-PILE steel helical piles. DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary HELICAL FOUNDATION PILES OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 31 66 15 - 2

http://www.abchance.com/

CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014 2.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Design and construct helical foundation system in accordance with applicable laws, codes,

ordinances, and regulations. 2.03 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A. Performance Criteria: Negligible settlement under applied design loads. B. Design Loads: Steel helical piles shall be designed and installed to resist the unfactored design

loads indicated on the Structural Drawings. 1. Piles shall develop ultimate load capacities of at least twice the design working loads in the

designated load-bearing layers. Analysis shall show that no soil layer underlying the designated load-bearing layers causes the load-bearing capacity safety factor to be less than two.

C. Helical piles shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with accepted engineering

practice to resist all stresses induced by installation into the ground and service loads. 2.04 COMPONENTS AND MATERIALS A. Pier Shafts: The central steel shaft shall consist of lead sections and extensions as follows. 1. The solid steel shafts shall conform to the general requirements of ASTM A29. 2. Helices: Carbon steel sheet, strip, or plate formed on matching metal dies to true helical

shape and shall conform to ASTM A656 Grade 80. B. Couplings: Couplings shall be cold-forged welded to the shaft. C. Finish: All material shall be galvanized per ASTM B633. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: See Section 01 71 16. 1. Layout: Verify grades and layout of work before beginning installation. B In the event of a discrepancy, notify the General Contractor with a copy to the Architect. Do not

proceed with helical pile installation in areas of discrepancies until said discrepancies have been resolved.

C. Start of installation means acceptance of existing conditions by helical pile installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Existing Utilities: Locate and protect from damage any sewer, water, gas, electric, phone or other

pipe lines or conduits in the area of the work under this Section. Do not drill through active utilities.

B. Protection: Protect adjacent improvements as required to prevent damage during installation. C. Installation Equipment: 1. Mobilize installation equipment with a rotary type motor with equal forward and reverse

torque capabilities. This equipment shall be capable of continual adjustment of the torque



drive unit's revolutions per minute (RPM's) during installation. Percussion drilling equipment will not be allowed.

2. Mobilize equipment capable of applying installation torque equal to the torque required to meet the pier loads.

3. Mobilize equipment capable of applying axial compression (crowd) pressure and torque simultaneously.

D. Provide torque-monitoring device. 1. The torque being applied by the installing units shall be monitored throughout the installation

by the installer. The torque monitoring device shall either be a part of the installing unit or an independent device in-line with the installing unit. Calibration for either unit shall be available for review by the Independent Testing Agency.

3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. Use only Manufacturer-approved

adapters and equipment. The helical pile installation technique shall be such that it is consistent with the geotechnical, logistical, environmental, and load carrying conditions of the Project.

B. Position helical pile as indicated. Establish proper angular alignment at start of installation. 1. The lead section shall be positioned at the location as shown on the working drawings. 2. Battered helical piles may be positioned perpendicular to the ground to assist in initial

advancement into the soil before the required batter angle shall be established. C. Advancing Sections: 1. Engage and advance the helical pile sections in a smooth, continuous manner with the rate

of pier rotation in the range of 5 to 35 RPM. 2. Apply sufficient axial compression (crowd) pressure to uniformly advance the helical sections

to approximately 3-inches (76.2 mm) per revolution. The rate of rotation and magnitude of crowd pressure must be adjusted for different soil conditions and depths in order to maintain the penetration rate.

3. If the helical section ceases to advance, refusal will have been reached and the installation shall be terminated.

D. Termination Criteria: 1. The torque as measured during the installation shall not exceed the torsional strength rating

of the steel helical lead and extension sections. 2. The minimum depth criteria indicated on the Drawings must be satisfied prior to terminating

the steel helical pile. 3. The top helix is to be located not less than five (5) feet (1.5 m) below the grade elevation

unless otherwise approved by the Owner. 4. If the torsional strength rating of the pier and/or installing unit has been reached prior to

satisfying the minimum depth required, the installing contractor shall have the following options:

a. Terminate the installation at the depth obtained with the approval of the Geotechnical Engineer, or,

b. Remove the existing pier and install a pier with smaller and/or fewer helices. This revised pier shall be terminated deeper than the terminating depth of the original pier as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer.

5. In the event the minimum installation torque is not achieved at minimum depth, the Contractor shall install the foundation deeper using additional plain extension sections.

6. The minimum specified installation torque shall have been met when the measured installation torque meets or exceeds the minimum specified installation torque in two successive readings of the measuring device, unless otherwise specified by the Independent Testing Agency.


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014 E. Installation Tolerances: 1. Centerline of helical piles shall not be more than 3 inches from indicated plan location. 2. Helical pile plumbness shall be within 2 inches of design alignment. 3. Top elevation of helical pile shall be within plus 1 inch to minus 2 inches of the design

vertical elevation. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Defective Piles: Abandon and replace with new piles as directed by Architect. 3.05 SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspection: See Section 01 45 00. Special inspections shall be performed continuously

during installation of helical pile foundations. The information recorded shall include installation equipment used, pile dimensions, tip elevations, final depth, final installation torque and other pertinent installation data as required by the Geotechnical Engineer.

B. Torque Monitoring: 1. Monitor torque applied by the installing units during the entire installation and record values

achieved on each pile. 2. Make calibration torque monitoring data available to Architect upon request.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 32 05 23

CEMENT AND CONCRETE FOR EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

(OTHER THAN PAVEMENT)

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes for the following:

1. Drainage Structures. 2. Retaining Walls. 3. Box Base Manholes. 4. As indicated on the plans.

B. Related sections include the following:

1. Division 31 Section “Earth Moving” for excavation and backfill. 2. Division 32 Section “Joint Sealants.” 3. Division 33 Section “Storm Utility Drainage Piping.”

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Samples: For waterstops.

E. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements:

1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.

F. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 320523 - 1


2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Fiber reinforcement. 6. Waterstops. 7. Curing compounds. 8. Floor and slab treatments. 9. Bonding agents. 10. Adhesives. 11. Vapor retarders. 12. Semirigid joint filler. 13. Joint-filler strips. 14. Repair materials.

G. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 308, “Standard Practice for Curing Concrete”. 3. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete subcontractor.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 320523 - 2

100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.

B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and

as follows:

a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better. b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge

sealed. c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

B. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.

C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.

D. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

E. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface.

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing.

2.02 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.


100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014 2.03 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2.04 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II

The following materials may be used to supplement the portland cement in accordance with ACI 301, Section 4.

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. Class C fly ash will not be permitted where Type II or I/II Portland cement is required.

b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded, 3/4-inch nominal maximum coarse-aggregate size.

1. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: ASTM C 94 and potable.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017, Type II.

2.05 WATERSTOPS

A. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.

1. Manufacturer and Type:

a. As indicated on plans.


100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014 2.06 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.

F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, nondissipating.

2.07 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, ½” thick unless indicated otherwise on the plans.

2.08 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.

D. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: [4000 psi] at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: 6 ½ Percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery.


100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014 2.09 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.010 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information to Owner’s Representative.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

2.011 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR STRUCTURE ELEMENTS

A. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4500 psi (31 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 5 inches (125 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-mm)

nominal maximum aggregate size.

2.012 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."


A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301 to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Provide ¾-inch chamfer at exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete, unless indicated otherwise on the plans.

D. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:



1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces.

E. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

F. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

G. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

H. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

I. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

J. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

K. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

L. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

M. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.02 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

3.03 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained.

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 80 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength.

2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.



B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Owner’s Representative.


A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.05 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by the Owner’s Representative.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement, continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicted.

3.06 WATERSTOPS

A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.07 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Owner’s Representative.

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301.



1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface

plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

G. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.08 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and



defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to all formed concrete surfaces.

B. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated on the drawings.

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one-half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.

3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part portland cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.09 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Apply float finish to all horizontal top slab surfaces unless indicated otherwise.

C. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to all surfaces exposed to pedestrian use unless otherwise indicated.

3.010 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.



C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project..

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer.

3.011 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Owner’s Representative. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Owner’s Representative's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.



1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Owner’s Representative.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Owner’s Representative's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Owner’s Representative's approval.


100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014 3.012 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least 1 composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for

each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive strength test, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete mix.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each set of compressive strength specimens.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise indicated. Cylinders shall be molded and stored for laboratory-cured test specimens unless field-cured test specimens are required.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd.. One specimen shall be tested at 7 days and two specimens at 28 days; one specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required.

7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, current operations shall be evaluated and corrective procedures shall be provided for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

C. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if average of any 3 consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).

D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Owner’s Representative, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in pour, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Owner’s Representative, but will not be used as the sole basis for approval or rejection.

F. Additional Tests: Testing agency shall make additional tests of the concrete when test results indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Owner’s Representative. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.

G. Remove and replace concrete where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.



H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor’s expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 32 12 16

ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Additional information concerning asphalt paving may be found on the civil drawings, in the project geotechnical report and City and County of Denver construction standards. In case of conflict between the drawings, jurisdictional criteria and the information specified herein, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

C. Additional information concerning asphalt paving may be found in the geotechnical investigation report by HP Geotech dated January 27, 2014. All requirements of this report shall be followed unless noted otherwise. The information shown in this report is for information and it shall be the contractor’s responsibility to field verify conditions indicated.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Hot-mix asphalt patching. 3. Hot-mix asphalt paving overlay. 4. Asphalt surface treatments. 5. Cold milling of existing hot-mix asphalt pavement.


1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling and site grading. 2. Division 32 Section “Pavement Markings” for pavement striping and symbols.

C. References:

1. Arapahoe County Standard Specifications for Design and Construction, latest edition. 2. Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge

Construction, current edition and all appropriate standard special provisions.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms.

B. CDOT: State of Colorado Department of Transportation.

C. CDOT Specifications: Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, current edition and all appropriate standard special provisions.


A. Provide hot-mix asphalt paving in accordance with Section 401 of the CDOT Specifications.

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary ASPHALT PAVING OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 321216 - 1


1. Standard Specification: CDOT Specifications. 2. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in CDOT

Specifications do not apply to this Project.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.

B. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work.

C. Material Test Reports: For each paving material.

D. Material Certificates: For each paving material, signed by providers.


A. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing hot-mix asphalt similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

2. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed hot-mix asphalt paving similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Testing Agency: 1. All testing and inspections required herein will be performed by an independent testing and

inspection agency employed by the Owner. 2. Notify the testing and inspection agency not less than 48 hours in advance of all work requiring

testing or inspection services.

C. Testing Requirements: Asphalt Paving shall be tested for gradation, asphalt content and in-place density in accordance with CDOT Specifications, the current edition of CDOT Field Materials Manual, and local Regulatory Agency requirements, whichever are the most stringent.

D. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as directed by Owner’s Representative. Contractor to comply with requirements, which may also be included in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp or if the following conditions are not met:

1. Tack Coats: Minimum surface or air temperature in the shade of 60 deg F (15 deg C). 2. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations of ASTM D 3910. 3. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface or air temperature in the shade of 40 deg F and

rising at time of placement. 4. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface or air temperature in the shade of 50 deg F and

rising at time of placement.

B. Coordination and Scheduling:



1. Cooperate with other trades and arrange scheduling to avoid damage to other work, including grading, site utilities and piping, exterior concrete, landscaping and irrigation systems.

2. Before commencing pavement operations, ascertain that utility lines, site lighting and wiring, piping, curb and gutter work, general grading and heavy trucking is complete so that such operations will not damage paving work.

3. Mask off and protect exposed building surfaces and abutting concrete from damage or staining by tack coat and paving operations.

4. Asphalt paving to be installed no later than mid-October 2012 to allow for paved access for fire department.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 AGGREGATES

A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations meeting the requirements of the CDOT Specifications.

B. Asphalt Concrete Aggregate: Clean, hard, durable particles of crushed stone, crushed slag, crushed gravel, or natural gravel conforming to the requirements of Subsection 703.04 of the CDOT Specifications, Item 703.04, Grading SX and S (Table 703-3).

C. Mineral Filler: Rock dust, slag dust, hydrated lime, hydraulic cement, or other suitable mineral material conforming to the requirements of Subsection 703.06 of the CDOT Specifications. Item 703.06.

2.02 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Cement: The asphalt cement to be used on this project shall be PG 64-22 conforming to the requirements of Subsection 702.01 of the CDOT Specifications.

B. Tack Coat: AASHTO M 140, emulsified asphalt or AASHTO M 208, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.

C. Fog Seal: AASHTO M 140, emulsified asphalt or AASHTO M 208, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted at the factory in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.

D. Water: Potable.

2.03 MIXES

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes. Furnish job-mix formulas for each pavement type, conforming to the requirements of Subsection 401.02 of the CDOT Specifications. Mix aggregates and bituminous materials in accordance with the requirements of Subsection 401.15 of the CDOT Specifications. Use approved job mix formulas. Mix to comply with the following requirements:

1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is located.

2. Base Course: Grading S (75). 3. Surface Course: Grading SX (75).

B. Emulsified-Asphalt: Shall conform to AASHTO M140 or M208 in accordance with Subsection 702.03 of the CDOT Specifications.


100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that subgrade is unfrozen, free of water, snow, and ice otherwise in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads.

B. Proof-roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic-tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that require further compaction. Scarify, regrade and recompact surface of subgrade that is pumping or deforming as required to provide true levels, uniform slopes and proper total thickness of paving as required in Division 2 Section “Earthwork.”

C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 COLD MILLING

A. Clean existing pavement surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold milling. Remove existing asphalt pavement by cold milling to grades and cross sections indicated.

1. Mill to a depth of a minimum 1 ½-inches or as indicated on the plans. 2. Mill to a uniform finished surface free of gouges, grooves, and ridges. 3. Control rate of milling to prevent tearing of existing asphalt course. 4. Repair or replace curbs, manholes, and other construction damaged during cold milling. 5. Excavate and trim unbound-aggregate base course, if encountered, and keep material

separate from milled hot-mix asphalt. 6. Transport milled hot-mix asphalt to asphalt recycling facility. 7. Keep milled pavement surface free of loose material and dust.

3.03 PATCHING

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches (300 mm) into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.

B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.2 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.8 L/sq. m).

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove

spillages and clean affected surfaces.

C. Patching: Partially fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished flush with adjacent surfaces.

3.04 REPAIRS

A. Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of hot-mix asphalt surface course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch (25 mm) in existing pavements.

B. Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing joint filler material from cracks or joints to a depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm).



1. Clean cracks and joints in existing hot-mix asphalt pavement. 2. Use emulsified-asphalt slurry to seal cracks and joints less than ¼ inch (6 mm) wide. Fill

flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess. 3. Use hot-applied joint sealant to seal cracks and joints more than ¼ inch (6 mm) wide. Fill

flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess.

3.05 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.

1. Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course. Do not dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course.

B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted-aggregate base before applying paving materials.

C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.20 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.8 L/sq. m).

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove

spillages and clean affected surfaces.

3.06 PAVING GEOTEXTILE INSTALLATION

A. Apply asphalt binder uniformly to existing pavement surfaces at a rate of 0.25 gal./sq. yd. (1.0 L/sq. m) per in accordance with Subsection 420.04 of the CDOT Specifications. item 420.04.

B. Place paving geotextile promptly according to manufacturer's written instructions. Broom or roll geotextile smooth and free of wrinkles and folds. Overlap longitudinal joints 4 inches (100 mm) and transverse joints 6 inches (150 mm).

1. Protect paving geotextile from traffic and other damage and place hot-mix asphalt paving overlay the same day.

3.07 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING

A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.

1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated on the plans or as directed by Geotechnical Report. Maximum lift thickness shall be 3-inches. Minimum lift thickness shall be 1½-inches for Grading SX and 2-inches for Grading S.

2. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift. Maximum lift thickness shall be 2-inches. 3. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 235 deg F (113 deg C) per in accordance with

Subsection 401.15 of the CDOT Specifications, Table 401-4. 4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of one-

way slopes, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears

in asphalt-paving mat.



B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet (3 m) wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required.

1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt surface course.

C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.

3.08 JOINTS

A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course.

1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches (150mm). 3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, 6 to 12 inches (150-300 mm). 4. Construct transverse joints as described in AI MS-22, "Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt

Pavements." 5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive

displacement. 6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.

3.09 COMPACTION

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.

1. When paving surface temperature falls below 185 deg F (85 deg C) no further compaction effort will be permitted unless approved.

B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.

C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density in accordance with Subsection 401.17 of the CDOT Specifications.

1. Pavement shall be compacted to a density of 92% to 96% of the maximum theoretical density, determined according to Colorado procedure 51. Field density determination will be in accordance with Colorado Procedure 44 or 81.

D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.

E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.



F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.

G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened.

H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.

3.010 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances:

1. Base Course: Plus or minus ¼ inch (6 mm). 2. Surface Course: Plus ¼ inch (6 mm), no minus.

B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas:

1. Base Course: ¼ inch (6 mm). 2. Surface Course: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown.

Maximum allowable variance from template is ¼ inch (6 mm).

3.011 MANHOLE FRAME ADJUSTMENTS

A. Set frames for manholes and other such units within areas to be paved to ¼-inch minimum to ½-inch maximum below final grade as part of this work. Include existing frames or new frames furnished under other sections of these specifications.

B. Set cover frames to ¼-inch minimum and ½-inch maximum below surface of adjacent pavement. Surround frames set to grade with a ring of compacted asphaltic concrete base prior to paving. Place asphaltic concrete mixture up to 1-inch below top of frame, slope to grade, and compact with hand tamping. Adjust frames as required for paving.

C. Provide temporary closures over openings until completion of rolling operations. Remove closures at completion of work.

3.012 ASPHALT CURBS

A. Construct hot-mix asphalt curbs over compacted pavement surfaces. Apply a light tack coat unless pavement surface is still tacky and free from dust. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F (121 deg C).

1. Asphalt Mix: Same as pavement surface-course mix.

B. Place hot-mix asphalt to curb cross section indicated or, if not indicated, to local standard shapes, by machine or by hand in wood or metal forms. Tamp hand-placed materials and screed to smooth finish. Remove forms after hot-mix asphalt has cooled.


100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014 3.013 SURFACE TREATMENTS

A. Fog Seals: Apply fog seal at a rate of 0.10 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.45 to 0.7 L/sq. m) to existing asphalt pavement and allow to cure. With a fine sand, lightly dust areas receiving excess fog seal.

B. Slurry Seals: Apply slurry coat in a uniform thickness according to ASTM D 3910 and allow to cure.

1. Roll slurry seal to remove ridges and provide a uniform, smooth surface.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.

1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from specified requirements.

B. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

C. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTM D 3549.

D. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances.

E. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement according to ASTM D 979.

1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from four samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.

2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

a. One core sample will be taken for every 350 sq. yd. or less of installed pavement, with no fewer than 3 cores taken.

b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

F. Asphalt Content and Gradation. Testing agency will take sample of uncompacted paving mixtures at a minimum frequency of every 1,000 tons according to Colorado Procedure – Laboratory CPL-5120 and Colorado Procedure CP-31.

G. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. Conforming to the specified requirements will be in according with Subsection 105.03 of the CDOT Specifications.

3.015 DISPOSAL

A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.



1. Do not allow excavated materials to accumulate on-site.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 32 13 13

CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes constructing exterior concrete paving on prepared subgrade or base course in accordance with these specifications. This work shall be in conformity with the lines, grades, thicknesses and typical cross-sections shown on the plans for the following:

1. Driveways and roadways. 2. Parking lots. 3. Curbs and gutters. 4. Sidewalks, steps, ramps. 5. Base material for resilient surfacing. 6. Dumpster and loading dock pads. 7. As detailed on the plans.


1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, grading, and subbase course. 2. Division 32 Section “Pavement Marking” for pavement striping and symbols. 3. Division 33 Section “Concrete Pavement Joint Sealants” for expansion and contraction joints.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. City and County of Denver Standard Specifications for Design and Construction, latest edition.

B. Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, current edition.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, expansive hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume.

B. CDOT: State of Colorado Department of Transportation.

C. CDOT Specifications: Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, current edition.

D. ADA Handbook: Americans with Disabilities Act Standards for Accessible Design, U.S. Department of Justice.

E. ANSI A117.1: Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, American National Standard Institute.

F. Refer to ACI 301: (American Concrete Institute – Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete), for additional definitions.

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary CONCRETE PAVING OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 321313 - 1

100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.

B. Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mix, and includes alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials:

1. Aggregates. 2. Cement. 3. Admixtures.

D. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials used in the project complies with requirements:

1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Applied finish materials. 7. Bonding agent or adhesive. 8. Joint fillers.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Pavement Joint Layout Plan: Plan to show joint locations and typical dimensions for review and approval by engineer.

G. Traffic Control Plan: For work in the public right-of-way.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed pavement work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94/C 94 M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mix Concrete Association's (NRMCA) Plant Certification Program.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant and each aggregate from one source.



E. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents.

F. Concrete Testing Service: The Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

G. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at project site as directed by Owner’s Representative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with requirements, which may also be included in Division 1 Section “Project Management and Coordination.”

H. Regulatory Requirements:

I. Comply with City and County of Denver standards for sidewalks, curbs, ramps, gutters, and driveway approaches or aprons, including standard dimensions, profiles, thicknesses, reinforcing, and compressive strength. In the event of conflict between the Contract Documents and the standards, the more stringent requirements will apply.

1. Comply with applicable requirements of ADA Handbook, ANSI A117.1, and local and State codes and ordinances regarding walks, steps, ramps and curb ramps.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.

B. Coordination and Scheduling: Coordinate with other trades and arrange scheduling to avoid damage to other work including grading, site utilities and piping, asphalt paving, landscaping and irrigation systems.

C. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions and existing conditions shown on the drawings by taking field measurements prior to start of work. Report discrepancies to the Owner’s Representative for clarification and make minor adjustments in layout as required by field conditions and as approved by the Owner’s Representative, at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Environmental Requirements: Perform work only under suitable weather conditions. Comply with the environmental requirements of Section 3.6 for concrete placement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.


100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014 2.02 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.

1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a radius 100 feet or less.

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.


A. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: CDOT Section 709 and ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

B. Reinforcement Bars: CDOT Section 709 and ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

C. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, CDOT Section 709 and ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

D. Tie Bars: CDOT Section 709 and ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

E. Supports for Reinforcement: Chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcement bars, welded wire fabric, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:

1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs.

2.04 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER

A. Sealed Joints: Preformed, compressible fiber or cork filler material complying with ASTM D1751 or D1752, Type II, guaranteed compatible with expansion joint sealant materials, ½” thick unless otherwise indicated. Provide high-impact polystyrene removable “void cap” to create ½” deep reveal for installation of sealant.

B. Self-Sealing Joints: Preformed, compressible asphalt fiber joint filler complying with ASTM D994, ½” thick unless otherwise indicated. Do not use asphalt fiber filler in joints to receive elastomeric joint sealants.

2.05 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout the Project:

1. Portland Cement: CDOT Section 701 and ASTM C 150, Type I/II.

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.



B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: CDOT Section 703 and ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. 3. Do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing substances that cause spalling.

C. Water: CDOT Section 712 and ASTM C 94/C 94M potable.

2.06 ADMIXTURES

A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures.

B. Air-Entraining Admixture: CDOT Section 711 and ASTM C 260.

C. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494, Type E. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 6. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 7. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

2.07 CURING MATERIALS: CDOT SECTION 711

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq.yd. (305 g/sq.m) dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, waterproof paper, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

E. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B.

1. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350 g/L.

F. White Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type II, Class B.

1. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350 g/L.

2.08 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience.



1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the trial batch method.

2. Do not use Owner's field quality-control testing agency as the independent testing agency.

B. Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4,000 psi. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm). 4. Minimum 594 lb. Cement per cubic yard.

C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content of 4.0 to 7.0 percent.

D. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing admixture plasticizing and retarding admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

F. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements for concrete exposed to deicing chemicals as follows:

1. Fly Ash or Pozzolan: 20 percent CDOT Section 601.05. 2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent. 3. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan, and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent, with

fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 20 percent.

G. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd.

H. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer’s written instructions.


A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.

B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.



1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).

2. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons. 3. Subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch require

correction according to requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."

C. Subgrade shall be tested by Geotechnical Engineer and pass required tests prior to concrete pavement placement.

D. Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after non-conforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

3.03 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.


A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating reinforcement and with recommendations in CRSI's "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

D. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

E. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 12-inch (300-mm) overlap of adjacent mats.

3.05 JOINTS

A. General: Construct/install construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated.

1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Contractor to provide plan of joint placement for the Engineers approval.



3. The distance between joints shall not exceed in feet, twice the pavement thickness in inches. (i.e.: 6” PCC pavement to utilize maximum 12-foot joint spacing.)

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour, unless pavement terminates at expansion joints.

1. Contractor may utilize preformed galvanized steel or plastic keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.

2. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated. 4. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys, unless

otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.

C. Expansion Joints: Form expansion joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Locate expansion joints in pavement where indicated on plans. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler no less than 1/2 inch or no more than 1 inch below finished surface for

joint sealant. 4. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip

joint-filler sections together. 5. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary

preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with groover tool to the indicated radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks.

3. Tied Contraction Joints: Install deformed bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated.

3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcement steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and alignment.

D. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 304R requirements and recommendations for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.



E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery to the project site.

F. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.

G. Do not add water to concrete surface during finishing operations.

H. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

I. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete according to recommendations in ACI 309R.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.

J. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off.

K. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading dry-shake surface treatments.

L. Curbs and Gutters: Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified with expansion joints at intervals of approximately [100] feet and tooled contraction joints at 10-foot intervals When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements.

M. Walks: Minimum 4” thick, with expansion joints as shown on plans. Tool edges to rounded profile and finish as noted herein or shown on the drawings. Contractor may utilize sawed contraction joints. Pitch walks ¼” per foot for drainage unless otherwise indicated.

N. Ramps: Construct ramps similar to walks. Comply with applicable ADA Handbook, ANSI A117.1, and local and State codes, ordinances, and details including maximum allowable slope not to exceed 1 foot vertical in 12 foot horizontal, with maximum rise not to exceed 30” between level landings.

O. Steps: Minimum 6” thick at intersection of treads and risers, reinforced as indicated. Slope treads ¼” to nosing, and tool nosings to uniform ½” radius. Finish as specified below.

P. Paving: Minimum 6” thick unless otherwise indicated. Provide expansion joints as indicated on the drawings, and contraction joints at a minimum 12’-0” EWW. Place concrete paving over compacted subgrade as specified in Division 2 Section “Earthwork”. Provide minimum 1% slope for drainage unless otherwise indicated.

Q. Driveway Approaches: Minimum 6” thick, unless otherwise indicated or required by local public works standards or building codes. Construct to radius of flare indicated, and taper or warp into alignment with adjacent curbs, gutters, and walks. Place approaches over compacted subgrade as specified in Division 2 section “Earthwork.” Refer to drawing and details for any reinforcing requirements.



R. Slip-Form Pavers: When automatic machine placement is used for pavement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce pavement to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as required for formed pavement.

Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of paver machine during operations.

S. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength.

T. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical

accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.

U. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 deg F. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover reinforcement steel with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms, reinforcement steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

V. Wet-Weather Placement: Do not begin to place concrete while rain, sleet, or snow is falling unless adequate protection is provided and, when required, acceptance of protection is obtained.

3.07 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.

C. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.

1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.

2. Medium-to-Course-Textured Broom Finish: For use on roadways and streets only. Provide a coarse finish by striating float-finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.



3. Burlap Drag Finish: For use on roadways and streets only. Provide a course finish by dragging a clean, unused, section of burlap fabric longitudinally across pavement.

3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and follow the recommendations of ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows:

1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for

curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.08 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 1/4 inch. 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch. 4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch. 5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch. 6. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch. 7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length of

dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches. 8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. 9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.



A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement.

B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least 1 composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for

each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive strength test, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete mix.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each set of compressive strength specimens.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise indicated. Cylinders shall be molded and stored for laboratory-cured test specimens unless field-cured test specimens are required.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd.. One specimen shall be tested at 7 days and two specimens at 28 days; one specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required.

7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, current operations shall be evaluated and corrective procedures shall be provided for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

C. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if average of any 3 consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).

D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Owner’s Representative, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in pavement, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Owner’s Representative, but will not be used as the sole basis for approval or rejection.

F. Additional Tests: Testing agency shall make additional tests of the concrete when test results indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Owner’s Representative. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.

G. Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.



H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor’s expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.010 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet requirements in this Section.

B. Drill test cores where directed by Owner’s Representative when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 32 13 73

CONCRETE PAVEMENT JOINT SEALERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Expansion and contraction joints within cement concrete pavement. 2. Joints between cement concrete and buildings and structures. 3. Surface preparation including primers. 4. Joint backup material.


1. Division 32 Section "Concrete Pavement" for constructing joints in concrete pavement.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer.

C. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for sealants.

E. Warranty: As required by Division 1 – Warranty Section: Contractor agrees to repair or replace joint sealers (including labor, materials, and any necessary associated costs) which fail to perform as watertight joints; or fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance or general durability; or appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified by submitted manufacturer’s data as an inherent quality of material for exposure indicated. Provide warranty signed by Installer and Contractor.

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary CONCRETE PAVEMENT JOINT SEALERS OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 321373 - 1

100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Work under this section shall be subject to all applicable provisions of federal, state and local rules and regulations.

B. Applicator: Company specializing in application of sealants with five (5) years minimum experience and be acceptable to manufacturer. Manufacturer’s field representative shall visit site and make suggestions.

C. Adhesion Tests: Prior to any sealant application, perform adhesion tests as directed by sealant manufacturer’s technical representative.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Install sealant materials in strict accordance with all safety and weather conditions recommended by manufacturer, product literature, or Material Safety Data Sheets. Do not proceed with installation of sealants under adverse weather conditions, or when temperatures are below or above manufacturer’s recommended limitations for installation. Proceed only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable for proper cure and development of high-early bond strength. Wherever joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations, install elastomeric sealants only when temperatures are in lower third of manufacturer’s recommended installation temperature range.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2.02 COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Approved Sealants:

For each application, provide the grade of sealant (non-sag, self-leveling, no-track knife grade preformed, etc.) as recommended by the manufacturer for the particular condition of installation (location, joint shape, ambient temperature, and similar conditions), to achieve the best possible overall performance. Grades specified herein are for normal condition of installation.

1. Silicone Sealant: ASTM C-920-79, Type S, Class 25, Grade NS. DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary CONCRETE PAVEMENT JOINT SEALERS OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 321373 - 2


2. Two-Component (plus color) polyurethane low-modulus, non-sag sealant: ASTM C920-79, Type M, Class 25, Grade NS.

3. Two-Component (plus color) polyurethane self leveling sealant: ASTM C920-79, Type M, Class 25, Grade P.

2.03 HOT-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Single-component formulation complying with ASTM D 3405 or D1190.

1. Refer to CDOT Standard Specification, Section 702.06 for hot-poured joint and crack sealant material requirements.

2. Refer to CDOT Standard Specification, Section 408.01-408.03 and 412.18 for joint and crack sealant installation requirements.

2.04 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS

A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.

C. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and width required to control sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant.

D. Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.

2.05 PRIMERS

A. Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from manufacturers recommendations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience.



Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

3.03 JOINT DESIGN

A. Sealant depth is measured at the center (thin) section of sealant bead.

B. Install sealants to depths and widths as recommended by sealant manufacturer and as shown on the drawings. Also, conform to the following general limitations if not in conflict with sealant manufacturer’s recommendations.

1. For sidewalks, pavements and similar joints subject to traffic and other abrasion and indentation exposures, fill joints to a depth equal to 75% of joint width, but neither more than 5/8 inch deep nor less than 3/8 inch deep.

2. For normal moving joints not subject to traffic, fill joints to a depth equal to 50% of joint width, but neither more than 5/8 inch deep nor less than ¼ inch deep.

3. Depth of sealant must not exceed width of joint. 4. Sealant joints shall not be less than ¼ inch in width and ¼ inch in depth. 5. Sealant joints shall not exceed 2 inches in width in a single application.

3.04 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Preparation work shall result in clean surfaces in all areas where sealant is to be adhered. Such surfaces shall be free of any old sealant, contaminants and impurities which are deleterious to bonding or adhesion of primers or sealant.

B. Clean ferrous metals of all rust, mill scale and coatings by wire brush or grinding. Any equipment used to remove rust shall be free of oil contaminants.

C. Wire brush masonry joint surfaces, then blow clean with oil free compressed air.

D. Apply primer per manufacturer’s recommendations. Allow primer to dry prior to applying sealant.

E. Do not caulk joints until they are clean, dry, and free of dust, loose mortar, old sealant, foreign matter or other bond inhibiting materials, and in compliance with requirements of manufacturer of materials, details shown on drawings, and specific requirements of other sections of specifications.

3.05 JOINT BACKING

A. Use joint backing to control depth of joint to specified thickness.

B. Select joint backing size to allow for 25% compression of backing when inserted into joint.

C. Where shown on drawings where depth of joint will not permit use of joint backing, or wherever recommended by sealant manufacturer, install bond-breaker tape to prevent three-sided adhesion.

D. Do not leave voids or gaps between ends of joint backing units.

3.06 APPLICATION/INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANT

A. Apply sealants neatly, in a good and workmanlike manner which meets following minimum requirements or standards. Specific instructions of manufacturer must also be followed.



B. Apply sealant using a gun with proper size nozzles. Use sufficient pressure to fill all voids and joints solid to backup material, with complete wetting of all joint bond surfaces.

C. Applied sealant shall form a full, smooth, uniform bead, free of ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets and embedded impurities.

D. After joint has been completely filled with sealant, neatly tool joint sealant to eliminate air pockets or voids, and to provide a smooth, slightly concave, neat appearing finish, with sealant surface slightly below adjoining surfaces. Wetting of finished surface with not be allowed.

E. Where horizontal joints are located between a horizontal surface and vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove, so joint will not trap moisture and dirt.

F. Protect adjacent surfaces and systems from sealant material. Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

G. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

H. Tooling of Non-Sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

I. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations indicated.

3.07 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.08 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.

3.09 JOB SITE CLEAN-UP

A. Sealant applicator must remove all excess materials from job site.



B. Leave all surrounding areas where joint sealant has been applied free of excess sealant, debris and foreign substances.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 32 15 40

CRUSHER FINES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install: 1. Crusher fines material.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Section 31 00 00: Earthwork. B. Section 32 91 13: Fine Grading and Soil Preparation.


A. Source Quality Control: 1. Gravel Materials: Subject to inspection and acceptance. Provide source location and

sample prior to delivery to site. 2. Inspection will be made periodically during path installation, and at project completion

and end of warranty period. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Stockpile delivered gravel near installation location. B. Material will be inspected upon delivery to site. C. Immediately remove unacceptable material from site.


A. Visit site to determine existing conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Gravel Materials: to be grey, see plan for location, to the following properties:

1. Sieve % Passing 3/8" 100% #4 85% #8 63% #16 50% #30 40% #50 31% #100 21% #200 12.4%

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary CRUSHER FINES OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 32 15 40 - 1


B. Provide 4” total depth crusher fines. Color to be buff “Butter Breeze” or approved equal. C. Filter fabric: lightweight, nonwoven geotextile suitable for soil separation and weed barrier,

US 100NW by US Fabrics or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Visit site to determine existing conditions. B. Centerline of track to follow existing graded alignment per plans. Obtain Landscape

Architect approval for any deviations. C. Grades: Verify grades of crusher fines area to not exceed 5%.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utilities: Protect from damage any existing utilities in or near the project area. B. General: Do not perform work when existing site conditions will not provide satisfactory

results. C. Clearing and Grubbing: Per Section 31 10 00. D. Excavate 4" deep bed. Remove soils from excavation on sides of track area. E. Grade subgrade level and compact with sheepsfoot roller to 95% optimum density, in

accordance with AASHTO T-99. Contractor is not required to scarify and re-compact the next 6" below this sub-grade level. 1. Inspect exposed surface for unsuitable soil, areas of loose or soft soil, disturbed or

moist soils.

F. Excavated sections and adjacent areas shall be reasonably smooth, compacted, and free from irregular surface changes. No geotextile fabric shall be applied until subgrade is approved by Owner’s Representative.

G. Install metal edger per details and manufacturer’s specifications. Locate per plans.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Compacted Gravel Crusher Fines: 1. Spread crusher fines. 2. Rake gravel crusher fines to uniform 5"-6" depth with 2% cross slope or as indicated

on plans. 3. Immediately roll gravel material and excavated area with a roller of sufficient weight

to compact crusher fines into smooth firm surface. Rolling shall continue until all material is firmly locked and keyed together. The appearance and surface shall be uniform with all ridges removed. Surface shall not vary more than 1/2" when measured with a ten foot straight edge applied parallel to the centerline. Correct any variation by loosening, reshaping and re-rolling. When finished, compacted area shall be a minimum of 4" deep in all locations. Do not use a vibratory roller. a. In any areas where there are underground pipes, use extreme caution when

compacting to protect pipe. Discuss alternative compaction methods with



Owner’s Representative prior to execution for approval if pipe hazard is anticipated.

4. At completion of surfacing, remove excess spoils from along edges. 5. Ensure positive drainage away from area and into new drainage structures or swales.

3.04 CLEANING

A. General: Contractor shall be responsible for daily removal of mud and debris from road surfaces on a daily basis. 1. Remove debris and excess materials from site.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for making a reasonable effort to protect the work from vandalism. If barricading or signage is necessary, the Contractor shall request such from the Owner. Owner shall provide any necessary barricading or signage. Any vandalism shall be brought to the attention of the Owner.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 32 17 23

PAVEMENT MARKINGS

PART 1 – GENERAL


Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 specifications Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: Furnish and install all painted lines, directional arrows, handicapped symbols, or similar markings on paved surfaces, as shown on the drawings or specified herein, as required by jurisdiction having authority, and as required to complete the work.

B. Related Work:

1. Division 32 Section “Asphaltic Paving” for materials, installation and minimum requirements. 2. Division 32 Section “Concrete Paving” for materials, installation and minimum requirements.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Reference Standards: Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more stringent requirements are described herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents.

B. City and County of Denver Standard Specifications for Design and Construction, latest edition.

C. Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, current edition.

D. “Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices” latest edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s published descriptive literature and complete specifications for products specified herein.


A. Qualifications: Pavement marking applicator shall be regularly engaged in this type of work, and shall provide adequate, experienced manpower and proper equipment to complete the work.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions of Colorado State Department of Highways Specification Sections 627, 708, and 713.

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary PAVEMENT MARKINGS OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 321723 - 1



A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers, with labels intact and legible.


A. Environmental Requirements: Do not apply pavement marking when ambient air and pavement surface temperature is below 40°F for paint and below 50°F for epoxy and thermoplastic marking materials, or when moisture in any form is present on the pavement surface.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Traffic Marking Paint: Alkyd-based, lead and chromate free, ready-mixed, cold-applied traffic marking paint complying with FS TT-P-115E and AASHTO M-248, Type N or F as determined by traffic requirements, white or yellow color as designated on the plans for striping and lane markings, white and blue at international handicapped parking symbols. Acceptable products include Devoe “Traffic Line” and Sherwin Williams “ProMar Traffic Marking Paint.”

B. Thermoplastic Marking Material: Reflectorized thermoplastic pavement striping materials composed of pigment, filler, resins, and glass reflecting spheres, conforming to AASHTO M-249, white or yellow as designated on the plans or as required by applicable public works requirements.

C. Preformed Thermoplastic Pavement Marking: Markings shall consist of a resilient white or yellow thermoplastic product with glass beads uniformly distributed. Capable of being affixed to bituminous pavement by heating and applied to concrete per manufacture recommendations.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work of this Section will be performed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of work implies acceptance of all areas and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Allow fresh pavement surfaces to weather at least 30 days prior to application of traffic marking paint.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Traffic Marking Paint: Unless otherwise indicated, apply traffic marking paint in nominal 4” wide stripes at the rate of 100 to 110 sf/gal.

B. Patterns and Symbols:



1. Unless otherwise indicated, apply traffic markings in nominal 4” wide stripes with clear and sharp dimensions. See drawings for striping patterns, directional arrows and symbols.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, use yellow markings at lane striping and directional symbols, white markings at parking striping and white and blue markings at international handicapped symbols.

3. Comply with ANSI 117.1 and ADA requirements for graphic symbols, stall widths, and access aisles at handicapped parking spaces. Provide approved templates for symbols and directional arrows.

C. Thermoplastic Marking Material:

1. Apply in molten state or by flame-spray methods as applicable for material type. 2. Apply molten material to uniform dimension and line thickness of 1/8” to 3/16”. 3. Apply flame-spray powder at the rate of 14 to 21 oz per 30 seconds.

END OF SECTION



DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary ALUMINUM CANTILEVER GATE SYSTEM OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 32 31 00 - 1

SECTION 32 31 00

ALUMINUM CANTILEVER GATE SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. The contractor shall provide all labor, materials, and appurtenances necessary for installation of the industrial cantilever gate system defined herein at (specify project site).


A. The manufacturer shall supply a total industrial ornamental aluminum cantilever gate system of the Ameristar® TransPort II design, Majestic style. The system shall include all components (i.e., tracks, uprights, bracing, pickets, hardware, fittings and fasteners) required.


A. The contractor shall provide laborers and supervisors who are thoroughly familiar with the type of construction involved and materials and techniques specified.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. ASTM B117 - Practice for Operating Salt-Spray (Fog) Apparatus. B. ASTM B221 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and

Tubes.

C. ASTM D523 - Test Method for Specular Gloss.

D. ASTM D822 - Practice for Conducting Tests on Paint and Related Coatings and Materials using Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Light and Water Exposure Apparatus.

E. ASTM D1654 - Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to

Corrosive Environments.

F. ASTM D2244 - Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates.

G. ASTM D2794 - Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid

Deformation (Impact).

H. ASTM D3359 - Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test.

I. ASTM F1184 – Industrial & Commercial Horizontal Slide Gates 1.05 SUBMITTAL

A. The manufacturer’s submittal package consisting of gate elevations, hardware details, and installation details, shall be submitted prior to installation.



1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE

A. Upon receipt at the job site, all materials shall be checked to ensure that no damage occurred during shipping or handling. Materials shall be stored in such a manner to ensure proper ventilation and drainage, and to protect against damage, weather, vandalism, and theft.

PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. All industrial ornamental aluminum cantilever gates shall conform to the Ameristar® TransPort II gate system, Majestic style, manufactured by Ameristar Fence Products, Inc., in Tulsa, Oklahoma. The project gate schedule shall include the following additional information for each cantilever gate included in the project scope: (specify nominal opening size range in feet) opening, and (specify size and shape of posts) gate posts.

2.02 MATERIAL

A. The materials used for cantilever gate framing (i.e., uprights, diagonal braces and pickets or pales) shall be manufactured from ASTM B221 aluminum (designation 6063-T-6) with a yield strength of 25,000 PSI, a tensile strength of 30,000 PSI and a standard mill finish. The TransPort® Fast-Trak™ rails shall be manufactured from ASTM B221 aluminum (designation 6063-T-6) with minimum yield strength of 25,000 PSI, a tensile strength of 30,000 PSI and a standard mill finish.

B. Material for diagonal bracing and uprights shall be 2” sq. x ¼” aluminum. The design of the

top and bottom enclosed track shall conform to the manufacturers 5” x 2” Fast-Trak system. Material for pickets shall be 1” x 1/8” wall aluminum.

C. Internal roller truck assembly shall be self-aligning swivel ball-and-socket type running on

four bearing wheels. Internal roller truck assembly shall be affixed to the hanger bracket by means of a 5/8” diameter industrial-grade rod end/center bolt, with a minimum static load rating of 10,000 pounds. Attachment of the center bolt to the truck body shall be by means of a swivel joint to ensure equivalent and consistent loading on all bearing wheels and internal track surfaces throughout the travel of the gate.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Pickets, enclosed track, uprights and diagonal bracing shall be pre-drilled and labeled for easy assembly. All components shall be precut to specified lengths.

B. Top and bottom rail extrusions shall be mechanically fastened to vertical uprights and

reinforced with diagonal braces, as required by drawing. C. The manufactured components shall be subjected to the Ameristar thermal stratification

coating process (high-temperature, in-line, multi-stage, and multi-layer) including, as a minimum, a six-stage pretreatment/wash and an electrostatic spray application of a polyester finish. The topcoat shall be a “no-mar” TGIC polyester powder coat finish with a minimum thickness of 2 mils (0.0508mm). The color shall be (specify Black, Bronze, White, or Desert Sand). The stratification-coated framework shall be capable of meeting the performance requirements for each quality characteristic shown in Table 1.



Table 1 – Coating Performance Requirements Quality Characteristics ASTM Test Method Performance Requirements Adhesion D3359 – Method B Adhesion (Retention of Coating)

over 90% of test area (Tape and knife test).

Corrosion Resistance B117, D714 & D1654 Corrosion Resistance over 3,500 hours (Scribed per D1654; failure mode is accumulation of 1/8” coating loss from scribe or medium #8 blisters).

Impact Resistance D2794 Impact Resistance over 60 inch lb. (Forward impact using 0.625” ball).

Weathering Resistance D822 D2244, D523 (60˚ Method) Weathering Resistance over 1,000 hours (Failure mode is 60% loss of gloss or color variance of more than 3 delta-E color units).

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. All new gate installations shall be laid out by the contractor in accordance with the construction plans.

B. All hardware shall be installed in accordance with the Transport installation instructions.

Transport cantilever gates shall be installed so they comply with current ASTM F2200 & UL325 standards.

C. Gate stops shall be installed on each track in a way that conforms to current ASTM F2200

standards. 3.02 GATE INSTALLATION

A. Gate post shall be spaced according to specified gate elevation. Posts shall be set in concrete footers having a minimum depth of 48” with a minimum diameter of 12” (Note: In some cases, local restrictions of freezing weather conditions may require a greater depth). The “Earthwork” and “Concrete” sections of this specification shall govern material requirements for the concrete footer. Posts setting by other methods such as plated posts or grouted core-drilled footers are permissible only if shown by engineering analysis to be sufficient in strength for the intended application.

3.03 CLEANING

A. The contractor shall clean the jobsite of excess materials; post-hole excavations shall be scattered uniformly away from posts.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary CHAIN LINK FENCES OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 32 31 13 - 1

SECTION 32 31 13

CHAIN LINK FENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental

Conditions and Division 1-Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Chain link fencing as shown on the drawings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's technical data, and installation instructions for metal fencing. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide chain link fences as complete units produced by a single manufacturer including necessary erection accessories, fittings, fastenings and gates.

B. Except where higher standards are indicated conform to "Product Manual" published by

CLFMI for materials and ASTM F567 for installation. B. Display of the fence manufacturer or installer’s name on completed chain link fencing is

prohibited. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL FENCING

A. Galvanized finish.

B. Fabric: No. 9 ga. (0.148") steel wires, 2" mesh, with both selvages knuckled galvanized. Backstop fabric shall be 6 ga. 1. Furnish one-piece fabric widths for fencing up to 12' high. 2. Fabric finish, galvanized, ASTM A392, Class I, with not less than 1.2 oz. zinc per sq.

ft.

D. Framework: Galvanized steel, ASTM A120, with not less than 1.8 oz. zinc per sq. ft. for galvanized fence.

E. Hardware and Accessories: Galvanized, ASTM A153, with zinc weights per Table I for

galvanized fence.

2.02 FRAMING AND ACCESSORIES

A. Space as shown on plans and sections. B. Posts



1. End, corner and pull posts a. Schedule 40, 2.875” O.D. minimum for up to 8’-0” height b. Schedule 40, 3.5” O.D. minimum for posts to 10’ height

2. Line posts: Schedule 40, 2.375” O.D. minimum 3. Gate Posts

a. Single gates: Schedule 40, 2.875” O.D. minimum b. Double gates: Schedule 40, 3.5” O.D. minimum

4. Post caps a. Line posts: Weather tight closure caps with opening for top rails b. Terminal posts: Weather tight closure caps

5. Provide escutcheon or slope grout to provide positive drainage away from pipe.

C. Rails 1. Minimum 1.66” O.D., Schedule 40. 2. Expansion sleeves are prohibited unless approved by DPS Project Manager. 3. Provide bottom rails at backstop and on backstop wings. 4. Intermediate rails are required for fences over 4’-0” in height.

D. Gates

1. Perimeter frame: 1.90” O.D. minimum, Schedule 40 2. Weld corners of frames and touch-up weld spots with black coating. 3. Hardware

a. Commercial grade b. Hinges (Tack weld all latches)

1) Non-lift off 2) 180 degree swing 3) One pair (minimum) up to and including 6’-0” height 4) One and one-half pair (minimum) on gates over six feet 6’-0” height 5) Weld in place. Bolt or screw attachment of hinges is prohibited.

c. Latches (Tack weld all latches) 1) Padlock eye 2) Operation either side 3) Single gate: Fork type 4) Double gate: Cane bolt/drop pin assembly mounted to gate, vertical

frame, designed to engage strike/ground sleeve that is embedded 18” minimum in concrete (inactive leaf)

5) Weld in place. Bolt or screw attachment of latches is prohibited. 6) ECE gate closer for 4’ wide gate: Locinox Gate Closer, VCSL by Hoover

Fence Company, 800-355-2335. d. Cantilever gates

1) Solid track wheels, cast iron 2) 2 3/8” Minimum O.D. Rail / Frame, Schedule 40 3) 4” minimum support posts 4) If gate is in play area, provide a protective shield over the rollers.

E. Backstops shall be fabricated with welded joints. F. Accessories

1. Truss rods: 3/8” diameter with turnbuckle and post anchors 2. Tension bar: Full height, ¼” x ¾” (minimum) 3. Tension clamps: 14 gauge x 1” (minimum) 4. Tension wire: 9 gauge (minimum) 5. Tie wires: 9 gauge (minimum)

G. Concrete



1. Portland cement, ASTM C150; aggregates, ASTM C33; and clean water 2. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of

3000 psi. 3. Mix shall use at least five (5) sacks of cement per cubic yard and 1” maximum size

aggregate. 4. Mix shall have a maximum slump of three inches (3”) and between 2% and 4%

entrained air.

H. Post Brace Assembly: Manufacturer's standard adjustable brace at both sides of corner and pull posts, with horizontal brace located at mid-height of fabric.

I. Use. 1.66" OD pipe for horizontal brace. J. Stretcher Bars and Bands: One piece stretcher bars in lengths equal to full height of fabric,

with minimum cross-section of 0.188" x 0.75". Provide one stretcher bar for each gate and end post, and 2 for each corner and pull post, except where fabric is integrally woven into post.

K. Space stretcher bar bands not over 12" o.c., to secure stretcher bars to end, corner, pull,

and gate posts. All backstop tension bands to be 1/8" x 1" heavy duty. L. Refinishing: Following any damage to post coating, immediately refinish with two coats of

plasticoating or rustolium to match original finish. M. Gate Accessories: Industrial malleable ball and socket hinge. Malleable gate fork latch for

man gates. Industrial latch pressed steel latch assembly for double gates including plunger rod. Industrial gate ells.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Do not begin installation and erection before final grading is completed, unless otherwise permitted.

B. For fencing attached to concrete, do not begin work before these materials have been

completed, cured and have attained their design strengths. C. Excavation: Drill holes for post foundations of diameters and spacing shown, in firm,

undistributed or compacted soil. D. Post Spacing:

1. General: 10’ on center (maximum). All rolling gates: 5” on center (maximum). 2. Include composite lumber on field side of backstop fence (Trex type).

E. Post foundations:

1. Concrete shall be used for post foundations. The depths listed below are minimum embedment depth of the fence post in concrete for fences without wind screens. The foundation depth shall provide an additional 6” of concrete below the embedment depth. a. 4’ & 6’ Fence Heights: Minimum 12” diameter by 42” deep. b. 12’ Fence Heights: Minimum 18” diameter by 42” deep. c. 16’ Fence Heights: Minimum 24” diameter by 4’ deep. d. 24’ Fence Heights: Minimum 24” diameter by 6’ deep.



F. Gates and other access locations

1. Clear opening <5’-0”, single gate, unless otherwise noted. 2. Clear opening , 10’-0” and > 5’-0”, double gate. 3. Clear opening 2/3-1/3 gate – vehicle/pedestrian combo gate. 4. The type of gate or vehicle barrier structure for any access opening in excess of 10’

shall be coordinated with the DPS Project Manager. Avoid larger openings wherever possible. Preliminary gate types are as follows: a. Clear opening < 20’-0” and > 10’-0”, rolling gate b. Clear opening > 10’-0”, cantilever gate

G Framework: Setting Posts: Center and align posts in holes 3" above bottom of excavation. H. Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Check each post for

vertical and top alignment, and hold in position during placement and finishing operations. Bring top elevation of concrete to 5" below pavement grade except where otherwise shown and trowel smooth with wash away from post.

I. Pour curb or mow strip to grade indicated. Trowel smooth. Clean posts. Cut one

perpendicular control joint to the center of each post. J. Top Rails: Run rail continuously through post caps. Use of couplings is acceptable. K. Center Rails: Provide center rails only where shown. Install in one piece between posts

and flush with post on fabric side, using special offset fittings where necessary. L. Brace Assemblies: Install braces so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper

tension. M. Fabric: Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Install fabric on security

side of fence, or on the active side for playfields, and anchor to framework so that fabric remains in tension after pulling force is released.

N. Stretcher Bars: Thread through or clamp to fabric 4" o.c., and secure to posts with metal

bands spaced 12" o.c. O. Tension Bar Clamps: 15” o.c. (maximum). P. Truss Rods: Provide at all terminations and changes in directions, from top of nearest line

post to bottom of terminal or corner post. Q. Tie Wires: Use U-shaped wire, conforming to diameter of pipe to which attached, clasping

pipe and fabric firmly with ends twisted at least 2 full turns. Bend and put wire to minimize hazard to persons or clothing. Leave no ends exposed past fabric thickness. Line Posts: 12” o.c. (maximum). Rails: 24” o.c. (maximum).

R. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and hardware bolts on side of fence opposite

fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts; file smooth. S. Backstop Attachments: Miter all post to rail connections. Do not crimp pipe. Continuously

weld all attachments. T. Tension Wire:

1. Tension wire shall be secured with hog rings at 24 o.c. minimum in all applications.



2. All fencing fabric: Continuous length (no splices permitted), secured with hogs rings to fabric at 2nd diamond, 4” from bottom.

3. Fencing over 4’0” in height; additional tension wire, continuous length, secured with hog rings to fabric at 2’-0” above bottom of fabric. Hog rings should be closed with hog ring pliers to ensure there is no overlap with exposed, sharp edges.

4. Backstops: Continuous length, secured with hog rings to fabric at bottom, 18” and 36” above bottom.

5. Continuous welded pipe may be used in liew of tension wire.

U. Remove sharp edges and protrusions.

V. Warranty: 1. During the period of twenty-four (24) months after the final payment of work, make all

necessary repairs or replacements, due to defective workmanship or materials. Any corrections required to meet this specification shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

W. Display of the fence manufacturer or installer’s name on completed chain link fencing is

prohibited.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary UNIT MASONRY RETAINING WALLS OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 32 32 19 - 1

SECTION 32 32 19

UNIT MASONRY RETAINING WALLS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnishing and installing modular concrete block retaining wall system and modular concrete block fencing system.


A. Section 32 13 13: Concrete.

B. Section 32 91 13: Fine Grading and Soil Preparation. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Inspect masonry units upon delivery and handle carefully to avoid chipping and breakage. Store on pallets or concrete slab until ready for use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRECAST BLOCK UNITS

A. AB Wall Stones and AB Fence System Stones by Allan Block as specified on the drawings. 2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Pile and post concrete, concrete grout, steel reinforcement, construction adhesive, and shimming material per manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Wall Rock: material must be well graded compactable aggregate, 0.25 in. to 1.5 in., with no more than 10% passing the #200 sieve.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Before beginning work, inspect wall location for proper grades and elevations. Report unsatisfactory conditions immediately to General Contractor.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare the base for the wall units according to manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall at locations and to dimensions shown on plans, following manufacturer's instructions.

B. Do not exceed a height of 3' on any portion of the wall.


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary UNIT MASONRY RETAINING WALLS OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 32 32 19 - 2

C. Top of wall to be level at elevation called for on plans.

D. All joints shall be plumb or level.

E. Allowable tolerances: 1. Maximum variation from level or grades:

a. 1/4" per foot b. 1/2" in 10 feet c. 1" for the total length

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary UNDERGROUND SPRINKLER SYSTEM OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 32 84 00 - 1

SECTION 32 84 00

UNDERGROUND SPRINKLER SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Underground Sprinkler System, installation and testing. B. Furnish all work and materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation and services

necessary for and incidental to perform all operations in connection with the installation of “Landscape Irrigation”, complete, as shown on Drawings and/or specified herein.

C. The work in this section shall be coordinated with all underground utilities and trades responsible

for their installation. D. The Contractor shall contact the Owner and inform him seventy-two hours in advance of any

water interruption that is required. E. Related Sections and Documents

1. Section 01 23 00: Alternates, Unit Prices and Allowances 2. Section 01 78 23: Operating and Maintenance Data 3. Section 31 23 33: Trench Excavation and Backfill

1.02 ALTERNATES/ALTERNATIVES

A. Project alternates are to be used only with the approval of DPS. Work identified as “Alternates” shall be subject to the review and evaluation of the DPS Project Manager and may be selected for addition to or deletion from the Contract for Construction. Comply with requirements of Section 01 03 00-Alternates, Unit Prices and Allowances.


A. No requests for substitutions will be considered after the Bid Opening. B. Contractors and/or suppliers may submit requests for approval of equal products or materials.

Written requests shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer (A/E) for review within the specified time BEFORE THE BID.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data. Provide submittals in the following format:

ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER MODEL NUMBER

1. pressure supply line Pipe, Inc Schedule 40 2. Lawn head XYZ Co. B-44 3. Etc. Etc. Etc.

B. Quality assurance data

1. Submit manufacturer's certification that plastic pipe and fittings comply with specification requirements.

2. Submit data confirming that electrical wiring, control motors and electrical devices are U.L. listed.

3. Prior to beginning work, Contractor shall certify that the existing water pressure matches the design pressure. Provide pressure gage calibration records. Provide written documentation



of existing pressure and pressure gauge calibration records to Owner prior to beginning work.

C. Project record documents

1. Record dimensioned locations and depths for each of the following on a record drawing set of prints. Maintain for this purpose only. a. Point of Connection b. Sprinkler Pressure Line. Provide dimensions for each 100 l.f. (maximum) along each

routing, and for each change in direction. c. Resilient Seat Gate Valves d. Sprinkler Control Valves e. Quick Coupling Valves f. Control Wire Routing g. Sleeves h. Other related items as may be directed by the A/E or DPS Project Manager.

2. Locate dimensions from two permanent reference points (building, monuments, sidewalks, curbs or pavements). a. Dimension accurately at the same scale used on the original drawings, or larger. b. Notes and dimension lettering must be legible.

3. Record changes from the contract drawings, including changes in pressure, and non-pressure lines.

4. Maintain information daily. Keep drawings at the site at all times and available for review of the A/E and the DPS Project Manager.

5. Irrigation legend shall be changed to accurately reflect the irrigation equipment installed, if not the same as originally specified on the contract documents. This includes flow rates, effective spray diameter/radius and operating pressure of sprinkler heads.

6. Provide record drawings in AutoCAD format per industry CAD standards.

D. Operation and maintenance data 1. Provide bound manuals detailing operation and maintenance requirements for irrigation

systems per Division 1 requirements. a. Provide descriptions of installed materials and systems in sufficient detail to permit

maintenance personnel to understand, operate and maintain equipment. 2. Provide the following in each manual

a. Index sheet, stating irrigation contractor's name, address, telephone number and name of person to contact

b. Duration of warranty period c. Equipment list providing the following for each item

1) Manufacturer's name 2) Make and model number 3) Name and address of local manufacturer's distributor 4) Spare parts list 5) Detailed operating and maintenance instructions for equipment

d. Completed and approved controller chart 1.05 CONTROLLER CHARTS

A. Do not prepare charts until record drawings have been approved by the DPS Project Manager. B. Provide one controller chart for each automatic controller installed. C. Following approval of controller charts by the DPS Project Manager, they shall be laminated,

including schedule of each head, etc.



1. Sample of Controller Charts:

1. S. Field Rotors Colfax side

2. S. Field Rotors Center

3. S. Field Rotors N end

4. S. Field Rotors E side

5. Sprays S.E. Sidewalk

6. Colfax tree RWS

D. Install charts inside a pocket inside the controller cabinet door. E. Charts must be completed and approved prior to final acceptance of irrigation system.


A. Qualifications/Certifications 1. Pipe installer qualifications: Each installer shall be trained by the manufacturer's

representative in correct joint techniques prior to performing work. 2. Superintendent: A superintendent satisfactory to the A/E shall be present on the site at all

times during progress of work and possess certification as a Certified Irrigation Technician (CIT). a. The superintendent shall not be changed, except with the consent of the A/E. b. The superintendent shall have a minimum of five (5) years of experience installing

irrigation systems of comparable size and complexity. B. Explanation of drawings: Due to the scale of drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets,

fittings, sleeves, etc., which may be required. Drawings are diagrammatic. Carefully investigate the conditions affecting the work and plan accordingly, furnishing fittings, etc., as may be required to meet conditions. Install the work in a manner to avoid conflicts between irrigation systems, planting and architectural features.

C. Manufacturer's directions: Manufacturer’s directions and detailed installation drawings shall

be followed. Where manufacturer’s instructions are in conflict with the contract documents, the Contractor shall bring these conflicts to the attention of the A/E and DPS Project Manager prior to construction.

D. The Contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation system when it is obvious in the field that

obstructions, grade differences or discrepancies in dimensions exist that might not have been considered during the design. Such obstructions or differences shall be brought to the attention of the A/E prior to starting work.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Warranty the irrigation system to for a period of twenty four (24) months. Also see General

Conditions of the contract and Division 1 requirements. B. Correct problems which develop in the system due to faulty materials or workmanship

during the warranty period. C. Provide written report to DPS Project Manager of warranty work performed. D. Make repairs and replacement within 2 calendar days when notified. E. DPS reserves the right to make temporary repairs during warranty and landscape



maintenance periods as necessary to keep systems in operating condition without voiding the Contractor’s warranty, nor relieving the Contractor of his responsibility.

F. Contractor shall provide “winterization” and “spring startup” for the system during the warranty

and landscape maintenance periods. Notify the DPS Project Manager before performing winterization or spring startup.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL PIPING

A. Pressure supply lines downstream of the point-of-connection: CL-200 PVC

1. Pressure supply lines 3” and larger: Ring tight for mainline 2. Mainlines: Ring tight fittings

B. Non-Pressure lines: CL-160 PVC or CL-200 PVC. See plans. C. Water supply lines 3” and below (including pipe through backflow preventer): Type K copper,

rigid; silver brazed underground fittings, solder above ground fittings, ASTM B-88 D. Sleeving pipe

1. PVC, Class CL-200 2. Sleeves shall be at least two (2) pipe sizes larger than line carried. 3. Sleeve wiring separately in 1-½”minimum pipe

2.02 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Identification Markings: Identify pipe with the following indelible markings.

1. Manufacturer's Name 2. Nominal Pipe Size 3. Schedule or Class 4. Pressure Ratings in p.s.i. 5. NFS (National Sanitation Foundation) Seal of Approval 6. Date of Extrusion

B. Pipe (Solvent Weld type)

1. Manufactured from virgin polyvinyl chloride compound in accordance with ASTM D 2241 and ASTM D 1784, cell classification 12454-B, Type I, Grade I

2. Fittings: Standard weight, Schedule 40, injection molded PVC Comply with ASTM D 1784 and D 2466, cell classification 12454-B

3. Threads, where required: Injection molded type 4. Tees and Ells: Side gated 5. Threaded Nipples: ASTM D 2464, Schedule 80 with molded threads 6. Joint Cement: Depending on time of year when installation is performed, use type as

recommended by manufacturer of pipe and fittings to match temperature conditions. 7. Weld-on Cement

a. 710 up to 2" (excluding Sch 80) b. 705 up to 6" (excluding Sch 80) c. 711 up to 12" (including Sch 80) d. 725 up to 6" (hot and cold, under 40° F)

8. Joint Primer: Type recommended by manufacturer of pipe and fittings. 9. Weld-on Primers

a. P-68 purple b. P-70 purple



c. P-75 Aqua blue

2.03 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND SERVICE

A. Line voltage 1. Contractor shall provide line voltage electrical supply and connections to irrigation

equipment. 2. Color code wires from building to controller as follows

a. Hot: Black b. Common: White c. Switch: Red d. Ground: Green

B. Low voltage

1. Connection between controller and remote control valves: Direct burial #14 AWG UF with PE jacket

2. Splices, where permitted a. Waterproof, using 3M DBY splice kit for connection (min. 300’) b. Contain in an accessible valve box. 10” round or standard branded valve box with

“WS” branded on cover c. Direct bury splices are must be in boxes.

3. Wire sizing shall be according to manufacturer’s recommendations, in no case less than #14 AWG.

C. Conduit

1. Underground between controller and mainline trench: Schedule 80 PVC 2. Exterior above ground: PVC coated rigid metal conduit

D. Color code wires from controller to valves as follows:

1. Spares: Black 2. Controller: Red 3. Spare Common: Yellow 4. Regular Common: White

2.04 MANUAL DRAIN VALVES

A. Buckner 22000 series, or approved equivalent. Drain valves to be installed only in pits before the

backflow preventer. 2.05 ISOLATION VALVES

A. 2” and smaller, unless otherwise indicated: Ball valve, schedule 40, threaded B. 2½” and larger, unless otherwise indicated: Nibco 200 psi Push On-IPS resilient seated gate

valve with 2” square operator nut 2.06 QUICK COUPLING VALVES

A. Buckner Valve or Rainbird quick coupler mounted in valve box per DPS standard detail.

2.07 SWING JOINTS

A. Quick Couplers: Reference DPS Standard Detail. B. All other locations: Lasco or Blu-Lock pre-manufactured swing joints.



2.08 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Hunter ICV B. Spring-loaded, packless diaphragm activated, normally closed type C. Valve Solenoid: 24 volt AC, 4.5 watt maximum, 500 milliamp maximum surge, corrosion

proof, stainless steel construction, epoxy encapsulated to form a single integral unit D. Provide bleeder valve to permit operation in the field without power at the controller. E. Provide isolation valve on supply side of each electric control valve. Reference DPS standard

detail. 2.09 POP-UP SPRINKLER HEADS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Rainbird 1800 SAM-PRS series 2. Hunter Institutional series

B. Plastic body pop-up C. Removable plastic spray nozzle Rainbird “U” series nozzles D. Provide full, half, third or quarter circle pattern nozzles. E. Minimum pop-up height 4" F. Connection: Lasco pre-manufactured swing joint or RainBird SP Series pre-manufactured swing

joint/swing pipe assembly. Swing pipe: ½” poly pipe may be used for swing joints on spray heads only. Swing pipe must be poly pipe, no funny pipe allowed.

2.10 ROTARY SPRINKLER HEADS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hunter, series I-40, I-25 and I-20. B. Type: Internal drive, with spring loaded sprinkler heads.

1. Body and nozzles: stainless steel.

C. Connection: Lasco or Blu-Lock pre-manufactured swing joint D. Part Circle Heads: Variable arc setting capability

2.11 VALVE BOXES

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Carson Brooks Jumbo B. Locking bolt-down type, furnished with lid and 3” gravel sump C. Contractor shall provide gravel. Reference DPS standard detail. D. Jumbo size valves boxes for all valves. Provide extensions as needed. E. Ten inch round boxes or larger if needed to prevent crowding at wire splices, isolation valves

and quick couplers. Reference standard DPS detail.



F. Tamper-proof bolts. Bolts shall be stainless steel button head socket security type. 2.12 ROOT WATERING SYSTEM

A. Acceptable manufacturer: Rainbird, RWS series. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Before irrigation work commences, a pre-installation conference shall be held with the DPS Project Manager, Irrigation Representative, the Contractor, the A/E, the plumbing subcontractor’s on-site representative, the irrigation subcontractor’s on-site representative, the DPS Plumbing Department irrigation specialist and DPS Grounds. 1. The A/E shall provide a meeting report.

B. Notifications by Contractor

1. Notify the A/E and the DPS Project Manager of the following with 72 hours minimum notice. a. System layout b. Trench excavations for depth of trench prior to backfill c. Pressure supply line installation and testing d. Coverage tests: Prior to landscape planting

C. Provide up-to-date as-built irrigation drawings at each meeting, review, test, and inspection.

3.02 WATER PRESSURE

A. Prior to beginning irrigation installation, the Contractor shall verify that the water pressure is as designed, intended and anticipated at the point of connection. 1. Existing pressure shall be checked utilizing a calibrated pressure gage. 2. Written submittal shall be provided prior to start of work. 3. Provide pressure gage calibration records with the submittal. 4. Written confirmation from the DPS Project Manager shall be obtained prior to the start of

work. 3.03 WATER SERVICE CONNECTION

A. Make connections to water sources at locations indicated and make minor changes in location as may be necessary due to actual conditions.

B. Notify the DPS Project Manager 72 hours in advance of water service interruption.

3.04 LAYOUT

A. Piping and equipment layout is indicated diagrammatically on the plans. B. Piping and equipment shall be installed inside planting areas whenever possible. C. Minimize the number of lines below asphalt and concrete. D. Lay out sprinkler heads and other items, and make minor adjustments required due to

differences between actual site conditions and the contract documents. Minor adjustments shall maintain the original design intent.



E. Mark line layout with paint. F. Flag heads and valves. G. System layout shall be approved by the A/E and DPS Project Manager. H. Maintain and protect layout through the completion of trenching.

3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall examine the site for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence and quality of work and shall immediately notify the A/E and the DPS Project Manager, in writing, of items that will adversely affect the work. 1. Verify that final grading has been completed and accepted by the A/E and the DPS Project

Manager, before proceeding with remaining work. 2. Exercise extreme care in excavating and working near existing utilities. Contractor is

responsible for damage to utilities caused by his operations or neglect. Contractor shall obtain locates from utilities for the locations of utilities prior to the start of work. Also refer to other DPS standards regarding utilities.

B. Soil Conditions: Investigate soil type and conditions in which lines are to be installed and allow

for the same in installation. No extras will be allowed due to difficulty in trenching. A soils report is available from the DPS Project Manager for review prior to bid and during construction activities.

C. Commencement of work shall indicate that the Contractor accepts site conditions and water

pressures without recourse. D. Mainlines shall have concrete thrust blocks installed at changes of direction such as tees, ells,

cross tees, etc. 1. Each thrust block shall include a minimum of four cubic feet of 3,000 psi concrete with a

minimum of two square feet poured against undisturbed earth. 2. Wrap pipe, tees, ells, cross tees, etc., with four mil poly or other fabric to prevent bonding of

concrete to the irrigation component. 3. Refer to DPS standard thrust block details.

E. Brass pipe and threaded fittings: Assemble using Teflon tape applied to male threads

only. F. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings: Assemble using Teflon tape applied to male threads

only. G. Tape open ends of pipe during installation to prevent entry of foreign matter into the

system. H. All sprinkler heads shall be installed with Lasco or Blu-Lock pre-manufactured swing

joints. No “funny pipe” is allowed. I. Valve boxes shall be installed with lids level with finished turf elevation, and shall have a

minimum 2” clearance above any piping passing into or through the boxes. J. Irrigation heads

1. Locate approximately as indicated on drawings. Do not exceed the maximum or minimum spacing indicated by manufacturer.

2. Flush lateral lines with full head of water and install heads after hydrostatic test is completed.



3. Install lawn heads to be level with turf or mulch. 4. Keep heads 1-½” below level of adjacent sidewalks and other hardscapes. 5. Locate part-circle heads minimum 6” from walks and 12” from walls, fences, and other

boundaries, unless otherwise indicated or approved by the DPS Project Manager. 6. Allow no backwash or overspray onto walls or fences.

K. Low flow equipment

1. Install low flow valve assembly in separate valve box. 2. Use of drip tubing is prohibited 3. Use specialized tools for installation methods per manufacturer’s recommendations.

L. Locate isolation valves in easily acessible locations. Do not locate above ceilings or in crawl

spaces unless there is easy and direct access.

M. Rain sensor mounting: Refer to standard DPS detail for mounting requirements. 3.06 TRENCHING

A. Also refer to other DPS standards for trenching. B. Following approval of layout, excavate trenches to required depths at pipe invert. C. Maintain bottom of trenches flat to permit piping to be supported on an even grade continuously

for full run. D. Pipes below asphalt and concrete shall be installed in PVC sleeves. Sleeves shall drain to one

end. E. Depth of bury to top of pipe in landscape areas

1. Main lines: 18” to 24” (minimum) 2. Lateral lines: 12” to 16” (minimum)

F. Depth of bury to top of pipe in athletic/sports fields

1. Main lines: 18” to 24 “ (minimum) 2. Lateral lines 16” to 20” (minimum)

G. All trenches in existing grass to remain shall be repaired with full width sod rolls after

proper compaction. No seeding is allowed for these trenches. 3.07 LINE CLEARANCES

A. Provide not less than 6" clearance between each irrigation line and not less than 12" clearance between lines of other trades.

B. Do not install parallel lines directly over any other line.

3.08 BACKFILLING

A. Also refer to other DPS standards for backfilling. B. Do not backfill more than is necessary over any line for stability until it has been inspected and

tested.

The A/E and the DPS Project Manager will then approve the satisfactorily tested and satisfactorily inspected portion of the system for backfill.



C. Place accepted backfill material in 6” loose lifts, and compact each lift. D. Compact trench backfill to a dry density equal to adjacent undisturbed soil. Restore to adjacent

grade, free of dips, depressions, humps or other irregularities. E. Compaction by truck or other vehicles is not permitted. F. Puddle each trench thoroughly and assure that no settlement occurs.

1. Exception: Do not puddle in expansive soil areas indicated by the Soils Report. 3.09 EXISTING TREES

A. Where necessary to excavate adjacent to existing trees, use all possible care to avoid injury to trees and tree roots.

B. Trench no closer than 6’ from trunk of existing trees. C. Cut no roots over 2” diameter; hand trench around roots. D. Hand dig all trenches within drip lines of existing trees.

3.10 EXISTING PAVEMENTS

A. Piping sleeves under pavements may be installed by jacking, boring or by hydraulic driving except as otherwise specified or directed by DPS Project Manager.

B. Obtain permission from DPS Project Manager prior to cutting or breaking existing pavements. C. At locations where cutting is approved, make clean cuts using power saws. Make cuts at

approved locations only. New pipe shall then be installed in sleeves. D. Sidewalk cuts shall remove full sidewalk panels only. No narrow cuts will be allowed. E. Restore affected site and landscape elements to original condition, including grades and

landscaping. Restoration work shall match the original condition, including type, strength, texture and finish.

3.11 SYSTEM FLUSHING

A. After sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, and prior to installation of sprinkler heads, thoroughly flush lines with a full head of water.

B. Do not install sprinkler heads until lines have been flushed to the satisfaction of the A/E and the

DPS Project Manager. 3.12 VALVE BOX IDENTIFICATION

A. Brand the box identification number with characters from the “Brand New Industries Inc.” value box branding kit. This will include numbers and letters.

B. Permanently mark each valve inside of ox with same identification as valve box cover. Use

“Christies Valve ID Tags” or equal to identify valves. Attach the tag to the valve via wire or cable tie and mark clearly with permanent marker. Use yellow ID tags for potable water irrigation systems and use purple ID tags for non-potable water irrigation systems.



3.13 ELECTRICAL WIRING

A. The A/E shall specify electrical wiring installation requirements. B. Low voltage wiring

1. Place wiring in the same trench and routing as pressure supply lines unless otherwise approved.

2. Install wiring to the side of mainlines whenever possible and not below or above. 3. When more than one wire is placed in a trench, tape wires together at 15 ft. o.c., maximum. 4. Provide a 24" expansion loop at each connection and directional change. 5. Wire shall be run in PVC conduit underground between controller and mainline trench.

a. Sleeve conduits through foundation walls, asphalt, concrete, etc., and under asphalt and concrete walks, driveways, parking areas, etc.

b. PVC conduit is prohibited above ground or in building interiors 6. Rigid metal conduit shall be used on exteriors above ground.

a. Transition from PVC conduit to rigid metal conduit five (5) feet from building wall and/or controller location.

7. Use continuous wire between controller and remote control valves. 8. Splicing

a. Except as otherwise approved, do not splice wire at any point. b. At locations where splicing is allowed, make splices within an approved box. c. Wire splicing shall not occur in a valve box, quick connect box or any box used for a

purpose other than wire splicing. d. Each controller shall have its own separate ground wire.

9. Spare wires a. Provide two spare common wires for each controller, installed to end of each

mainline. b. Provide one spare control wire for every 10 zones, two minimum for each controller.

3.14 BOOSTER PUMPS

A. Specify installation and testing of booster pumps with the approval of the DPS Plumbing

Department, if applicable. 3.15 PRESSURE TESTS

A. Contractor shall provide equipment necessary to test systems, including air compressor. B. Schedule testing 72 hours in advance so the A/E and the DPS Project Manager may

observe pressure testing. C. Pressure supply lines shall be filled with water for at least 24 hours prior to testing and shall be

tested under minimum 150 p.s.i. hydrostatic pressure for a period of two (2) hours unless otherwise approved.

D. Contractor shall provide a written report to the A/E and the DPS Project Manager stating the

starting pressure and ending pressure and listing the equipment used. 3.16 COVERAGE TESTS

A. Perform coverage tests after sprinkler system is completed and pressure testing is completed. B. Prior to planting, provide coverage testing in the presence of the A/E and DPS Project Manager. C. Assure all lawn and planting areas are watered completely and uniformly.



D. Make necessary adjustments, including realignment of heads, to provide required coverage as

directed by the A/E and the DPS Project Manager. The Contractor shall provide a written and signed report of the coverage testing to the A/E and the DPS Project Manager.

3.17 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING AND ADJUSTMENT

A. Valves: Adjust controls and pressure reducing valves to attain the required pressure (as

shown on sprinkler head legend) at the sprinkler head. B. Heads: Adjust for alignment and coverage. C. Contractor shall make alterations to the system to provide specified coverage. D. Make final adjustments prior to planting. E. Controller settings

1. Prior to the Owner’s acceptance of the irrigation system, program the irrigation controller on a regular basis to ensure adequate but not excessive watering for the seasonal period and establishment of the landscape.

2. Conform to municipality requirements imposed on the Owner, such as watering periods, water application rates, and drought restrictions.

3. For information on responsibility of clock adjustments refer to maintenance section 329100. 3.18 WINTERIZATION

A. Installer is responsible for winterization of the entire site irrigation system (including the

existing system) during the warranty and landscape maintenance periods. B. Winterize by draining the entire site at the conclusion of the sprinkler season within five (5)

days of notification by the DPS Project Manager. C. Unless modified by extremely mild weather conditions, the system shall be shut down and

winterized by November 25. D. In the week immediately prior to winterizing of the system, landscape areas shall receive a

minimum of 1-½” of water (either through natural conditions or operation of the system). E. Winterize the system by closing the main pressure valve, opening valves, removing water from

the lines, including backflow preventer and line to meter, de-energizing the controller, and other required actions. Remove water from drip lines. Lines shall be purged by use of compressed air. Evacuate back flow prevention device and protect.

F. Submit written certification of time and date of completed winterization to the DPS Project

Manager with two (2) days of completion. 3.19 ACTIVATION/SPRING STARTUP

A. Installer is responsible for startup of the irrigation system during the warranty and landscape

maintenance periods. B. Activate irrigation system no later than April 30th. If weather conditions warrant activating the

system prior to April 1st or after April 30th, obtain agreement from DPS Project Manager. C. Notify DPS Project Manager a minimum of one week before activating the irrigation system.



D. The system shall not be activated and operated without the Owner present to verify vandalism

damage, etc., beyond the responsibility of the Contractor. If Owner is not present during startup, damage discovered subsequent to the startup will be assumed to be covered under the warranty.

E. To activate the system, pressurize and run each zone a minimum of 15 minutes. Observe for

leaks, pressure defects, adequate coverage, and other conditions that may impact the effective operation of the system. Immediately correct leaks or defects.

F. Submit written certification of time and date of completed startup to the DPS Project Manager

within two (2) days of completion. 3.20 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train the Facility Manager(s) in proper operation of equipment. B. Coordinate and schedule training sessions with the DPS Project Manager. C. Submit written evidence that training has been successfully completed.

3.21 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS A. Deliver the following items to the DPS Plumbing shop

1. Two (2) keys for each automatic controller 2. Two (2) sockets for opening valve boxes 3. Two (2) keys for hotboxes or backflow protection

3.22 CLEAN-UP

A. Upon completion of work, restore ground surface and landscape to required elevation and remove excess materials, debris and equipment from the site to satisfaction of Owner’s Representative.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 32 91 00 - 1

SECTION 32 91 00

LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Section includes maintaining the following items through final acceptance: 1. Irrigation System. 2. Sod areas. 3. Seed areas. 4. Trees, shrubs and ground covers.


A. Section 32 84 00: Underground Sprinkler System. B. Section 32 92 19: Seeding. C. Section 32 92 23: Sodding. D. Section 32 93 00: Trees, Shrubs and Ground Covers.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor to submit written reports to the Owner of landscape maintenance work. 1. Provide a written report to Owner for each maintenance activity. 2. Provide at least one report per month regardless of extent of problems or activity, through

landscape maintenance period. 3. Report form should include inspection for each type of plant, license number, etc.

B. Contractor to submit to the Owner the name and composition of herbicides, fertilizers, fungicides,

growth retardants and other chemicals and mixtures used in landscape maintenance operations. C. Contractor to notify the Owner minimum one (1) week prior to the following

1. Request for irrigation system adjustment (Contractor requests adjustment; Owner performs controller adjustment)

2. Irrigation system spring start-up and fall winterization 3. Fertilization or the broad application of any chemicals or insecticides of any kind

D. Contractor shall responsible to review the maintenance activity of the Owner throughout the

landscape maintenance period and notify the Owner, in writing, of deficiencies in desired operations. Failure to notify Owner of deficiencies will prohibit Contractor from relief of responsibility for dead or damaged work. 1. Contractor shall make no repair or take corrective action for discrepancies unless authorized

to do so by Owner in writing. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicable Codes and Standards 1. Abide by the codes, specifications, and standards of all governmental and industry

regulations including but not limited City, County, State of Colorado, and the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen (ANN), American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), National Plumbing Code (NPC), Colorado Technical Plumbing Code, Uniform Building Code (UBC), Sprinkler Irrigation Association (SIA), National Electric Code (NEC),



American Sod Producers Association (ASPA), United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), and the Association of American Seed Control Officials (AASCO).

2. All labor shall be United States citizens or have current, valid work permits for work within the United States.

3. At all times when work is being performed, Contractor shall have an individual who has successfully completed the Standard First Aid and Personal Safety Course (intermediate level) offered by the American Red Cross or other training as accepted by the Owner.

4. No chemicals or fertilizers shall be utilized on the work without a state licensed operator in attendance.

B. Equipment:

1. All equipment shall be well maintained and equipped with current safety features including audible reverse warning, trimming guards, etc.

C. Contractor shall replace, at no cost to Owner, plant material that dies. This guarantee included

plant materials that are damaged due to Contractor’s operations. D. Warranty for replacement plants shall be extended for an additional year beyond replacement

planting date. 1.05 MAINTENANCE PERIOD

A. Required maintenance for all items shall extend until date of final acceptance of the entire project. This period will last through a minimum of two lawn cuttings for sodded areas.

B. After acceptance of the entire project, the Contractor will assume responsibility for maintenance for

24 months. A 24 month warranty will begin at date of acceptance of all landscape construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 NOTIFICATION TO OWNER

A. Contractor is responsible to review the regular maintenance activity of the Owner throughout the warranty period and notify the Owner, in writing, of any deficiencies in desired operations. Failure to notify the Owner of deficiencies will prohibit Contractor from relief of responsibility for dead or damaged work.

B. Contractor shall make no repair or take corrective action for discrepancies unless authorized to do

so by Owner in writing. C. Notify Owner of any proposed applications of herbicides, insecticides, fertilizers or other

chemicals. Do not apply without written approval of DPS Project Manager. 3.02 IRRIGATION SYSTEM

A. Refer to Section 328400 – Underground Sprinkler System for winterization, spring start-up and other requirements for the irrigation system.

3.03 SODDED AREAS

A. Fertilization:



1. Fertilize sodded areas four (4) weeks after installation, but no later than October 15. On established irrigated turf, apply two (2) times per year, once between March 15 and April 15 and once between September 1 and September 15 and as necessary outside of that timeframe to ensure the health of the sod.

2. Fertilize sodded areas four (4) weeks after installation, but no later than October 15. On established irrigated turf, apply two (2) times per year, once between March 15 and April 15 and once between September 1 and September 15 and as necessary outside of that timeframe to ensure the health of the sod.

3. Fertilizer shall be a Urea based only mixture with the following chemical composition: 20-10-5. All applications shall be at a rate of 1 lbs. nitrogen per 1000 square feet.

4. These feedings are specifically in addition to those required by the installation specification. 5. All fertilizer applications shall occur using a commercial spreader on a calm, dry morning.

The sod should be moist. Never fill the spreader over the lawn areas or when "on". Sweep all concrete and asphalt areas that may have been pelleted with fertilizer.

6. In addition to the lawn fertilization, one (1) application of elemental iron shall be made at a rate of 0.5 lbs. per 1000 square feet.

B. Weeding and Insect Control: Contractor is responsible for weed and insect control until

acceptance of the entire project. No application of weed killer, insecticides, or antifungal chemicals are specified. Apply these elements as necessary to maintain healthy, weed free sod throughout the year. Apply as per manufacturer's recommendations whenever necessary to protect the sod condition. 1. In no case shall application occur on a school day; in the event of the application of these

chemicals applies; a notice of the time of application shall be posted at each building entrance.

2. Take all precautions when applying weed killers, insecticides or antifungal remedies, including gloves, masks, goggles, etc., and shall not apply on windy or rainy days.

3. This section includes insects, molds, fungus, broadleaf, and viney weeds and specifically includes grasshoppers.

C. Mowings: Cut sod with a sharp and well-maintained mower, such as a reel or rotary type mower.

Keep grass an average of 2.5 inches in height and cut whenever the clippings will measure approximately 0.5 inch of 25 percent of the grass plant. Never cut off more than 33 percent of the plant height. Between May 1 and September 15, cut grass a minimum of once every week and as needed outside of that timeframe to preserve the health of the grass. 1. If mowing creates visible accumulations of clippings, clippings must be removed. Remove all

clippings immediately. Cross slope all mowing vary cutting direction periodically. All areas around walks, buildings, curbs, walls, rocks, plants, lights, or other structures must be trimmed by hand or mechanical trimmer each time the grass is cut. All cuttings must be done diagonal to the way the sod was laid. Clean cuttings from walks, plazas, drives, etc.

D. Aeration: Contractor shall be responsible for aerating the grass a minimum of two times per year

and as necessary after that to maintain the health of the grass. 3.04 SEEDED AREAS

A. General: Maintenance shall begin immediately after each area is seeded and continue through the

landscape maintenance period. During this time, be responsible for watering, mowing, spraying, weeding and related work as necessary to ensure that seeded areas are established and continue in a vigorous, weed-free growing condition. Control weeds by use of spot herbicides or mechanical trimmer. Include bind weed, thistle control and control of designated State of Colorado noxious weeds.

B. Watering: Water irrigation areas until stand of grass is established. After grass is established,

water irrigated grass at regular schedule as approved by Owner. Native and dryland grasses are not required to be watered unless otherwise specified.



C. Weed Control: As required for native seed/dryland grasses only after turf establishment using

selective herbicides or mechanical string trimmers or mowers. D. Insect and Disease Control: As required, apply insecticide and fungicide. E. Remove debris in seeded areas at each time of maintenance service.

3.05 TREE AND SHRUB CARE

A. Contractor shall inspect plant material on a bi-weekly basis. Immediately remove dead plants, dead parts of plants and tree suckers and leafing on main stems.

B. Each spring, no later than June 1, trim winter dieback and undesirable shoots, and correct

branching problems. C. Each deciduous tree trunk shall be wrapped between October 15 and November 31 of each year. D. Remove tree wrap prior to completion of the maintenance period.

3.06 WINTER WATERING

A. Contractor's maintenance crew to water all sod, irrigated seed and plant material areas once each month during December, January, February, and March and as needed to adequately sustain plant material through the winter.

B. This watering shall occur from sillcocks of the building or quick couplers and must include the cost

of supplying all necessary hoses and fittings. If sillcocks are frozen or cannot be activated Contractor shall utilize a water truck.

3.07 VANDALISM

A. Contractor shall notify the Project Manager immediately of apparent vandalism, including graffiti, in

areas of landscape maintenance responsibility.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary FINE GRADING AND SOIL PREPARATION OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 32 91 13 - 1

SECTION 32 91 13

FINE GRADING AND SOIL PREPARATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Ripping. B. Fertilizer. C. Soil amendments. D. Topsoil. E. Fine grading.


A. Section 328400: Underground Sprinkler System.

B. Section 329100: Landscape Maintenance.

C. Section 329219: Seeding.

D. Section 329223: Sodding.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certificates: State, federal and other inspection certificates shall accompany invoice for all

materials showing source or origin. Submit to Owner's Representative prior to acceptance of materials.

2. Soil Amendment Test Report: Submit soil conditioner test analysis to Owner's Representative 3 weeks prior to delivery to site in accordance with Section 00 13 00.


A. The work of this section shall be performed by an experienced landscape Installer having not less than 5 years successful experience in landscape projects of similar size and scope as this project. Include work of Sections 32 92 19, 32 92 23, and 32 93 00 for undivided responsibility.


A. Fertilizer: Deliver inorganic or chemical fertilizer to site in original unopened containers bearing manufacturer's guaranteed chemical analysis, name, trade name, trademark and conformance to state law, bearing name and warranty of producer.

B. Notify Owner's Representative of delivery schedule in advance so material can be inspected upon

arrival at project site. Immediately remove unacceptable material from project site. 1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITION

A. General: Do not perform work when climate and existing site conditions will not provide satisfactory results.



B. Vehicular accessibility on site shall be as directed by owner's representative. Repair damage to

prepared ground and surfaces caused by vehicular movement during work under this section to original condition at no additional cost to Owner.

C. Perform soil preparation just prior to planting operations and in accordance with final planting

schedule. Coordinate with irrigation system installation to avoid damage to work of one by the other.

D. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner which will avoid

damage. Hand excavate, as required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Composted Amendment: Premium 3 Compost by A-1 Organics (class II compost). Weed free 40% minimum organic matter.

Apply at a rate of 4 cubic yards per 1000 s.f., till to a minimum depth of 9” for all planting areas including sod.

B. Compost Certification Specifications:

1. Composted soil amendments must be produced at a facility permitted and regulated under the State of Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment and/or the county in which the facility operates for the production of compost and soil amendments.

2. The product must be certified to have been produced in a manner that meets the US EPA 40CFR 503.13 minimum standards for pathogen destruction under a controlled, monitored, and documented process.

3. The supplier must certify that no supplemental nitrogen or other chemicals have been added to the compost to alter or enhance the results of the laboratory analysis, unless specifically requested by the design architect.

4. The contractor must supply a letter of certification from the manufacturer which confirms that the product being supplied has met the referenced requirements and that supporting documentation exists and is available for inspection (if requested).

C. Planter’s Mix: Amended Topsoil blend by A-1 Organics (70% screened topsoil / 30% compost) to

full depth of planter as shown on the plans.

2.02 PLANTING MIXES

A. Turf: Minimum requirements for acceptable topsoil or amended soil used for topsoil 1. Organic matter content: Above 3% 2. PH: 6.5 – 7.6 3. Conductivity: Less than 2 mmhos/cm. 4. Nutrients: N, above 15 ppm; P above 10 ppm; K above 80 ppm 5. Soil texture: Sandy/clay, clay, silty clay loams; loam; or silty, sandy loams.

B. Tree and shrub planning backfill

1. Seventy percent (70%) topsoil by volume; soil may be taken form the plant pit or imported soil of a quality acceptable by the DPS Project Manager meeting or exceeding the quality of specified topsoil.

2. 15% soil amendment humus by volume and 15% clean concrete sand. 3. The specified backfill materials shall be evenly pre-mixed using appropriate equipment, then

turned to produce a uniform, evenly blended consistency, free of all pockets of unblended



material and any colds or stones greater than 2” in diameter. Backfill mix shall be inspected an approved prior to use.

C. Bedding mix (ground covers, perennials): Topsoil or amended soil with two percent (2 %) more

organic matter than indicated by topsoil test (5% minimum). D. Groundcover and perennial areas

1. Prepare as above for turf areas at the following rates for amendments: a. Fertilizer: One (1) pound per 100 sq. ft. of diammonium phosphate fertilizer (18-46-0). b. Soil amendment humus: One (1) cubic yard per 100 sq. ft.

2.03 TOPSOIL

A. Topsoil for planting backfill or other use shall be from stripped on site stock pile. Strip from “A” horizon in source area.

B. Contractor shall mix, scarify and pulverize soil to break up or remove clods, rocks, debris, and non

decomposed organic matter. No clods, rocks, or organic matter larger than 2” in the greatest dimension will be allowed for use in planting operations.

C. 6” Minimum topsoil is required under sodded areas. 4” Minimum under seeded areas. D. Topsoil Test:

1. DPS Environmental specialist will test soils for aras to be planted before design. 2. Topsoil test by A/E is required for projects where soil may be stripped for later use. Test

shall determine soil amendments and preparation required to avoid using import top soil. 3. Minimum requirements for acceptable topsoil or amended soil used for topsoil include:

a. Organic matter content: Above 3% b. PH: 6.5 – 7.6 c. Conductivity: Less than 2 mmhos/cm d. Nutrients: N, above 15 ppm; P, above 10 ppm; K above 80 ppm e. Soil texture: Sandy/clay, clay, silty clay loams; loam; or silty, sandy loams.

2.04 FERTILIZER

A. Commercial Fertilizer: 1. Seeded Areas: Commercial fertilizer having an analysis of 18% available nitrogen (sulfur-

coated Urea only) and 46% available phosphorus (18-46-0). Provide in sufficient quantity to apply at the rate of 5 lbs nitrogen per acre.

2. Sodded Lawns: a. Commercial fertilizer having an analysis of 46% available nitrogen (Urea and sulphur-

coated Urea only) (46-0-0) in sufficient quantity to apply at a rate of 50 lbs. nitrogen per acre.

b. Treble phosphate (0-46-0) in sufficient quantity to apply at a rate of 650 lbs. per acre. 2.05 HERBICIDE

A. Roundup by Monsanto: Apply according to manufacturer's instructions using certified applicators. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. General: Verify that existing site conditions are as specified and indicated before beginning work under this section.



1. Grades: Inspect to verify rough grading is within + 0.1 foot of grades indicated and specified.

2. Damaged Earth: Inspect to verify that earth rendered unfit to receive planting due to concrete water, mortar, limewater or any other contaminant dumped on it has been removed and replaced with clean earth from a source approved by the Owner's Representative.

B. Unsatisfactory Conditions: Report in writing to General Contractor with copy to Owner's

Representative. C. Acceptance: Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions by installer.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protection: 1. Locate sewer, water, irrigation, gas, electric, phone and other pipelines or conduits and

equipment prior to commencing work. 2. Be responsible for proper repair to landscape, utilities, walls, pavements and other site

improvements damaged by operations under this section. 3. Pay for repairs made by contractor(s) designated by Owner.

B. Weed Control: Remove perennial weeds by applying herbicide 1 week before final grading and as

needed. Remove annual weeds by tilling. Water prepared soil for two weeks if possible and apply herbicide to exposed weeds.

C. Surface Grade: Remove weeds, debris and rocks larger than 1/2". Dispose of accumulated

debris at direction of Owner's Representative. D. Runoff: Take measures and furnish equipment and labor necessary to control the flow, drainage,

and accumulation of water to run off the grounds as is intended by the grades. E. Erosion Control: Take measures and furnish equipment and labor necessary to control and

prevent soil erosion, blowing soil and accumulation of wind-deposited material on the site throughout duration of work.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Soil Amendment 1. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. 2. Before tilling, clean topsoil of stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful or

toxic to plant growth. Leave seeds and plants for native seed areas. Use soil devoid of seeds and plants in sodded and seeded lawn areas.

3. Sodded Lawns: Spread soil amendments and phosphate at the rate specified after topsoil (if specified) is spread. Till in thoroughly to a minimum depth of 6"-9", and grade to meet lines, grades and elevations shown, allowing for natural settlement.

4. Seeded Areas: Spread soil amendments and fertilizer at the rate specified after topsoil is spread. Till in thoroughly to a minimum depth of 6”, and grade to meet lines, grades and elevations shown, allowing for natural settlement.

B. Fine Grading in all Landscape Areas:

1. Do fine grading for areas immediately prior to planting. 2. For ground surface areas surrounding buildings to be landscaped, maintain required positive

drainage away from buildings. 3. Establish finish grades to within 0.05 foot of grades indicated. The intent of this spec is to

prevent 'bird baths' or ponding. 4. Finish grade to be below edge of pavement prior to sodding, seeding or planting.

a. Sodded Areas: Allow 1.5" for sod.



b. Shrub Beds: Allow 7” for mulch. c. Seeded Areas: Allow 1” for seed.

5. Noxious weeds or parts thereof shall not be present in the surface grade prior to landscaping.

6. Compaction of Surface Grade Prior to Landscape Installation: Firm, but not hard (80% standard Proctor density within 2% optimum moisture).

7. Prior to acceptance of grades, rake to smooth, even surface free of debris, clods, rocks, and vegetable matter greater than 1". Native seed areas should not be raked smooth but left in a uniform condition after tilling. Rough raking may occur parallel to the contour only.

8. Sodded Lawns: Apply nitrogen fertilizer, at the rate specified, after fine grading and prior to sodding.

9 Restore planting areas to specified condition if eroded or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and prior to planting.

3.04 NOTIFICATION AND INSPECTION

A. Inspection: Provide notice to Owner's Representative requesting inspection at least 7 days prior to anticipated date of completion.

B. Deficiencies: Owner's Representative will specify deficiencies to Contractor who shall make

satisfactory adjustments and shall again notify Owner's Representative for final inspection. 3.05 CLEANING

A. General: Remove debris and excess materials from site. Clean out drainage inlet structures. Clean paved and finished surfaces soiled as a result of work under this section, in accordance with direction given by Owner's Representative.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. General: Provide and install barriers as required and as directed by Owner's Representative to protect completed areas against damage from pedestrian and vehicular traffic until acceptance by Owner. Contractor is not responsible for malicious destruction caused by others.

3.07 WARRANTY

A. Contractor to warrant for a period of 24 months that puddling, sinking or caving directly due to earthwork operations does not occur.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary SODDING OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 32 92 23 - 1

SECTION 32 92 23

SODDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Placing Sod 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 32 84 00: Underground Sprinkler System.

B. Section 32 91 00: Landscape Maintenance.

C. Section 32 91 13: Fine Grading and Soil Preparation.

D. Section 32 92 19: Seeding

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASPA (American Sod Producers Association) - Guideline Specifications to Sodding. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certificates: State, federal and other inspection certificates shall accompany the invoice for

materials showing source of origin. Submit to Owner's Representative prior to acceptance of material.

2. Submit mix specification showing variety and percentage in the mix for approval two weeks prior to installation.

B. Contract Closeout Submittals:

1. Operating and Maintenance Data: At completion of work, submit 3 copies of data. Include directions for irrigation, fertilizing, aeration, mowing, and spraying as required for continuance and proper maintenance through a full growing season and dormant period.


A. Coordination: Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to planting of

lawns, unless otherwise acceptable to Owner’s Representative. If planting of trees and shrubs occurs after lawn work, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage to lawns resulting from planting operations.


A. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within 24 hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking of rolled strips.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.01 MATERIALS

A. Sod: Provide strongly rooted sod, not less than two years old, free of weeds and undesirable native grasses and machine cut to pad thickness of 3/4" (+ 1/4"), excluding top growth and thatch. Provide only sod capable of vigorous growth and development when planted (viable, not dormant). After April 15 and prior to October 31 provide sod capable of vigorous growth and development. After October 31, installed sod may be dormant. 1. Provide sod of uniform pad sizes with maximum 5% deviation in either length or width.

Broken pads or pads with uneven ends will not be acceptable. Sod pads incapable of supporting their own weight when suspended vertically with a firm grasp on upper 10% of pad will be rejected. Jumbo roll sod will be acceptable upon approval by Owner’s Representative. Jumbo roll sod shall not include structural netting.

2. Provide Colorado grown GTF Blend suitable for vigorous athletic field and general play use. Blend shall contain a minimum of three improved varieties. Contact Graff’s Turf Farm at 800-280-8873.

B. Water: Clean, fresh and free of substance or matter which would inhibit vigorous growth of grass.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF FINAL GRADE

A. Restore lawn areas to condition specified in Section 32 91 13 if eroded or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and prior to planting.

3.02 FERTILIZING

A. Apply commercial nitrogen fertilizer as specified in Section 32 91 13. Apply after fine grading and prior to compaction.

B. Lightly water to aid the breakdown of fertilizer. C. Apply fertilizer within 48 hours before laying sod. D. Apply second fertilization at one half rate three weeks after sodding is completed.

3.03 LAYING SOD

A. Lay sod within 24 hours from time of stripping. Do not plant dormant sod or if ground is frozen. B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod strips; do not

overlap. Stagger strips to offset joints in adjacent courses. Tamp or roll lightly to insure contact with subgrade. Work sifted soil into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering of adjacent grass.

C. Water sod thoroughly with a fine spray immediately after planting. Do not lay sod which will not

receive water within one (1) hour. D. Rolling: When soil and sod are moist, roll sod lightly as soon as possible after it is laid. Delay

rolling until just before the second watering. E. Topsoil: Add along exposed edges to match adjacent grade. Feather topsoil out approximately 1

ft. from edge of sod.



F. Abutting Existing Sod: Provide a clean cut edge along existing sod where new sod will adjoin. Lay new sod to avoid any gaps, overlap, or unevenness.

G. Drainage: Assure finished areas of sod are such that positive drainage of storm and irrigation

water will occur and ponding of water will be minimized. 3.04 REPAIR OF EXISTING SOD AREAS DISTURBED BY RENOVATION

A. Repair existing sod areas disturbed by renovation work (utilities, paving, etc.) as indicated, in accordance with specifications of this section.

3.05 ACCEPTANCE

A. Sod will be inspected at time of final walk through. Sod must be mowed within three days prior to this inspection.

B. Sod will be inspected for health, vigor, and quality of installation: C. All seams between sod pieces to be tight. D. Surface grade is to be smooth, without pits, humps, or pock marks. E. Sod must be free of weeds and undesirable grasses. F. Sod will not be accepted until after a minimum of two mowings at new sod have been completed.

Contractor shall be responsible for maintenance and mow sod on a regular basis until project achieves Final Acceptance.

3.06 WARRANTY

A. Sod: Warrant sod for a period of 24 months from date of Final Acceptance to be in a healthy, vigorous growing condition. 1. During the original warranty period, replace at once sod areas that die due to natural

causes, etc. or which in Owner's Representative's opinion are unhealthy. 2. Replacement will not be required in any season definitely unfavorable for sodding. 3. Install replacements as originally specified and warrant for one additional year.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 32 93 00

TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUND COVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Trees, shrubs, perennials and grasses. B. Temporary support. C. Mulch.


A. Subcontract landscape work to a single firm specializing in landscape work. B. Perform work with personnel experienced in the work required of this Section under direction of a

skilled foreman. C. Staking: All final lines and grades to conform to grade stakes set and approved prior to work. D. Source Quality Control:

1. General: Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection required by governing authorities. Comply with regulations applicable to landscape materials.

2. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not obtainable, submit proof of non-availability to Owner's Representative, together with proposal for use of equivalent material.

3. Procurement: The entering of a proposal and execution of a contract will be construed as evidence that the Contractor has made successful procurement arrangements for all plant materials as specified.

4. Analysis and Standards: Package standard products with manufacturers certified analysis. For other materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the Association of Official Agriculture Chemists, wherever applicable.

5. Trees, Shrubs, and Plants: Provide trees, shrubs and plants of quantity, size, genus, species and variety shown and scheduled for landscape work and complying with recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z60.1 "American Standard of Nursery Stock." Provide healthy, vigorous stock, grown in a recognized nursery in accordance with good horticultural practice and free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun-scald, injuries, abrasions, or disfigurement.

6. Hardiness: Plants grown in hardiness zones 1, 2, 3, and 4 only will be accepted. Hardiness zones are defined in U.S. Dept. of Agriculture publications. Grower's certificates may be required when doubt exists as to the origin of plant material.

7. Plant Source: All plants shall be nursery grown or gathered native plants approved by Owner's Representative. Imported plants shall have been growing in a nursery for a minimum of one growing season. Trees and shrubs shall have been root-pruned during their growing period in the nursery in accordance with standard nursery practice.

8. Label each tree and shrub with securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. a. Where formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees or shrubs are shown, select

stock for uniform height and spread, and label with number to assist symmetry in planting.

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUNDCOVERS OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 32 93 00 - 1


9. Inspection: The Owner's Representative may inspect trees and shrubs either at place of growth or at site before planting, for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size, and quality. Owner's Representative retains right to further inspect trees and shrubs for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries, and latent defects, and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from project site.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Certification: Submit certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. Submit manufacturers or vendors certified analysis for soil amendments and fertilizer materials. Submit other data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements.

B. Planting Schedule: Verbally submit proposed planting schedule, indicating dates for each type of

landscape work during normal seasons for such work in area of site. Once accepted, revise dates only as approved in writing, after documentation of reasons for delays.


A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site.

B. Move plant materials with solid balls wrapped in burlap, or in approved containers. C. Deliver plant materials immediately prior to placement. Keep plant materials moist. D. Reject plants when ball of earth surrounding roots has been cracked or broken prior to or during

process of planting. E. Reject plants when burlap, stakes, and ropes required in connection with transplanting have been

displaced prior to acceptance.

1.05 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Proceed with and complete landscape work as rapidly as portions of site become available, working within seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work required.

B. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner which will avoid

possible damage. Hand excavate, as required. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned.

C. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill,

adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Owner's representative before planting. D. Planting Time: Plant or install materials during normal planting seasons for each type of

landscape work required. Correlate planting with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance from date of substantial completion.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Provide 24 month warranty from date of Final Acceptance. B. Replace plant materials found dead, or not in a healthy growing condition. Vandalism or negligent

acts by maintainer after acceptance will not be grounds for replacement at Contractor’s expense.



C. Replacements: Plant materials of same size and species, with a new warranty commencing on

date of replacement. D. Remove and replace trees, shrubs, or other plants found to be dead or in unhealthy condition

during warranty period. Make replacements during growth season following end of warranty period. Replace trees and shrubs which are in doubtful condition at end of warranty period, unless, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, it is advisable to extend the warranty period for a full growing season. 1. Another inspection will be conducted at the end of extended warranty period, if any, to

determine acceptance or rejection. Only one replacement (per tree, shrub, or plant) will be required at end of warranty period, except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with specified requirements.

2. Warranty replacements shall be warranted for one additional year. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Plants: Species and size identified in plant schedule, grown in climatic zones 1, 2, 3, or 4.

B. Planting Pit Backfill: Soil backfill for planting pits shall consist of the following mixture: 1. Four parts native soil from pit excavation. 2. One part soil amendment per Section 32 91 13. 3. Materials to be thoroughly blended.

C. Mulching: All single trees and planting beds shall be mulched with 4" depth crusher fines as

indicated on the drawings. Mulch shall form a circle, 2'-6" diameter, around single trees.

2.02 PLANT MATERIALS

A. Quality: Provide trees, shrubs, and other plants of size, genus, species, and variety shown and scheduled for landscape work and complying with recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z60.1 "American Standard of Nursery Stock."

B. Deciduous Trees: Provide trees of height and caliper scheduled or shown and with branching

configuration recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and species required. Provide single-stem trees, except where special forms are shown or listed. 1. Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) deciduous trees. 2. Container grown deciduous trees will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped

deciduous trees subject to specified limitations of ANSI Z60.1 for container stock. 3. Field dug deciduous trees will be accepted based on prior approval by Owner's

representative.

C. Deciduous Shrubs: Provide shrubs of the container size shown or listed and with not less than minimum number of canes required by ANSI Z60.1 for type and height of shrub required. All shrubs will be container grown in the sizes indicated on the plans.

D. Coniferous and Broadleafed Evergreens: Provide evergreens of sizes shown or listed.

Dimensions indicate minimum height for upright trees, such as globe, dwarf, cone, pyramidical, broad upright, and columnar. Provide normal quality evergreens with well-balanced form complying with requirements for other size relationships to the primary dimension shown. 1. Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) evergreens.



2. Container grown evergreens will be acceptable subject to specified limitations for container grown stock.

3. Field dug evergreen trees will be accepted based on prior approval by Owner's representative.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Wrapping: Tree wrap tape not less than 4" wide, designed to prevent borer damage and winter freezing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Layout individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations and outline areas and secure Owner's Representative's acceptance before start of planting work. Make minor adjustments that may be requested.

B. Preparation of Soil Backfill for Planting Pits:

1. Before mixing, clean pit excavations of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful or toxic to plant growth.

2. Mix specified soil amendments with soil at rates specified. C. Sequencing and Scheduling:

1. Planting Time: Proceed with, and complete landscape work as rapidly as portions of site become available, working within seasonal limitations. Plant or install materials during normal planting seasons for each type of plant material required.

2. Correlate planting with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance from date of substantial completion.

D. Excavation for Trees and Shrubs:

1. Excavate pits, beds and trenches with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation slightly raised at center to provide proper drainage.

Loosen hard subsoil in bottom of excavation. For bare root trees and shrubs, make excavations at least 12" wider than root spread and deep enough to allow for setting of roots on a layer of compacted backfill and with collar set at same grade level as in nursery, but 2" above finished grade at site. Allow for 9" setting layer of planting soil mixture. a. For balled and burlapped (B&B) trees and shrubs, or container grown stock, make

excavations at least 12" wider than the ball diameter and 2" shallower than ball depth. b. For container grown stock, excavate as specified for balled and burlapped stock, and

excavate pits to a width at least twice as wide as the containers and at least as deep as the containers.

c. Dispose of unacceptable subsoil removed from landscaped excavations. Do not mix with planting soil or use as backfill.

d. Use prepared plant backfill mix for setting and filling all plants. e. Where rubble fill is encountered, notify Landscape Architect and prepare planting pits

properly by removal of rubble or other acceptable methods. When conditions encountered are severe and extensive (as determined by Architect) proceed with additional work at the direction of the Architect.

f. Drainage: If subsoil conditions indicate the retention of water in planting areas, as shown by seepage or other evidence indicating presence of underground water, notify the Landscape Architect before backfilling.



E. Fill excavations for trees and shrubs with water and allow to percolate out before planting.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Planting Trees and Shrubs: 1. Set balled and burlapped (B&B) stock on layer of compacted planting soil mixture, plumb,

and in center of pit or trench with top of ball at same elevation as adjacent finished landscape grades or as noted. Remove burlap from sides of balls; retain on bottoms. When set, place additional backfill around base and sides of ball, and work each layer to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets. When backfilling is complete water well with root-feeder probe.

2. For container grown stock, remove plant from container, split root ball 50% up from bottom, spread roots over mounded backfill under roots as required to eliminate voids and prevent settling. Complete backfilling on top of pit.

3. Mound top of backfill in irrigated areas. Provide bowl for water retention in dryland areas. 4. Anti-desiccant: If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full-leaf, spray with anti-desiccant

at nursery before moving. 5. Remove and replace excessively pruned or misformed stock resulting from improper

pruning. 6. Wrap tree trunks of 1" caliper and larger. Start at ground and cover trunk to height of first

branches and securely attach with flexible tie. Do not use duct tape. Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning, and insect infestation and take corrective measures before wrapping. Double wrap all maples.

B. Mechanical Spade Planting: Larger evergreen trees may be planted by means of mechanical

spade equipment with prior approval. Larger plantings being moved from permanent locations to new locations must be transplanted by this method. Use equipment that will dig, carry, and replant with the same unit. Equipment size must be adequate for size of plant and not less than 8" of spade diameter at 15" depth per caliper inch of trunk diameter.

C. Mulch: Provide not less than 6" thickness of mulch in all mulch pit and planting beds, unless rock

or other mulch is indicated on the drawings. Work into top of backfill in pits and finish level with adjacent finish grades.

D. Water: Contractor is responsible for ensuring that plant materials are watered.

3.03 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION

A. During landscape work, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. Any damage to other work done by landscape crew is to be reported and repaired immediately.

B. Protect landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations, operations by

other Contractors and trades and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed.

3.04 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. When landscape work is completed, Owner's Representative will, upon request, make an inspection to determine acceptability. 1. Landscape work may be inspected for acceptance in parts agreeable to Owner's

Representative, provided work offered for inspection is complete.



B. When inspected landscape work does not comply with requirements, replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance until re-inspected by the Owner's Representative and found to be acceptable. Remove rejected plants and materials promptly from project site.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 33 41 00

STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Additional information concerning storm sewer systems may be found on the civil drawings. In case of conflict between the drawings and the information specified herein, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. State of Colorado, Department of Transportation (CDOT): State Department of Highways Standard Construction Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, current edition.

B. City and County of Denver Standard Specifications for Design and Construction, Latest Edition.

C. Reference Standards: Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents.

1.03 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes gravity-flow, STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING outside the building, with the following components:

1. Cleanouts. 2. Drains and inlets. 3. Precast concrete and Cast-in-place concrete manholes.


1. Division 22 Section “Trenching” for excavating and backfilling of utilities. 2. Division 32 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for concrete structures. 3. Division 32 Section “Concrete Paving” for concrete materials. 4. Division 31 Section “Earth Moving” for Site Grading. 5. Division 31 Section “Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control” for erosion and

sedimentation control measures.

C. Permits and Fees:

1. Obtain and pay for all permits required for the work of this section. 2. Pay all fees for inspections by local authorities and utility agency for work specified in this

section.

D. Existing Utilities

1. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to excavate and verify the location (depth, horizontal alignment, etc.) of all existing utilities that may affect construction of the proposed STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING line. All exploratory excavations shall occur far

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary STORM DRAINAGE UTILITY PIPING OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 Section 334100 - 1


enough in advance to permit any necessary relocation to be made with minimum delay and to verify existing vertical and horizontal location to determine alignment for the proposed STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING line. All costs incurred by the Contractor in making exploratory excavations shall be considered to be included in the unit price bid for construction of each section of STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING line or the associate structures.

E. All standard details and specifications of the utility agency shall apply as noted on the construction permit and as required by the agency.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. HDPE: High Density Polyethylene Pipe.

B. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Pipe.

C. RCP: Reinforced Concrete Pipe.

D. RCBC: Reinforced Concrete Box culvert.

E. CMP: Corrugated Metal Pipe.


A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure, Drainage-Piping Pressure Rating: 10-foot head of water. Pipe joints shall be watertight with gasketed joint.

B. Force-Main, Pressure-Piping Pressure Rating: At least equal to system operating pressure but not less than 150 psig.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Cleanouts, inlets and area drains. 2. Channel drainage systems. 3. Trench drainage systems. 4. Manholes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments for the following:

1. Precast concrete manholes and other structures, including frames, covers and grates. 2. Cast-in-place concrete manholes and other structures, including frames, covers and grates. 3. Catch Basins and Storm Water Inlets. Include plans elevations, sections, details and

frames, covers and grates. 4. Storm Water Detention Structures: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames,

orifice plates, and covers. 5. Design Mix Reports and Calculations: For each class of cast-in-place concrete.

C. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.


100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Do not store plastic inlets, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.

B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.

C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer’s written rigging instructions.

D. Handle catch basins and storm water inlets according to manufacturer’s written rigging instructions.

E. Deliver piping in manufacture’s original bundles, securely strapped, and with protective blocking as required. Label or tag each bundle with type, size and quality of material.

F. Exercise care to prevent damage to materials during loading, transportation and unloading. Do not drop pipe or fittings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.02 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Corrugated-Steel Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 760/A 760M, Type I with fittings of similar form and construction as pipe.

1. Special-Joint Bands: Corrugated steel with O-ring seals. 2. Standard-Joint Bands: Corrugated Steel. 3. Coating: Zinc

2.03 ALUMINUM PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Corrugated Aluminum Pipe and Fittings: ASTM B 745/B 745M, Type I with fittings of similar form and construction as pipe.

1. Special-Joint Bands: Corrugated steel with O-ring seals. 2. Standard-Joint Bands: Corrugated steel.

2.04 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PVC Pressure Pipe: AWWA C900, Class 200 for gasketed joints and using ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.



1. Fittings NPS 4 to NPS 8 (DN 100 to DN 200): PVC pressure fittings complying with AWWA C907, for gasketed joints and using ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.

2. Fittings NPS 10 (DN 250) and Larger: Ductile-iron, compact fittings complying with AWWA C153, for push-on joints and using AWWA C111, rubber gaskets.

B. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 (DN 375) 15” and Smaller: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35 with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.

C. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 18 (DN 450) 18” and Larger: ASTM F 679, T-1wall thickness, with bell-and spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.

2.5 HDPE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. ASTM D3350, AASHTO M294. Profile wall – Type S 2’ minimum burial depth, 10’ maximum burial depth, bell and spigot joint with water-tight, non-cleating, O-ring gasket, ASTM F477.

2.6 CONCRETE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. RCP Sewer Pipe and Fittings: According to the following:

1. ASTM C 76 and ASTM C 506 and ASTM C 507 for circular, arch, and vertical and horizontal elliptical pipe, respectively. Pipe shall be Class III, Wall B, unless otherwise noted.

2. Joints: Water tight joints meeting ASTM C443 Standard Specification for joints in circular concrete sewer and culvert pipe, using rubber gaskets.

3. Flared End Sections: No standard specifications apply to concrete flared end sections. Provide manufactures specifications with shop drawings to Owner’s Representative.

2.7 NONPRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS

A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

B. Sleeve Materials:

1. For Concrete Pipes: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443m), rubber. 2. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 3. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials

being joined.

2.8 CLEANOUTS

A. Gray-Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Josam Company. a. MIFAB Manufacturing Inc. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. c. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. d. Watts Industries, Inc.



e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Enpoco, Inc. Div. f. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Zurn Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Top-Loading Classification(s): Heavy duty.

3. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.

D. PVC Cleanouts: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser to cleanout of same material as sewer piping.

2.9 MANHOLES

A. Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints.

1. Diameter: As shown on drawings (48 inches (1200 mm) minimum, unless otherwise indicated).

2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as required to prevent flotation.

3. Base Section: 6-inch (150-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and the minimum thickness as noted on plans for walls and base riser section.

4. Riser Sections: 4-inch (100-mm) minimum thickness or as noted on the plans and the lengths to provide depth indicated.

5. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings.

6. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe connection.

B. Cast-in-Place Concrete Manholes: Construct of reinforced-concrete bottom, walls, and top; designed according to ASTM C890 for A-16 (ASSHTO HS20-44), heavy-traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, dimensions, and appurtenances indicated.

1. Ballast: Increase thickness of concrete, as required to prevent flotation. 2. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe

connection.

C. Manhole Joint Sealant: All joints in the manhole barrel, cone and/or flat top sections including the joint between the cast-in-place base slab and the bottom barrel section shall be sealed with a preformed, flexible plastic gasket conforming to the following requirements:

1. The flexible plastic gasket shall be in conformance with Federal Specification SS-S 00210, “Sealing Compound, Preformed Plastic, for Expansion Joints and Pipe Joints.”

2. The plastic sealing compound shall be packaged in extruded preformed rope-like shape of proper size to completely fill the joint when fully compressed. The material shall be protected by a suitable, removable, two-piece wrapper so that one wrapper may be removed as the compound is applied to the joint surface without disturbing the other wrapper, which remains attached to the compound for protection. The sealing compound shall be impermeable to water, have high immediate bonding strength to the primed concrete surface, and shall maintain permanent plasticity, resistance to water, acids, and alkalies.

3. All surfaces of the tongue and groove joint of the manhole barrel shall be primed with an approved priming compound prior to the installation of the sealing compound. The application of the priming compound and the sealing compound shall be accomplished in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s instructions, as to the method of application, quantity of material, the grade of the materials, and the application temperatures.



4. All lifting holes shall be sealed with the plastic sealing compound.

D. Manhole Steps: All manhole steps shall be similar and equal to those specified below and shall be installed in a straight line vertically. Manhole steps shall be cast into the wall at the same time the barrel section is cast. Except for unusual circumstances, steps which are inserted or grouted in the wall after the wall has been cast will not be accepted. Steps shall be installed with a nominal spacing of 15 inches (375-mm) and 6 inches (150-mm) from face of manhole.

1. Aluminum, Federal specification QQ-A-200/8, or ALMAG35. Two non-skid grooves in surface of step and capable of carrying load of 1000 lbs. 6 inches (150 mm) from face of manhole.

2. Polypropylene Reinforced Plastic: ASTM Specifications.

a. ASTM C-478. b. ASTM A-615 Grade 60 (steel rod). c. ASTM 2146 69, Type II Grade 16906 (polypropylene).

E. Manhole Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 3-inch to 9-inch (75 to 225-mm) total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover.

F. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ring and cover shall have a combined weight greater than 400 lbs shall be machined to fit securely with non-rocking cover, and shall be hot-dipped in asphalt. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "STORM SEWER."

a. Material: ASTM A 48, Class 35 gray iron, unless otherwise indicated. b. Protective Coating: Foundry-applied, SSPC-Paint 16, coal-tar, epoxy-polyamide paint

or hot dipped asphalt; 10-mil minimum thickness applied to all surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

2.11 STORM WATER INLETS

A. Gutter Inlets: Type as indicated on plans, in accordance with Arapahoe County Standard Details.

B. Area Inlets: Type and manufacture as indicated on plans.

2.12 STORM WATER DETENTION STRUCTURES

A. Cast-in-Place Concrete, Storm Water Detention Structures: Construct of reinforced-concrete bottom, walls, and top; designed according to ASTM C890 for A-16, heavy-traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, dimensions, and appurtenances indicated on the plans.

1. Ballast: Increase thickness of concrete, as required to prevent flotation.

B. Precast Concrete, Storm Water Detention Structures: As designated on plans.

2.13 CONCRETE

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following:

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable.



B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious materials ratio, 5-7% entrained air and maximum 4 inch slump. Refer to Section [03300] for additional information.

1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa), deformed steel.

2.15 PIPE OUTLETS

A. Head Walls: Cast-in-place reinforced concrete, with apron and tapered sides as shown in plans.

B. Riprap Basins: Broken, irregular size and shape, graded stone according to Urban Drainage criteria.

C. Flared End Section (FES): Precast reinforced concrete with apron and tapered sides.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EARTHWORK

A. Site excavation and filling are specified in Section “Earth Moving.”

B. Excavation and backfilling for utilities are specified in Section “Trenching.”

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Piping: Prior to installation, verify that insides of pipe and pipe joints are clean and free of dirt, mud, oil, shavings from cutting, or other deleterious materials.

3.03 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate location and arrangement of underground STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING piping. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B. General:

1. Use only undamaged material. 2. Lay pipe on firm bedding with full length of barrel fully supported. Maintain straight lines and

uniform grades between invert elevations shown. Inside of pipe shall be smooth and clean. 3. Begin all pipe installation at downstream end of pipe run, with lower segment of pipe in

contact with specified bedding. Place bell or groove ends facing upstream. 4. Plug ends temporarily during installation, until connections are made to adjoining pipe or to

manholes or inlet structures. 5. Trench excavation and placement and compaction of bedding and backfill are specified in

Division 22 Section “Trenching.”

C. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer’s written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Plug all lifting holes in pipe with approved rubber plug or grout.



D. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

E. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

F. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed by tunneling, jacking, or a combination of both.

G. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at slopes indicated on plan. 2. Install corrugated steel piping according to ASTM A798/A798M. 3. Install corrugated aluminum piping according to ASTM B 788/B 788M. 4. Install PVC sewer pipe according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F1668. 5. Install reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA’s “Concrete

Pipe installation Manual.” 6. Install HDPE piping per manufacturer’s recommendation.

3.04 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use PVC or cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron valve boxes for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.

B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place-concrete block, 18 inches by 18 inches by 6 inches deep. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding grade.

C. Set cleanout frames and covers in pavement with tops 1/8 inch below pavement surface.

3.05 MANHOLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.

B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.

C. Construct cast-in-place manholes as indicated.

D. Manholes:

1. Construct manholes in accordance with drawings and applicable agency having jurisdiction standards. Carry pipe through manhole with split pipe. Extend cast-in-place concrete manhole base at least 8 inches below pipe barrel.

2. Slope floor of manhole from centerline of pipe to maximum of 2 inches above top of pipe at face of manhole. Shape invert when manhole base is poured to conform exactly to lower half of pipe.

3. Form or shape inverts smooth and clean, with no obstructions. Allow insertion of an expandable plug in pipe. Construct side branches with radii as large as possible to connect to main invert.

4. Extend concrete base ring minimum 3 inches above top of pipe. 5. Place future extension of pipe from manholes in manhole base. Shape invert with pipe

extended to outside face of manhole base and terminated with bell of pipe as close as practical to manhole base.



6. Do not place precast manhole sections on manhole base for two days minimum after placement of concrete base. Thoroughly clean top of formed concrete base ring prior to placing manhole barrel sections.

7. Place a complete and continuous roll of sealant in groove or keyway of concrete base ring in sufficient quantity that when precast manhole barrel is placed there will be no voids. Join each succeeding precast manhole barrel in similar manner. Install sealant in groove side of tongue and groove joints.

8. Trim away all excess material and repair all lifting holes.

E. Manhole Rings and Covers:

1. Set tops of frames and covers 1/8 inch below finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 1 inch (25 mm) above finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Where finished surface will be completed after manhole construction, set top of cone where a maximum of two courses of brick will be required to adjust ring and cover to final grade. Final elevations of lid will be adjusted with bricks, mortar or precast concrete rings with a minimum of 6 inches and a maximum of 18 inches of adjustment.

3.06 INLETS, OUTLETS AND CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION

A. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.

1. Cast-in-place or precast concrete in accordance with drawings and applicable agency having jurisdiction standards. Comply with applicable requirements of Division 32 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete.”

2. Construct inverts of pipe or concrete smoothed inverts same size as pipe up to centerline of pipe. Form perimeter bench as indicated.

3. Embed steel angles or other accessories as indicated or required to anchor and support frames, grates, or covers.

B. Frames, Grates, Covers and Steps: Install accurately to placement dimensions shown on drawings. Anchor castings in place and set in adjustment mortar to assure a firm foundation.

C. Connection to Existing Structures:

1. Cut and patch or rebuild existing manhole, catch basins, or other drainage structures as required to receive new drain lines.

2. Core drill openings to receive new pipe. Chip existing bench to provide sufficient thickness for mortar bed to form new invert.

3. Seal around new pipe penetration with expandable waterstop sealant, completely filling space between pipe and cut opening to provide a watertight repair.

3.07 STORM WATER INLET AND OUTLET INSTALLATION

A. Construct inlet head walls, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete, as indicated.

B. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated.

C. Install outlets that spill onto grade, anchored with concrete, where indicated.

D. Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where indicated.


100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014 3.08 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R.

3.09 TRENCH DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Assemble and install components according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with finished surface.

C. Assemble channel sections to form slope down toward drain outlets. Use sealants, adhesives, fasteners, and other materials recommended by system manufacturer.

D. Embed channel sections and drainage specialties in 4-inch minimum concrete around bottom and sides.

E. Fasten grates to channel sections as indicated.

F. Assemble channel sections with flanged or interlocking joints.

3.010 CLOSING ABANDONED STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use one of procedures listed below:

1. Fill pipe with stone or gravel flowfill. 2. Close open ends of piping with at least 8-inch thick, brick masonry bulkheads. 3. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable

methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs.

B. Abandoned Manholes and Structures: Excavate around manholes and structures as required and use one procedure below:

1. Remove manhole or structure and close open ends of remaining piping. 2. Remove top of manhole or structure down to at least 36-inches below final grade. Fill to

within 12-inches of top with stone, gravel or sand. Fill to top with concrete.

C. Backfill to grade according to Division 31 Section “Earth Moving” and Section “Trenching.”

3.011 IDENTIFICATION

A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section “Earth Moving.” Arrange for installation of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground structures.

1. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures.



A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches (610 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.

1. Submit separate report for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of

size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified.

4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects.

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours

advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. 5. Gravity-Flow STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING Piping: Test according to requirements

of authorities having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following:

a. Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417. b. Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C924 (ASTM C 924M).

C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.

3.013 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping, inlets and manholes of dirt and superfluous materials. Flush with potable water.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 33 46 00

SUBDRAINAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Foundation drainage piping and fittings at new foundations. 2. Geocomposite foundation drainage. 3. Gravel backfill at drains. 4. Geotextile soil filtration fabric. 5. Drainage pipe to drainage structures as indicated on Site Plan. B. Related Requirements: 1. Concrete Work: Division 03 Concrete. 2. Pipe Installation: Division 22 Plumbing. 3. Trenching and Earth Backfilling: Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving. 4. Storm Drainage System: Section 33 41 00 Storm Utility Drainage Piping. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01 42 00. 1. ASTM International Standard Specifications: a. D2729-03 - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. b. D3034-08 - Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. c. F1732-96(2005) - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer and Drain Pipe Containing

Recycled PVC Material. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Submit for review, acceptance and return in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Submit the following for acceptance. 1. Geotextile soil filtration fabric. 2. Prefabricated geocomposite panels. C. Samples: Submit the following for acceptance. 1. Geotextile soil filtration fabric. 2. Prefabricated geocomposite panels. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General Requirements: Deliver and store materials in accordance with Section 01 60 00. B. Storage and Handling Requirements: Stockpile and store materials so not to bury or damage. 1. Prefabricated Geocomposite Panels: When storage is required outdoors for periods

exceeding one week, cover and protect from sunlight.

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Valdez Elementary SUBDRAINAGE OZ Architecture Project No. 113233.00 33 46 00 - 1

CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PVC DRAINAGE PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Drainage Pipe: ASTM D2729, D3034 or F1732. 1. Unperforated Pipe: Rigid polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe and solvent welded fittings. 2. Perforated Pipe: Perforated rigid polyvinyl chloride leaching system piping and solvent

welded fitting. Provide solid end caps at terminations. 3. Provide perforated next to foundation walls, retaining walls, and under interior slabs;

unperforated elsewhere. 4. Sizes: 4-inch diameter unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 5. Bell and spigot ends, for loose joints. B. Fittings: ASTM D2729, D3034 or F1732. Provide all standard fittings required as well as

transitions from different pipe diameters. 2.02 CLEANOUTS A. Cleanout Pipe and Fittings for Vehicular Traffic Areas: Cast iron soil pipe. Provide each

cleanout with a brass ferrule and cast brass screw jointed plug with socket for wrench. Provide floor cleanouts or wall cleanouts as indicated.

B. Cleanout Pipe and Fittings for Non-Vehicular Traffic Areas: ASTM D3034. PVC pipe with

cleanout threaded plug and threaded pipe hub. 2.03 DRAINAGE FILL A. Free-Draining Backfill Material: 3/4 inch crushed washed rock accepted by Geotechnical

Engineer. 2.04 GEOTEXTILES A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products for Geotextile Filtration Fabric: 1. TenCate Geosynthetics North America; www.mirafi.com – Mirafi 140N. B. Substitution Requests: In accordance with Section 01 25 00. 2.05 PREFABRICATED GEOCOMPOSITE DRAINAGE PANELS A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: 1. American Wick Drain Corporation; www.americanwick.com – Amerdrain sheet drain. 2. Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing, Inc.; www.carlisle-ccw.com – CCW MiraDRAIN

6000/6200. a. Use MiraDRAIN 6200 over membrane waterproofing. 3. Cosella-Dörken Products, Inc.; www.deltadrain.com – Delta-Drain 6000 or 6200. 4. Colbond, Inc.; www.colbond-usa.com – Enkadrain 3611R. 5. Eljen Corporation; www.eljen.com – Eljen No-Aggregate Drainage System. 6. JDR Enterprises, Inc.; www.j-drain.com – J-DRain. 7. Accepted substitute. B. Description: Composite consisting of three-dimensional free-draining plastic core laminated to

a nonwoven filter fabric.


http://www.mirafi.com/

http://www.deltadrain.com/

CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014 PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 DRAINAGE PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Keep trenches dry during installation of drainage systems. B. Use fittings at intersections and right angle intersections. C. Make changes in direction of drain lines with 90 degree ell fittings. D. Bedding: Place graded bedding prior to laying of drain pipe. 1. Thickness: As indicated. E. Pipe Laying: 1. Lay drain lines to uniform grades and alignment, with continuous fall in direction of flow

with minimum slope of 1/8 inch per foot. 2. Clean interior of pipe thoroughly before being laid. 3. Rest each section firmly upon the bedding, through entire length. 4. Lay perforated pipe with perforations facing down between 4 o'clock and 8 o'clock. 5. Face bells of pipe sections upgrade. 6. Remove and relay any length that has had its grade or joints disturbed. 7. Wrap all fittings with knitted sock after fittings are completed. 3.02 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install perforated drainage pipe embedded in free-draining gravel at the foundation elevation

and parallel with perimeter foundation walls and retaining walls as indicated. 1. Lay on minimum bedding depth of 3 inches. B. Drainage Gravel Thickness: Cover pipe on all sides with minimum 6 inches free draining

gravel. 3.03 GEOCOMPOSITE FOUNDATION DRAIN INSTALLATION A. Preparation: 1. Verify the substrate is sound and suitable for geocomposite panel installation. 2. Remove obstacles and protrusions. B. Install using a suitable anchoring system compatible with the substrate. C. Application to Foundation Walls: Install with filter fabric side facing away from the foundation

wall. D. Repair tears or holes in fabric by placing new cloth over damaged areas. E. Install with base of panels open to drain to through drainage gravel to drainage piping.

Provide lateral extensions over footings as required to ensure free drainage path. 3.04 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Cleanout Locations: Provide cleanouts at 75 feet on center and at all major direction changes. B. Unpaved Areas: Set in 12-inch by 12-inch concrete blocks. Comply with Division 3.


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 24, 2014 3.05 OUTLETS

A. Tie into existing drain or storm drainage system as indicated. 3.06 BACKFILLING A. Earthwork and Backfilling, General: Comply with Section 31 20 00. B. After pipe installation has been accepted, place drainage gravel on each side and top of pipe

to dimensions indicated. C. When placing gravel backfill, prevent displacement of or injury to pipe. D. Drainage Gravel: Extend minimum 2 feet laterally from face of foundation wall. Top of

drainage gravel shall be minimum 1-foot below finish grade. E. Filtration Fabric: Wrap foundation drain gravel with filter fabric at bottom, sides and top to

protect gravel from infiltration by finer grained soils. Place geotextile filtration fabric full width of trench and over drainage backfill before other backfill is placed under Section 31 20 00.

3.07 SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Notify Geotechnical Engineer and allow for inspection of each subdrainage system prior to

backfilling the system. B. Testing: Perform flow test of each subdrainage system under observation of Geotechnical

Engineer prior to backfilling the system.

END OF SECTION
